The URL can be used to link to this page

Report Walmart • EviVED JUN 18 2015 PROJECT MANUAL CM OFT/GARD \ Ul NANG MINION LANDLORD WORK AT OUTLOT BUILDINGS TIGARD, OR Store Number: 5935-500 Project Number: 14217 06/15/2015 For WALMART STORES, INC. Sam Walton Development Complex 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville, Arkansas 72716-0550 BCRA,Inc. 2106 Pacific Ave, Suite 300 Tacoma,WA 98402 t� (253)627-4367 L 7O 20' t'--C D t7- City of Tigard A• •rove. Plans if By Vis Date 6 I2At 15 OFFICE COPY UniSpec II 123010 DOCUMENT 00007- SEALS PAGE PROJECT: Name: Wal-Mart Outlot Buildings Location: Tigard,OR Project Number: 14217 Store Number: 5935-500 00007-1 Outlot Buildings, Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 ARCHITECT OF RECORD Douglas P.Oberst BCRA, Inc. 2106 Pacific Ave, Suite 300 Tacoma, WA 98402 *S.4°Y-D114% :DOUGLAS S P. t1�TACOMA,WA 4' 'r14*CIF fek ate `,/,; y; 0/15/15 Architect •f Recor. Date 00007-2 Outlot Buildings, Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 SEALS PAGE(Connt>iamed3) Sr' UC"ll RAL ENNGENEER OF RECORD Wilson K. Hca BCRA, Inc. 2106 Pacific Ave, Smite 300 Tacoma, WA 98402 i v0REGONi Ci k 13 SON KX XPIRE 5$13(U,./, Structural Engineer of Record Date 00007-3 Outlot Buildings, Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 123010 DOCUMENT 00007- SEALS PAGE PROJECT: SEALS PAGE(Continued) FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER OF RECORD .AEp PROFFss GINE / Sean O.Eisler testa 8345 Lenexa Drive 84639PE Suite 300 Lenexa,KS 66214 0 n 20` OREGON do 61.:41aER Q9 �,� , • 'S"' EXPIRES:12/31/2015 Fire Protection Engineer of Record Date MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD sED PROFS. Sean O.Eisler �5 �NGINEFR.,/�✓ 8345 Lenexa Drive 4S1 Suite 300 cc 84639PE Lenexa,KS 66214 off:. °j OREGON 48ER ✓��/ . ►411 RES:12/3 015 Mechanical Engineer of Record Date , ,Ep rPRoF ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD troQINE04 +/O�' David D.Haake 4!', 72336PE 8345 Lenexa Drive Suite 300 ti, Lenexa,KS 66214 � OREGON �1r0 E Electrical Engineer of Record Date END OF DOCUMENT 00007-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 00010-TABLE OF CONTENTS !Division Section Title INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 Project Title Page 00007 Seals Page 00010 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Bidding Requirements(including Invitation to Bids, Instructions to Bidders,and Bid Forms)may be obtained through the on- line Walmart Bidding System and are not included in the Project Manual. CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Contracting Requirements (including Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor,Bond,and Certificate Forms) are issued by the Owner under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01255 Request For Information 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01330 Submittal Procedures 01351 Regulatory Compliance 01432 Electrical Installer Qualifications 01452 Contractor's Quality Control 01454 Architect-Engineer Quality Assurance 01455 Mechanical Equipment Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 01457 Testing and Inspection by Owner 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600 Product Requirements 01700 Execution Requirements 01731 Cutting and Patching 01740 Cleaning 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03312 Cast-in-place Concrete Slabs(Interior) 03362 Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes 03930 Concrete Rehabilitation DIVISION 4-MASONRY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 5-METALS 05090 Post-Installed Concrete And Masonry Anchors 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05300 Metal Deck 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 00010-1 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06615 Non-Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07500 Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07721 Manufactured Curbs 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08710 Door Hardware Schedule 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09655 Resilient Base and Accessories 09900 Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10810 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13900 Fire Suppression DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15100 Building Services Piping and Equipment 15190 Fuel Gas Piping 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15480 Domestic Water Heaters 15700 Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning Equipment 15800 Air Distribution DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16100 Wiring Methods 16402 Low Voltage Service and Distribution 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16442 Branch Circuit Panelboard 16500 Lighting 16700 Communications OWNER FURNISHED REFERENCES Appendix A Products and Work by Owner or Separate Contractor 00010-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Appendix B Testing and Inspection by Owner END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01100—SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner or Separate Contractors. 4. Contractor use of site and premises. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Partial occupancy. 1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. Applicability: The publications listed in the REFERENCES paragraph of an individual section shall apply only to the extent referenced within the text of that section.Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent require- ments, applicable construction industry standards form a part of these specification and have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. Publication Dates: Standards and publications referenced in the Specifications shall mean the latest edition as of the date of commencement of the Work as stated in Paragraph 3.1.4 of the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor unless otherwise specifically dated. C. Copies of Standards: Owner or the Architect will not provide copies of references cited within the specifications. Copies may be obtained directly from publication source. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish:Purchase and deliver to project site,ready for installation. B. Install: Unpack, assemble, set in final position, fasten in place, make final connections, clean, adjust, and leave ready for use. C. Provide: Furnish and install. D. Receive: Accepting a delivery. (Entity responsible for accepting a delivery.) E. Final Connections: Complete plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required and recommended by manufacturer for optimum operation of equipment. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises the general construction required for landlord work for future tenants at the outlot retail buildings located.at 7500&7700 SW Dartmouth St,Tigard OR 97223. The owner/landlord is Walmart. Refer to drawings for full detailed scope description. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Owner has its own forces who will perform certain Work on the project;items noted'NIC'(Not In Contract)which will commence as indicated on the Construction Schedule. 01100-1 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Owner may award separate contracts for work at the Site, which will be executed concurrent with work of this Contract. Consult and cooperate with separate contractors to the full extent provided for in the Conditions of the Contract.Owner work by separate contractors is specified in Appendix A. C. During setup of equipment by the Owner or separate contractors,make crane service available to hoist equipment directly from trucks to final position.Coordinate schedule with Owner's Construction Manager. 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations,including use of Project site,during construction period. B. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the following: 1. Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 2. Access to site and premises by the public agencies granted access for inspection of the Work. 3. Owner occupancy of existing work or partially completed work. 4. Access to site and premises by the public to areas required to remain open to tenants,their customers and associates. 5. Access as permitted or restricted by Owner's Construction Manager or Store Manager as described in paragraph:Coordination with Occupants below. C. Do not unreasonably encumber site with products or equipment. D. Maintain the following conditions at all times during the construction period until possession by Owner. 1. Maintain building weathertight and secure. 2. Maintain building security and fire alarm systems in operation. (In the event both systems should fail, the Fire Alarm System shall have priority over the Security System.) a. Contract with local alarm company to maintain service,and repair existing systems as required due to work relating to this Contract. b. Alarm Company: 1) Visit site and be familiar with existing conditions. 2) Respond to service calls within 24 hours. c. Provide on-site guard services in the event the existing system is disabled for 8 hours or more. d. Coordinate security alarm with Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls. e. Contact Owner's Alarm Central Control at (479) 273-4600 for additional information and coordination relating to work associated with existing alarm systems. 3. Maintain access and egress from the building. 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Owner and Tenants may occupy premises during portions of the period of construction for the conduct of Owner's and Tenant's normal,daily operations.Cooperate with Owner's Construction Manager in construction operations to minimize delays,inconvenience,or conflict to Owner's and Tenant's daily business operations and customer traffic. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner for interruptions of utility services to the building. Acci- dental interruptions shall be restored immediately. 1. Any Contractor work operations that may disrupt or interfere with building operation or function shall be reviewed and approved by Owner's Construction Manager. 2. Submit written request for approval to Owner's Construction Manager 14 calendar days in advance of date Contractor work operations are required to begin. B. Contractor personnel shall not enter"restricted" area of building without prior approval of Owner's Construction Manager and Tenants. Requirements regarding "restricted areas" of building will be discussed by Owner's Con- struction Manager at the Preconstruction Conference. C. Maintain all building exits and provide clear pathways to exits.Relocate exits or provide temporary exits as required for construction operations and construction sequence phases. Locate temporary exits in conformance with code exiting requirements. 01100-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Contractor shall minimize noise or vibration that would disturb Owner's and Tenant's operations.When directed by Owner,Contractor shall perform disruptive operations at designated time of day or night in order to minimize dis- turbance to Owner's and Tenant's operations. E. Contractor shall maintain watertight conditions in operating portions of the building during construction. F. Coordinate with Owner's Construction Manager for maintenance of access and for the operations and maintenance of existing utilities and services. 1.8 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY A. Owner and Tenants shall have the option to occupy any completed or partially completed portions of the Work. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict,and schedule the Work to facilitate Owner's and Tenant's operations. C. Prior to Owner or Tenant occupancy in areas of new work,the following provisions shall be in place: 1. Illuminated exit signs are operational. 2. Exit doors,including required panic hardware,are operational. 3. Lighted, enclosed walkways and other temporary safety measures are in place if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Fire sprinkler system is operational. 5. Doors required for Owner's and Tenant's security purposes are operational. D. After Owner occupancy: 1. Keep exit routes and exit doors free from obstructions. 2. Maintain exit signs and fire sprinkler system in operational condition. 3. Provide security for Owner's and Tenant's products,equipment,and operations. 4. Do not permit smoking in the building. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01100-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01255 (01 2613)-REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requests for Information(RFI)procedures. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Requests for Information: A formal online process used during the construction phase to facilitate communication between the Contractor,the Owner's Construction Manager(CM)or the Mechanical Construction Manager(MCM), and the Professional of Record (POR) with regard to requests for additional information and clarification of the intent of the Contract Documents(Drawings and Specifications). B. Professional of Record(POR): The Architect of Record(AOR)or the Civil Engineering Consultant(CEC) C. Architect of Record(AOR):The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the project. The AOR will be the administrator for all construction RFIs classified as"BLDG". D. Civil Engineering Consultant(CEC):The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the pro- ject. The CEC will be the administrator for sitework RFIs classified as"SITE". E. Owner's Construction Manager(CM):The Owner's building and sitework Construction Manager for the Project. F. Mechanical Construction Manager(MCM):The Walmart Mechanical(HVAC,Refrigeration and BAS)construction manager for the Project. 1.3 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL A. Submit requests for information for conditions requiring clarification of the Contract Documents on Owner's Con- struction RFI website as designated by Owner. (www.bldgportal.com, enter username and password, select Con- struction RFI). POR will not respond to requests for information unless this format is utilized and all appropriate information is provided. Faxed or emailed RFIs will not be reviewed B. Do not use Request for Information process during bidding phase. For questions during bidding phase, refer to Invitation to Bid issued by Owner's Contract Administrator. C. Submit in accordance with procedure as follows: (See Process Flow Chart at the end of this Section) 1. Subcontractors,manufacturers,and suppliers shall submit request for additional information and clarification to Contractor. 2. Contractor shall contact Owner's CM or MCM, as applicable, with requests for additional information or clarification. Owner's CM or MCM will not accept requests for information or clarification submitted di- rectly from subcontractors,manufacturers,or suppliers. 3. Owner's CM or MCM will provide response to Contractor or will direct Contractor to submit a formal Re- quest for Information. a. Submit a formal RFI only if authorized by the Owner's CM or MCM. Submittal to Construction RFI website signifies authorization has been given. b. Generate Requests for Information by one source per project. c. Submit one request for information per website entry. 4. POR will review formal requests from Contractor and provide response within 3 working days. 5. POR's response-shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change Directive,nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 01255-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Scheduling,Costing,and Owner Provided Equipment Coordination: Direct to the Owner's Construction Manager. 1.4 PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURE A. A $250 administrative cost will be assessed to the Contractor for each Request for Information submitted which does not follow the procedure specified above. 1.5 REIMBURSEMENT FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING FEES A. The Contractor shall be charged administrative costs and professional fees incurred by Owner for additional Archi- tectural and Engineering services associated with the correction of completed Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents.See Paragraph 8.7 of the Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor for pro- visions relating to Correction of Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01255-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Sibcontractor tnia c- 'curer;supplier,or other party submits request for information glractor. - C -- 1 (Contractor contacts' Owner's Mechanical Cott- Owner's Mechanical Con- Owner's Mechanical Con- struction Manager author- struCtion Manager provides, strnotion Manager izeseontractOi.to submit response to Contractor. (MCM)with request for formal Request for Infor- 1 information. MCM will oration to Owner's Con- provide response or au- '1/4t;_truetian RFS ebsite.. ,' orize Formal RFI. 1 Contractor subnufs Re- quest for Information to HVAC/REFRIGERATION/BAS Professional ofRecord REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (POR) on Owner's ' PROCESS FLOW CHART \Construction RFI Website j SUPERCENTER, SAM'S CLUB, AND NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET POR notifies appropriate consultant for response on Owner's Construction RFI _ Website � / 1 Consultant answers'RFI on Construction RFI Website Contractor issues response to subcontractor,manufac- POR issues response to Curer, zplier,or other C Contractor on Construction �p RFI Website 01255-3 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 SOP9-0ffiOtits lit0AtAW1.1 **,supplier, r 4g#0, PASY400:4: 10it for. cot tact OvOdr'S C01101110011 Owner'sConstructionCotiet's',c90,104joi MEOulgc*00100*Con- Manager provides response Manager f04)**re- tractor to submit formal to Contriebit. quest àr information CM Request for Information to will provide response or ,0*.ert - FOrmit 'Contractor submits Re- quest for Information to REQUEST FOR INFORMATION POR on Owner's „ PROCESS FLOW CHART \Ccinstructi:MW:bsito.i SUPERCENTER,SAM'S CLUB, AND NEIGHBORHOOD MARKET POR notifies appropriate consultant for response on Construction RFI Website. • Consultant answers RFI on Construction RH Wobsire, - ss, ( Contractor issues response POR issues response to to subcontractor,manufac- turer,supplier,or other contractor on Constrnction Webaite. arty. 01255-4 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01310(01 3100)-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project Management and Coordination: a. Construction Manager. b. Project Coordination. B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor:Owner's Construction Manager's rights and scope of authority. 1.2 OWNER'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER A. Owner will assign this project to a staff Owner's Construction Manager.The Owner's Construction Manager is the Owner's representative in all matters relating to the Work. B. Owner will assign this project to a staff Owner's Mechanical Construction Manager. The Owner's Mechanical Construction Manager is the Owner's representative in all matters relating to the Building Automation System, HVAC equipment,and refrigeration equipment. C. Cooperate with the Owner's Construction Manager and Owner's Mechanical Construction Manager in all matters relating to the Work on this project. D. During construction,coordinate use of site and facilities through the Owner's Construction Manager. E. Comply with Owner's Construction Manager's and Owner's Mechanical Construction Manager's procedures for project communications,reports and records, and coordination with drawings, and comply with recommendations and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. F. Comply with instructions of the Owner's Construction Manager for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. G. Coordinate use of site during Owner's fixture setup work under instructions of the Owner's Construction Manager. 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Schedule and conduct pre-construction, pre-installation, or pre-work conferences as specified and required in the various specification sections. Provide Architect of Record seven days notice prior to expected time for each required conference. 1.4 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Sections of specifications to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed at a later date and under separate contracts. B. Obtain necessary drawings,manufacturer's product data,and other necessary data to provide a complete and proper installation. 1. Check field dimensions prior to installing equipment and furnishings.Verify necessary clearances and means of access from equipment storage to final position. 01310-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Make shop drawings and manufacturer's rough-in requirements available to trades involved. C. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various specification Sections for installation and final connection of equipment. 1. Verify that mechanical,plumbing,and electrical rough-ins have been properly located. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.Follow routing shown for pipes,ducts,and conduits as closely as practicable. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance,and for repairs. E. In finished areas, conceal pipes,ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy after possession. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01310-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Progress Schedules and Reports B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor. Requirements for construction schedules and re- ports.Ref Articles 1.1.15 and 3.8. 1.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Using the Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract;the Contractor shall develop the detailed CPM Construction Schedule with activity time duration in calendar days further describing his method for performing the Work.The Contractor shall review the Contractor's schedule with the Owner's Construc- tion Manager within 3 weeks from award of Contract,or at the Pre-Construction Meeting,whichever is first.Failure of the Contractor to have a construction schedule approved by the Owner's Construction Manager will be considered cause to withhold progress payments. 1. The Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract shall not to be construed as an indication by the Owner as to means,methods,or techniques of construction to be employed by the Contractor. 2. Critical path activities shall be indicated on the Contractor's detailed construction schedule. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS CHART A. Progress of the Project will be monitored using charts produced from the CPM Schedule.Requirements herein pro- vide for planning and execution of the Work and are to assist the Owner's Construction Manager in evaluating progress of the Work economically and chronologically. B. The Contractor shall be familiar,in detail,with the Milestone Completion Dates identified in Exhibit 1.1.16 of the Construction Contract.By submitting a bid,the Contractor acknowledges that the Construction milestones are fea- sible,reasonable,and are a workable schedule for the Work. C. Delivery times for Owner Furnished Items are specified in Section 01640. Coordinate delivery of these items with progress of the Work. D. Prior to construction,the Contractor may request reasonable changes to the Construction Progress Schedule Chart, provided delivery dates specified in Section 01640 and the contract completion date are not changed.The Owner's Construction Manager will review requested changes.Upon approval by Owner,Progress Schedule Chart shall be- come the"Approved Construction Progress Chart"by which the Contractor shall plan,organize,direct,coordinate, and execute the Work,and the basis of evaluating progress of the Work. E. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Construction Manager, any of the dates specified in Section 01640 are not com- pleted by the Contractor on or before the stated time period and after 48 hours written notice to the Contractor, Owner may proceed to carry out the work in accordance with.Article 2.4 of the Construction Contract. F. The Contractor shall perform work directed by the Owner's Construction Manager to meet the Owner's contract completion date and shall maintain the original management and supervision team to continue their office and job site duties on a full-time basis through Grand Opening and/or any other time the Contractor has any work being performed on the project regardless of the date or condition of project completion. 01320-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1.4 SCHEDULE UPDATES A. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner's Construction Manager regular updated reports on the Construction Schedule as determined by the Owner's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall maintain a current weekly updated detailed construction schedule in the site construction field office. 1. Construction Schedule Updating: Progress information to be included in schedule updates includes actual start and finish dates,percentage complete,remaining duration or projected finish dates for all activities in progress during reporting period. Schedule updates may also include approved added activity descriptions. B. Prior to the Contract Substantial Completion Date,Contractor shall affirm to the Owner a commitment to meet the Contract Substantial Completion Date and all obligations and conditions of the Contract on or before the agreed upon Substantial Completion Date.Contractor shall make this affirmation by completing the attached"90 day Con- tractor's Commitment Letter," which shall be signed by an officer of Contractor, and delivered to the Owner no sooner than 100 days prior to the Contract Completion Date and no later than 90 days prior to that date. 1.5 RECOVERY PLAN A. Should the updated approved Construction Schedule show the Contractor to be behind schedule,the Contractor shall immediately devise a plan for recovery of lost time within one week and submit it to the Owner's Construction Manager for approval.Once approved by the Owner's Construction Manager,the Contractor shall immediately put the recovery plan into action. B. During the period covered by the recovery plan,the Contractor's progress will continue to be monitored against the Approved Construction Progress Chart. If the Contractor does not recover from delay as detailed in the recovery plan,Owner may exercise the option to carry out the work as specified above. C. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses related to recovery from the Contractor's delays, including costs, expenses,and lost sales incurred by Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01320-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 90 DAY CONTRACTOR'S COMMITMENT LETTER ' I [GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD] I1 [DATE] 11 f CMl ,Construction Manager Wal-Mart Stores,Inc. 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville,AR 72756 '1 Re: [State].-[Site/Cityl ;Store# 90 day Contractor's Commitment Letter IDear[CM] • [Contractor]acknowledges and recognizes the importance of completing its Work on or before the Contract Substantial Com- 1 pletion Date and has agreed to provide all materials,equipment,supplies and personnel,services,and labor necessary to com- plete the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents on or before that date. [Contractor]hereby affirms its commitment to meet the Contract Substantial Completion Date of[Date],as set forth in its Construction Contract with the Owner.,and any amendments thereto,and further affirms that it has either met all obligations and conditions of the Contract,or shall do so prior to the agreed upon Substantial Completion Date, [Date]. [Contractor]rep- resents that the undersigned is an officer of[Contractor] and is authorized to make this commitment. I1 [CONTRACTOR] Il By: Title: Date: I II Ii I! Ii 11 1 1 01320-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 11 4. Architect will forward submittals to proper sub-consultant for review as necessary. D. Unrequested Submittals: Submittals transmitted to Architect or Architect's Consultants that are not indicated or requested will not be reviewed.Architect will dispose of unrequested submittal items. 1.3 TRANSMITTAL A. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submit to Architect unless indicated otherwise. 1. Transmit submittals to be reviewed by Architect to: BCRA,Inc. 2106 Pacific Ave,Suite 300 Tacoma,WA 98402 Attn: Lode Limson Cole llimsoncole( bcradesign.comContact Architect for access to their Newforma Exchange site for electronic ' submittals. 2. Transmit submittals to be submitted directly to Structural Engineer of Record to: Structural Consultant BCRA,Inc. 2106 Pacific Ave,Suite 300 Tacoma,WA 98402 Attn: Lode Limson Cole llimsoncole(a?bcradesign.comContact Architect for access to their Newforma Exchange site for electronic submittals. 3. Transmit 3 copies of fire protection submittals to the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant listed below within 30 day of prime contract award. Send one copy of the submittal transmittal to the Architect listed above. HEI I Darrell Stein Henderson Engineers Incorporated 8345 Lenexa Drive Suite 300 Lenexa,KS 66214 (913)742-5000 Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER B. In addition to recipients stated above, transmit submittals to those parties as may be required in the individual specification section. 1 1.4 DEFERRED SUBMITTALS A. Definition: Deferred Submittal are submittals required by the AJH for code compliance but which,rather than being submitted at the time of permit application,have been allowed by the AHJ to be deferred until after Contract award to enable the successful Contractor,Subcontractor,or Supplier to submit the applicable submittals. B. Submit the deferred submittals to the extent indicated on the Deferred Submittal Table located on the Drawing Cover Sheet. C. Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements stated in the applicable individual Specifications Sections and B the applicable requirements herein D. Process: 1. Immediately after award of the Contract,the Contractor shall contact the AHJ to coordinate and determine the AHJ requirements for deferred submittals. Information obtained shall include such requirements as num- ber of copies; extent of detail of information to be submitted;review, if required,by Professional of Record (Architect or Engineer);and other necessary process and procedural requirements. 2. The Contractor,or other entity, responsible for the submittal shall submit,track,and report submittal status to the Owner's Construction Manager through final approval and issue of permit. 01330-2 I Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 ' I 3. Communicate with vendors, suppliers, and Subcontractors the AHJ requirements for deferred submittals. Receive,review,and stamp submittals in accordance with submittal requirements herein. 4. Transmit deferred submittals directly to AHJ unless otherwise requested by AHJ to obtain prior review and u approval by Professional of Record. 5. Upon approval by AHJ,obtain permits and pay permit fees and other fees required by the AHJ. 6. Attach approved deferred submittals to the approved"Permit Set"documents at the project site. 11 7. Do not install deferred submittals until corresponding submittal documents have been approved by the AHJ. 1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Drawings with graphic information at accurate scale. Show dimensions and note which dimensions are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in Work shown. Indicate compliance with specified standards and special coordination requirements. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings as Shop Drawings. 2. Include on each Shop Drawing the drawing title,number,original issue date,and revision numbers and dates, in addition to other required identifying information. 3. Identify details by reference to sheet,detail,schedule,or room names shown on the Contract Drawings. 4. Identify numerical values in English units. 5. Document Size Requirements(Hard copy submittals): Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by I ) 6. 42 inches. Number of Copies Required(Hard copy submittals): Submit four copies unless otherwise required in indi- vidual sections. Submit an additional copy to AHJ for approval if required. Comply with requirements of AHJ with regard to signing and sealing of submittals by Registered Professional licensed in the State in which project is located. a. One copy will be returned to the Contractor. I 1 B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: a. Clearly mark to identify pertinent products. b. Show performance characteristics and capacities. c. Show dimensions and clearances required. d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. e. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to this work. I 2. f. Supplement standard drawings and diagrams to provide complete information applicable to this work. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement product data with material prepared for the Work to satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not exist. Note that the material is developed specifically for this Contract. 3. Submit product data for each specification section as a complete,bound volume. Include table of contents 1 listing page and catalog item numbers for product data. 4. Indicate,by prominent contrasting color notation on each product being submitted,the specifications section and paragraph numbers to which it pertains. t 5. Where printed product data includes information on several products,some of which are not required,mark copies to indicate information applicable to Work and clearly cross out other information not applicable to Work. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. b. Compliance with referenced standards. c. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Id. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. e. Notation of coordination requirements. 6. Product Data For Information: Written information not requiring action by Owner's Construction Manager or Architect; for verification of compliance with requirement. Submittal not complying with requirements I will be rejected. 7. Number of Copies Required(Hard copy submittals): Four. C. Engineering Calculations: 1. Submit calculations signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State where project is located. Comply with requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction with regard to signing and sealing of submittals. j 01330-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415a SECTION 01351 —REGULATORY COMPLIANCE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for compliance with regulatory require- ments including Storm Water,Hazardous and Universal Waste,Safety,and Worker Verification laws. B. Compliance provisions are contained in the Supplement which is a part of,and included at the end of,this Section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor: The attached Supplement paragraph num- bering is associated with corresponding provisions of the Construction Contract and the associated Exhibit 3.6 therewith. 2. Provisions included in the Supplement hereto are similar in content to those of the Exhibit 3.6 of the Contract and may repeat,duplicate,supplement,expand,or clarify the text of the Exhibit. 3. Pursuant to Clause 1.2.4, in case of conflicting provisions, the Exhibit 3.6 of the Contract shall prevail over these specifications. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01351-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 SUPPLEMENT to SECTION 01351 COMPLIANCE SPECIFICATION 3.6.1 PART 1 —COMPLIANCE GENERALLY. Section includes administrative and procedural require- ments for compliance including Stormwater, Hazardous and Universal Waste, Safety, and Worker Verification. 3.6.1.1 DEFINITIONS 3.6.1.1.1 Compliance Requirements. Compliance with all laws, including Safety Laws, Environmental Laws, Stormwater Laws and Worker Verification Laws as well as requirements found within the Contract Doc- uments, the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications, that pertain to Safety Compliance,Environ- mental Compliance,Stormwater Compliance and Worker Verification Compliance. 3.6.1.1.2 Compliance Laws. All Compliance related laws,regulations and requirements to include Safety Laws, Environmental Laws, Stormwater Laws and Worker Verification Laws. (a) Safety Laws. All applicable Federal, state and local laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful or- ders relating to the safety or health of persons or property including without limitation,compliance with local safety laws,local fire and life safety code, building codes,safety or environmental laws governing exposure to toxic or hazardous substances,transportation safety laws concerning the safety of shipments arising out of the course of work, the latest OSHA safety standards (Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,20 U.S.C. Section 651 et seq.and rules and regulations promulgated there-under), and all state approved and local safety and health statutes,rules and regulations. (b) Environmental Laws. All laws, statutes, regulations and judicial interpretations thereof of the United States,of any state in which the Project Site is located,and of any other government or quasi-government authority having jurisdiction,that relate to the prevention,abatement and elimination of pollution and/or protection of the environment, including but not limited to the federal Comprehensive Environmental Response,Compensation and Liability Act of 1980("CERCLA"),42 U.S.C.§9601 et seq.,the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 ("RCRA"), 42 U.S.C. § 6901 et seq., the Clean Water Act ("CWA"), 33 U.S.C. § 1251 et seq., the Clean Air Act ("CAA"), 42 U.S.C. § 7401 et seq., the Safe Drinking Water Act ("SDWA"), 42 U.S.C. § 300f et seq., the Endangered Species Act ("ESA"), 16 U.S.C. § 1531 et seq.,the Toxic Substances Control Act("TSCA"), 15 U.S.C. § 2601 et seq., and the Emergency Planning&Community Right to Know Act("EPCRA")together with any state statutes or local ordinances or other requirements serving any similar or related purposes. This includes,but is not be limited to,all laws,regulations,permits or other requirements relating to Stormwater,wetlands pro- tection and asbestos abatement or notification,and hazardous materials/hazardous waste management. 1) Solid Waste Laws. All Federal state,or local statutory environmental requirements for diver- sion of construction and demolition waste from landfills as applicable. (c) Stormwater Laws. All Environmental Laws,and other laws,regulations,permits or other requirements relating to Stormwater. This includes the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System("NPDES" or"Stormwater Permit")Federal Stormwater general permit system or analogous state Stormwater gen- eral permit system required under Stormwater Laws for discharges associated with construction activi- ties on Project Sites greater than an acre in size. (d) Worker Verification Laws. All Federal, state,and local laws, statutes,rules,codes, ordinances, orders and regulations governing the employment of its workers,including,without limitation,the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986,as amended, the Immigration and Nationality Act, as amended, and the Illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act of 1996,as amended,and any succes- sor statutes,laws,rules and regulations thereto. 3.6.1.1.3 Contract Documents. The Contract between Contractor and Walmart, as Owner, all at- tached exhibits including the Compliance Exhibit,together with these and other corre- sponding or referenced Specifications. 3.6.1.1.4 Walmart Associates. Employees of Walmart,its subsidiaries,or affiliates,including Sam's Clubs. 3.6.1.1.5 Contractors and Workers. 01351-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (b) Contractor and Subcontractor. All references to Contractor and Subcontractor shall have the same mean- ing as those terms are defined in the Contract between Contractor and Walmart,which are adopted and incorporated into the Compliance Exhibit and/or these Specifications;the term Subcontractor shall apply to subcontractors of any tier and for any duration. 1) Contractor Workers. Workers of any tier and for any duration of Work on the Project,who are employees of the Contractor. 2) Subcontractor Workers. Workers of any tier and for any duration of Work on the Project,who are employees of a Subcontractor. 3) Workers. Includes all Contractor Workers and Subcontractor Workers of any tier and perform- ing work for any duration. (c) Walmart Contractors. Contractors performing work under separate contracts directly with Walmart. This includes any subcontractors hired by Walmart Contractors. 1) Walmart Contractor Workers. Individuals of any tier and for any duration of Work on the Project who are employees of Walmart Contractors,including third party temporary workers. 3.6.1.1.6 Hazardous Materials.Those materials,substances,wastes,pollutants or contaminants which are hazard- ous,toxic or radioactive and shall include but not be limited to those substances defined as"hazardous substances","hazardous materials","hazardous wastes",or other similar designations in the CERCLA, RCRA,Hazardous Materials Transportation Act,49 U.S.C. Section 1801 et seq.,and any other Federal, state or local governmental statutes, laws, codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and precautions, or by common law decision. 3.6.1.1.7 Hazardous Waste. As defined by U.S.Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)in 40 CFR 261.3,and as defined by specific state and local jurisdictions. Materials shall be considered hazardous wastes as appropriate according to applicable regulations regardless of whether the material was supplied by Walmart. 3.6.1.1.8 Universal Waste: As defined by the U.S.EPA in 40 CFR 273 and as defined by specific state and local jurisdictions. 3.6.1.1.9 Administrative Violation: Violations of any Compliance Laws,Compliance Requirements or the Con- tract Documents. Such violations may be included in Inspection Reports,Notices of Violation,citations, Stop Work Orders, Requests for Production, Warning Orders, Administrative Orders, letters or other written or oral communication. It shall not be necessary for the operation of this paragraph that such violation determinations be reviewed by any court or administrative tribunal. 3.6.1.1.10 Superintendent. Individual(s)designated by the principal of the Contractor meeting the requirements set forth in Sec.3.6.1.5.2 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.1.1.11 Competent Person. (a) Competent Person—General. One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them (b) Qualified Person Electrical.—Must meet both NFPA 70 E and OSHA Definition. 1) Qualified Person(electrical)OSHA Definition. One who has received training in and has demon- strated skills and knowledge in the construction and operation of electric equipment and installations and the hazards involved. 2) Qualified Person(electrical)NFPA 70E. Refer to the most current version of NFPA 70E. 3.6.1.1.12 Compliance Oversight Manager(COM).The COM is a designated individual with construction-related and Compliance experience,meets the requirements set forth below in Sec.3.6.1.5.4 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications,and who is not serving as the Superintendent on a Project Site. 3.6.1.1.13 Stormwater Compliance Certificate.Evidence of completion of Walmart provided Stormwater training, or alternate training accepted by Walmart Stormwater Compliance Team. 3.6.1.1.14 Compliance Plan. Comprehensive plan,which includes,without limitation,Contractor's processes and procedures through which Contractor will ensure said compliance and conformance with Compliance Requirements. 01351-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (a) Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP). A document or series of documents defining practices and procedures designed to eliminate or minimize the discharge of soils,debris and other pollutants in runoff exiting the project. (b) Safety Plan. A description of Contractor program designed to ensure Compliance with Safety Laws and safety related Compliance Requirements (c) Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The Hazardous Waste management plan identifying regulatory requirements for the generation,management,storage,and disposal of hazardous waste. 3.6.1.1.15 Compliance Incident. Any matter or issue occurring on or in connection with the Project or Project Site which falls into the following categories: (a) Environmental Incident. Any release of a Hazardous Material or Waste that equals or exceeds five(5) gallons or that equals or exceeds its federal or state reportable quantity. (b) Worker Verification Incident. Any Administrative Violation or Regulatory Contact by the Department of Homeland Security("DHS")or any other governmental agency or authority related to immigration or worker verification issues of Contractor,its agents,employees,and Subcontractors. (c) Safety Incident. Death or serious injuries requiring either emergency medical attention or when an in- jured worker is admitted into a hospital or medical care facility for observation or treatment. Also in- cluded is the occurrence of any situation in which there is imminent danger to an individual present on or in connection with the Project,and/or any significant property damage. (d) Regulatory Contact. All contacts regarding the Project Site construction operations by any type of reg- ulatory authority, excluding routine building inspections (such as routine building inspectors and Fire Marshalls),unless a compliance exception is identified,including without limitation, NOVs(Notice of Violation),Warnings, Inspection Reports,Notices of Non-compliance,or other similar regulatory cor- respondences,Audits,Investigations or Raids. (e) Sediment Release.Any discharge of soil materials outside the limits of disturbance for the project,such as sediment laden runoff,track out, or other discharges, excluding intentional transport of soil off site by,and inside,equipment or truck. 3.6.1.1.16 Worker Verification Auditor("WV Auditor"). An independent third party immigration attorney or con- sultant,selected by Contractor from Walmart's"Preferred Worker Verification Auditor List"to conduct the audits required pursuant to the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.1.1.17 Worker Verification Certification Forms (WV Forms). Forms certifying compliance or audit results pursuant to the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.1.1.18 Qualified Verifier. Any employee or third party individual/entity responsible for reviewing Verification Documents for Contractor and who meets the requirements set forth in the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.1.1.19 Verification Documents. Form I-9 and Supporting Documents. (a) Form I-9. Original or legible copy of Form 1-9 Employment Eligibility Form. (b) Supporting Documents. Original or legible copy of documents provided by Workers to their employers as proof of identity and eligibility for completion of the Form 1-9. 3.6.1.1.20 Facilities Occupied by Walmart. Generally means a facility in which Walmart Associates are performing work and could potentially be exposed to the hazards involved with construction. This would include Store Planning Associates during Early Fixture Set and normal operations during Expansion or Remodel activities. Oversight visits by CMs, store planning or other Walmart Associates with proper PPE and escort is not included. 3.6.1.1.21 Construction Waste. Building and site improvement solid waste materials resulting from construction, remodeling,renovation,or repair operations. Construction waste includes shipping and packaging and discarded temporary construction materials. 3.6.1.1.22 Non-Hazardous Landfill. A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as household,commer- cial, and industrial waste, resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations, has a solid waste facilities permit from the State Waste Management Regulatory Board, and is in full compliance with Federal,State and local Environmental Regulatory Agencies. 01351-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.6.1.1.23 Demolition Waste. Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective de- motion operations. 3.6.1.1.24 Disposal. Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,recycling,reuse, or deposit in landfill acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3.6.1.1.25 Recycle. Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 3.6.1.1.26 C&D Recycling Center. A facility that receives only construction and demolition material that has been separated for reuse prior to receipt. 3.6.1.1.27 Inert Disposal Facility or Inert Waste Landfill. A disposal facility that accepts only inert waste such as soil and rock, fully cured asphalt paving, uncontaminated concrete (including fiberglass or steel rein- forcing rods embedded in the concrete),brick,glass,and ceramics,for land disposal. 3.6.1.1.28 Mixed Debris. Comingled recyclable and non-recyclable construction and demolition materials. 3.6.1.1.29 Mixed Debris Recycling Facility. A processing facility that accepts loads of comingled construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering re-usable and recyclable materials and disposing the non-recyclable residual materials. 3.6.1.1.30 Recycling. The process of sorting,cleansing, treating, and reconstituting materials for the purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product.Recycling does not include burning,incin- erating,or thermally destroying solid waste. 3.6.1.1.31 Re-Use. The use, in the same or similar form as it was produced,of a material which might otherwise be discarded. 3.6.1.1.32 Solid Waste. Putrescible and nonputrescible solid, semisolid, and liquid wastes, including garbage, trash, refuse, paper, rubbish, ashes, industrial wastes, demolition and construction wastes, abandoned vehicles and parts thereof,discarded home and industrial appliances,dewatered,treated,or chemically fixed sewage sludge which is not hazardous waste, manure, vegetable or animal solid and semisolid wastes,and other discarded solid and semisolid wastes."Solid waste"does not include hazardous waste, radioactive waste,or medical waste as defined or regulated by State law. 3.6.1.1.33 Source-Separated. Materials,including comingled recyclables,that have been separated or kept separate from the solid waste stream at the point of generation,for the purpose of additional sorting or processing of those materials for reuse or recycling in order to return them to the economic mainstream in the form of raw materials for new,reused,or reconstituted products which meet the quality standards necessary to be used in marketplace. 3.6.1.1.34 Waste Hauler. A company that possesses a valid permit from the local waste management authority to collect and transport solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal. 3.6.1.1.35 Construction Waste Management Plan(CWMP). The Construction Waste Management Plan is devel- oped from the Construction Waste Management Estimation Form and identifies the construction waste diversion expectations including diversion percentages and tons of the targeted materials and the loca- tions for the legal reuse,recycling,or disposal. 3.6.1.1.36 C&D Training Manual. A site specific training manual that explains the processes and procedures for handling the C&D Waste and Recycle needs. Contents include but are not limited to the following: Materials to be recycled,re-used,or salvaged;Plan and procedure for recycling of lunch and break-time refuse;and Facilities to be utilized for the purpose specified herein. 3.6.1.2 WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS. See Compliance Exhibit 3.6.1.2. 3.6.1.3 COMPLIANCE WITH LAW. See Compliance Exhibit 3.6.1.3. 3.6.1.4 LICENSES,PERMITS AND CERTIFICATIONS("PERMITS") 3.6.1.4.1 Applications for licenses, permits, approvals and certificates. Unless otherwise clearly and expressly provided in the Contract Documents,Contractor shall diligently obtain,maintain,comply with,and pay for (solely to the extent Contractor may so obtain), and shall be responsible for the completion and 01351-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 submittal of all necessary applications relating to: all required licenses, permits, approvals and certifi- cates,impact documents and temporary easements(hereafter"Permits")relating to,necessitated by and necessary or appropriate for: (a) The Work or the product of said Work,the performance and completion of the Work,the overall devel- opment of the Project and all other activities and obligations under the Contract Documents (whether performed by Contractor or by any Subcontractor);and (b) The proper operation or use by Walmart after the completion of the Work, including all machinery, equipment and fixtures to be installed by Contractor or any Subcontractor in connection with the perfor- mance of the Work, in each case with said submittals to, and obtaining from, the proper authorities responsible for issuing said Permits for the Project,including without limitation the building permit and all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. 3.6.1.4.2 Coordination. Contractor shall coordinate with Walmart and any applicable Contractor with respect to obtaining all such Permits. 3.6.1.4.3 Fees. See Compliance Exhibit 3.6.1.4.3. 3.6.1.4.4 Delays. In the event that any delay is incurred in obtaining any Permit Contractor shall immediately notify Walmart,in writing,of the reason(s)for said delay. 3.6.1.4.5 Designation. Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary herein, Contractor shall have the right to designate other persons or entities to obtain any Permit,provided, however, that any such designation shall not relieve Contractor of any liability as a result of any failure to obtain any such Permit. 3.6.1.4.6 Permit Availability. Contractor shall ensure that the applicable Permits are readily available at the Site, or at a location properly designated pursuant to the applicable Permit or Compliance Requirements,for review as appropriate. 3.6.1.4.7 General Contractor Permit. Registration. Notification (GCPRN) Report. Contractor receives the GCPRN report in the bid documents prior to submission of the bid. The report identifies those permits, registrations,notifications,inspections and/or installer certifications(PRNs)to meet environmental reg- ulatory requirements. The list of PRNs is not intended to be comprehensive,but identifies those PRNs that were identified during the design review process. (a) Contractor shall ensure the PRNs are either forwarded to the Construction Testing Lab (CTL) Project Manager for upload(if projects that include a CTL)or shall upload PRNs directly to the Walmart Work- space. (b) The GC may obtain additional PRNs not identified within the GCPRN. Contractor is also required to provide a copy of any obtained PRNs to the CTL Project Manager or upload into the Walmart Work- space. 3.6.1.5 RESPONSIBLE PEOPLE AND GENERAL DUTIES 3.6.1.5.1 General: Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order on the Project Site. 3.6.1.5.2 Project Superintendents Requirements. The Contractor shall designate the required number of Project Superintendents as identified in the Contract. Proposed Project Superintendents shall: (a) Hold a valid Walmart Stormwater Certificate; (b) Have a level of knowledge and understanding of Compliance Laws,requirements and procedures; (c) Successfully complete any Federal, State or local training program mandated by the applicable permit or Compliance Laws; (d) Be responsible for overseeing activities and work at the Site; (e) Possess the skills to adequately identify and implement Compliance Requirements, including sediment and erosion control practices;and (f) Have.authority to direct Subcontractors,Walmart Contractors and Workers to undertake actions to com- ply with the Permits and Compliance Requirements. 3.6.1.5.3. Project Superintendents Responsibilities. No Work shall be performed under this Contract unless at least one Superintendent is present on the Site. The Superintendent shall be responsible for all Com- pliance related inspections,reporting,meetings,and training. 01351-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1 (a) Stormwater: If an NPDES Stormwater Permit is required for the Project,the Superintendent shall provide oversight and management of the implementation,and maintenance of the SWPPP. (b) Safety: Superintendent shall be responsible for maintaining general safety,the Safety Program,and pro- tection against accidents, exposure to toxic or hazardous substances generated out of the course of the Work,and property damage. 3.6.1.5.4 Compliance Oversight Manager(COM)Requirements. The proposed COM shall: (a) Hold a valid Walmart Stormwater Compliance Certificate; (b) Have a level of knowledge and understanding of Compliance Laws, including Stormwater Laws, re- quirements and procedures. (c) Successfully complete any Federal,State or local training program mandated by the applicable permit or Compliance Laws; (d) Be able to adequately identify and implement Compliance Requirements including storm water sediment and erosion control practices; (e) Have the authority and ability to effectively instruct Subcontractors,Walmart Contractors,and Workers in the implementation of such practices;and (0 Have the authority to stop work on the Site, and direct the Superintendent and other Subcontractors, Walmart Contractors and Workers in the execution of Compliance Requirements, including the ability to remove Workers for failure to comply;. 3.6.1.5.5 Compliance Oversight Manager(COM)Responsibilities. The COM is the individual on the Project Site with overall responsibility for Compliance. This includes oversight,auditing,training and documenta- tion responsibilities. Responsibilities of the COM include ensuring all "Compliance" training, plans, processes and procedures required in the Contract, its Exhibits,this Compliance Exhibit and all refer- enced Specifications and/or Forms, or project construction documents, are accomplished and main- tained. 3.6.1.5.6 Competent or Qualified Person. Contractor shall ensure that Competent or Qualified persons,whichever is applicable, are available per the requirements of Safety Laws for all job descriptions requiring such. For each construction discipline where OSHA or NFPA 70E requires a Competent or Qualified Person, the Contractor shall evaluate candidates for competency and select a candidate that meets those require- ments. (a) The Competent / Qualified Person Designation Form (Attached as "Safety Forms") shall be used to maintain an up to date and current log of Competent and Qualified Person(s)which includes selected individual's name as well as the discipline he/she serves as the Competent or Qualified person for. (b) Each selection of a Competent or Qualified Person must be communicated to all Workers on site during a safety meeting. (c) Qualified Person—Electrical requires: Meets standards as defined by OSHA and the latest version of NFPA 70E;has a valid professional license as may be required;is working under a valid business license as may be required. 3.6.1.5.7 Qualified Verifier. Contractor shall ensure a Qualified Verifier reviews Verification Documents on be- half of the Contractor,and shall execute the appropriate WV Forms required in Sec. 3.6.5 of the Com- pliance Exhibit and these Specifications. Contractor shall ensure that a Qualified Verifier reviews Verification Documents on behalf of the Sub- contractor(s),as evidenced by each Subcontractor's execution of the appropriate WV Forms required in the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. (a) Qualified Employee Verifier. Employee of Contractor or Subcontractor who is trained, experienced, and possesses the requisite skill and knowledge to conduct a reasonable compliance review of the Veri- fication Documents. (b) Qualified Third Party Verifier. Any person who is trained,experienced,and possesses the requisite skill and knowledge to conduct a reasonable compliance review of the Verification Documents. May include, without limitation,an immigration compliance attorney or law firm,a human resources compliance firm, or a similar professional services firm engaged in providing administrative or consulting services related to immigration compliance. Walmart reserves the discretion and right at all times,notwithstanding any prior ratification,to disapprove of the selected Qualified Verifier. 01351-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.6.1.5.8 Walmart Contractors. Walmart Contractors shall be responsible for relating problems and anticipated issues which may impede the progress of the Work and shall cooperate with Contractor. Walmart Con- tractors performing Work shall abide by the compliance policies of Contractor and shall not interfere with Contractor's ability to meet Compliance Requirements. (a) Contractor,as the"Controlling Contractor,"has the authority to remove or refuse access to any Walmart Contractors failing to comply with Compliance Requirements. 3.6.1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION/MEETINGS 3.6.1.6.1 Preconstruction Meeting("Precon Meeting"). Prior to initiation of ground-disturbing activities, Con- tractor/Superintendent shall conduct and document a Precon Meeting'at the Site to discuss Compliance issues including topics identified in the Specifications. The Precon Meeting requires,but is not limited to: (a) Notice. The Contractor shall give reasonable notice of such Precon Meetings to Walmart and all appro- priate governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the Site/Work,and offer them the opportunity to attend. Contractor shall document such invitation(s). (b) Safety. Superintendents shall ensure that all Safety Law required programs and documentation are avail- able, discussed and documented as part of the Precon Meeting. This includes, but is not limited to, sharing Safety Plan requirements and Lockout/Tagout programs and procedures. 1) The Lock Out/Tag Out portion of the Precon Meeting shall'be documented on the Form to be provided by Walmart. 2) Walmart provided Lock Out/Tag Out requirements shall be communicated to Workers. (c) Waste Management: Contractor shall discuss the general,Hazardous, Universal,and recyclable waste management requirements for the Project as described in the Hazardous Waste Management Plan. Con- tractor shall explain the site specific requirements and responsibilities. (d) Stormwater: If a NPDES permit is required for this Project,Precon Meeting requirements under Speci- fications Sec. 02370 must be complied with to discuss the permit, the SWPP and Stormwater related concerns for the Project. Initial earth-disturbing Subcontractors must attend this meeting. (e) Worker Verification: Superintendent shall ensure that information and training regarding access controls and WV Forms,is described and made available. 3.6.1.6.2 Orientation Meetings. The Contractor shall conduct an Orientation meeting for all Workers prior to initiation of their activities at the Project Site if they were unable to attend the Precon Meeting. Content should align with Precon Meeting requirements. 3.6.1.6.3 Weekly Meetings. The Contractor shall hold weekly meetings with all Subcontractors working on the Project Site and any persons involved in construction activities. The weekly meetings shall address Compliance issues as identified in the Specifications. (a) Safety. Have at least one safety meeting per week which addresses safety information pertinent to cur- rent or future work. Every Worker shall attend the meetings and document attendance with a sign-in sheet retained as part of the Safety Plan. 3.6.1.7 COMPLIANCE INCIDENT OR AGENCY SITE VISIT REPORTING AND PROCEDURES 3.6.1.7.1 Immediate Notice. Actual notice(voice communication, not email or voicemail) to Walmart shall be made within one(1)hour to the appropriate Construction Manager when any of the following occurs: (a) Spills of Chemical or Petroleum Products(or other potentially hazardous materials or waste)that equal or exceed the reportable quantity; (b) Safety Incidents; (c) Discovery of Unforeseen Conditions that pose risk requiring a Stop Work in the area conditions exist; and (d) Worker Verification. 3.6.1.7.2 Electronic Notice. Notice to Walmart shall be made by completing an Incident Report via the electronic reporting system provided by Walmart on the same date as the incident occurred. Electronic Notice must be provided for: (a) All items above requiring immediate notice; 01351-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (b) Regulatory Contacts/visits; (c) Spills of any Hazardous Material or Waste greater than 5 gallons that do not otherwise meet reportable quantity thresholds;and (d) Release or discharge of sediment outside of the Project's limits of disturbance,excluding the intentional, secure transport of soil inside equipment,or truck,to an off-site,permitted facility. 3.6.1.7.3 Additional Procedures for Regulatory Visits. In the event of a Regulatory Contact involving a visit to the Project Site,the Contractor shall,and shall ensure and cause its Subcontractors and Workers: (a) Comply,with requirements set forth in this Compliance Exhibit and the Specifications; (b) Respond to and fully cooperate in all respects with the regulatory agent or any audit,inquiry,inspection or investigation that may be conducted by any governmental Agency or authority related to Compliance; and (c) Accompany the Agency representative during the Site visit,and note all areas of concern or instances of non-compliance noted by the inspector,and if possible,photograph or video-tape these areas. 3.6.1.8 DOCUMENT/PERMIT AVAILABILITY AND RETENTION 3.6.1.8.1 Documents. Contractor shall properly maintain at all times during the term of this Contract all records to include,without limitation: (a) Permitting documentation. Sec. 3.6.1.4.4 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications; (b) Compliance Plans with all required updates,must be available in the job trailer; 1) SWPP Plans on NPDES Permitted Project Sites(Sec. 3.6.1.1.14(a)of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications); 2) Hazardous Waste Management Plan (Sec. 3.6.1.1.14(c) of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications);and 3) Safety Plan(Sec. 3.6.1.1.14(b)of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications). (c) All documentation received as part of Regulatory Contacts; (d) Documents required by any governmental agency or Compliance Laws; and (e) All documentation required by and relating to Worker Verification Laws and Contractor's Worker Ver- ification Program. 3.6.1.8.2 Document Retention. The Contractor agrees that it will retain required documentation and make readily accessible all records required by the applicable Permits,or Compliance Requirements applicable to the Project. (a) Documents will be retained and available for a minimum of five(5)years after date of contract comple- tion or termination of the Stormwater NPDES permit,whichever is later,or for such longer time as may be required by said Permit or applicable requirement. 3.6.1.8.3 Manifest Retention. Contractor shall retain all documentation relating to the generation,transportation, and disposal of Hazardous Waste,to include Hazardous Waste or Universal Waste manifests for a period of not less than 3 years from the date the waste is offered for transport. 3.6.1.8.4 Document Production. The Contractor shall,upon written request of Walmart,provide copies of any or all such records at Contractor's sole expense within seven (7) days. For documents required by and relating to Worker Verification Laws and Contractor's Worker Verification program,or where time may be of the essence,documents shall be produced immediately upon request. 3.6.1.9 TRAINING 3.6.1.9.1 Reserved. 3.6.1.9.2 Contractor Training. Contractor has a duty to ensure Workers are properly trained in the execution of this Contract in all job specific Compliance Requirements. Such training must include,but not be limited to: (a) The use of chemicals,supplies and equipment applicable to the Work; (b) The Hazardous Waste Management Plan and the appropriate handling of Hazardous Materials and Wastes, (c) All appropriate safety and storm water related training as required by job type; (d) Stormwater Compliance Certification; 01351-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.6.1.9.3 Retention of Training Documents. Contractor shall document and retain records of training provided to Workers and Subcontractors,including the name,date,and subject of each training session. 3.6.1.10 SITE INSPECTION/AUDIT 3.6.1.10.1 Contractor Site Inspection/Audit. Contractor shall accomplish all required self-audits within the time allotted. Specifically,these include those inspections/audits referenced in the Specifications, as well as all safety related inspections and audits as required under Safety Laws. 3.6.1.10.2 Walmart Site Inspection/Compliance Audit. Walmart may in its sole discretion,retain an independent consultant(the"Audit Consultant") or utilize Walmart Associates to conduct inspections/audits of the Site or of Contractor required documentation or conduct surveys or interviews to determine Contractor compliance with Compliance Requirements. Laws(the"Compliance Audit"). 3.6.1.10.3 Contractor Cooperation. Contractor shall fully cooperate and shall require Subcontractors and Workers to fully cooperate,with Walmart or any 3'd party auditors during such inspections and audits. 3.6.1.10.4 Worker Verification. There are unique audit requirements for Worker Verification compliance. See Sec.3.6.5 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.1.11 MODIFICATION. See Section 3.6.1.11 of the Compliance Exhibit. 3.6.1.12 OWNER REMEDIES AND DAMAGES. See Section 3.6.1.12 of the Compliance Exhibit. 3.6.2 PART 2-ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE. Contractor is responsible for compliance with all Environmental Laws, including compliance with all regulations regarding use, generation, storage, handling,discharge,disposal and transport of Universal,Solid and Hazardous Waste. 3.6.2.1 COMPLIANCE WITH DOT LAWS AND REQUIREMENTS. Compliance with Federal, state, and local transportation Safety Laws governing the safety of any shipments, including both Hazardous Material and Hazardous Waste arising out of the course of the Work. This includes but is not limited to classification, proper shipping name,packaging,marking and labeling,documentation including shipping papers and man- ifests,placarding and any other special consideration required. 3.6.2.2 LICENSES, PERMITS, AND CERTIFICATIONS. See Sec. 3.6.1.4 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.2.2.1 Hazardous Waste Generator Permit. Contractor,as generator of Hazardous Waste,must obtain an EPA and/or state RCRA identification numbers,if the identification number is required in accordance with state or Federal regulations. Contractor shall not indicate Walmart as the generator of waste or utilize a Walmart EPA or state RCRA identification number. (a) Where projects occur in buildings occupied by Walmart, in the event the state or Federal jurisdiction does not allow Contractor to obtain an independent RCRA identification number contact the Construc- tion Manager. (b) In the event Contractor is required by state or Federal regulations to obtain an EPA and/or state RCRA identification number for a specific site,the number shall be deactivated upon completion of the project. 3.6.2.2.2 Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest. Contractor shall be the generator of waste listed on the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest when disposing of Hazardous Waste or Universal Waste. Contractor shall not indicate Walmart as the generator of waste on the manifest. 3.6.2.2.3 Solid Waste Management. Firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse and disposal of C&D Waste shall be appropriately permitted for the intended use to the extent required by Federal, state and local environmental Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Contractor shall negotiate and sign agreements for re- quired services in compliance with state and local environmental regulations and specified requirements 3.6.2.3 SITE INSPECTION/AUDITS. See Sec. 3.6.1.10 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.2.3.1 Weekly Hazardous Waste Inspection.In addition to any periodic inspections the Contractor may conduct within its Hazardous Waste Program, the Contractor must perform an initial Hazardous Waste Setup Checklist within the Evoco fuze system to ensure Contractor has met certain minimum requirements in 01351-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 setting up its hazardous waste management program. In addition,a Weekly Hazardous Waste Inspection is required to be completed within the Evoco fuze system to ensure minimum requirements are being met within the Contractor's hazardous waste management program. (a) Contractor is required to perform a Weekly Hazardous Waste Inspection for each week project is in an active status. Active status is defined as the first day open tops arrive on site. Inactive status is reached when the last open top is removed from the site and all Hazardous Waste is appropriately removed from the site. (b) The individual responsible for submission of the Weekly Hazardous Waste Inspection must be Storm- water Compliance Certified. 3.6.2.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT. Contractor shall have primary responsibility as the generator of all Universal, C&D,and Hazardous Waste at the Site,including identification and management,regardless of who supplied the materials. Contractor must utilize the Waste Management, Inc. Lamptracker Program to dispose of all Universal Waste generated on the Project Site and must utilize Waste Management, Inc. for Hazardous Waste disposal and hauling. 'Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with disposal of hazardous or universal waste. 3.6.2.4.1 Universal Waste. Contractor shall,upon notification of successful bid award, contact Waste Manage- ment National Services, Inc. (www.wmlamptracker.com/walmartconstruction)to set up a Lamptracker account and register the specific Project Site to manage and recycle/dispose of all Universal and e-scrap (electronic equipment)waste generated on the Site. 3.6.2.4.2 Onsite Storage of Waste. (a) Contractor shall establish an enclosed and fenced storage area on-site for General Waste as specified in Specification 01500. Neither Hazardous Waste nor Universal Waste is required to be maintained in the enclosed,fenced area. (b) Fencing is not required for General Waste if all open tops are equipped with lids capable of locking to prevent items-from being deposited in the open tops. Lids shall be locked and remain locked when not adding or removing waste. (c) The Hazardous Waste storage area shall be at least 50 feet from the property line. (d) Hazardous Waste shall have appropriate signage as required by RCRA,including but not limited to the following: 1)"No Smoking"signs where Hazardous Waste is stored;and 2)"Hazardous Waste"(and"Hazardous Materials", as appropriate)where Hazardous Waste (and Hazardous Materials)are stored;and 3)Each specific container of Hazardous Waste shall be marked with the words "Hazardous Waste"and the accumulation start date(the date the Hazardous Waste was first placed in the container). Contractor shall utilize the Hazardous Waste labels provided by Waste Management,Inc. (e) Each type of Hazardous Waste shall be placed in a separate container with a watertight,closeable lid. 1)Hazardous Waste is classified as: Toxic,Reactive,Ignitable and Corrosive. A separation system that keeps these types of Hazardous Waste apart is required. 2)Universal and a-scrap wastes include: Lamps, batteries, mercury devices (thermostats, switches,thermometers, etc.) and non-PCB containing ballasts, capacitors and electronic equipment. i. Ballasts containing PCBs will be accepted by Waste Management, Inc. as fully regulated Hazardous Waste provided they are segregated from non-PCB ballasts and properly disclosed when requesting a pickup. 3.6.2.4.3 Contractor shall insure protocols are in place to prevent unauthorized disposal of Hazardous Waste in open tops. Prevention measures may include but are not limited to: open tops set back from the fencing or lids on the open tops. 01-351-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.6.2.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE. This paragraph replaces former specifica- tions section 01743. Contractor shall properly manage all Hazardous Materials and Wastes present on the Site,regardless of who supplied the materials or generated the waste,and comply with all applicable Com- pliance Requirements. 3.6.2.5.1 Material Selection and Use. All chemicals and other products utilized in the performance of the Work must be approved for the intended use by the Federal,state and local requirements,and be fully compli- ant with all Environmental Laws and Safety Laws. Contractor herby covenants and agrees that the ap- plication of all chemicals and other products utilized in the performance of the Work must be performed by a licensed applicator if so required under any Compliance Laws. 3,6,2.5.2 Walmart Prohibition.Walmart,in its sole discretion,may prohibit certain chemicals or substances from being utilized on Site that would otherwise be approved by Federal, state or local laws and regulation. Such determination will be provided in writing to Contractor. 3,6.2.5.3 Use and Storage of Hazardous Materials. Contractor shall properly safeguard and store any Hazardous Materials present on Site so as to protect against the possibility of fire, spill, injury, fumes or other damage. Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damage, cost or expense caused by the use or storage of Hazardous Materials at the Project site. 3.6.2.5.4 Hazardous Waste Management. Contractor shall have primary responsibility as the generator of all Hazardous Waste at the Site and shall manage all Hazardous Waste generated on the Site. Contractor shall identify all Hazardous Wastes produced and properly handle and dispose of said Hazardous Waste in accordance with all applicable Compliance Laws, 3.6.2.5.5 Hazardous Waste Vendor. Waste Management National Services,Inc.has been designated as the man- datory vendor for the management and disposal of Hazardous Waste on all of Walmart's Sites. 3.6.2.5.6 Removal of ALL Materials and Wastes. No construction chemicals, Hazardous Materials or Univer- sal/Hazardous Waste shall remain at the Site upon project completion including those generated or uti- lized by Subcontractors or supplied by Walmart, but shalt be removed, or appropriately and lawfully reused, recycled,or disposed of. Contractor will be required to remove any such items if discovered after Project completion at Contractor's sole expense. 3.6.2.5.7 Stop Work. If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a Hazardous Material or Hazardous Waste encountered on the Site by Con- tractor, Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately Stop Work in the affected area and report the condition per the requirements in Sec. 3.6.1.7 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Spec- ifications. 3.6.2.6 HAZARDOUSWASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN. Walmart has contracted with Waste Management,Inc. to provide a site-specific Hazardous Waste Management Plan("HWMP"). Contractor is required to purchase the plan from Waste Management,Inc.and shall manage the implementation of the HWMP and ensure com- pliance with all applicable Compliance Laws relating to the handling and disposal of Hazardous Materials and Wastes. 3.6.2.6.1 Contractor may amend the provided HWMP as appropriate for the Site conditions or to align the HWMP with existing Contractor procedures for management of Hazardous Materials and Wastes. 3.6.2.6.2 Contractor shall fill in the blanks on page 1 of the HWMP with the applicable personnel assigned to each position, as well as the applicable telephone numbers for emergency purposes. Contractor shall have this completed when work begins on the project. 3.6.2.7 USED TANK REMOVAL 3.6.2.7.1 Contractor is responsible for removal of any above ground tank(used cooking oil,TLE motor oil)during the construction project and is responsible to ensure proper disposal of the tanks. 3.6.2.7.2 Tanks must be empty before removed from the store/club. Contractors must coordinate with vendor to have the used cooking oil or TLE motor oil pumped. Quest Recycling 1-877-321-1811 01351-12 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.6.2.7.3 Once tank is empty it must be removed from the store/club immediately to prevent refill of the tank by store/club personnel. The tank must be stored and covered with waterproof tarps to prevent water from entering the tank or washing any residue into the environment. 3.6.2.7.4 All tanks removed during the project may be accumulated and picked up at one time to prevent multiple pick-up charges. Once all tank removal projects are complete,contact vendor to remove and dispose of tanks. EP&S OF VERMONT Phone#: 1-800-577-4557 Email: epsvtucoprogram@epsofvermont.com 3.6.2.8 CONDITIONS OF SITE 3.6.2.8.1 Stop Work. In the event Contractor encounters Unforeseen Hazardous(or potentially hazardous)Con- ditions,Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to Owner and Architect per the requirements for notice in Sec 3.6.1.7 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Speci- fications. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed,except by written agreement of Owner and Contractor,until any Hazardous Material or Hazardous Waste in fact present in the affected area has been disposed of, removed, abated or rendered harmless. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all Hazardous Materials brought to the site by Contractor or subcontractors. 3.6.2.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REMEDI-ATION ON PROJECT SITE. All Hazardous Waste generated as a result of Project Site remediation must be handled and disposed of in compliance with the Remediation plan and all applicable Compliance Laws. 3.6.2.10 NONHAZARDOUS DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL. This paragraph replaces former specifications section 01742. 3.6.2.10.1 Performance Goal. The waste management objective is to recycle, reuse, or salvage non-hazardous waste generated by the work and to eliminate or minimize the amount of waste going to landfills. The Construction Waste Management Plan (CWMP) does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for ade- quate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures, including,but not limited to the erosion and sedimentation control provisions specified in this Compliance Specifica- tion. 3.6.2.10.2 Owner Pre-Designated Vendor. GC shall subcontract the services of the Owner pre-designated Con- struction and Demolition Waste Management Vendor(Vendor)for the collection and disposal of desig- nated construction and demolition waste. The pre-designated vendor shall be as follows: Waste Man- agement National Accounts, Windsor, CT. Waste Management LLC (866) 338-2342, oakleafcdteam@wm.com. Coordinate with Vendor for Contractor prepared pre-determination of waste and associated Vendor costs prior to bidding and reference the Construction Waste Management Esti- mation Form and Guidelines thereto at the end of this Section 3.6.2.10.3 Coordination. (a) Vendor Responsibility. 1)Communicate to the job site contact what service and recycling is arranged. 2)Provide handling,containers,storage,signage,transportation,and other items as required to implement waste management for the duration of the Contract. 3)Identify what container is for which recyclable or for trash. 4)Provide the waste containers to be used by the Contractor and coordinate the placement of the waste containers with the Contractor. Waste containers will be classified and segregated to accept materials sorted with respect to type of waste or type of material, 5)Provi'de e-business web portal with unique User-ID for Contractor to login and schedule waste and recycling services. The e-business portal will submit requests made by Contractor in real-time to subcontracted waste and recycling hauler(s)providing service at Project site. 6)Provide toll-free phone number and e-mail address for Contractor to report any issues result- ing from missed services or to clarify needs at Project site. (b) Contractor Responsibility: 01351-13 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1)Upon commencement of construction, contact the Vendor for collection and disposal ar- rangements. 2)Supply name and contact information to Vendor for a designated Contractor contact person on the job site. 3)Perfonm waste separation for recyclables and dispose in the proper container as agreed to between Vendor and Contractor. 4)Train workers,subcontractors,and suppliers on waste management plan and procedures. 5)Provide and designate and label specific areas on site for waste containers and for separat- ing waste materials. Perform segregation of waste materials into the various classification and segregated materials as established and agreed to between Vendor and Contractor. De- posit wasted materials into the containers. 6)Allow use of waste containers by Owner throughout construction period for Owner's on- site generated waste. 7)Notify Vendor when containers are ready for pickup and disposal by logging into Vendor's e-business web portal and requesting services needed. Submit request for service prior to 10 AM local time one day in advance of requested service. Pickup for service requests received after 10 AM local time will be performed the second business day after request. Pre-order services may be made up to seven days in advance for multiple containers. 8)Contractor shall not directly contact locally subcontracted hauler. All communication shall be made through Vendor's e-business web portal,toll-free phone,or e-mail. 3.6.2.10.4 General Requirements (a) Take a pro-active leadership role in the management of construction and demolition waste recycle efforts and require subcontractors,vendors,and suppliers to participate. (b) Develop site specific procedures to incorporate and carry out the estimated waste and the Diversion Goals as shown on the CWMP. (c) Practice efficient waste management when sizing,cutting,and installing products and other materi- als. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills. (d) Exercise diligence in the planning and execution of CWMP. (e) Post in the Contractor's field office,the including a site map showing container locations,concrete washout,and lunch and break areas. (0 Provide workers and subcontractors with a copy of CWMP and the C&D Training Manual. 3.6.2.10.5 Materials to be Recycled. (a) Recycling may consist,but not necessarily include nor be limited to,non-hazardous demolition and construction waste and debris to be disposed of and not to be reused or considered of value to the Contractor and retained in the Contractor's possession. (b) Maximize recycling and reuse of materials. Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be acceptable. Salvaged materials,other than those specified in other Sections to be salvaged and re- used,shall not be used in this Project. (c) Revenues: Savings or revenues obtained from recycled,re-used,or salvaged materials shall accrue to Contractor unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. (d) Revenues: Savings or revenues obtained from recycled,re-used,or salvaged materials shall accrue to Owner. 3.6.2.10.6 Onsite Sorting and Storage of Waste. (a) Sort and store waste generated by the Contractor and Owner. (b) Provide temporary fencing for storing unsorted waste and securing waste and recycling containers as specified in Section 01500. Establish storage area at least 50 feet from the project property line or as allowed by Owner Construction Manager.Coordinate location of storage area with Construc- tion Manager prior to installing fencing. (c) Enclose non-hazardous waste and recycling containers within temporary fencing. Keep storage area locked. Provide controlled access to container storage area for disposal. 01351-14 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (d) Designate a fenced sorting area separate from and immediately adjacent to the waste container stor- age area with sufficient space to sort waste for storage and disposal. (e) Prevent runoff from waste storage and sorting areas. Inspect areas used for storing materials for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the storm drainage system or discharging from the site. (f) Sort waste into storage containers and clear the waste sorting area at least twice every 12 hours. (g) Prevent unauthorized disposal of wastes generated off-site. (h) Set open top containers back at least 4 feet from fencing. 3.6.2.10.7 Containers. (a) Owner will furnish containers for non-hazardous wastes at no cost to Contractor. (b) Classify containers by markings or signage to accept materials sorted with respect to type of waste or type of material. (c) Clearly identify containers to receive recyclable materials. 3.6.2.10.8 Separation and Recycling. (a) Unless otherwise specified,separate hazardous waste,non-hazardous waste,and recyclables. (b) Source separated materials may include,but are not limited to,the following: 1)Acoustical Ceiling Tiles(ACT). 2)Asphalt and concrete. 3)Brick,masonry,tiles and rocks. 4)Building materials(doors,windows,fixtures,etc.) 5)Cardboard and packaging materials. 6)Carpet,carpet padding and foam. 7)Concrete slurry. 8)Construction and demolition debris. 9)Film plastic and Styrofoam. 10) Gypsum wallboard. 11) Metal(ferrous and non-ferrous). 12) Mied construction and demolition waste and miscellaneous construction debris. 13) Plant and tree trimmings(land clearing debris). 14) PVC Plank Flooring. 15) Trash and garbage. 16) Vinyl Composition tile(VCT). 17) Wire and cable. 18) Wood. 19) Porcelain. 20) Reuse or Salvage Materials. 21) Soils. 22) Other(describe in the Plan). (c) Comingled Materials: Where acceptable to recycling facility,place waste products and recyclable materials into a single container and transport to recycling facility. (d) Clean all materials that are contaminated prior to placing in source separated containers. (e) Deliver materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to recycling process. (f) Arrange for collection by or delivery to the appropriate recycling or reuse facility through Vendor's website. 3.6.2.10.9 Non-Recyclable Material Disposal and Waste Hauling. (a) Except for items or materials to be recycled as specified above,remove waste materials from site and legally dispose of it in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. (b) Except as otherwise specified,do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to accumulate on site. (c) Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 01351-15 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (d) Do not burn waste materials on or off Site. 3.6.3 PART 3—STORMWATER. See Specification Section 02370 3.6.4 PART 4-SAFETY COMPLIANCE. Contractor will comply with all applicable Safety Laws. Con- tractor shall be responsible for the safety of all persons on the Site including,without limitation,Workers, Walmart Contractors,Walmart Associates,customers,vendors,suppliers,and any other third person who might be present on the Site. Contractor shall supervise all Work by any party to confirm compliance with Safety Laws the applicable Safety Plan. (a) Controlling Contractor. Between the established and agreed upon construction start and possession date, Contractor is the "Controlling Contractor"per 29 CFR 1926. Walmart shall ensure Walmart Associates, Walmart Contractors, vendors, and suppliers comply with the Contractor Safety Plan, including Personal Protective Equipment, to the extent the Contractor controls access to the Site, communicates the require- ments,and enforces the Safety Plan. (b) Walmart Safety Compliance Requirements. Walmart may go above and beyond Safety Laws in the associ- ated Compliance Specification. Contractor shall comply with these measures. (c) Construction General Industry Standards. When Work is taking place in a Facility Occupied by Walmart, additional OSHA Safety Laws applicable to General Industry as opposed to Construction may apply to Work in order to protect Walmart Associates and customers,suppliers,and vendors from construction hazards. Additional obligations are set forth in these Specifications to address these risks. 3.6.4.1 INCIDENT OR SITE VISIT REPORTING AND PROCEDURES See Sec. 3.6.1.7 of the Compliance Ex- hibit and these Specifications. 3.6.4.1.1 Emergencies. In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,Contractor shall take such actions as necessary to prevent or minimize threatened damage,injury or loss. 3.6.4.2 SAFETY COMPLIANCE. Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising a safety program as set forth in a Site specific Safety Plan necessary to comply with Safety Laws and Compli- ance Requirements. 3.6.4.2.1 Safety Plan Requirements. The Safety Plan must: (a) Be in writing and on the Site; (b) Include all necessary documentation,including but not limited to policies and procedures,training,commu- nication,and inspections; (c) Require frequent and regular documented inspections by Contractor designated Competent Person of the Project Site,materials and equipment; (d) Document weekly safety meetings as required under Sec. 3.6.1.6.3(a)of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications;and (e) Include all the elements of a Safety Plan required by Federal,state and local OSHA or other applicable Safety Laws. Applicable OSHA regulations found in 29 CFR 1926 highlight other required standards and elements of a Safety Plan. If work on the Site includes a discipline or element for which OSHA or other Safety Laws have issued a governing law or standard,the Contractor should ensure that necessary Site policies/procedures, training,communication,and inspections are accomplished and implemented to ensure compliance. 3.6.4.2.2 Safety Compliance includes,but is not limited to: (a) Hazard Communication. 1) Contractor. Contractor shall ensure all required MSDS documents are available on the Site. MSDS should be made available at the contractor's office. Electronic MSDS systems are acceptable as long as they are compliant and readily accessible in the job trailer. 2) Walmart. Hazardous Material found in"Facilities Occupied by Walmart"-Walmart/Sam's Hazard- ous Material and Safety Data Sheets i. Operating Walmart and Sam's Clubs contain hazardous chemicals. Some are products for sale and some are products used in normal operation of Store's/Clubs. ii. Safety Data Sheets for all products can be found on Walmart.com by searching for MSDS in the search engine and then clicking on the Material Safety Data Sheet Search Engine. 01351-16 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 iii. If you have any questions regarding chemicals you encounter and safe work practices for those chemicals,contact Store/Club Management directly and review the Safety Data Sheet. (b) Toxic and Hazardous Substances. Any work activity that occurs in a building occupied by Walmart,where the Contractor could introduce into the environment a toxic or hazardous substance,must be compliant with 29 CFR 1910.1200 or one of OSHA's specific Toxic Substance laws,whichever is applicable,without con- sideration of protection factors associated with personal protective equipment. Walmart will not require workers or customers to wear personal protective equipment for protection against toxic or hazardous sub- stances. Exposure must be kept below any limits that require PPE. (c) Signs, Signals,and Barricades. In addition to compliance with Safety Laws,Contractor must be compliant with all architectural specifications regarding signs,signals,or barricades. (d) Crane Operation. In Facilities Occupied by Walmart,Crane lifts must not take place over Walmart Associ- ates,Customers,Vendors,Suppliers,Walmart Contractors,or any other third person. Where crane operations over said individuals may be necessary each lift must be coordinated with Store Management,Store Planning, and the Construction Manager so that all persons can be removed and the Contractor can barricade the af- fected area off before the lift begins. (e) Helicopters. Use of Helicopters is not allowed in the Store/Club program. Helicopter use is allowed in the Distribution Center Program. If helicopters are used in the Distribution Center Program, it is the General Contractors responsibility to ensure helicopter use is compliant with safety law,including but not limited to any permits that may be required, certifications required for workers involved and inspections for the heli- copter and any other equipment related to the lift. (t) Welding, Cutting, Brazing, Soldering, and other Hot Work. In projects that take place in stores and clubs occupied by Walmart,Contractor must obtain from Store/Club Management a valid Hot Work Permit before beginning any Hot Work. (g) Lockout/Tagout(LO/TO)in Facilities Occupied by Walmart: 1) LO/TO Communication. Contractor must provide a copy of the Lockout/Tagout Program that it will use and enforce on the Site for attendees of the Pre-construction Meeting. Contractor must review Walmart's Lockout/Tagout policy/program and communicate to all Contractor and Subcontractor Workers. Store Manager or CM can provide a current copy of the LO/TO policy. All meetings with Contractor's workers must be documented,as required by OSHA,using the Lockout/Tagout Pre-Construction Meeting Form provided—(Attached as"Safety Forms"). 2) Repair of LO/TO covered equipment. When outside personnel,such as contractors,are involved in repair or maintenance of our Lockout/Tagout covered equipment,follow these steps: i. Walmart management and the contractor must inform each other of their respective Lockout/Ta- gout procedures. Contractor must be aware of the following: a) Walmart store associates do not meet the qualifications of authorized personnel; b) The contractor must utilize their own Lockout/Tagout equipment; c) The contractor must effectively and timely communicate with store management regarding the status of services provided,including,but limited to: d) De-energizing and re-energizing of equipment e) Prior notification about Lockout/Tagout of additional equipment as a result of the original scope of work f) Completion of work g) Any failure by store associates to comply with the contractor's Lockout/Tagout program ii. Walmart is not responsible for the contractor's work procedures. 3) Spare Breakers. GC must have all spare breakers removed by an electrician during the first week the contractor is on site. Appropriate blanks should be placed in the panels so that all holes are covered as required by law. GC must keep spare breakers to be installed,as required,at the end of the project. 4) Lockout/Tagout Log. Lockout Tagout activity in each panel must be tracked using the Lockout/Tagout Log provided—(Attached as"Safety Forms"). During the first week the contractor is on sight,a copy of this form should be placed on each panel door. The GC must set the expectation that each of its employees and subcontractors utilize this log to document all lockout/tagout activity in each panel. 01351-17 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 5) Superintendent Inspection. In addition to any inspections performed by competent persons,each day any electrical work is performed,a Superintendent must inspect the electrical work,review this log daily,and initial each new line to verify the lockout tagout process is being executed and is compliant with safety law. (h) Electrical Worker Qualifications. For the purposes of the following requirements, electrical workers are defined as those Workers who perform work on or are exposed to electrical conductors or electrical equip- ment of 50 volts or greater. 1) Electrician(s)must be"Qualified"as defined by OSHA and the latest version of NFPA 70E. 2) Licensed Electrician(sI. Where required, electrical contractors must possess the required professional and/or business license. Where required,each individual electrician must also possess a valid professional license. 3) Electrical Worker Apprentices. Apprentices must be working under an approved governmental or trade organization apprenticeship program whose work is being directly overseen by a Qualified Electrician who possesses required licenses. 4) If Contractor or Subcontractor fails to meet the above qualifications on the Project, then Owner may, without limitation,at Owner's sole discretion: i. Prevent Contractor from participating on bids with regard to additional Owner projects for min- imum of ninety(90)days for Contractor's first violation of the above-stated requirement;and ii. Permanently suspend Contractor from bidding on all future Owner projects for Contractor's vio- lation of this paragraph two or more times. 5) Exposed Live Electrical components in Facilities Occupied by Walmart. During those times when live electrical components are exposed,the General Contractor must provide a Qualified Person to monitor the exposed components to protect against electrical hazards and provide for the safety of all Workers, customers,vendors,and Walmart Associates. If the work area is to be left unattended, all live exposed electrical components shall be properly concealed and made safe before the work area is vacated by the electrical contractor. Only in exceptional circumstances,will locking a room be permitted if a Qualified Person is not available to monitor live exposed electrical components. In such cases,the Store Manager and Construction Manager shall be notified and must approve before the room is locked. In such circum- stances,the electrical contractor shall provide the store manager with an emergency contact in the event that an emergency arises and immediate access to the room is required. This requirement includes elec- trical distribution centers. (i) Equipment,Tools and Machinery. 1) Owner Equipment. Contractor shall not use any Owner Equipment in any way or for any purpose unless use of such equipment is specifically included in the contract. 2) Prohibition on Gasoline or Dieselpowered equipment inside buildings occupied by Walmart. Only elec- tric equipment and equipment powered by propane or compressed air shall be operated inside the building. i. Gasoline or diesel powered compressors for air powered tools shall be operated outside the build- ing and away from air intakes. ii. Propane powered equipment shall have catalytic converters on mufflers and shall be maintained and operated to ensure compliance with local,state,and federal indoor air quality regulations. iii. Provide storage and handling of propane fuel in compliance with local, state, and federal regu- lations. iv. No propane shall remain inside building except during operation of propane equipment. v. Propane powered equipment shall be re-fueled outside the building. 3) Electrical Cords. Cords for electric equipment shall be sized adequately for voltage, current load, and length,whether to generator or existing power supply(reference Specification Section 01700). 4) Routing. Route equipment cords and hoses in compliance with applicable OSHA requirements and in open stores not to become a hazard for associates,customers,suppliers or vendors. (j) Operating Store or Club. When construction work is taking place in an operating store or club, additional safety requirements may be necessary to protect Walmart Associates and Customers from construction haz- ards.The following additional items are required: 01351-18 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1) Effectiveness of Dust Walls. Where the work occurs in areas that are completely segregated by use of barricades such as dust walls,Contractor is responsible to ensure that dust walls are sufficiently sealed to prevent odors,particulates,dust,fumes, exhaust gases or any other by-product of construction from en- tering areas occupied by Walmart or its customers,associates,vendors,suppliers,or owners tenants. 2) Effectiveness of Barricades. Contractor is responsible for traffic control,segregation of all construction work from the retail environment, and necessary barricades that would facilitate customer traffic and ensure Customer,Associate,and Vendor safety. 3) Where there are door(s)or passageway(s)between a building that Walmart occupies containing merchan- dise and an active construction area,if contractors move through the door(s)or passageway(s),the Con- tractor is to provide a Bonded Unarmed Security Guard(s)to maintain security between operational and construction areas of a store or Club anytime the door is unlocked. (k) Obstructions. Contractor shall keep the Project Site clear of unnecessary obstructions so as to avoid danger to all persons on the Project Site. (1) Confined Spaces. If you plan to enter a confined space,if you create a confined space,or if you discover unknown hazards in a confined space you must: 1) Inform and Coordinate with Store Management and your Walmart Construction Manager. 2) Comply with applicable compliance requirements for confined space entry including safe entry and emergency rescue/response requirements. 3) For Coordination purposes: Walmart/Sam's Club Associates are not allowed to enter confined spaces. 4) Understand: Walmart/Sam's club Associates are not trained to perform any function associated with confined space entry and must not be asked to do so. 5) Confined Space Definition: Confined Space per OSHA 1926.21 (b)(6)(ii)—any space having a limited means of egress,which is subject to the accumulation of toxic or flammable contaminants or has an ox- ygen deficient atmosphere. 6) See GC Handbook for more information on Confined Space locations. 3.6.4.3 WORK SEGREGATION,SITE SECURITY AND SITE PROTECTION 3.6.4.3.1 Mixture of Work Environments. When activities classified as General Industry (as defined by OSHA Section. 1910), and Construction (as defined by OSHA Section. 1926), occur at a single location and both safety standards could be in effect, the Contractor must completely and effectively segregate the Construction Work from General Industry environment(retail environment)to the extent that any expo- sures created by the Work does not create a hazardous or non-compliant situation/environment for Walmart or Walmart Associates,vendors,suppliers,and customers. This applies to any and all hazard- ous conditions generated by the Work. Additional obligations may be contained elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.6.4.3.2 Site Security and Protection. Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Project Site,includ- ing the security of all tools,materials,equipment and completed Work on the Site. Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) Walmart Associates on the Site and all other persons who may be affected by the Project; (b) Work, materials,and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of Contractor or Subcontractors;and (c) Other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements,roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construc- tion. 3.6.4.3.3 Access Control—Badge Requirement. Contractor shall create, implement and enforce throughout the term of this Contract access control procedures for the Project site,which shall include the use of a Badge system. This Badge system and protocol: 01351-19 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (a) Shall include,without limitation,procedures to restrict,monitor, track and report ingress and egress to the Project, (b) Shall comply with all requirements, including without limitation, content and issuance, as set forth in this Compliance Exhibit and its corresponding and referenced Specifications,and (c) No individual shall be admitted to the Project without fulfilling the requirements for their Badge cate- gory,with the exception of certain individuals for which the Badge is not required,as follows: 1)Delivery Personnel;and 2)Tenant Contractor Workers;and 3)Such other personnel and individuals that Walmart may approve. 3.6.4.3.4 Perimeter Controls and Safeguards. Contractors,without any increase in the Contract Sum, shall take such actions as may be necessary to maintain security on the Site, including, but not limited to, the control of the Site perimeter through erection of temporary security fencing or other barriers around the Project Site. In the event that perimeter control methods are used,Contractor shall monitor such controls to ensure the integrity of such controls is maintained at all times. 3.6.4.3.5 Hazard Safeguards. Contractor shall provide reasonable safeguards for safety and protection of persons, including,without limitation: (a) Posting warning/danger signs and other warning signs on or around the Project Site or specific hazards, such as an excavation; (b) Providing proper and sufficient barricades; (c) Providing proper and sufficient lighting; (d) Providing proper and sufficient guarding;and (e) Notifying users of the conditions of the Project site as well as adjacent sites and utilities. 3.6.4.3.6 Non-Compliant Equipment or Material. Contractor shall keep the Project Site clear of any machinery, tool,material,or equipment which is not in compliance with any applicable Safety Law or other Com- pliance Requirement. 3.6.4.3.7 Spotters-When there is risk of harm due to Construction Work in an area where there is an expectation that customers,vendors or associates are or could become present,the Contractor is to provide spotter(s) (or signal persons), in addition to equipment operators, whose sole responsibility shall be to provide verbal notice to customers and associates regarding the construction risk and assist with ensuring the work is properly segregated from the retail environment. Spotters are not required where there is no expectation that customers,vendors or Walmart Associates will be present. 3.6.4.4 TRAINING See Sec. 3.6.1.9 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. Contractor must ensure workers are trained as required by Safety Laws. Training documentation must be kept on site. Specific areas where training are required include but are not limited to: (a) Personal Protective Equipment. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart E (b) Electrical. As required by 29 CFR 1926 Subpart K and NFPA 70E (c) Scaffolds. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart L (d) Fall Protection. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M (e) Excavations. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P (f) Crane Operation. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart CC (g) Steel Erection. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R (h) Toxic and Hazardous Substances. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart Z. In addition, 29 CFR 1910 Subpart Z when Walmart occupies the building where the work will occur and where Walmart associates/customers will be exposed to air contaminants generated by the work. 3.6.4.5 SITE INSPECTION/AUDIT See Sec. 3.6.1.10 of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. Con- tractor must ensure Competent/Qualified persons inspect the job site as required by Safety Law. Inspections, including deficiencies found and corrective measures taken, must be kept on site. Specific areas where in- spections are required include but are not limited to: (a) Scaffolds. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart L (b) Fall Protection. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M (c) Excavations. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P 01351-20 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (d) Crane Operation. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart CC (e) Toxic and Hazardous Substances. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart Z. 1)Toxic and Hazardous Substances in a Facility Occupied by Walmart. In addition,29 CFR 1910 Subpart Z when Walmart occupies the building where the work will occur and where Walmart Associates/cus- tomers will be exposed to air contaminants generated by the work. 3.6.5 PART 5 - WORKER VERIFICATION COMPLIANCE. Contractor shall implement a verification program through which Contractor shall ensure that all Workers on the Project Site are employed in compliance with the Worker Verification Laws. As part of this program,Contractor shall communi- cate,require and ensure compliance by each and every Subcontractor with all requirements under the Contract Documents,the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. 3.6.5.1 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES 3.6.5.1.1 The eligibility of each Worker on the Project shall be verified by their employer's Qualified Verifier who will review that Worker's Verification Documents to ensure that the Form I-9 is completed in ac- cordance with all relevant Worker Verification Laws. (a) Contractor's Qualified Verifier shall verify the eligibility of its Contractor Workers; (b) Each Subcontractor's Qualified Verifier shall verify the eligibility of its Subcontractor Workers. 3.6.5.1.2 All Verification Documents are required to be maintained and to be produced by the Worker's employer for review by the WV Auditor as set forth in the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications. (a) Forms I-9 are required to be maintained and to be produced by the employer of all verified Workers. (b) Supporting Documents are required to be maintained and to be produced by the employer of those veri- fied Workers who were hired after the Contractor's Project award date. Contractor shall be responsible for communicating that date to all Subcontractors. 3.6.5.2 WV FORMS 3.6.5.2.1 Worker Verification Forms("WV Forms").Verification of eligibility will be documented by execution of the appropriate WV Form confirming eligibility of Workers in compliance with all applicable Worker Verification Laws and Compliance Requirements. WV Forms shall be in the exact form as attached to these Specifications. 3.6.5.2.2 WV Forms—Use.Retention and Production. Fully executed WV Forms shall be collected by Contractor for all Subcontractor Workers, maintained by Contractor throughout the life of the Contract, and shall be produced to Walmart and/or WV Auditor immediately upon Walmart's request. (a) Worker Verification Certification-Contractor.Contractor's Qualified Employee Verifier shall complete and Contractor shall sign the Worker Verification Certification-Contractor. (b) Worker Verification Certification- Subcontractor. Subcontractor's Qualified Employee Verifier shall complete and Subcontractor shall sign the Worker Verification Certification—Subcontractor. (c) Worker Verification Certification—3'd Party Verifier. Contractor's or Subcontractor's Qualified Third- Party Verifier shall complete and Contractor or Subcontractor(whichever applies)shall sign the Worker Verification Certification—3"'Party Verifier. 3.6.5.2.3 Worker Verification Auditor Certification. At the close of the Worker Verification Audit as described in the WV Exhibit and these Specifications, the WV Auditor shall complete the Worker Verification Auditor Certification,containing an overview of total audit results. 3.6.5.3 ACCESS CONTROL:Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Project site,including: 3.6.5.3.1 Badge Requirement. Contractor shall create,implement and enforce throughout the term of this Contract access control procedures for the Project site which meets the requirements of the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications,and which shall include the use of a Badge system. 3.6.5.3.2 Badge Visibility. Badges must be worn at all times an individual is present on the Project Site,and in a manner which is unobtrusive and clearly visible so that the Contractor's Superintendent may easily iden- tify whether an individual is approved to work on the Project Site. 3.6.5.3.3 Badge Retrieval. Upon completion of an individual's work or approved visit to the Project,Contractor shall retrieve any badge issued to such individual. 01351-21 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.6.5.3.4 Non-Discrimination. All individuals must be subject to the same criteria with respect to the issuance or denial of a Badge(i.e.,all work eligible individuals will receive a Badge,and Badges will not be awarded or denied based on any prohibited basis). 3.6.5.3.5 Badge Types. The following Badges must be included within the Access Control Badge System: (a) Contractor Badge. 1) Content. The Contractor Badge must not bear the brand identification of Walmart or be issued to an individual in any other category. The badge shall include: i. A photograph of the Worker; ii. The Worker's full name; iii. The location identity(City,State,Facility#)of this Project;and iv. The name of the Contractor/Subcontractor that employs that Worker. 2) Issuance. The Contractor Badge shall be issued by Contractor to: i. Any Worker whose eligibility is first listed on a fully executed WV Form in the pos- session of Contractor and who has provided valid proof of identity to Contractor. a) Exception. A Contractor may issue a Contractor Badge to a Worker whose em- ployment eligibility has not been certified on a properly executed WV Form only under the following circumstances: 1)Exceptional Circumstances exist that prevent Contractor or Subcontractor from complying with the WV Form requirements with respect to said indi- vidual,such that Contractor would endure unusual and unreasonable delay, expense or spoilage should WV Form be required of said individual prior to obtaining access and performing work;and 2)Contractor reasonably believes that said individual is lawfully eligible to work in the United States, and has no knowledge (constructive or actual) that said individual is an unlawful worker; and 3)At any given time,no more than five percent(5%)of all valid Badges on a Project-wide basis shall have been issued under this Exceptional Circum- stances provision;and 4)Contractor shall certify or ensure certification of the individual's lawful em- ployment eligibility by completing or obtaining a fully executed WV Form with respect to said individual no later than 72 hours from the time of issu- ance of the Badge to the individual,or the Badge herein expires and will not be renewed or reissued. (b) Walmart Contractor Badge. 1) Content. The Walmart Contractor Badge must: i. Be in the format provided by Owner as"Walmart Contractor Badge Template." ii.Not contain a photograph of the Walmart Contractor Worker,bear the brand identifi- cation of Walmart or be issued to an individual in any other category. 2) Issuance. The Walmart Contractor Badge shall be issued by Contractor to any Walmart Con- tractor Worker who meets the access control and check-in procedures. (a) Walmart Associate Badge. Walmart controls the form and issuance of the Walmart Associate Badge. (b) Visitor Badge. 1) Content. The Visitor Badge must not contain a photograph of the Visitor,bear the brand iden- tification of Walmart or be issued to an individual in any other category. 2) Issuance. The Visitor Badge shall be issued by Contractor to any non-working visitor to the Project. 3.6.5.3.6 Check-In Procedures. The Access Control procedures implemented by Contractor must include but is not limited to the following: (a) Workers. The Contractor Badge must be presented to Contractor by each individual Worker pursuant to its access control procedures before admittance to the Project. (b) Walmart Contractors. 01351-22 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1) Direct Check-In. Walmart Contractors of all trades not specifically excluded in the Indirect Check-In procedures below,whether part of the Project or doing separate work, shall present themselves to Contractor directly or through their supervisor pursuant to Contractor's access control procedures before gaining access to the Project Site. A supervisor checking in a group of Walmart Contractors shall be responsible to: i. Supply Contractor with a list or roster on their company's letterhead or email containing the names of their Walmart Contractor Workers and update that list immediately with any changes that occur; ii. Ensure Walmart Contractor Badges are obtained from Contractor, distributed to each Walmart Contractor Worker and worn as required;and iii. Retrieve the Walmart Contractor Badges upon completion of the work,returning same to Contractor at such time. 2) Indirect Check-In. Walmart Contractor Workers checking in under this procedure shall log in at the appropriate entrance and obtain a badge from the quantity provided by Contractor. Third party temporary workers may already have this template badge pre-printed for use. i. Contractor shall place and maintain a sufficient quantity of Walmart Contractor Badges at each Indirect Check-In location; ii.Walmart Contractor Workers shall log out upon finishing their work, and return their badges to the place they obtained them. iii. The trades eligible for indirect check-in and their appropriate check-in locations are as follows: a) For Open Stores/Clubs,at all times. DSD Vendors,3rd Party Truck Drivers and Sup- pliers(including Vending Suppliers)delivering product will check in at the: 1) DSD entrance at rear of building; b) After the start of the possession phase. Operations Equipment Suppliers(e.g. scales, sensors, registers, etc.), Vending Suppliers, Tenant/Lease Businesses, Direct Mer- chandise Suppliers will check in at the: 1) Walmart location: front entrance desk of building; 2) Sam's Club location: Front entrance desk of building or receiving office via the trucker door. (c) Walmart Associates. All Associates must wear their Associate Badge and present themselves for check- in directly or by a group supervisor pursuant to Contractor's access control procedures before gaining access to a Construction Project Site. A supervisor checking in a group of Associates will be responsible to ensure: 1. Associate Badges are present; 2. Contractor receives a list/roster with the names of their Associates;and 3. List/rosters is updated daily with the Contractor. (d) Visitors. Non-working visitors to the Project shall not be admitted to the Project Site without a Visitor Badge issued by Contractor pursuant to its access control procedures. 3.6.5.4 WORKER VERIFICATION AUDITS. The Project Site may be randomly selected or selected for cause,in Walmart's sole discretion,to be audited for purposes of Worker Verification Compliance. 3.6.5.4.1 Cooperation. Contractor shall,and shall cause its Subcontractors to,cooperate with the WV Auditor and provide the WV Auditor with access to such documentation and personnel as may be necessary to com- plete any certification,review or audit,including but not limited to WV Forms and Verification Docu- ments. Cooperation shall include:: (a) Contractor shall immediately notify any and all Subcontractors of the audit, (b) Contractor and Subcontractors shall provide any and all requested information and documentation,and (c) The WV Auditor shall review copies of the Verification Documents and other documents as they are delivered to the extent required pursuant to the Worker Verification Laws and the Worker Verification Program for each Worker on the Project. 01351-23 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (d) Contractor shall,and shall cause its Subcontractors to,immediately resolve any issues,problems or other circumstances of non-compliance revealed in any such review or audit 3.6.5.4.2 Timing. All audits in this Section shall be completed and reported within ten(10)business days from the date of Walmart's request. 3.6.5.4.3 Auditing for Cause. Walmart shall commence a Worker Verification Audit for Cause If Walmart be- comes aware of evidence,which in Walmart's sole discretion appears to be reasonably credible,that a Worker's eligibility is not properly documented and/or verified. 3.6.5.4.4 Audit Results. At the conclusion of the audit, the WV Auditor will submit the results of the audit to Walmart and Contractor in the form of the"Worker Verification Auditor Certification,"attached hereto and incorporated herein by such reference. 3.6.5.5 EXPENSES. After the conclusion of the audit,the WV Auditor will submit the audit invoice to Contractor with a copy of such invoice submitted to the Walmart Realty Employment Compliance team at RealtyCompliance.Audit@wal-mart.com. 3.6.5.5.1 Reasonable Expenses Reimbursed. Reasonable expenses incurred by Contractor in connection with ran- dom audits conducted pursuant to,and which meet the requirements under the Compliance Exhibit and these Specifications,will be reimbursed by Walmart. Contractor's human resources or office expenses utilized in any auditing shall not be considered reasonable expenses and shall not be reimbursed. (a) Reasonable Expenses. Reasonable expenses for audits which will be reimbursable consist of a flat fee plus a per worker fee as follows: 1)Flat Fee of: 1.$1000 for Projects with Workers numbering 200 or less;or 2.$2000 for Projects with Workers numbering 201 or more,and 2)Fee of$20 per Worker reviewed (b) Submittal by Contractor. Contractor shall submit a request for reimbursement for such reasonable ex- penses to the Walmart Contract Management team through its reimbursable expenses protocol. 3.6.5.5.2 Expenses Not Reimbursed. Any expenses incurred by Contractor in connection with Auditing for Cause, or which exceed the reasonable expenses allowed by Walmart shall be borne by the Contractor and shall not be reimbursed by Walmart. 3.6.5.6 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING. Superintendent shall ensure that all Worker Verification Laws required programs and documentation are available,discussed and documented as part of the preconstruction meeting. This includes but is not limited to access control and WV Forms. 01351-24 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 WV FORMS 01351-25 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 WV FORM WORKER VERIFICATION CERTIFICATION-CONTRACTOR Facility Number: Facility Location: The undersigned, ("Contractor"),certifies,pursuant to that certain Construc- tion Agreement dated , 20 ("Contract") between Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. ("Owner") and Contractor, the following: 1. Contractor has fully complied with all Worker Verification Laws, as defined in the Con- tract, its Compliance Exhibit and corresponding or referenced Specifications ("Contract Documents") with regard to each of Contractor's employees who shall perform work on the Project pursuant to the Contract("Contractor Workers"). 2. As to each Contractor Worker described above, Contractor has on file a Form 1-9 that is free of substantive or uncorrected technical deficiencies (other than timeliness deficien- cies) and that reflects that the Contractor Worker is lawfully eligible to work on the Pro- ject. 3. Contractor will document those specific Contractor Workers in a list exactly in the format below, which shall be affixed to this WV Form, supplemented as necessary, maintained and produced according to the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to the presen- tation of such Contractor Workers for admission to the Project site. Full Legal Name of Individual _ Name of Employer EX \N1PLE ONLY FX'IMP1 E ONLY FXV NIPLF ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY 4. Legible photocopies of the employment eligibility and identity documentation for Con- tractor Workers (who were hired after the award of the Contract project have been and will continue to be maintained by Contractor for the period required by the Contract Doc- uments. 5. Contractor has reported or will report any and all Worker Verification Incidents (as de- fined in the Contract)to Owner within one (1) hour of such Worker Verification Incident. 6. Contractor has not, and its Subcontractors have not been the subject of enforcement or other action by ICE within the two (2) year period prior to the date of this certification. 7. Contractor intends, and has procedures in place,to ensure that it and all of its Subcon- tractors are in compliance with the Worker Verification Laws and that all Workers on the Project are authorized to work in the United States. 8. None of the Workers is known to Contractor to be employed without lawful authoriza- tion. 9. Contractor shall, and shall cause its Subcontractors to, cooperate with the WV Auditor and provide the WV Auditor with access to such documentation and personnel as may be necessary to complete any certification, review or audit. This Certification may be delivered to and relied upon by Owner. Certified by the undersigned as true, correct and complete this day of , 20_• 01351-26 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 QUALIFIED EMPLOYEE VERIFIER By: Name: Title: ADDITIONAL CERTIFIER(if necessary) By: Name: Title: 01351-27 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 WV FORM WORKER VERIFICATION CERTIFICATION—SUBCONTRACTOR The term "Subcontractor"applies to any Subcontractor of the General Contractor("Contractor') A4 any Subcontractor of any tier or for any duration thereunder performing work on this Project. This does not include Walmart Contractors. Facility Number: Facility Location: The undersigned, ("Subcontractor"), through its Qualified Employee Veri- fier, certifies,pursuant to that certain Subcontractor Agreement dated ,20 or other Agreement, Scope of Work, or Work Order (collectively referred to as "Subcontract") be- tween ("Contractor/Subcontractor") and Subcontractor pertaining to the Pro- ject identified above, the following is true and correct: 1. Subcontractor has fully complied with all Worker Verification Laws, as defined in the Contract between Contractor and Walmart ("Contract"), with regard to each of Subcon- tractor's employees who shall perform work on the Project pursuant to the Subcontract ("Subcontractor Workers"). 2. As to each Subcontractor Worker described above, Subcontractor has on file a Form 1-9 that is free of substantive or uncorrected technical deficiencies(other than timeliness de- ficiencies) and that reflects that the Subcontractor Worker is lawfully eligible to work for Subcontractor. 3. Subcontractor will document those specific Subcontractor Workers in a list exactly in the format below,which shall be affixed to this WV Form and provided to Contractor, supple- mented as necessary to Contractor,maintained and produced according to the requirements of the Subcontract prior to the presentation of such Subcontractor Workers to Contractor for admission to the Project site. Full Legal Name of Individual Name of Employer EXAMPI F ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY EXVAPIONL1 I EXAMPLE ONI.4' 4. Legible photocopies of the employment eligibility and identity documentation for Sub- contractor Workers who were hired after the award of the Project to the Contractor have been and will continue to be maintained by Subcontractor for the period required by the Contract. 5. Subcontractor has reported or will report any and all Worker Verification Incidents (as defined in the Subcontract)to Contractor within one (1) hour of such Worker Verification Incident. 6. Subcontractor has not, and its Subcontractors have not been the subject of enforcement or other action by ICE within the two (2)year period prior to the date of this certification. 7. Subcontractor intends, and has procedures in place, to ensure that it and all of its Sub- contractors are in compliance with the Worker Verification Laws and that all Subcon- tractor Workers of any tier on the Project are authorized to work in the United States. 8. None of the Subcontractor Workers is known to Subcontractor to be employed without lawful authorization. 9. Subcontractor shall, and shall cause its Subcontractors to, cooperate with the WV Audi- tor and provide the WV Auditor with access to such documentation and personnel as may be necessary to complete any certification, review or audit. This Certification may be delivered to and relied upon by Contractor and Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Certified by the undersigned as true, correct and complete this day of 20 QUALIFIED EMPLOYEE VERIFIER By: Name: Title: ADDITIONAL CERTIFIER (if necessary) By: Name: Title: WV FORM WORKER VERIFICATION CERTIFICATION—3rd PARTY VERIFIER WV Auditor Name: WV Auditor principal place of business: Business Name: Title: Street Address: City, State, Zip: Telephone: E-mail: Website(if any): I, the undersigned, do hereby attest and affirm that: 1. I have reviewed the Form(s)I-9 executed in connection with the individual(s) listed be- low and their employment with (Employer). 2. As to each individual listed below, Employer has on file a Form I-9 that is free of sub- stantive or uncorrected technical deficiencies (other than timeliness deficiencies) and that reflects that the individual is lawfully eligible to work for Employer. 3. I possess the requisite skill and knowledge to conduct an effective and meaningful com- pliance review of Forms I-9 and related documents. Full Le al Name of Individual Name of Employer EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY This Certification may be delivered to and relied upon by Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Certified by the undersigned as true, correct and complete this day of 20 Signed: _ Name: Contractor(/Subcontractor(circle one) further certifies the following: 1. As to each individual listed above, Contractor/Subcontractor has on file a Form 1-9 that is free of substantive or uncorrected technical deficiencies (other than timeliness deficien- cies) and that reflects that the individual is lawfully eligible to work for Contractor /Sub- contractor. 2. Copies of the employment eligibility and identity documentation for individuals who were hired after the award of the Project to Contractor have been and will continue to be main- tained by Contractor/Subcontractor for the life of the Contract/Subcontract. 3. Contractor/Subcontractor has reported or will report any and all Worker Verification Inci- dents (as defined in the Contract)to Owner/Contractor(respectively)within one (1) hour of such Worker Verification Incident. 4. Contractor/Subcontractor has not,and its Subcontractors have not been the subject of en- forcement or other action by ICE within the two year period prior to the date of this cer- tification. 5. Contractor/Subcontractor intends to and has procedures in place to ensure that it, as well as any and all of its Subcontractors are in compliance with the Worker Verification Laws and that all Workers on the Project are authorized to work in the United States. 6. None of the Contractor/Subcontractor Workers is known to Contractor/Subcontractor to be employed without lawful authorization. 7. Contractor/Subcontractor shall, and shall cause its Subcontractors to, cooperate with the WV Auditor and provide the WV Auditor with access to such documentation and per- sonnel as may be necessary to complete any certification, review or audit. This Certification may be delivered to and relied upon by Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Certified by the undersigned as true, correct and complete this day of 20 QUALIFIED EMPLOYEE VERIFIER By: Name: Title: ADDITIONAL CERTIFIER(if necessary) By: Name: Title: WV FORM WORKER VERIFICATION AUDITOR CERTIFICATION Facility Number: Facility Location: General Contractor Subject to Audit("Contractor"): Subcontractors Subject to Audit("Subcontractors"): (List) The undersigned, ,has been engaged as a Worker Verification Auditor to: 1. Review the Forms I-9 and copies of employment eligibility and identity documentation required to be maintained for Worker Verification Compliance pursuant to the Contract between ("Contractor") and Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. ("Owner"), for each Worker (as defined in that Contract) of any tier and duration, on the above referenced Project, and 2. Certify whether the documentation supplied and reviewed confirm that the Contractor and Subcon- tractor have verified the eligibility of such Workers and are in compliance with Form I-9 requirements and all applicable immigration laws, statutes,rules, codes,orders and regulations, including,without limitation, the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, as amended, the Immigration and Na- tionality Act, as amended, and the Illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act of 1996, as amended, and any successor statutes, laws, rules and regulations thereto (collectively, the "Worker Verification Laws") as well as the Contract, and 3. Certify whether any errors or items of concern exist in the documentation reviewed which could call into question the eligibility of a Worker. I hereby certify the following: 1. I reviewed the Forms I-9 for the individuals listed in the Worker Verification Audit Summary Sheet (which is attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference as "WV Form Audit Summary"). 2. Regarding the review of Forms I-9 (and employment eligibility and identity documents where appli- cable)in this audit: a. The total number of I-9 Forms reviewed in conjunction with this audit is b. The total number of individuals whose employment eligibility and identity were verified through the review of their I-9 is c. The total number of Forms I-9 which contained errors or items of concern which could call into question the eligibility of the Worker(s) is d. The total number of Worker(s) for whom employment eligibility and identity documentation which appear to be tampered with or fraudulent on their face is 3. A list of the Worker(s)referred to in paragraph 2.c. and 2.d. hereinabove has been provided to Owner and to Contractor, a. Who has confirmed the removal of such Worker(s)from the Project, and b. The total number of such Worker(s)who have provided additional proof of eligibility which I have reviewed and whose eligibility I have confirmed through that review is 4. Contractor has provided documentation evidencing payment by Contractor to all Subcontractors as of the date of this audit. 5. Contractor has provided proof of solvency for any and all bond companies for the Project. Certified by the undersigned as true, correct and complete this day of , 20_ Auditor: By: Name: Title: SAFETY FORMS Lockout - Tagout Activity Log Warning — READ BELOW BEFORE OPENING PANEL! This is a multi-employer worksite undergoing construction. Oversight of this panel has been delegated to the General Contractor in charge of the project and as indicated below. If you need to access this panel for any reason please coordi- nate with the Superintendent and Electrical Contractor. This includes all Maintenance Contractors. General Contractor: Superintendent Name: Phone Number: Electrician Name: Phone Number: Facility Number: Store Manager: Spare Breaker Validation by GC: Before Con- Superintendent Signature and Date: struction begins all spare breakers must be re- moved and all empty breaker slots must be plugged with the proper blanks. All Lockout/Tagout activity in this panel must be documented on,the form below. To protect the safely of each worker, Do Not remove a lock unless it is your own. Locked Out Lock Removed Circuit Electrician's Name Electrician's Checked by Su- pe* Phone# perintendent (Initials) Date Time Date Time Safety Lockout Tagout Pre-Construction Meeting Form I Jobsite City&State: Store/Club#: Construction Start Date: The following is applicable when proiect work occurs in facilities occupied by Walmart. Walmart Store Management and the General Contractor shall inform each other of the applicable lockout/tagout procedures that will be utilized during the project. Walmart Store Management must provide the General Contractor with a copy of the Store Lockout/Tagout procedures used at the store and available on the WIRE.The General Contractor Superintendent must provide Store Management with copy(s)of the Lockout/Tagout procedure(s)that will be utilized on the project. Discussion/explanation of the procedures must take place during the pre-construction meeting. Visual demonstration of the devices that will be used for control of energy ilocks and tags)should also occur. It is the responsibility for the General Contractor Superintendents and Store Management to ensure their respective Workers or Associates comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the various energy control programs. It is most important that construction workers and Walmart Associates recognize the locks and tags used,or any other method used to control other forms of energy,and understand they may not alter remove or in any way try to energize a circuit that has been locked or tagged by another employers associates/workers. Note to Construction Manager and Store Management: Walmart Lockout Tagout Procedures are located on the WIRE at the following location: WIRE>Knowledge Center>Safety>OSHA Programs/Lockout/Tagout. Store Management Signature Date General Contractor Superintendent Signature Date General Contractor must have Field Leadership(foreman)for each trade/subcontractor sign below verifying they un- derstand the Lockout Tagout processes applicable to the job site before they begin any work on the site. Company Name and Trade Signature of Field Leadership Date (Foreman) Example: XYZ Electrical/Electri- Art Flash 4/25/2013 clans Note:This Form Is required by Contract Exhibit Section XXX and Compliance Spec Section XXX. Once the document is signed by both Store Management and the Super- intendent a copy should be given to Store Management for their records. The•Superintendent should keep the original for documenting the training given to workers and trade foremen. The final copy should be kept as part of the contract documents and must be made available to OSHA or Walmart upon request. Safety Competent or Qualified Person Designation Form Jobsite City&State: Store/Club#: Construction Start Date: Expected Construction Complete Date: IThe person(s) below have been designated by the General Contractor as a"Competent Person"per OSHA guidelines and are now dele- gated the responsibility and authority for coordinating activities and operations covered by the designation(s)for which they have been deemed competent. *A Competent Person must be listed IF the discipline or work activity occurs on the jobsite. Work Activity/ Discipline The list of work activities that require a Competent Signature of Competent or Qualified or Qualified person includes but is not limited to: Person (whichever is required) Company Name Electrical Fall Protection Scaffolds/ Ladders Cranes Trenching/ Excavation Concrete & Masonry Welding & Cutting Steel Erection Toxic & Hazardous Substances Demolition Health & Environmental Controls PPE & Life Saving Equipment Blasting & Explosives Underground Construction Note:This Form is required by Contract Compliance Spec Section 3.6.1.5 and must be posted on the Wall of Information in the General Contractors jobsite office. SELECTED POLICY EXCERPTS Hot Works Procedures Overview Hot Works is any activity capable of producing flames or sparks. Examples include,but are not limited to,cutting,welding,grinding,brazing, soldering(to include copper plumbing),thawing pipes and torch applied roofing. This procedure provides the necessary guidelines to safely perform welding,cutting and any other hot works in order to maintain safe work- ing conditions and protect the health of our associates and customers.With this in mind,all operations will implement and monitor the fol- lowing Welding/Hot Works Procedures specified by OSHA 29 CFR 1910.252 and NFPA regulations. Facility Management Responsibilities It is the responsibility of facility management to perform the following: • Notify contractors performing"Hot Work"of their responsibilities and provide them with a copy of this policy including the permit. • Identify all potential hazards(flammable materials,wall material,roof materials,chemicals,packaging,material storage,etc.)with the contractor before work begins. • Do not allow the contractor to turn off automatic sprinklers without notifying Alarm Central at 479-273-4600. • Verify that the contractor understands the Hot Works program before completing the necessary portions of the Hot Work Permit and signing the Contractors Letter of Commitment. • Visually inspect the area at random times while work is being conducted and after the work is completed to verify procedures are being following and no hazards are present. • Make a final inspection of the area,complete the permit and have the Safety Team Leader keep the closed permit in their Safety binder.Refer to Appendix I for the Hot Works Permit. In the event of a fire,refer to the Code Red tab in the Emergency Procedures Flipchart. Contractor Responsibilities Contractor must notify a salaried member of management of their intent to perform hot work and to request a Hot Work Permit.They must follow the procedures outlined in this program: • The contractor(i.e.,welder)and the fire watch,someone that is assigned the duty to monitor the work area for smoke,fire or haz- ards,must check the area for flammable conditions.All flammables,including power equipment,should be moved 50 feet from the hot work site.If merchandise cannot be moved,then a certified non-combustible or flame retardant cover must be used to protect the items.Non-combustible or flame retardant covers should be used where necessary to cover equipment,and to cover openings in the walls and floors. • The contractor will provide a fully charged, 101b.type ABC fire extinguisher.The extinguisher shall be at hand and available for the fire watch at all times. • A fire watch,in addition to the person doing hot work will be present at all times.If needed,provide the fire watch a facility's two- way radio to communicate with management. • If work is interrupted because of breaks,lunches,meetings,etc.,the contractor is to contact a member of management who will inspect the area prior to the person doing hot work or fire watch leaving.The fire watch or a member of management must stay and monitor the area for 30 minutes. • If the permit expires before the work is completed a new Hot Work Permit must be issued before work can continue.Expiration times should be calculated as realistically as possible to the actual completion time of the work. • When the work is completed,the person doing hot work will enter the time of completion on the Hot Work Permit and will return it to facility management.The contractor is responsible to ensure all electrical connections and cables on their equipment are in good condition. Fire Watch Responsibilities All qualified fire watches must receive training on the proper use of a fire extinguisher and the fire watch guidelines listed in this section.A fire watch is provided by the contractor. • Before any hot work begins,the fire watch must ensure a valid hot work permit has been issued. o Refer to the first bullet under the Facility Management Responsibilities section of this document. • A Fire Watch is not to have other duties. • All flammable materials must be moved from the area where the hot work will occur. • Certified non-combustible or fire retardant covers must be used to shield flammable materials on each side of the area to be welded.Flammable material that cannot be moved must also be covered.The covers should also be used to cover equipment and to cover openings in the walls and floors. • If welding/other hot work is to be done on a metal wall,partition,ceiling or roof precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side,due to conduction or radiation of heat. • The Fire Watch must keep a constant watch on the surrounding area as well as the area where the hot work is being performed. • Fire Watches must keep a fire extinguisher at hand anytime hot work is being performed. • Fire Watches must shut down any hot work whenever anything out of the ordinary occurs(e.g.,severe weather announcement,fire alarm,chemical spills,etc.). • If a fire does occur,the main responsibility of the Fire Watch is to warn and protect the person(s)performing the hot work,other people in the area and themselves from the fire.The Fire Watch may attempt to extinguish the fire. • Any time a Fire Watch must leave the area,the work must be halted until the Fire Watch returns.The person doing hot work will monitor the area until the Fire Watch returns. • The Fire Watch must be familiar with shutting down welding machines or oxygen-acetylene cutting equipment. • The Fire Watch and the person doing the hot work will conduct a thorough inspection of the surrounding area after the hot work is complete to verify nothing is burning or presenting a hazard. • The Fire Watch must not lose visual contact with the hot work area until after a sufficient cool down period has expired(30 minutes minimum).This includes stopping work for breaks,lunches,general meetings,etc.The Fire Watch must visually inspect the welding area for 30 minutes after the work has been completed. Fire Watch Requirements - International Fire Code 901.7 Systems out of service Where a required fire protection system is out of service,the fire department and the fire code official shall be notified immediately and, where required by the fire code official,the building shall either be evacuated or an approved fire watch shall be provided for all occupants left unprotected by the shut down until the fire protection system has been returned to service. Where utilized,fire watches shall be provided with at least one approved means for notification of the fire department and their only duty shall be to perform constant patrols of the protected premises and keep watch for fires. Hot Works Procedures(Appendix I WalMart Stores Hot Work Permit Hot Permits will not be issued if sprinkler system is out of ser- vice 'Permit Issues To(Contract or person doing hot work): (Date: 'Time Issued: 'Location of Work: (Description of Work: I I 'Time Work Started: I I (Time Permit Expires: The Contractor and the Fire Watch have taken the following precau- tions to performing Hot Work: ▪ Verified the sprinkler protection is in service E Flammable and combustible materials removed S0ft(15m)from area r F• loor and wall openings within Soft(15m)covered r 1• 0 lb type ABC fire extinguisher located within reach of the Fire Watch E Cutting and welding equipment in good condition r Trained Fire Watch present Fire Watch Verification: Fire Watch:"i have read and understand my responsibilities" Print Name: Fire Watch Signature: Date: Closing the Permit: Time work completed: Contractor's Signature: Member of Facility Mgmt inspecting the site: IDate: I Time: Have the Safety Team Leader keep the closed permit in their Safety binder.Retain the document(s)as outlined in the Retention of Rec- ords Policy(PR-03). Walmart Stores Contractors Letter of Commitment Hot Work Information and Responsibilities • It is imperative that persons conducting Contract Welding/Hot Works follow all procedures.The contractor shall understand that failure to follow procedure or produce required documents can or will terminate their contract. • Our company strongly believes that fires caused by hot work have a significant adverse effect on our ability to do business.Be- cause of this,we have established procedures and trained our associates to help minimize this hazard. • As a contractor at this facility,you are a partner in our continued success in preventing losses.We encourage your suggestions on how hot work can be avoided by using alternative methods.If hot works cannot be avoided,you are expected to strictly follow our policy and procedures during all work conducted at this location. • Facility Management at this location will assist you in following our procedures for hot work.If appropriate,management will in- troduce you to other workers in the area to discuss unique conditions that you should be aware of before your work begins. • Verify that you have read and understand our company's Hot Works policy/procedures by signing in the location provided below. Thank you for helping us improve our property and protect against potential losses. Print Name: Sign Name: Lockout/Tagout Procedures Removing Equipment from Use Procedures for Identifying Equipment Needing Servicing and/or Maintenance and Information on Lock- out/Tagout Procedures From time to time,you may encounter equipment that is broken or not working correctly.This procedure describes the steps that you should take to protect yourself and other associates from broken or malfunctioning items or equipment. In most cases, Walmart utilizes outside contractors to perform service and maintenance on equipment and most store/club associate job re- sponsibilities do not include maintenance or servicing work.Consequently,you should not attempt to fix equipment yourself and,instead should warn other associates about malfunctioning or broken equipment by placing a Do Not Operate tag on it and notifying a salaried member of management,who will contact qualified and authorized personnel or service companies to fix the equipment. Procedures for affixing a Do Not Operate tag are described below in section A. In addition, information intended to help you understand safety procedures that may be implemented by third party contractors engaged to service or maintain equipment, known as"Lock Out/Tag Out",is described in section B. If necessary,you may be provided with more specific information in connection with the maintenance or servicing of equipment with which you work. A. Procedures for Identifying Equipment in Need of Repair or Servicing Whenever an authorized outside contractor needs to perform service or maintenance on equipment,an associate should place a"Do Not Operate"tag on the equipment to notify others that the equipment should not be operated or used until the equipment has been serviced by an authorized outside contractor: • If the machine or equipment is operating,shut it down using the normal stopping procedures by depressing a button or toggle switch. Only attempt this if it will not put individuals in danger of being injured. • Put your name and date on a"Do Not Operate"tag • Attach the tag to the equipment using a tie wire or zip tie. • Inform individuals who use the affected equipment and who work in the area that the equipment is in need of maintenance and/or service and should not be used. • Immediately notify a salaried member of management that the equipment is in need of maintenance and/or service and complete the front portion of the Do Not Operate tag and place it on the equipment • A member of management will turn off the disconnect switch(if any)and complete the back portion of the already in place"Do Not Operate"tag with name and date and place it on the disconnect switch. Examples of equipment with disconnect switches include the baler and compactor. • The authorized service provider will follow their lockout/tagout procedures,as appropriate. • Do not remove a contractor's lockout device AND use the machine only after the service is complete and all Do Not Operate tags have been removed. B. Overview of Lock Out/Tag Out Lock Out/Tag Out is a process that is intended to prevent accidents and injuries caused by the accidental release of hazardous energy of pow- ered equipment or from unexpected equipment startup when performing maintenance or service..Only qualified and authorized personnel or service companies should provide service or maintenance on equipment.As noted,in most cases,Walmart utilizes outside contractors to perform service and maintenance on equipment and most store/club associate job responsibilities do not include maintenance or servicing work. In order to assure that you have a good understanding of such policies,this procedure is intended to ensure that you understand such procedures,which will assist in providing a safe workplace and complying with OSHA requirements as contained in 29 C.F.R.1910.147. LO/TO applies to servicing and/or maintenance work which takes place during normal operations on equipment which could injure workers due to the release of stored hazardous energy or from unexpected equipment startup.Such work is covered by this process if: • Personnel are required to remove or bypass a guard or other safety device. • Personnel are required to place any part of their body into an area where work is actually performed by a machine or equipment or where an associated danger zone exists. o NOTE:The LO/TO process does not apply to work on cord and plug connected electric:equipment,when the equipment is unplugged from the energy source and the person performing the work has complete control of the plug. LO/TO requires specific procedures and training for employees who perform such work("Authorized"personnel)and also requires that work- ers in the area where such work is occurring("Affected"personnel)be informed of the existence of the safeguards in order to protect the Authorized workers.Most store/club associate job responsibilities do not include maintenance or servicing work.Consequently,most associ- ates are not Authorized personnel,as defined in OSHA's Standard on LO/TO. Although most associates are not subject to the requirements pertaining to Authorized Personnel,Wal-Mart/Sam's Club wants to ensure that all associates,whether or not they work in an area where equipment that is subject to LO/TO procedures,understand the purpose and use of LO/TO procedures,including the requirement that no attempts should be made to start or use machines or equipment that are locked or tagged out of service. Definitions applicable to LO/TO Affected Personnel-Personnel who are required to use machines or equipment on which service and/or maintenance is performed under a lockout/tagout process or who perform other job responsibilities in an area where service or maintenance is performed. Authorized Personnel-Personnel who lock or tag out machines or equipment in order to perform service or maintenance.It is anticipated that in most cases such personnel will be outside contractors. Capable of`Being Locked Out-An energy-isolating device is considered capable of being locked out if it: • Is designed with a hasp or other means of attachment to which a lock can be affixed. • Has a locking mechanism built into it. • Can be locked without dismantling,rebuilding,or replacing the energy-isolating device or permanently altering its energy control capability. Energized-Machines and equipment are energized when they are connected to an energy source or they contain residual or stored energy. For example,a machine that is plugged in to an outlet is considered energized even if the machine is turned off. Energy-Isolating Device-A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy,including,but not limited to,the following: • Manually operated electrical circuit breaker. • Disconnect switch. • Manually operated switch by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded supply conductors and,in addition,no pole can be operated independently. • Line valve. • Block. • Any similar device used to block or isolate energy. • Note:Push buttons,selector switches,and other control circuit type devices are not energy isolating devices. Energy Source-Any source of electrical,mechanical,hydraulic,pneumatic,chemical,thermal,or other energy. Lockout-The placement of a lockout device on an energy-isolating device,in accordance with an established procedure,ensuring that the energy-isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed. Lockout Device-Any device that uses positive means such as a lock,blank flanges,and bolted slip blinds to hold an energy-isolating device in a safe position to prevent the start-up of machinery or equipment. Normal Production Operations-Use of a machine or equipment to perform its intended production function. Servicing and/or Maintenance-Workplace activities such as constructing,installing,setting up,adjusting,inspecting,modifying,maintaining, and/or servicing machines or equipment,including lubricating,cleaning,or un-jamming of machines or equipment,and making adjustments or tool changes,in situations in which personnel could be exposed to the unexpected energization or startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy. Tagout-The placement of a tagout device on an energy-isolating device,in accordance with the established procedure,to indicate that the energy-isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed. Tagout Device-Any prominent warning device,such as a tag and a means of attachment that can be securely fastened to an energy-isolating device to indicate that the machine or equipment to which it is attached may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.Tags do not provide the same degree of protection as locks and to be effective,must never be bypassed,ignored,or otherwise defeated. Affected Personnel (Store/Club Associates) Affected Personnel should understand this policy and its purpose,and should follow these guidelines: • Never attempt to start a machine or piece of equipment that is locked out or tagged out of service. • Never attempt to remove or alter a lock or tag that has been placed on a machine that is being serviced. • Report to a salaried member of management if a tag is damaged,unclear,or illegible. • Ask a salaried member of management if you have any questions about this process. Outside Contractors When outside contractors are involved in service and/or maintenance of our lockout/tagout covered equipment,follow these steps: • Walmart management must obtain from the contractor its lockout/tagout procedures. • Facility management must inform the contractor of the following: o Walmart store/club associates do not meet the qualifications of Authorized Personnel(except those authorized to service the Auto Care Center/TBC air compressors) o The contractor must utilize their own lockout/tagout equipment o The contractor must effectively and timely communicate with store management regarding the status of services pro- vided,including,but limited to: De-energizing and re-energizing of equipment Prior notification about lockout/tagout of additional equipment as a result of the original scope of work Completion of work Any failure by store/club associates to comply with the contractor's lockout/tagout program • Management should ensure that any affected associates are informed of and comply with the restrictions and controls of the con- tractor's lockout/tagout program. • Walmart is not responsible for the contractor's work procedures. Auto Care Center/TBC Authorized Personnel must use the lockout/tagout process whenever service,maintenance,and/or repairs are performed on a machine and injury could occur as a result of unexpected startup of or release of energy from the machine.In most cases,associates will place an Do Not Operate tag on equipment until repairs can be made and an outside contractor will repair the equipment,including,when needed,the use of LO/TO procedures while performing service and/or maintenance.. In a few instances associates may act as Authorized Personnel.This section describes the situations and procedures to be used in such instances. When to Use Lockout/Tagout(Authorized Personnel Only) • Auto Care Center/TBC Air Compressor Periodic Oil Change Maintenance: Auto Care Center/TBC Associates should follow the lock- out/tagout procedures in the Auto Care Center/TBC Air Compressor LOTO SOP. (insert link on the Wire) Lockout/Tagout Procedures(Authorized Personnel Only) Authorized Personnel who are going to perform service and/or maintenance on equipment should follow these steps to lockout or tagout equipment(Note:the specific procedures(SOPs)for the machine or equipment should be consulted): • If the machine or equipment is operating,shut it down using the normal stopping procedures by depressing a button or toggle switch.Only attempt this if it will not put individuals in danger of being injured. • Shut off the main electrical breaker switch,valve,or other energy isolating devices.Verify that facility management has been in- formed of the lockout/tagout procedure specific to the machine. • Place a lock or other energy isolation device on the electrical box or valve with a printed name and dated"Do Not Operate"tag.This prevents accidental startup. • "Bleed down",reposition,or block the energy when preparing to lockout equipment or machinery that may have stored energy such as vehicle lifts,hydraulic systems,and air,gas,steam,or water pressure. • Conduct a lockout assurance test.Ensure there is no one near the equipment;attempt to start the equipment to ensure it is not operational.Remember to turn the switch or button to the"off"position after the test and before performing service or mainte- nance. Lockout/Tagout Device Removal (Authorized Personnel Only) To re-energize equipment after service and/or maintenanceis completed,do the following: • Before the lockout device is removed,make sure the work area is clear of tools and other items used during the repair and that all equipment components are operationally intact. • Make sure individuals maintain a safe distance from equipment that is to be re-energized. • The lockout/tagout device shall be removed by the individual who applied it. • Notify affected individuals that the lockout device has been removed. Group Lockout/Tagout Procedures(Authorized Personnel Only) When service and/or maintenanceare performed by several individuals or other groups,proper'lockout procedures must be coordinated to maintain continuity of the lockout procedure. • Each individual working on the equipment needs to have his/her own lock. • Use a hasp if the energy isolation device cannot handle multiple locks. • The primary responsibility is assigned to an authorized individual who maintains control of the lockout process,so their lock is the last to be removed.This individual must be aware of the work activities and exposure of each group member. When there is a change in work shifts,do the following: • Incoming individuals must place a lockout device on the equipment. • Incoming individuals receive a status report on the repair or maintenance progress of the equipment prior to the removal of the outgoing Individual's lockout device. • Utilize the hasp for multiple locks in the event several individuals are working on the same equipment. Group Lockout/Tagout Removal (Authorized Personnel Only) There maybe occasions when the individual who applied a lockout or tagout device is not present to remove it.If this occurs,have a salaried member of management follow this procedure: • Verify that the individual who applied the lock(s)is not in the facility. • Verify that no work is being performed on the equipment and that removal is safe before removing the lock or tag. • Contact the individual whose lock(s)/tag(s)was removed before he/she returns to work to ensure the individual is aware that the lock/tag was removed before the individual starts his/her shift. Lockout/Tagout Kit The following items are located in the lockout/tagout kit: • Do Not Operate tags and cable ties • Circuit Breaker Lockout device(For Auto Care Center/TBC only E-fixtures order number 100552727) Periodic Inspections • On an annual basis a salaried member of management who is also an authorized associate will observe each authorized associate perform the lockout/tagout procedures for the Auto Care Center/TBC Air Compressor at their facility. • These inspections are performed to ensure that authorized associates are performing the lockout/tagout procedures properly. The salaried member of management shall certify that the annual periodic inspections have been performed.The certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was utilized,the date of the inspection,the employees included in the inspection,and the name of the member of management that completed the.inspection. Only properly trained and authorized associates may perform lockout/tagout. Last Modified:January 13,2014 ATTACHMENT 1 REMOVAL AND RECLAMATION OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE(VCT) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Attachment Includes: 1. Except as otherwise specified herein,procedures for removal of existing vinyl composition tile(VCT)and prep- aration for shipment to reclamation firm by Owner's Preferred Flooring Contractor are included as information only to General Contractor,unless General Contractor is performing the flooring installation.Work includes the following: a. Selective removal of existing VCT which is determined acceptable for reclamation. b. Containerizing of acceptable VCT for transport to reclamation firm. c. Loading of acceptable VCT for transport to reclamation firm shall be by Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Reclamation Firm: The entity performing VCT recycling under separate contract with Walmart. 1. Linron Company,Houston,TX(713)802-9137. B. Tile Reclamation Bag: Vinyl bag supplied by Reclamation Firm for containing removed tile. C. Preferred Flooring Contractor: Owner's preselected contractor responsible for removal of existing resilient flooring. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate removal work with General Contractor,Store Manager,Walmart Construction Manager and Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Only full truckloads of VCT shall be loaded and shipped.Quantities considered to be less than full truckloads shall not be reclaimed with respect to this program but shall be disposed of by the General Contractor in accordance with the Compliance Specifications. B. Full truckload is defined by the reclamation firm for number of VCT containers. Coordinate with the Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager. 1.5 NON-COMPLIANCE A. Contaminating containers with foreign materials or unacceptable VCT may subject the Contractor to reimbursement of landfill costs or labor costs for resorting. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE VCT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise modified by the reclamation program guidelines, products acceptable for reclamation include all brands of vinyl composition materials.Material being reclaimed shall be dry and free from debris. Store off of grade, protected from weather.Wet material will not be accepted by Reclamation Firm. 1. VCT(field tile). 2. Non-Skid VCT. a. Non-Skid tile must be in separate reclamation bag. 3. Tan or Dark colored tile. a. Tan or Dark colored tile must be in separate reclamation bag. 4. Lined adhesive buckets a. Adhesive buckets cannot contain any residual adhesive. Buckets must be stacked on pallets and shipped with the last VCT recycle load. 2.2 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS: A. Unless otherwise modified by the reclamation program guidelines,products not acceptable for reclamation include: 1. Tile or adhesive containing asbestos. 2. Red colored tile. 3. PVC plank(wood look)tile. 4. Bulk removed tile containing foreign material or debris will not be acceptable. B. General Contractor shall dispose of unacceptable VCT in accordance with the waste disposal requirements hereinbefore. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Recycling is mandatory for VCT which is acceptable under the terms of Reclamation Firm. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Survey and assess the quantity of acceptable VCT to be removed. 3.3 COORDINATION AND APPROVAL A. Coordinate the precise details and execution of the reclamation program with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. B. Verify that the old VCT tiles can be recycled. 3.4 VCT REMOVAL A. Sweep all debris from VCT surfaces. Remove excessive buildup of wax and other debris. B. Remove VCT to be reclaimed. Tile may be removed using normal removal methods. Tile may not be removed prior to receipt and preparation of reclamation bags for pickup by Reclamation Firm. 3.5 LOADING AND SHIPPING A. Wal-Mart's reclamation firm will provide tile reclamation bags suitable for placement on pallets. Contact Reclamation Firm for provision of bags. B. Prepare VCT for shipment in accordance with the reclamation program guidelines and instructions.Preparation shall be in strict accordance with the guidelines provided and shall take precedence over any conflicting provisions stated herein. Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager for coordination of preparation and to obtain specific loading and shipping instruction prior to removal of VCT. C. Fill tile reclamation bags with VCT that is acceptable for reclamation to the maximum fill line indicated. D. Place properly prepared tile reclamation bags on pallets and store in a dry location as directed by General Contractor. E. Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager for arrangement of carrier for shipping. Prepare a packing list printed and affixed to each container. Each carrier shall carry a Bill of Lading with each shipment. F. The Walmart Store Planning Field Project Manager shall Load and secure pallets onto trailers to prevent shifting in transit. END OF ATTACHMENT 1 ATTACHMENT 2 REMOVAL AND RECYCLING OF ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE(ACT) PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Attachment Includes: Procedures for removal and recycling of existing acoustical ceiling tile(ACT) including the following: 1. Submission of application for recycling of ACT to Recycling Firm for project registration, approval and acceptance of removed ACT. 2. Selective removal of existing acoustical ceiling tile(ACT)which is determined acceptable for reclamation. 3. Palletizing,labeling,and loading ACT for transport to Recycling Firm. 4. Shipment of ACT at Recycling Firm expense. B. Related Specifications Requirements: . Section 01100-Summary: Restrictions for Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 2. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. 3. Section 01731-Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 6. Section 02023 -Selective Site Demolition. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Recycling Firm: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Armstrong Recycling Center, (877) 276-7876, kdmullen(armstrong.com. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate removal work with work of Specification Section 02023. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE ACT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise modified by Recycling Firm Guidelines,products acceptable for recycling include: 1. All brands of dry,pulpable mineral fiber ceiling panels or tiles. 2. All brands of dry fiberglass panels. Facing must be easily removable. 3. Vinyl or scrim-faced mineral fiber panels. 4. See Recycling Firm Guidelines for list of unacceptable materials and materials acceptable for recycling on a case-by-case basis. B. Condition of Acceptable Materials: 1. Remove metal splines from tiles. 2. Store recyclable materials off of grade and protected from weather. 3. Ceiling material being recycled shall be dry and free of debris. 4. Package recyclable materials in accordance with the requirements of Recycling Firm. 5. Ceiling material being recycled may not come into contact with asbestos containing material,hazardous waste materials or special waste. If the area where ceilings are being removed is or has gone through abatement procedures,verification that ceilings did not come in contact with asbestos containing material is required. C. Dispose of unacceptable ACT in accordance with the waste removal requirements hereinbefore. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Recycling of ACT is provided under the Recycling Firm Guidelines (http//www.armstrong.com/commceilingsnalarticle45691.html) and includes the acceptance, including shipment, of removed ACT at no cost to Contractor as long as Recycling Firm requirements are met. B. Materials proposed for recycling are subject to on-site inspection by Recycling Firm. C. Recycling by Contractor is mandatory for ACT which is approved and accepted under the terms of Recycling Firm. 3.2 EXAMINATION A, Survey and assess the quantity of acceptable ACT to be removed. 3.3 COORDINATION AND APPROVAL A, Register Project with Recycling Firm by calling (877) 276-7876, option I then 8. Coordinate the precise details and execution of recycling program with Recycling Firm. B. Verify that ACT to be removed is acceptable to Recycling Firm. C. Submit Asbestos Survey provided by Owner, year of building construction and details of any prior or current asbestos abatement to Recycling Firm via email address above. Submit one additional copy each to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Architect in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01330. D. Upon approval you will receive a US Recycling Agreement which is to be tilled out and returned. E. Receive return authorization and return labels from Recycling Firm. F. Schedule material pickup by submitting a Recycling Logistics Form to Recycling Firm via email address above at least five days prior to desired pickup date. Submit one additional copy each to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Architect in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 and upload to Wal-Mart's designated web- based reporting system. G. If materials are not accepted by Recycling Firm, submit statement indicating reason for non-acceptance to Wal- Mart via Wal-Mart's designated web-based reporting system. 3.4 ACT REMOVAL A. Remove acoustical ceiling tiles to be recycled from grid. B. Where removal terminates at a "surface" or construction "to remain," completely remove all traces of material se lectively removed. Provide smooth, even substrate transition as specified in Specification Section 01731. 3.5 LOADING AND SHIPPING A. Prepare recyclable materials for shipment in accordance with Recycling Firm Guidelines and instructions. Preparation shall be in accordance with Guidelines provided and shall take precedence over any conflicting provisions stated herein.Contact Recycling Firm for coordination of preparation and to obtain specific loading and shipping instruction prior to removal of ACT. B. Load and ship full truckloads of recyclable materials whenever possible. A full truckload is defined as not less than 30,000 sq. ft. C. Full truckloads of material will be picked up at Site. If there is less than a full truckload, contact Recycling Firm for instructions. D. Include only material generated from the Site of this Project in shipment of ACT materials. E. Palletize acoustical ceiling tile that is acceptable for recycling. Provide palletizing materials and supplies including pallets,metal bands,and stretch wrap. F. Stack ceiling panels on 4 by 4 wooden pallets and secure with metal bands or stretch wrap. Any variation from pallet size shall be approved by Recycling Firm.Palletize in one or combination of the following methods: I. Palletize on 4 ft by 4 ft pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 4 feet tall each pallet. 2. Palletize on 4 ft by 4 ft pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 6 feet tall each pallet. G. Load and secure pallets onto trailers to prevent shifting in transit. Carriers will provide load stabilizers. H. Load pallets as follows: I. Forty-four 4 x 4 pallets stacked with ceiling material to 4 feet tall each and stacked on top of each other in trailer. 2. Twenty-four 4 by 4 pallets with ceiling material stacked to 6 tall each pallet. 3. A combination of 4 ft tall and 6ft.tall stacked pallets to achieve equivalent quantity of above loading. 3.6 NONCOMPLIANCE A. Costs for transportation and disposal of non-compliant materials shipped by the Contractor to Recycling Firm may be deducted from payments due Contractor. END OF ATTACHMENT 2 Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Agreement (USA) page 1 of 3 Between Armstrong World Industries,Inc.,a Pennsylvania Corporation,with an address of 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster,PA 17603 (hereinafter referred to as"Armstrong") and Building Owner or General Contractor or Demolition Contractor, —————— — a Corporation with an address of (hereinafter referred to as"Recycler"). WHEREAS,Armstrong operates a recycling program whereby building owners,distributors and contractors supply old ceiling material to Armstrong for recycling subject to certain conditions; WHEREAS,Armstrong wishes to allow Recycler to collect ceiling materials approved by Armstrong and as specified below for shipment to Armstrong's plant or an Armstrong Consolidator for recycling; WHEREAS. Armstrong and Recycler desire to enter into this Agreement for recycling in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth below. NOW THEREFORE,for good and valuable consideration,the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, and intending to be legally bound hereby,the parties agree as follows: 1. Recycling Terms.All ceiing material Recycler submits to Armstrong must meet the criteria as outlined in Armstrong's Ceiling Recycling Requirements (hereinafter referred to as"Requirements") attached hereto as Exhibit A as well as the conditions set forth in this Agreement.Recycler also shall submit to the Armstrong Recycling Center an asbestos survey(as required by law)from the jobsite where the old ceiling tile is to be removed. Armstrong shall review the asbestos survey and have the sole discretion of whether to approve the material. Once the jobsite and material have been approved by Armstrong.Armstrong will accept the ceiling tile for recycling ("Approved Ceiling Material"),and issue Return Authorization labels to Recycler.Recycler must affix a Return Authoreation label on each pallet Recycler sends to Armstrong. Armstrong may.at any time.revoke its approval of the material if additional information is learned that would disqualify the material. 2. Warranty and Indemnity. Recycler warrants that all material sent to Armstrong is Approved Ceiling Material that shall be dry and free of other debris or contaminants Recycler warrants Approved Ceiling Material does not contain nor has been contaminated with or exposed to any material constituting hazardous material or special waste,including asbestos, regardless of the amount of contamination.Recycler represents and warrants that the asbestos survey provided to Armstrong is for the jobsite from where the ceiling tile Recycler wishes to recycle has been removed.Recycler further warrants that each pallet that it sends to Armstrong will be properly labeled with a Return Authorization label and that each pallet is the material and from the jobsite that matches the Return Authorization label. Recycler warrants that it shall not apply a Return Authorization label to any material that has not been approved by Armstrong. Recycler agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Armstrong for all costs, damages and/or expense incurred by Armstrong as a result of any breach of this warranty.Any breach of this warranty shall be considered a Nonconformance. Confidentia1101 Armst•ong Cclbng lecychng P10yarn strong' 510 Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Agreement (USA) 3. Packing and Shipping.Approved Ceiling Materials must be packaged in accordance with the Requirements allowing both secure shpment by trailer and safe inspection and unloading by Armstrong employees.Armstrong will pay for the shipping costs of full trailer loads of Approved Ceiling Materials that are packaged and loaded per Armstrong's Requirements.It is Recycler's responsibility to ensure that only full trailer loads of Approved Ceiling Materials are shipped unless otherwise agreed upon by Armstrong.Where the amount of Approved Ceiling Materials from a site are insufficient for a full trailer load, Recycler may elect to consolidate with a local Armstrong Network Distributor or Consolidator until a full trailer load is ready for shipment. If local consolidation is not an option for less than full truckload quantities, Recycler stl all contact Armstrong for the Less Than Full Truckload Procedure.To intiate transport of the Approved Ceiling Material to Armstrong,Recycler shall provide to Armstrong a Recycling Logistics Form as attached hereto as Exhibit B before transportation is arranged. 4. Acceptance, Nonconformance and Reimbursement.Armstrong may refuse to accept nonconformhg shipments of Ap- proved Ceiling Materials if any shipment is.upon arrival at an Armstrong plant,either not bearing Return Authorization labels on each pallet;not packaged according to Armstrong specifications;any ceiling material that does not meet the attached Requirements;or are otherwise reasonably unacceptable to Armstrong ("Nonconformances"),In the event of any Nonconformances,Armstrong will immediately notify Recycler. In event Armstrong refuses a shipment..Armstrong, at its discretion,will have the option to either dispose of the materials or ship those materials back to Recycler without having accepted them.The Recycler shall promptly reimburse Armstrong for all costs,expenses or damages in connec- tion with such disposal,Nonconformance orretum shipment. 5. Title to Goods.Armstrong shall not take title to the Approved Ceilng Materials until they are received and accepted at Armstrong's Plant(destination),despite Armstrong's payment of the freight costs for full trailer loads.The common carrier that Armstrong has selected for transport is responsible for the transport of the Approved Ceiling Materials from the pick up location to Armstrong's plant.This carrier is an independent contractor utilized by Armstrong and required to demonstrate general liability insurance coverage which meets or exceeds industry standards. 6. Entire Agreement.The terms and conditions of this agreement together with the attached exhibits represent the entire agreement between Recycler and Armstrong with respect to its subject matter and supersedes all prior written and oral agreements and can be modified only in writing signed by both parties. 7. Governing Laws. This agreement will be interpreted under the laws of the Commonweath of Pennsylvania.The terms of this Agreement will be binding upon the Recycler and shall inure to the benefit of the successors and the assigns of the Recycler and Armstrong. 8. Assignment. Recycler may not assign or otherwise transfer this Agreement without the prior written consent of Armstrong,which consent shall be solely within the discretion of Armstrong.Armstrong may assign any or all of its rights and obligations hereunder without the prior approval of Recycler.This Agreement shall be binding on successors and valid assigns. @Thstrong Conl Idcnllal for ArmstlOng Ceiling nucycling Pro- gram Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Agreement (USA) page 3 of 3 9. Waiver and Severability. No waiver by either party of any breach of a term contained in this Agreement shall be deemed to be a continuing waiver or a waiver of a breach of any other term of this Agreement.If any provision of this Agreement should be held invalid or unenforceable,under any applicable laws or regulations,all of the other provisions of this Agreement shall remain valid and enforceable. 10. Comply with Laws.Recycler shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations and shall be responsible for obtaining all appropriate governmental permits,licenses and approvals. 1 1. Independent Contractor.Recycler shall perform its obligations under this Agreement as an independent contracttor and nothing contained in the Agreement shall constitute Armstrong and Recycler as partners,joint venturers,employee and employer or principal and agent.Neither party has the right or the authority to create any oblgations on behalf of the other. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the last date written below. Recycler(Building Owner,General Contractor or Demolition Contractor): By: (signature) Name Title: Company: Address: Phone No.: Date: Armstrong World Industries Inc.—Armstrong Building Products: By: (Armstrong) Title: Date: Confidential for Armstrong Cet1lrog Ilocychrg Program mstrong. 5 I 0 RECYCLING LOGISTICS FORM This document is to be provided on all jobs.This form,a properly signed Recycling Agreement and a negative asbestos survey report for each jobsite must be provided and approved by Armstrong before Armstrong ar- ranges a pick up.Return required documents to Armstrong Recycling Center at Fax#800 572 8324 or 888 396 0877 in the Customer Focus Center. Contact our Recycling Center directly at 1-877 276 7876 ,press Options 1 &8. JobName/RA# _ Quantity of Material to Recycle: SF of material to recycle: _ _ sf or #of pallets MaterialType:Mineral Fiber: Fiberglass: Cast: B. Address for Pickup: Building Name: ---- — — — -- -- - --- Street: -- City: State.Zip:--- --- -- Jobsite Contact Name:----——— — Jobsite Contact Phone Number: ---- Jobsite Contact Fax Number:---C. Pick Up Date: Estimated date needed for pickup (list all dates if more than one trailer load) Please allow a minimum of five (5)days for a shipment to be scheduled. Load#1 ; -- Load#2 D. Special loading Riquirements?Loading Dock height or size,parking, city/state requirements, other trade traffic that needs to be factored into this pickup? E Job Details: List each project/owner for each'job that is part of this shipment. If material from several jobsites is con- solidated in one truckload,an Armstrong-approved Asbestos Survey must be on file with Armstrong for each jobsite. List each site separately. #1 -Building Owner or Tenant: — GeneralContractor: --- ---- Demolition Contractor: Project Location(Address): — ——— ——— —— ——— ——— ——Is this a LEED project? Yes No Is a Recycling Certificate requested? Yes No Note:For additional projects on single truckload list job information on second sheet. ATTACHMENT 3 REMOVAL AND RECYCLING OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)PLANK FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Attachment Includes: 1. Except as otherwise specified,procedures for removal and recycling of existing polyvinyl chloride (PVC)plank flooring and preparation for shipment to recycling firm by Owner's Preferred Flooring Contractor are included as information only to General Contractor. Work includes the following: a. Selective removal of existing polyvinyl chloride(PVC)plank flooring and determination of acceptance for recycling. b. Containerizing of acceptable PVC plank flooring for transport to Recycling Firm. 1) Loading of PVC plank flooring for transport to reclamation firm shall be by Wal- Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager. c. Shipment of PVC at Recycling Firm expense. B. Related Specification Requirements: 1. Section 01100-Summary: Restrictions for Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 2. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. 3. Section 01731 -Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 4. Section 02023 -Selective Site Demolition. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Recycling Firm: The Matworks Company,LLC,Beltsville,MD,(301)837-1202. B. Preferred Flooring Contractor: Owner's preselected contractor responsible for removal of existing resilient flooring. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate removal work with General Contractor, Store Manager, Walmart Construction Manager, and Walmart Store Planning Field Project Manager.. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise modified by Recycling Firm Guidelines, products acceptable for recycling include all brands of PVC plank flooring. B. Condition of Acceptable Materials: 1. Store recyclable materials off of grade and protected from weather. 2. Material being recycled shall be dry and free of debris. Wet material will not be accepted by Recy- cling Firm. 3. Package recyclable materials in accordance with the requirements of Recycling Firm. 4. Material being recycled may not come into contact with asbestos containing material, hazardous waste materials or special waste. C. Unless otherwise modified by Recycling Firm Guidelines,products not acceptable for recycling include: 1. Flooring or adhesive containing asbestos. 2. Vinyl Composition Tile(VCT). 3. Solid Vinyl Plank(SVP)flooring. 4. PVC(Tac-Fast)with cloth backing. 5. Slip resistant tile. 6. Tan colored tile. 7. Red colored tile. 8. Bulk removed flooring containing foreign material or debris. D. General Contractor shall dispose of unacceptable materials in accordance with the waste disposal require- ments hereinbefore. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Recycling is mandatory for PVC plank flooring which is acceptable under the terms of Recycling Firm. B. Include only material generated from the Site of this Project in shipment of PVC plank flooring materials. C. PVC plank flooring not recycled under program shall be disposed of by General Contractor in accordance with the waste disposal requirements hereinbefore. D. Use only containers(Gaylord boxes)furnished with shipment of new PVC plank flooring for containment of removed PVC plank flooring. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that PVC plank flooring to be removed complies with the requirements specified herein and is ac- ceptable for recycling. B. Survey and assess the quantity of acceptable PVC plank flooring to be removed. 3.3 PREPARATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING PVC PLANK FLOORING A. Coordinate precise details and execution of recycling program with Recycling Firm. B. Coordinate removal of PVC plank flooring with relocation of existing merchandise fixtures by Wal-Mart. C. Place Gaylord on pallet. 1. Plastic pallets and blue CHEP pallets are not allowed. D. After relocation of existing merchandise fixtures by Wal-Mart, sweep all debris from PVC plank flooring surfaces. Remove excessive buildup of wax and other debris. E. Remove PVC plank flooring to be recycled. Flooring may be removed using normal removal methods. Flooring may not be removed prior to receipt and preparation of Gaylord boxes for pickup by Reclamation Firm. 3.4 LOADING AND SHIPPING A. Contact Recycling Firm for provision of additional Gaylord boxes,if required. B. Prepare PVC plank flooring for shipment in accordance with Recycling Firm guidelines and instructions. Preparation shall be in strict accordance with the guidelines provided and shall take precedence over any conflicting provisions stated herein.Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager for coordina- tion of preparation and to obtain specific loading instruction prior to removal of PVC plank flooring. C. Containerize PVC plank flooring that is acceptable for recycling. Gaylord must be filled to top. D. Shrink wrap filled Gaylord. Prior to shrink wrapping,obtain approval of Walmart Construction Manager or Wal-Mart Field Project Manager to ensure material for recycling contains no trash,foreign debris,dis- allowed materials or other contaminants. E. Store prepared Gaylords in dry location as directed by General Contractor. 1. Do not store outdoors. 2. Do not store inside Wal-Mart building. F. Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager for arrangement of carrier for shipping. Prepare a packing list printed and affixed to each container. Each carrier shall carry a Bill of Lading with each shipment. G. Notify Wal-Mart Store Planning Field Project Manager when ready for shipping. 3.5 NON-COMPLIANCE A. Failure to comply with Recycling Firm Guidelines or the requirements specified herein may result in addi- tional costs to Contractor without increase in Contract time. B. Costs for transportation and disposal of non-compliant materials shipped to the Recycling Firm may be deducted from payments due Contractor. END OF ATTACHMENT 3 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN Complete the information on this form for construction and demolition(C&D)materials that will be reused,recy- cled,or disposed from the project in accordance with the Compliance Specification section 3.6.2.10.2.(Type into form—do not hand write) Project Name: Location: Type of Project: ❑New Construction ❑ Relocation ❑ Site Clearing Only ❑On Site Relocation ❑ Expansion ❑Other ❑Remodel ❑ Demolition Only Was there difficulty finding Salvage or Re-Use vendors? ❑Yes❑No If yes,explain manner of difficulty: If the estimated amount of reused or recycled materials is less than 50%of total estimated amount of material dis- posed,explain why: C&D ESTIMATED WASTE GENERATED(TONS) Complete and submit no later than 24 hours after Bid Tim. Estimated Estimated Tons Vendor or Facility Used(Destination) Material Type Tons of Re- of Disposed/ (Bus name,city,state,contact name,phone no.) used/Recy- Landfilled cled Acoustical Ceiling Tiles Asphalt&Concrete Bricks/Masonry/Tiles Building Materials(doors,windows, fixtures,etc.) Cardboard Carpet/Carpet Padding/Foam Concrete Slurry Construction/Demolition Film Plastic&Styrofoam Blocks Gypsum Wallboard Metal Mixed C&D Waste&Misc Const Debris Plant&Tree Trimmings PVC Plank Flooring Trash/Garbage VCT Floor Tile Wire.and Cable Wood Other(Describe) Other(Describe) TOTAL Estimated percent of waste diverted from landfill UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01432(01 4323)—ELECTRICAL INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provisions for electrical installer qualifications formerly included in this section are now included in Section 01351 —Compliance(Par 3.6.4 of the Supplement) B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01432-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01452(04 4517)-CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 13. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.Contractor obligations to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. Section 01770-Contract Closeout:Project Record Documents. 3. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner: a. Owner procurement of test and balance for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. (Formerly included in Section 01455) b. Quality Requirements of Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL) and services. (Formerly included in Section 01458) c. Architect-Engineer Site Observation: Site observation by Owner's Architect and Engineer Consultants.(Formerly included in Section 01454) C. Contractor testing and inspection are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. 1. Contractor testing and inspection includes testing or inspection to be performed by and under the responsibility of the General Contractor as well as that required by the manufacturer, manufacturer's representative,product supplier,or other party under the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Requirements in this section are independent of testing and inspection specified for the Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL)specified in Appendix B(Section 01458). 3. Specific quality assurance and control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 4. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and control services required by Architect,Owner's CTL,Owner's Construction Manager,or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Testing: Evaluation of systems,primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials,in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection:Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and engineering judgment. C. Quality Assurance: Activities,actions,and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will substantially comply with construction documents. D. Quality Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction substantially comply with construction documents. E. Mockups: Full-size,physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify or demonstrate aesthetic effects and,where indicated,qualities of materials and execution,and to review construction,coordination, testing, or operation;they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. F. Architect of Record(AOR):The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. 01452-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 G. Engineer of Record(EOR):The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. H. Structural Engineer of Record(SER):The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for the project. I. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the project. J. Architect-Engineer(A/E): A collective term to include the AOR,CEC,SER,and the Mechanical,Electrical,and Fire Protection EOR. K. Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL):The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner. L. Independent Test and Balance Agent(ITBA): The independent HVAC testing and balancing agency employed by the Owner. M. Special Inspector(SI): The Special Inspector under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer (unless otherwise specified)regularly engaged in inspection,and experienced with the type of work requiring related testing and inspection.The categories of special inspector are specified in Appendix B(Section 01458): N. Building Official:The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and enforcement of the local building code. O. Deviation: A deviation is any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements of the construction documents and which has not been corrected by the end of business on the day it is identified. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different,but apparently equal,to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test and Inspection Reports: 1. Site Work Testing and Inspection: After each inspection or test, distribute report within 3 working days of time services were performed as follows: a. Site Work Civil Engineering Consultant(CEC): 1 copy. b. Building Official:Quantities as required. 2. Building Testing and Inspection: After each inspection or test, distribute report within 3 working days of time services were performed as follows: a. Structural Engineer of Record(SER): 1 copy(Construction Administration Leader) b. Building Official:Quantities as required. c. Architect of Record:2 copies(Construction Administration Leader). 3. Report of non-conforming work. 1.5 REPORTS A. Submit reports as required herein and conduct and interpret tests and inspections. B. Testing and Inspection Report: Submit test and inspection reports including the following information: 01452-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Store number. 4. Firm name and address. 5. Name and signature of tester or inspector. 6. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge(as applicable). 7. Date and time of sampling. 8. Date of test or inspection. 9. Identification of product and specification section. 10. Location in project,including elevations,grid location and detail. 11. Type of test or inspections. 12. Results of tests or inspections and interpretation of same. 13. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom. C. Submit a separate final signed report stating whether the work requiring inspection is,to the best of the inspector's knowledge,in conformance with the approved plans,specifications,and the applicable workmanship provisions of the building code. D. Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and binding in booklet form. Sheets shall have the Contractor's letterhead(including phone number and,address).Larger sheets shall be folded and bound into the booklet. E. Tests and inspections reports indicating non-conformance(deviations)to the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the A/E within 24 hours upon discovery. F. Contractor shall send an RFI to the A/E on the same day of non-conformance(deviation)notification. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Owner will perform testing and inspection(T&I)but only as a means of verification to the Owner of Contractor quality control performance. Owner T&I shall not be considered Quality Control or Quality Assurance as defined herein. Owner T & I and Contractor obligations with respect to Quality Control shall be pursuant to related provisions of Articles 2.3.3,2.3.4,2.4.1,2.5.2,2.6.2,and 3.2.2 of the Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. C. T&I by the Owner will be conducted by the Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Appendix B(Section 01458)except that costs for failing tests will be deducted from the sum due to the Contractor. D. Owner T&I results and reports will be available as information to Contractor. E. Owner's T&I shall not be relied on by the Contractor as an indication of conformance or nonconformance of work nor shall the Contractor be dependent on the Owner's CTL test results for verification of satisfactory work in place. 01452-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 F. Work found by the Owner's CTL to be defective or in non-compliance with Contract Documents shall be corrected based on the CTL T&I results except when proven otherwise by subsequent CTL or Contractor conducted tests. G. In-place work will be subject to testing and inspection by the Owner's CTL at any time during the progress of the work. H. Test reports conducted by and at the discretion of the Contractor shall be provided to the Owner upon request when reason exists to suspect non-compliance or when used for comparison to CTL conducted tests. I. Any testing agency,if employed by the Contractor for purposes of Contractor Quality Control,shall not be the same entity engaged by the Owner. J. Contractor shall pay for: 1. Tests and inspections at the source or prior to incorporation into the Work of materials, products, or equipment to certify compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Tests,samples,inspection,or engineering services the Contractor determines appropriate for performance of Work or for Contractor's convenience. 3. Tests and inspections when initial tests or inspections indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. 4. Tests and inspections required or conducted by public authorities as part of permits or inspection fees. 5. Other tests and inspections indicated to be"by Contractor." K. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,to facilitate tests and inspections,and to provide storage and curing of test samples.Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owner's representatives. L. Provide 14 days written notice to A/E prior to expected time for operations requiring observation, inspecting, and testing. If work to be observed is covered prior to notification,uncover work as required. M. Notify in writing the Owner's Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. N. Repair and protect the work regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection,testing,or similar services. 1. Protect work exposed by or for testing and inspection. 2. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services, restore constructed areas to conform to Contract Documents. O. Costs, including without limitation additional professional fees and expenses, of any required redesign or re- engineering required by non-conforming tests and inspections will be deducted from the sum due the Contractor. P. Provide a Letter of Conformance at the completion of the Project to the Owner's Construction Manager,with copy to the AOR, stipulating that the Project has been built per the Contract Documents. An example is attached at the end of this section. Q. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. Use the Contract Documents supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for testing and inspection of the work. R. Provide qualified personnel at site to.comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as defined in Part 3 of this Section. S. Perform specified inspection,sampling,and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. T. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. U. Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. 01452-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 V. Notify Owner's Construction Manager and CEC or AOR,as applicable of observed non-conformance of Work or Products.If observed deviations from the Contract Drawings,Specifications,or building code will be probable cause of subsequent rejection of work or material,notify the Owner's Construction Manager and,CEC or AOR sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations or take corrective measures before continuing. W. Deviations from the Contract Documents will be entered into the on-line Owner Observation Log by other parties performing quality control construction observation. The Contractor shall track deviations, as defined above, and resolutions and remedial repairs to deviations and subsequent conformance to the Contract Documents on the Observation Log.(www.bldgportal.com,enter username and password,select Observation Log. Follow instructions on the Observation Log website.) X. The,Owner's Construction Manager in conjunction with the CTL and/or SI will determine when to involve the AOR or EOR for remedial action. Y. If additional A/E site or FPT visits are required beyond those described in Section 01454 as determined by Owner to determine correction to non-conforming work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner the sum of time and travel expenses per the approved consultant estimate for each additional visit to cover A/E expenses. Additional A/E site observations or FPTs will be performed as required until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and closed by the A/E consultant. Z. If ITBA retesting visits are required as described in Appendix B (Section 01455) as determined by Owner to determine correction to non-conforming work,the Contractor shall pay to ITBA the sum of$6500 for each retesting visit to cover ITBA expenses. ITBA retesting visits will be performed as required until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and closed by the ITBA and/or A/E consultant. AA. Cooperate with CTL/SI personnel,and provide access to the Work and to Contractor's facilities. BB. Submit test and inspection reports to the A/E consultant and other designated persons as specified in individual sections. Submit test and inspection reports to the Building Official as required. CC. Testing and inspection by the Building Official does not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by the A/E consultant,nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. DD. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated,engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures." 3.2 PRODUCTION TESTING A. General Requirements: 1. Testing shall be conducted as specified in the individual specification sections. However, Contractor's responsibility for quality control shall not be limited to the specified specific requirements 2. If inspection of fabricators work is required,the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant,before shipment.Owner,Architect,and Structural Engineer of Record(SER)reserve the right to reject material not complying with the Contract Documents. 3. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the industry standard used as the reference for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified.In the absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 4. Work shall be checked as it progresses. END OF SECTION 01452-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 [Example Conformance Letter from Contractor. Text in parentheses are to be edited for each individual project] [Date] [Mr. Construction Manager] Owner Construction Manager Sam M.Walton Development Complex 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville;Arkansas 72716 [Re: Supercenter(Store#xxx.)—City. State] [Dear Construction Manager:] The purpose of this letter is to state to the Owner that,to the best of our knowledge,the construction on the above referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents. We performed construction testing,observation,and testing as required by the Contract Document.To our knowledge,no outstanding items exist except as may be otherwise entered and shown on the Owner's Observation Log. Sincerely, [GENERAL CONTRACTOR] [Include signature and date of signature] cc: File [ARCHITECT OF RECORD] [ENGINEER OF RECORD] 01452-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01454(01 4518)-ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SITE OBSERVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site observation of construction by Architect and Engineers of Record including the Architect;Mechanical,Electrical, and Fire Protection Engineers. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions:Inspections,testing,and approvals required by public authorities. 2. Section 01452 — Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 3. Section 07500—Membrane Roofing:Inspection by Owner's Independent Roofing Consultant. 4. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner a. Site observation by Architect-Engineer.(Formerly included in this Section) b. Testing, Adjusting,and Balancing: Owner's procurement of test and balance for heating,ventilating,and air conditioning systems.(Formerly included in Section 01455) c. Construction Laboratory Testing Services: Testing and Inspection by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL)and services.(Formerly included in Section 01458) 1.1 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Employment and payment for services of Architects and Engineers to perform specified site observation of construction will be by Owner. 1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor will: 1. Provide an estimated construction schedule to the AOR at construction start. 2. Cooperate with A/E personnel and provide access to the Work and to Contractor's facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to facilitate observation and testing. Provide lift equipment as required for A/E personnel. 4. Provide A/E 14 days written notice prior to expected time for activities requiring observation. 5. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for use by the A/E. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SITE OBSERVATION A. Site observation by Owner's Architects and Engineers is specified in Appendix B. Not Used. END OF SECTION 01454-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01454(01 4518)-ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SITE OBSERVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site observation of construction by Architect and Engineers of Record including the Architect;Mechanical,Electrical, and Fire Protection Engineers. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions:Inspections,testing,and approvals required by public authorities. 2. Section 01452 — Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 3. Section 07500—Membrane Roofing:Inspection by Owner's Independent Roofing Consultant. 4. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner a. Site observation by Architect-Engineer. (Formerly included in this Section) b. Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing: Owner's procurement of test and balance for heating,ventilating,and air conditioning systems.(Formerly included in Section 01455) c. Construction Laboratory Testing Services: Testing and Inspection by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL)and services.(Formerly included in Section 01458) 1.1 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Employment and payment for services of Architects and Engineers to perform specified site observation of construction will be by Owner. 1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor will: 1. Provide an estimated construction schedule to the AOR at construction start. 2. Cooperate with A/E personnel and provide access to the Work and to Contractor's facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to facilitate observation and testing. Provide lift equipment as required for A/E personnel. 4. Provide A/E 14 days written notice prior to expected time for activities requiring observation. 5. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for use by the A/E. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SITE OBSERVATION A. Site observation by Owner's Architects and Engineers is specified in Appendix B. Not Used. END OF SECTION 01454-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01454(01 4518)-ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SITE OBSERVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site observation of construction by Architect and Engineers of Record including the Architect;Mechanical,Electrical, and Fire Protection Engineers. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions:Inspections,testing,and approvals required by public authorities. 2. Section 01452 — Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 3. Section 07500—Membrane Roofing:Inspection by Owner's Independent Roofing Consultant. 4. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner a. Site observation by Architect-Engineer. (Formerly included in this Section) b. Testing, Adjusting,and Balancing: Owner's procurement of test and balance for heating,ventilating, and air conditioning systems.(Formerly included in Section 01455) c. Construction Laboratory Testing Services: Testing and Inspection by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL)and services. (Formerly included in Section 01458) 1.1 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Employment and payment for services of Architects and Engineers to perform specified site observation of construction will be by Owner. 1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor will: 1. Provide an estimated construction schedule to the AOR at construction start. 2. Cooperate with A/E personnel and provide access to the Work and to Contractor's facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to facilitate observation and testing. Provide lift equipment as required for A/E personnel. 4. Provide A/E 14 days written notice prior to expected time for activities requiring observation. 5. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for use by the A/E. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SITE OBSERVATION A. Site observation by Owner's Architects and Engineers is specified in Appendix B. Not Used. END OF SECTION 01454-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01455(01 4523)-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for test and balance services for mechanical equipment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15700-Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning Equipment: HVAC system equipment. 2. Section 15800-Air Distribution: HVAC system ductwork and diffusers. 3. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner: Quality Requirements of Owner's Testing and Balancing services.(Formerly included in this Section) 1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Employment and payment for services of an Independent Test and Balance Agency(ITBA)to perform specified testing and balancing of environmental systems will be by Owner as specified in Appendix B(Section 01455). 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner Responsibilities: 1. Owner will obtain the services of an Independent Test and Balance Agency (ITBA) certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau(NEBB)or Associated Air Balance Council(AABC). 2. Upon completion of fmal system Test and Balance,a copy of ITBA report,will be uploaded to the Building Portal for the Contractor and Engineer of Record(EOR).If mechanical system deficiencies exist,those defi- ciencies will be listed in the Building Portal Observation Log for the Contractor's correction.If the Contractor fails to respond and correct these deficiencies within seven days,the Owner will authorize repairs as judged necessary and take necessary contractual action to recover adequate compensation for repair expenses. B. Contractor Responsibilities 1. Provide balancing dampers as specified and shown on the Drawings for proper balancing of systems. 2. Prepare system for test and balance as follows: a. Install and adjust mechanical systems and have fully operational with deficiencies corrected two weeks prior to Owner Possession Date. Mechanical systems include roof top units (RTU), water source heat pumps(WSHP),air handling units(AHU),pump package,fluid coolers,chillers,exhaust fans,and associated equipment and piping. b. One day prior to starting test and balance procedure,provide new filters equal in quality to factory installed filters. Filters: Class 1, 30 percent efficiency, radial pleat design with 15 pleats per linear foot. c. Verify that duct work is clean and sealed tight against leaks. d. Verify that controls,dampers,and actuators are installed,adjusted,calibrated,and accessible. e. Prior to starting test and balance,clean and flush piping for condenser water loop per specifications. f. Remove start-up strainers and clean equipment strainers after system flush is complete. g. To maintain schedules and prevent return trips,have experienced personnel available to correct me- chanical system deficiencies while ITBA is on site. h. Secure control dampers after test and balance as directed by ITBA. i. Provide access to equipment and specialties required to carry out the ITBA work including providing the following: 1) Access panels 2) Ladders and lifts. 3) Personnel to assist with access as needed. 01455-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Notify Owner Mechanical Construction Manager and ITBA when mechanical systems are ready for test and balance.If Contractor fails to notify Owner Mechanical Construction Manager of status,ITBA will be sched- uled into store two weeks prior to Possession Date. 1.4 CONTRACTOR AND ITBA COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination and scheduling between the Contractor and ITBA shall be as follows: 1. The Contractor will be contacted by the ITBA approximately six weeks prior to Owner Possession Date. 2. The initial ITBA visit date will be scheduled for one week after OEM final start-up is complete.The ITBA will schedule the initial visit with the Contractor approximately four weeks prior to date of visit. 3. The Contractor shall have the mechanical systems ready for the ITBA visit at least two weeks prior to Owner Possession Date. 4. The ITBA will provide a Project Information Worksheet and a Pm Test and Balance Checklist to be com- pleted and signed by the Contractor prior to the ITBA visit.One week prior to the ITBA visit,the Contractor shall send the ITBA the signed off Pre Test and Balance Checklist. Any exceptions to the list shall be noted and reviewed with the ITBA for possible schedule changes.Worksheet and Checklist forms are included at the end of this section. 5. Upon arrival at the project,the ITBA will meet with the Contractor and the mechanical and electrical sub- contractors to review the project and verify all equipment is installed and operating. 1.5 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. Initial ITBA Visit: 1. Each day the ITBA is on site,noted deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor in a list format for cor- rection. 2. The Contractor will sign the list to acknowledge its receipt. 3. The Contractor will sign off on each listed item as it is corrected and submit the list to the ITBA when all items are corrected. B. Return ITBA Visits: 1. If the items cannot be completed prior to the departure of the ITBA,a return visit will be made to verify the completion of the list and finalize the ITBA work. 2. Should a return trip be necessary,the Contractor will forward the completed,signed off,deficiency list to the ITBA and schedule a return visit. 3. The Contractor will have the sub-contractors present for the return visit. 4. One return visit for deficiencies is included in the ITBA scope of work. Additional visits are considered retesting. 1.6 RETESTING A. Should the ITBA work not be completed due to non-conformance by the Contractor within the initial and return visits, retesting visits shall be made until all deficiencies are corrected. Contractor shall pay ITBA for costs for retesting at a rate specified in Section 01452. ITBA will not schedule retesting visit until payment is received from Contractor. B. Retesting shall follow the procedures for correction of deficiencies described in Appendix B. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01455-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 PRE TEST & BALANCE CHECKLIST This pre test and balance checklist will be provided to the Contractor by the ITBA prior to the initial test and balance visit. Each mechanical subcontractor,as applicable,will verify and initial each item and return the checklist to the General Con- tractor. The General Contractor will fax the checklist to the ITBA to confirm readiness. Yes No Initials Comments All equipment is running(Field Verify) Ductwork is complete Balancing dampers are installed and wide open Grilles,registers,diffusers are installed Power and/or gas to all RTU's Filters are clean Exhaust fans and hood fans are running Grease filters are installed in exhaust hoods HVAC Units—Start up completed by OEM Exhaust/Relief fan—Rotation/Operation confirmed Fluid cooler—Start up completed by OEM Pump package—Start up completed Start-up strainers have been removed from equipment Strainers in condenser water and refg loops have been cleaned Glycol has been added to the condenser and refrigeration loops Glycol fluid temperatures are running at design conditions Glycol freeze point has been verified with refractometer Are the HVACR systems complete,fully functional and ready for testing and balancing? I CERTIFY THAT THE ABOVE ITEMS HAVE BEEN CHECKED AND THAT THE SYSTEMS ARE READY FOR TESTING AND BALANCING Sub-Contractor Company Name Date Sub-Contractor Signature Sub-Contractor Printed Name INDEPENDENT TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY: ITBA Contact Person Phone: Fax: 01455-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 PROJECT INFORMATION WORKSHEET This worksheet will be provided to the Contractor by the ITBA prior to the initial test and balance visit. The Contractor will complete the worksheet and fax to the ITBA prior to initial visit. Store No. Sq.Ft. Store Location: Possession Date: Grand Opening Date: Supercenter❑ Wal-Mart ❑I Market❑ Sam's Club❑ New❑ Expansion U Relocation❑ Takeover❑ Roof Top Unit Manufacturer: Carrier ❑ Aaon ❑ Lennox U Air Handling Unit Manufacturer: Munters U Seasons-4 ❑ GENERAL CONTRACTOR: Address: Project Mgr.: Phone: Email: Fax: Website: CONSTRUCTION SITE SUPERVISOR: Jobsite Phone: Fax: Cell: MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: Phone: Fax: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR: Phone: Fax: OWNER CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: Phone: Fax: OWNER MECHANICAL SERVICES: Phone: Fax: INDEPENDENT TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY: ITBA Contact Person Phone: Fax: 01455-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01457—TESTING AND INSPECTION BY OWNER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner testing and inspection services. B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.Contractor obligations to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. Section 01770-Contract Closeout:Project Record Documents. 3. Section 01452 - Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 4. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner: a. Architect-Engineer Site Observation: Site observation by Owner's Architect and Engineer Consultants.(Formerly included in Section 01454) b. Civil Engineering Consultant Site Observation: Site observation by Owner's Civil Engineering Consultant.(Formerly included in Section 01456) c. Owner's procurement of test and balance for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. (Formerly included in Section 01455) d. Owner furnished Construction Laboratory(CTL)tests and inspections. (Formerly included in Section 01458) 1.2 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Employment and payment for services of an Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL)and/or Special Inspector(SI) to perform specified testing and inspecting will be by the Owner under separate contract in accordance with Appendix B(Section 01457). 1.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with CTL/SI personnel,and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. B. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,to facilitate tests and inspections,and to provide storage and curing of test samples. Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owner's representatives. C. Provide CTL 24 hour notice prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. D. Notify in writing the Owner's Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. E. Provide the CTL/SI with access to the internet for the purpose of logging deviations onto the Wal-Mart Observation Log on the Wal-Mart Building Portal website. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 01457-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 END OF SECTION 01457-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL L1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary Utilities: Electricity,lighting,heat,ventilation,telephone service,water,and sanitary facilities. 2. Temporary Controls: Barriers,enclosures and fencing,signage,protection of the Work,and water control. 3. Construction Facilities: All-weather access roads, parking, progress cleaning, temporary buildings, and staging areas. 1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Owner will pay cost of electricity used. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's and Tenant's need for continuous service.Exercise measures to conserve energy. B. Provide adequate distribution equipment,wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. Provide temporary feeders to limit voltage loss to 5% overall from local utility power lines to provide electric requirements for project during construction. C. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location.Provide necessary transformers, meters,cables,protective devices,switches,etc.,as required. 1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. B. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.4 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes,verify that installation is approved for operation,equipment is lubricated and filters are in place.Provide and pay for operation,maintenance,and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress,unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.5 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity,and to prevent accumulation of dust,fumes, vapors,or gases. 1.6 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide,maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide,maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required for construction operations. 01500-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections.Provide tempo- rary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. C. Connect to existing water source.Owner will pay cost of water used.Exercise measures to conserve water. 1.8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required chemical toilet facilities. B. Locate as directed by Owner's Construction Manager. Maintain facilities clean and serviced as necessary and in compliance with local health code requirements. C. Existing facilities shall not be used. 1.9 BARRIERS A. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic,stored materials,site and structures from damage. B. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's and Tenants' use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. C. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way, to allow for Owner's and Tenants'use of site,and for public access to existing building. 1. Erect barricades using 1/2 inch plywood on 2x4 framing. Supports shall be as required to uphold barricade. Verify requirements with Owner's Construction Manager. 2. Construct 8 feet high unless otherwise directed by Owner. 3. Shopping carts shall not be used as barricades. 1.10 TEMPORARY FENCING FOR CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE CONTAINERS A. General: 1. Provide commercial grade temporary chain link fencing around general non-hazardous waste storage and sorting areas as specified in Section 01351 Supplement Par 3.6.2-ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE. 2. Fencing shall be 8 feet high. 3. Maintain access to fire hydrants and hose connections,emergency vehicles,and other site specific conditions as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4. Obtain permits required by AHJ for usage and placement of temporary chain link fencing. B. Materials: 1. Posts: Galvanized steel pipe. Posts shall be suitable for setting in concrete footings,driving into ground as required by local conditions. 2. Fabric: Woven galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh. Provide in continuous lengths to be wire tied to fence posts. 3. Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size required for functional access to waste container storage area. a. Fabricate of same material as used for fencing. b. Equip with locks. C. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Post and Fabric: Set posts in concrete footings,drive posts in ground,or set in holes and backfill to accom- modate local conditions. Attach fabric to posts. 2. Gates: Install gates with required hardware. 1.11 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCING A. Construction:Commercial grade chain link fence,6 feet high. 01500-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Provide fence around area of expansion and staging area. C. Coordinate installation and relocation with all trades,Owner's Construction Manager,and the Store Manager. D. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.12 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain.Maintain excavations free of water.Provide,operate,and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water.Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. The Contractor shall at all times protect all activities of his construction, excavations, fill areas, embankments, trenches structures or building from damage from rainwater,spring water,ground water,backing up of drains,sew- ers and all other water encountered during his operations. He shall provide all pumps, equipment and enclosures necessary to provide adequate protection. 1.13 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and protec- tion for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections,and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.14 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner or Tenant occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner or Tenant occupied areas,and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 1.15 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Temporary Security Enclosures and Dust Partitions: Construct and maintain temporary partitions to seal openings to Owner or Tenant occupied areas. Install as required and directed by Owner's Construction Manager. Install par- titions prior to demolition of existing walls and maintain in dust tight condition until the completion of all related construction and area is fully secured and accepted by the Owner's Construction Manager. Prohibit dust and debris from entering any Owner or Tenant occupied areas. 1. Dust Drapes: (To be maintained in place less than one week) a. Covering:6 mil.Clear poly sheeting.Overlap sheeting at joints a minimum one foot and continuously tape joints.Attach sheeting from ceiling to finish floor for dustproof condition.If attachment to ceiling is impractical,light framing shall be installed with sheeting attached all around to prohibit dust pene- tration. 2. Type A Partitions: a. Framing: Commercial softwood species or light gauge metal framing. Provide continuous 2x4 top and bottom plates,2x4 studs at 24 in.o.c.,and continuous 2x4 bridging 4'-0"vertically.Continue top plate to bottom side of roof deck. b. Covering: Install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheeting.Tape all joints. Install 4'x 8'sheets horizon- tally from floor to bottom of roof deck. Provide 2x4 blocking behind each joint. Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on other side. 3. Type B Partitions: a. Framing:(same as Type A above) b. Covering: Install continuous 6 mil clear poly sheeting.Tape all joints. Install 1/2 inch plywood over 6 mil poly. Install 4 foot x 8 foot sheets horizontally from floor to bottom of finish ceiling. Extend 6 01500-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 mil poly to bottom of roof deck.Insure that 2x4 blocking is provided behind each joint.Provide sealant at bottom of plywood at finish floor and continuous sealant against plate on opposite side. 4. Doors: a. Provide single acting doors,opening out,with sturdy closer,with gasketed stops on frame to reduce passage of dust. 5. Sealing: a. Seal perimeter of partitions and doors to prevent passage of dust. At Type A and B partitions, tape fastener depressions; joints between panels; and joints between panels and floor, ceiling, and col- umns.Tape shall be 2 inch wide pressure sensitive tape. 6. Mats: a. Provide mats at doors to reduce tracking of dust.Replace or clean daily. 1.16 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Contractor's Office: 1. Size as required for Contractor's use and to provide space for project meetings. 2. Adequate electrical power,lighting,heating,and cooling to maintain human comfort. 3, Office space with desk and chair, layout table, plan rack, and facilities for storage of Project Record Documents. 4, In addition to Contractor office space, provide office space with one additional desk and chair for use by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory personnel. 5. Furnishings in meeting area: a, Conference table and chairs for at least eight persons. b. Racks and files for Project Record Documents in,or adjacent to,the meeting area. c. 'Other furnishings:Contractor's option. 6. Contractor's office and sheds shall not be used as living accommodations. B. Storage Sheds: Structurally sound,weathertight,on proper foundations,with floors raised above ground. C. Locate office and sheds minimum 30 feet from structures. 1.17 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids required to facilitate execution of Work, including stairs, ladders, ramps, staging, plat- forms,railings,cranes,scaffolds,hoists,chutes,runways,and other required facilities and equipment. B. Owner or Tenant employees shall not be allowed access to scaffolds,ladders,and hoists. C. Coordinate crane service required for erection of structural steel, installation of HVAC Rooftop Units, Electrical Distribution Center(when used),and other crane services as required to accommodate Owner's needs. 1.18 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK A. The existing building shall be protected from moisture,dust and debris.Installdust partitions or drapes as shown or as required to keep dust and moisture from the building premises. B. Damage to existing property(including merchandise)which occurs during the process of construction shall be re- paired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall pay costs for damaged incurred. C. Provide suitable temporary watertight coverings over openings as required to protect interior work from inclement weather and related/adjacent construction areas. D. Maintain benchmarks,monuments and other reference point. If disturbed or destroyed,replace as directed. E. Protect existing adjacent streets,sidewalks,curbs,buildings and property,including trees,lawns and plants. 1.19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 01500-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Protect installed Work;provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products.Control activity in immediate work area to min- imize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs,sills,and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors,stairs,and other surfaces from traffic,dirt,wear,damage,or movement of heavy objects,by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Minimize traffic and storage on roofed surfaces. If traffic or storage is necessary,obtain recommendations for pro- tection from roofing material manufacturer. F. Do not operate cranes or other heavy equipment on concrete floor slabs if damage could result from such operations. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.20 SECURITY A. Maintain the integrity of the existing building security and security systems at all times.Provide security and facil- ities to protect Work and Owner's and Tenants'operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism,and theft. B. Obtain permission and coordinate with Owner's and Tenants'security program through Owner's Construction Man- ager at least 12 hours prior to the modification of any existing security system. C. Building Security: Employ a certified and bonded uniformed guard service licensed in the State in which project is located to provide security guard(s)to provide security and facilities to protect Owner's and Tenants'facilities from unauthorized entry,vandalism and theft during performance of all work operations during building non-operational hours. D. Provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior walls and roofs. 1.21 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING A. Construct and maintain temporary all weather roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve building pad and con- struction staging area. B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires.Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants,free of obstructions. D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. E. When site space is not adequate,provide additional off-site parking. F. Provide 100 foot x 100 foot all weather material staging area exclusive of building pad. 1.22 NOISE CONTROL A. Demolition and other Work that disturbs surrounding Store areas shall only be allowed in the following categories and time restrictions: 1. Low Level Noise: Assembling trades such as electricians,ceiling installers,painters,tapers,etc..Excludes all hammering and impact drilling. Low level noise operations are allowed during Owner's or Tenants' operational hours. 2. Moderate Level Noise: Trades include gypsum board installers,stud partition installers,duct installers, etc. Includes occasional and intermittent hammering, screw drilling, etc. Excludes impact drilling and concrete 01500-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 sawing.Moderate level noise operations maybe allowed during Owner's or Tenants'operational hours upon approval of Owner's Construction Manager or Store Manager. 3. High Level Noise: Constant loud and high pitched noise produced by impact drilling,concrete sawcutting, hammering of ductwork,and all demolition work.High level noise operations shall be restricted to Owner's or Tenants'non-operational hours. 1.23 SIGNAGE A. Temporary Construction Signage: Provide temporary signage for identification as required due to obscurity caused by construction.Provide signage for traffic control and safety information.Provide temporary pavement striping for traffic control and pedestrian safety. Provide temporary handicap parking spaces if existing spaces are at a non- accessible location to the building entrance. B. Coming Soon Banner: Provide"Coming Soon Banner"in accordance with the detail and information shown on the drawings. Banners which are to be furnished by the Contractor shall be ordered using the"Coming Soon Sign Order Form"included at the end of this section. 1.24 INFORMATION/SAFETY BOARD A. Provide 4 foot x 8 foot x 3/4 inch C/D exterior glue plywood to be attached on the existing exterior wall at a location designated by the Owner's Construction Manager. B. The board shall contain but not be limited to the following: 1. OSHA Safety Requirements 2. Federal and State Hiring Regulations 3. Owner's Safety Regulations and Procedures 4. Owner's Construction Site and Safety Rules 5. Pertinent State,Local,and Federal Employment Regulations 6. Building Permits 7. Emergency telephone numbers 8. Job Site Safety Meeting notifications 9. EPA Permits or Notification regarding Asbestos or other Toxic or Hazardous Materials 10. Other information required to comply with applicable OSHA,EPA and Federal safety laws C. Protect posted information with either plastic sleeves stapled to the board or 6 mil clear plastic sheathing over entire board providing access for posting of additional information. 1.25 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Contractors and sub-contractors and their agents and employees shall comply with local fire protection codes and OSHA Regulations. 1. Provide a minimum of one U.L. listed 2A:20BC dry chemical fire extinguisher,or one standard U.L. listed 2-1/2 ga.Water(E-10)and one U.L. listed 10BC carbon dioxide fire extinguisher mounted together,in each of the following areas: a. Each 3000 sq.ft.of work area or fraction thereof with minimum of two extinguishers. 2. Contractor's superintendent,or other assistant superintendents,shall be appointed as project fire warden for entire construction period. 3. Train workmen in proper use of each type fire extinguisher. 4. Post telephone number of fire department,specific information on location of on-site fire fighting equipment and procedure to be followed in event of fire. 5. Maintain free access at all times to fire extinguisher equipment,street fire hydrants,and outside connections for standpipe hose systems. B. Maintain exit facilities and access thereto free of material and other obstructions.If any exits are rendered inoperative during remodeling,provide the same number of temporary exits and maintain a sufficient number of required exits and exit width as required by building codes and the authority having jurisdiction. 01500-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1.26 NON-SMOKING POLICY A. Smoking will not be allowed within the building. 1.27 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES,FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. D. At completion of construction,remove fencing,guardrails,barricades,temporary signage and temporary coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01500-7 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Coming Soon Sign Order Form Project Type SuperCenter SAM'S Wal-Mart Market Project Store # : City & State: Send To: (General Contractor/Superintendent) Phone # Send form to FastSigns by one of the following methods. Email 279(a)fastsigns.com or ioe.waugh(ifastsigns.com Fax . (479) 872-2505 Phone (877) 818-0870 Toll free One 4'x 8' banner will be sent to the contact noted above. The package will include a detail for the installation with wood or steel post. 01500-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 061015 SECTION 01600(01 6000)-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic Product Requirements. 2. Product Options. 3. Product Substitution Requirements. 4. Direct Purchase Products. 5. Product Delivery Requirements. 6. Product Storage and Handling Requirements. B. Related Requirements: Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Defined as new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. 1.3 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Architect before proceeding. E. The contractual relationship,duties, and responsibilities of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Naming a Single Manufacturer and/or Model Number: Provide specified product only unless otherwise specifically permitted in the specifications. B. Products Specified by Naming Two or More Manufacturers: Provide specified products of manufacturers and models named only, meeting specifications and specified requirements unless otherwise specifically permitted in the specifications. C. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Provide any product meeting specified reference standard or description. 01600-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS A. No substitutions permitted. Provide specified products only unless otherwise specifically permitted in the specifications. 1.6 DIRECT PURCHASE PRODUCTS A. Direct purchase products shall be purchased directly by the General Contractor from the Manufacturer or the Pre- Negotiated Supplier as specified in the individual Specifications Sections. Direct purchased products shall not be purchased by any subcontractor regardless of the discipline or subcontract involved in the installation. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver materials and equipment at such stages of work in order to expedite the Work and minimize storage requirements. B. Schedule delivery for Owner furnished and installed equipment such that upon delivery of equipment to the site, sufficient equipment provisions are in place ready for installation and hook-up. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements,quantities are correct,and products are undamaged. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, and damage. Do not use damaged materials and equipment. 1.8 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Product Delivery and Receiving: 1. Unless noted otherwise herein, Owner's supplier will deliver products and equipment to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. 2. Terms of Contractor's delivery and receiving, as well as significant order lead times required for some products,are specified in the Delivery Schedules included herein. 3. The Schedules provide summary information only and do not preclude or supersede requirements contained in the corresponding individual sections or in Appendix A or the Drawings. B. Coordination: 1. Unless otherwise noted,Contractor shall coordinate delivery date of Owner furnished equipment. 2. Owner's Supplier will contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery and installation date,quantities of materials,and a coordination procedure. 3. Exceptions to Contractor scheduling are specified in the Delivery Schedules included herein. C. Refer to the applicable drawings or Appendix A for specific details regarding Owner furnished products or equipment. D. Receive and unload products at the Site unless otherwise specified in the Owner Products Delivery Exceptions Schedules included herein. E. Owner Furnished and Installed Equipment to be Received by the Contractor. Owner furnished and installed equipment will be received at the site by the Owner. F. Review supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Specifications Section 01330. Submit to supplier with notification to Architect, Owner, and Owner's Construction Department of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use the products. G. Verify quantity of products furnished with shop drawings, Final Field Use Drawings, or Bills of Lading as applicable. 01600-2 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 H. Promptly inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged, or defective items; report to Owner and Owner's Construction Department.Upon notification,Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement products. I. Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Owner's Construction Manager and Product Supplier. Upon notification,Owner will arrange for repair of product manufacturing defects. 1.9 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide safe storage of products. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight,climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated products,place on sloped supports,above ground. D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area.Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement,or damage. H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer,for components being replaced. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner Furnished Equipment Installed by the Contractor. All Owner Furnished equipment shall be installed by the Contractor unless otherwise noted in the individual sections of the Specifications,on the Drawings,or in Appendix A to be installed by the Owner. B. Owner Furnished and Installed Equipment to be Received by the Contractor. Owner furnished and installed equipment will be received at the site by the Owner. C. Provide for installation and hook-up at time of delivery of Owner installed equipment if Owner is to install as specified in the Products Installed by Owner Schedules included herein. D. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Coordinate installation of Owner installed products and equipment. F. Work in harmony with all subcontractors,suppliers and manufacturers. 01600-3 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 G. Unpack and set in place,plumb,level,and secure. H. Connect to mechanical,plumbing,and electrical systems as required. I. Remove packaging and clean products. J. Test and adjust as required. K. Replace items damaged during installation. END OF SECTION 01600-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 DELIVERY SCHEDULE Order Date* Delivery Conditions* Product Description Location Shown or Specified Contractor to Schedule All Products Unless Otherwise Noted Various Delivery Prior to Possession Date, from shortest to longest time out); I Week Test and Balance 01455 Lighting Fixtures (Except where noted on Drawings to be 4 Weeks Min furnished by canopy 16500 manufacturer) 4 Weeks Telephone System 16700 4 Weeks • Fire System Electrical Drawings • Burglar Alarm System END OF SCHEDULE 01600-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Examination of existing conditions. 2. General construction requirements. 3. Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 1.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to bidding and commencement of Work. If discrepancies are found between what is shown on the Drawings and existing field conditions,notify the Owner's Construction Manager and the Architect to determine action to be taken to resolve differences. B. Verify the existing structural column dimensions, structural bearing heights, existing dimensions, top of masonry elevations,and joist bearing elevations prior to the fabrication of any structural items.The beginning of structural steel fabrication by the General Contractor,Steel Supplier,Steel Fabricator,or Joist Manufacturer means acceptance of the existing conditions. C. Utility locations shown are approximate. Field verify the exact location and depths of existing utilities (whether shown or-not)prior to the submission of bid or the commencement of construction.Notify the Owner's Construction Manager of the discovery of existing utilities not shown or noted on Drawings. 1.3 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work in a safe and workmanlike manner and in strict accordance with the local governing Building Code, National Electric Code,U.S.Dept of Justice Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA),and all applicable codes,reg- ulations and ordinances having jurisdiction. B. Subcontractors shall be familiar with drawings and specifications in their related field.Failure to be acquainted with this knowledge will not relieve subcontractors the responsibility for performing the work properly.No additional compensation will be allowed due to conditions that occur through to failure to familiarize workers. C. Repair and seal roofing system immediately upon completion of any rooftop equipment installation to eliminate potential water damage or moisture infiltration. 1.4 WORK WITHIN AND ADJACENT TO EXISTING BUILDING AREAS A. Comply with building Tenant's and Walmart Construction Manager's regulations for work within building.Specific regulations will be discussed by Owner's Construction Manager at Preconstruction Conference. B. Provisions regarding use of gas and diesel equipment within an enclosed building formerly included in this paragraph are now included in Section 01351—Regulatory Conformance(Supplement). PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used 01700-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 END OF SECTION 01700-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching work. 2. Products for patching and extending work. 3. Transitions and adjustments. 4. Repair of damaged surfaces and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor(Par 3.12):Additional requirements for cutting and patching. 2. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary barriers. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Cutting and patching shall be performed as required for cutting into existing construction to provide for installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original con- dition. B. Cut into or partially remove portions of the existing building as required for new construction. Include such work as: 1. Cutting,moving or removal of items shown to be cut,moved or removed. 2. Cutting,moving or removal of items not shown to be cut,moved,or removed,but which must be cut,moved, or removed to allow for new construction. 3. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. 4. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items rendered no longer required resulting from alterations such as abandoned piping and electrical conduits to nearest J-boxes. 5. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. C. Structural Work: 1. Do not cut and patch structural work in manner resulting in reduction of load-carrying capacity or load and deflection ratio. 2. Submit proposed methods for cutting and patching of structural work and obtain Owner's Construction Man- ager's approval prior to the structural alterations. D. Operational Limitations: 1. Do not cut and patch in manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life, or increased maintenance. 2. Submit proposed methods of cutting and patching operational elements and safety components and obtain Owner's Construction Manager's acceptance prior to the work. E. Quality Limitations: Do not cut and patch work exposed to view (exterior and interior) in manner resulting in noticeable reduction of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities,as determined by the Owner's Construction Manager. F. Limitation on Acceptance: Owner's Construction Manager's acceptance to proceed with cutting and patching shall not waive right to later require removal or replacement of work found to be cut and patched in unsatisfactory manner as determined by Owner's Construction Manager. PART 2-PRODUCTS 01731-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials.If identical materials are not available or cannot be used,use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect.Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance characteristics. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before cutting. Take corrective action before proceeding with work if unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut to prevent failure. B. Protection: 1. Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 2. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 3. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 4. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe,conduit,or duct serving building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Remove,cut,and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products,materials, and finishes to match original condition. B. Cut work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. C. Where cutting is required,use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding rather than hammering or chopping.Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machines such as a carborundum saw or core drill. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing fin- ished surfaces, cut and drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. D. Patch with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible.Comply with specified tolerances for work. E. If the surrounding surface cannot be matched,repaint or recoat the entire surface to the nearest corner or transition point. 3.4 TRANSITIONS A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing work,provide a smooth and even transition.Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible,terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. C. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, reconstruct ceilings to provide horizontal planes without breaks,steps or bulkheads. D. In cases of extreme change of ceiling or floor, obtain instructions from the Owner's Construction Manager for method of making an acceptable transition. 01731-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, discolored, or showing imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. B. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the start of the work. C. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed,patch the floors,walls,and ceilings with finish materials to match new finishes. D. Where plumbing is removed and capped below finish floor,core drill concrete floor as required and cap a minimum of 8"below floor.Patch new concrete to match existing floor. 3.6 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WORK A. Remove existing items,services,finishes,or surfaces as required for the installation of new construction. B. Repair,re-route, and extend services,piping, and conduit of existing items and equipment as required during con- struction operations for installation and operation of new items and equipment.When existing equipment to remain is removed or relocated,re-install as required for proper operation. END OF SECTION 01731-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01740-CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleaning and maintenance of site premises. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Compliance: a. Construction demolition waste management and disposal.(Formerly included in Section 01742) b. Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste.(Formerly included in Section 01743) 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable Federal, State and Local codes and regulations relative to environ- mental safety regulations. B. Hazards Controls: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily.Prevent accu- mulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. C. Pollution Control: 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the project site. 2. Do not disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways. 3. Do not disposal of any toxic chemicals in storm or sanitary sewer systems. Comply with EPA requirements regarding disposal. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. C. Cleaning materials shall be clearly labeled and safely stored when not in use.Maintain control of cleaning materials while in use. Do not leave unattended.No flammable materials or liquids may be stored in the existing building or in the new addition. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING REQUIREMENTS A. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. B. In exterior work,sprinkle dusty debris with fine water mist to control accumulation of dust.Avoid puddling. C. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an as- needed basis until building is ready for acceptance or occupancy. 01740-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly-painted surfaces. E. Clean exterior premises daily. Do not let debris enter customer areas. 3.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING AND EXPOSED OVERHEAD STRUCTURE CLEANING A. Clean existing exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings in all areas.Clean existing exposed overhead structure. Surfaces to be cleaned include the following: 1. Acoustical tile ceilings to remain in place including trim,edge moldings, suspension system members,dif- fusers,speakers,and camera mounts. 2. Exposed overhead structure to remain in place including,but not limited to,structural steel,steel joists,metal deck,drop boxes,ductwork,and bracing members. B. Qualifications: Cleaning shall be done by a reputable firm regularly engaged in cleaning of acoustical tile ceilings and overhead structure and shall have been in business for a continuous period of not less than 2 years. Firm shall be experienced in work of the nature and scale similar to this project C. Products and Procedure 1. Cleaning Products: Accomplish cleaning using solutions and products specifically formulated and recom- mended for cleaning the surfaces involved.Products shall be non-toxic and non-caustic to metal or acoustic surfaces. Products shall be enzyme based or of such ingredients to effectively clean, whiten, and dissolve nicotine tar,cooking oils and grease,soiling,soot,smoke,mildew,and dirt films.Products containing bleach will not be allowed.Products shall be by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such products. 2. Procedure: Cleaning procedure shall be as follows: a. Cover entirely with drop cloths, all merchandise, furniture, equipment, and floors in areas to be cleaned. b. Dust or vacuum tiles and tile suspension system and structural members to remove loose dirt and dust. c. Apply cleaning solutions by spray or mist at a rate recommended by product instructions depending on type and porosity of surface to be cleaned. d. Allow sufficient time as recommended by product instructions for solutions to react. e. Remove solutions with sponges and wipe dry. f. Follow written instructions of product manufacturer where such instructions vary from,or are in ad- dition to,the foregoing procedures. D. Coordination and Scheduling: Perform cleaning during periods when store is closed or during low traffic periods, typically between 10:00 PM and 6:00 AM. Coordinate cleaning schedule with store manager. Submit to the store manager,a mutually agreed upon cleaning schedule at least 7 days prior to commencement of cleaning operations. E. Cleaning shall be completed within 45 days of possession of area cleaned. Schedule with Owner's Construction Manager. 3.3 TRASH REMOVAL A. On a daily basis,clean work areas and access,and dispose of waste materials,rubbish and debris. B. Perform segregation of waste materials into the various classification and segregated materials. C. Do not allow waste materials,rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. D. Keep streets and access to site free of rubbish and debris. 3.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection as follows: 1. Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape de- velopment areas,of rubbish,waste material,litter,and other foreign substances. 01740-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills,stains,and other foreign deposits. 3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,even-textured surface. 4. Remove tools,construction equipment,machinery,and surplus material from Project site. 5. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films,and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective sur- faces to their original condition. 6. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces,including roofs,plenums,shafts,trenches,equip- ment vaults,manholes,attics,and similar spaces. 7. Clean debris from roofs,gutters,downspouts,and drainage systems. 8. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces,removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 9. Vacuum clean all interior floor surfaces. 10. Clean transparent materials,including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,vision-obscuring materials.Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged trans- parent materials.Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. 11. Remove labels that are not permanent. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred,exposed finishes and surfaces.Replace finishes and sur- faces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 13. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint,and mortar droppings,and other foreign substances. 14. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,free of stains,including stains resulting from water exposure. 15. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters of equipment operated during construction. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills. 16. Clean ducts,blowers,and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 17. Clean light fixtures,lamps,globes,and reflectors to function with full efficiency.Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures. 18. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. B. Cleaning of Toilets Prior to Possession: 1. Immediately prior to possession,clean toilets thoroughly including each toilet fixture and accessory. 2. Clean entire wall and floor surfaces using cleaning solutions and wipe dry to prevent surface film or residue. 3. Clean water closets and sinks with scrubbing cleansers to remove stains and deposits. 4. Clean and polish stainless steel accessories and toilet partitions to a spotless luster using soap,ammonia,or mild detergent and water.Apply with sponge or soft cloth,rinse with clear water,and wipe dry. As an alternate, use a commercial stainless steel cleaner and polish. 5. Clean mirror surfaces using glass cleaner. C. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. D. Prior to final completion or Owner possession,conduct an inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas with the Owner's Construction Manager to verify that entire Work is clean. END OF SECTION 01740-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01742(01 7420)—CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 -GENERAL A. Administrative and procedural requirements for nonhazardous demolition and construction waste removal and dis- posal formerly included in this section are now included in Section 01351 —Compliance(Supplement). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Compliance: a. Removal and Reclamation of Vinyl Composition Tile(VCT) included as Attachment 1. (Formerly included in Section 02223) b. Removal and Recycling of Acoustical Ceiling Tile (ACT) included as Attachment 2. (Formerly in- cluded in Section 02224) c. Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste.(Formerly included in Section 01743) 2. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls. Temporary chain link fencing for construction and dem- olition waste management containers. 3. Section 01740-Cleaning. Site and premises cleanup during and at completion of construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01742-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 022715 SECTION 01743—HAZARDOUS/UNIVERSAL WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 -GENERAL A. Provisions for hazardous/universal waste Management and disposal formerly included in this section are now in- cluded in Section 01351—Compliance(Supplement) B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Compliance: a. Removal and Reclamation of Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) included as Attachment 1. (Formerly included in Section 02223) b. Removal and Recycling of Acoustical Ceiling Tile (ACT) included as Attachment 2. (Formerly in- cluded in Section 02224) c. Disposal and removal of nonhazardous construction and demolition waste.(Formerly included in Sec- tion 01742) 2. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. 3. Section 01731 -Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 4. Section 02023-Selective Site Demolition. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01743-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 01770(01 7700)-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Closeout Procedures. 2. Final Closeout Submittals. 3. Closeout Document Submission. 4. Record Letters of Conformance. 5. Letters of Certification. 6. Project Record Documents. 7. Operations and Maintenance Data. 8. Warranties and Bonds. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01740—Cleaning: Requirements for final cleaning. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Comply with closeout submittal requirements defined within individual Sections. Submittal procedures described herein shall apply unless otherwise described in individual Sections. B. When Contractor considers Work to be Substantially Complete,submit written certification to Owner's Construction Manager as follows. 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected. 3. Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Work is ready for inspection. 1.3 FINAL CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Definition: Closeout submittals are submittals specified in the individual sections as "Closeout" and shall not be otherwise considered a closeout document regardless of the type of submittal. Submittals not classified as a closeout submittal shall be considered a regular submittal under the provisions of Section 01330.For example: Maintenance Data may,or may not,be classified as a closeout unless specifically identified as a closeout in the individual section Part 1 SUBMITTAL paragraph. B. Unless otherwise specified in the individual sections, submit closeout submittals to the Owner within 90 days after Substantial Completion of the Work. C. All closeout documents specified in the individual sections shall be submitted.Specific documents listed below shall be included separately in an Electronic Closeout Document Submission as specified hereinafter. D. Final closeout submittals shall be received and approved by Owner before final application for payment will be approved. 1.4 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS FOR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Closeout documents for Owner furnished equipment as required and specified in the Appendix A shall be obtained directly from the Owner's vendor,supplier,or manufacturer. When,or if,documents are unavailable directly from the vendor,Contact Realty Procurement Services for assistance in obtaining the required documents. 1.5 ELECTRONIC CLOSEOUT DOCUMENT SUBMISSION 01770-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Submit Electronic Closeout Documents electronically through Owner's approved online system. Documents included in Electronic Closeout Document Submission shall consist only of the items in the following numbered list.Note that all closeout documents are not necessarily included in the Electronic Closeout Document SUbmissian. If any item listed below is not applicable, include a "Not Applicable" sheet within the uploaded section of the Electronic Closeout Document Submission. The Electronic Closeout Document Submission shall not be compiled based only on the brief description of each item in the following list. It is compulsory that the individual sections and references be examined to comprehend the full description of the specific item to be included. Include the following: 1. Contractor's Statement of Warranty. (Reference Article 3.4 of the Construction Contract.)(Reference form included at end of this Section.) 2. Copy of Certificate of Occupancy. 3. List of Subcontractors: Final list of Subcontractors used complete with telephone numbers, addresses, and after hours telephone numbers.(Reference Article 3.5 of the Construction Contract.) 4. Signed and notarized lien waivers from Contractor and all Subcontractors. (Reference Article 5.3. and associated Exhibits of the Construction Contract.)The wiavers shall have no modifications or changes made thereon. 5. Copies of Performance and Payment Bond.(Reference Article 7.5 of the Construction Contract.) 6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment from Bonding Company. (Reference Article 5.3 of the Construction Contract.) 7. Substantial Completion Punchlist: Building, Civil, and HVAC/refrigeration punch lists showing items completed and approved by Owner.(Reference Article 5.2 of the Construction Contract.) 8. Registration of Storage Tanks with State. (Sections 11140 and 13220 if specified.) 9. Maintenance Data Sheet.(Reference form at the end of this Section,) 10. Verification of transmittal to Store Manager of all Project Record Documents specified hereinafter and Operations and Maintenance Manuals. This shall be in the form of a Letter of Transmittal with a statement signed by the Store Manager verifying that the O&M manuals have been placed in the Electrical Distribution Center(EDC)by the Contractor and the placement witnessed by the Store Manager. 11. Warranties. a. Membrane Roofing. Submit Roofing Warranty included at the end of Roofing Section (Sections 07500,07511,or 07550 as applicable). Manufacturer's standard warranty will not be considered as a substitute for the warranty included therein. 12. Record Letters of Conformance: Include separate letter for each item listed below. Include letters for the following as applicable when the specified specification section is included in the project. a. Contractor Quality Control(Section 01452) b. Construction Testing Laboratory(By Owner's CTL—Appendix B). 13. Inspection Reports: Include separate report for each required item listed below, Include reports for the following as applicable when the specified Section is included in the project. a. Building Services Piping(Section 15100). 1) Video Inspection Report. 2) Dye Testing Report(If specified). b. Building Automation System(BAS)(Section 13810). 1) Start-up Report and Punch list. 14. Copy of Signed Notice of Termination of NPDES Construction General Permit with proof of submittal to appropriate agency.This is only applicable for those permits issued to the General Contractor.(Section 02370 erosion) B. If Contractor fails to provide a fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission within 90 days after Substantial Completion of the Work,then Contractor agrees to pay Owner the sum of$250.00 per day,as liquidated damages and not as a penalty,until the fully completed Electronic Closeout Document Submission is received and approved by Owner Contract Administration. 1.6 RECORD LETTERS OF CONFORMANCE A. Submit Record Letters of Conformance as a Closeout Submittal.By submitting Record Letter of Conformance,the Contractor declares that the product identified by manufacturer's name and model number is the product specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. 1. Submit completed Record Letter of Conformance for each product selected as indicated within each Section. 01770-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Complete required information on form and sign in ink by person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 3. No modifications shall be made to the form. 4. Record Letters of Conformance,when required,are located at the end of the respective Section. 1.7 LETTERS OF CERTIFICATION A. Certify manufacturer's or installer's qualifications, conformance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as required in individual specification sections. B. Submit supporting reference data,affidavits,and certifications as required. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Maintain on site,one set of the following record documents. Record actual revisions to the Work. 1. Contract Drawings. (Building and Civil) 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings,product data,and samples. B. Maintain Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. As-built Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Record as-builts shall be maintained and submitted for the primary purpose of recording the locations for concealed interior and exterior underground utilities as specified in the individual specifications. Legibly record actual measured horizontal and vertical locations of interior and exterior underground utilities and appurtenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements. D. Record required as-built information concurrent with construction progress.Do not permanently conceal work until required information has been recorded. E. At Project completion, the Contractor shall place the Record Documents (including Building and Civil Record Drawings,Specifications,Addenda,and Change Orders)enclosed in a plastic pipe tube(fixed cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end)for storage in the Electrical Room unless otherwise specified to be located in another location in the individual sections.Placement shall be in the presence of and witnessed by the Store Manager. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation and Maintenance data shall include a suitably bound set of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data,and parts lists for each item of equipment provided under this Contract that will require maintenance or special operating procedures,including drawings,instructions,or manuals supplied with equipment furnished by others and installed under this Contract.Submittal of O&M data shall be in the form of the bound set of O&M data and placement by the Contractor in the Electrical Distribution Center (EDC) room within the building unless otherwise specified to be located in another location in the individual sections. Do not include O&M data in the Electronic Closeout Document Submission or submit to Owner's Contract Administration.Placement of documents shall be witnessed by the Store Manager and shall be at least 14 days prior to final inspection. 1.10 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Submit required warranties and bonds through the Electronic process. 1. Assemble documents from Subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers. 2. For equipment put into use with Owner's acceptance during construction, submit within ten days after first operation,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 3. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 01770-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01770-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET Complete all Sections Prior To Final Payment Location: Store/Club No.: Size: Possession Date: TYPE OF BUILDING CONSTRUCTION Walls: Roof(circle one): SBS BUR TPO Metal Other(explain) Roofing Mfg. Warranty Information.(years) Roof(circle one): SBS BUR TPO Metal Other(explain) Roofing Mfg. Warranty Information.(years) STORE/CLUB TYPE(Check Those That Apply) Free Standing New Store Take-over Store Strip Center Relocation Stockroom Add'n. Mall Remodel Expansion Back _Front L. Side R. Side Company Name Location Business Phone Emerg.Phone Developer: Gen. Contractor: Subcontractors: Electrical: Plumbing: Fire Protection: Roofing: Ht/Vent/Cool: BAS: Refrigeration: Paving: Painting: Storefront: Earthwork: Site Utility: Striping: 01770-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Fencing: Concrete Ext.: Concrete Int.: Masonry: Struct. Steel: Overhead Doors: Auto.Doors: Flooring: Landscaping: Irrigation: HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT GAS FIRED [ ] ELECTRIC HEAT [ ] Quantity Manufacturer Model No. Heat/Cool(BTU's) Cool Only(BTU's) MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION Quantity Manufacturer Catalog/Model No. Volts/Watts Parking Lot Lighting: Lighting Poles: Light Fixtures: Ballasts: Lamps: Ceiling Light Fixtures: High Bay: Ballasts: Lamps: Pendant Mount: Ballasts: Lamps: 01770-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Fluorescent Mount: Ballasts: Lamps: PRODUCTS Manufacturer Model/Serial# Color/Style(If Applicable) Door Closers: Panic Hardware: Auto.Doors: Ceiling Panels: Floor Tile: Rubber: VCT: PVC: Ceramic: R.R.Partition: BAS: Refrigeration: Domestic Water Booster Pump: Fire Pump: Jockey Pump: Exit Lights: Emergency Lights: Note: Include all information requested, including Owner Provided Parts. DNA: Does Not Apply END OF MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET 01770-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 AFFIDAVIT OF TOTAL RELEASE AND CERTIFICATION OF ALL BILLS PAID Replaced by Construction Contract Par 5.3 and Exhibits 01770-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF WARRANTY DATE: PROJECT: LOCATION: OWNER: Wal-Mart Stores,Inc. 2001 SE 10th Street Bentonville,AR 72716-5520 CONTRACT: Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor,dated 20 Contractor hereby: (1) warrants that the Work for Project complies with Article 3.4 of the Construction Contract ; (2) acknowledges that its warranty obligations under such Article 3.4 extends one year beyond the actual date of Substantial Completion of the Project;and(3)affirms the enforceability of other warranties made by Contractor in the Contract. Terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the above referenced Contract. The undersigned Contractor hereby makes the certifications set forth herein to Owner as of the day of ,20 Witness: Contractor: By: Print Name: Name: Title: STATE OF COUNTY OF On this the day of ,20 before me,a Notary Public,within and for the State and County aforesaid,personally appeared,to me well know(or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence), who stated upon oath that (s)he had executed the foregoing instrument for the consideration set forth therein. Notary Public My commission expires: 01770-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 093011 SECTION 03312(03 3012)-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLABS(INTERIOR) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is included to provide information on the existing interior concrete slab. All new concrete slab shall match these specifications. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new slab and vapor retarder is required. B. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete slabs including the following: a. Interior floor slabs on ground. 2. Aggregate base below slab. 3. Reinforcement and accessories. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03362 - Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes: Cleaning, application of densifier and burnishing of floor slabs. 2. Section 05120-Structural Steel:Column anchor bolts. 3. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Joint fillers and sealants for floor slabs. 4. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner: Procedures for inspection,testing, and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): 1. Standard Specification For Transportation Materials And Methods Of Sampling and Testing: a. AASHTO T318 - Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying (Formerly AASHTO TP 23). C. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. ACI 117-Tolerances for Concrete-Construction and Materials and Commentary. 2. ACI 301 -Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 305.1 -Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306.1 -Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 6. ACI 347-Formwork for Concrete. 7. ACI SP66-ACI Detailing Manual. D. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 615-Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A 706-Low-Alloy Steel deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C 31 -Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 5. ASTM C 33 -Concrete Aggregates. 6. ASTM C 39-Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 7. ASTM C 42-Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 8. ASTM C 94-Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C 136-Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 10. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density(Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 03312-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 11. ASTM C 143 -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 12. ASTM C 150-Portland Cement. 13. ASTM C 171 -Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 14. ASTM C 172-Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 15. ASTM C 173-Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 16. ASTM C 231 -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 17. ASTM C 403 -Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance. 18. ASTM C 494-Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 19. ASTM C 618-Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 20. ASTM C 702-Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size. 21. ASTM C 881 -Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 22. ASTM C 989-Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 23. ASTM C 1064-Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 24. ASTM C 1218-Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 25. ASTM C 1602 -Mixing Water used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 26. ASTM D 75-Sampling Aggregates. 27. ASTM D 98-Calcium Chloride. 28. ASTM D 448-Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 29. ASTM D 698 -Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Hammer and 12-in(305 mm)Drop. 30. ASTM D 1241 -Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase,Base and Surface Courses 31. ASTM E 1155-Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System(Inch-Pound Units). 32. ASTM E 1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 33. ASTM E 1745 -Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. E. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.4-Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI): 1. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars. G. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association: 1. NRMCA Inspection Standards 1.3 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pursuant to Article 2.7 of the Construction Contract Between Walmart and Contractor,the Owner has the right to perform construction work and to award separate contracts on the Site. B. Owner or Separate Contractor Responsibilities:The following provisions are provided as information to Contractor with respect to the responsibilities of the Owner or separate contractors doing work on, or related to, the building floor slab construction.The Owner or separate contractors must: 1. Notify Contractor's superintendent 1 week prior to the start of the work at Site. Provide names and contact phone numbers to Contractor's superintendent. 2. Coordinate work and schedule activities with floor slab construction to avoid interference and to minimize detrimental effects to floor finish. 3. Comply with floor protection measures as specified in this Section and as described in Contractor's Concrete Floor Protection Plan. 4. Damage to concrete floor finish determined by Wal-Mart to be the responsibility of Owner or separate contractor will be repaired in accordance with approved methods,materials,and personnel at the expense of Owner or separate contractor. C. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting: 1. Plan,host,and attend Pre-slab Installation Meeting to be conducted at Site by Owner's Concrete Consultant 03312-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 via teleconference. 2. Schedule meeting between 7 and 14 days prior to first concrete slab placement of 10,000 SF or greater and after placement of test slab and after concrete submittals have been approved. 3. Obtain Pre-slab Installation Meeting agenda from Wal-Mart Concrete Consultant(Structural Services, Inc. (SSI),(877)774-2677. 4. Require responsible representatives of each party involved with the interior concrete slab work to attend the meeting. Representatives to be present shall include personnel who are directly involved in overseeing the work for each placement and who have authority to control the concreting work. 5. Notify all required attendees in writing of scheduled time and place at least two weeks in advance of meeting. Include copy of agenda with invitation. 6. The meeting shall convene only when all parties are present. 7. Attendees shall include,but not be limited to the following: a. Owner's Construction Manager. b. Owner's Concrete Consultant. c. Contractor. 1) Project Manager. 2) Superintendent. d. Concrete Subcontractor 1) Project Manager. 2) Finish Foreman. e. Concrete Supplier. 1) Quality Control Representative. f. Base Fine Grading Contractor g. Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory. h. Densifier Manufacturer's Representative. i. Densifier Applicator and Burnished Floor Surface Installer. j. Joint Filler Manufacturer's Representative. k. Joint Filler Subcontractor. 8. Meeting Minutes: Record discussions of meeting and decisions and agreements reached. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Submittals paragraph. 9. Changes to Contract Documents from recommendations or discussions at the Pre-slab Installation Meeting shall be approved in writing by Owner's Construction Manager prior to implementation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures:Unless otherwise specified herein,submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. B. Submit submittal items concurrently for submittals shown with the same submittal date specified in the Concrete Submittal Register included at the end of this Section. Do not submit submittals of this section together with submittals in Section 03310 or any other Section.Identify submittals explicitly in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330. C. Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email,unless otherwise specified,to designated parties in the Concrete Submittal Register at the end of this Section. D. Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base System: Submit current sieve analysis report for aggregate base and choker material. E. Concrete Finishing Sub-contractor's Qualification Statement: Submit Concrete Finishing Sub-Contractor's Qualifications Statement form included at the end of this Section including Floor Finisher Qualifications as required in Quality Assurance paragraph. 1. Provide ACI certification documents for at least three finishers who will install interior slabs. F. Slab Reinforcing Bar Shop Drawings: 1. Complete information for installing reinforcing, including placement plans, bar bending diagrams, splice lengths and locations,bar spacing,concrete cover,and support devices and accessories. 2. Detail in accordance with ACI SP 66. 03312-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Perimeter foundation tie reinforcing submittals is specified in Section 03310. G. Mix Design: Submit Concrete Slab Mix Design Submittal Form at the end of this Section. 1. Submit only one form indicating same mix design proportions for all interior slab concrete. 2. Include applicable information shown on the Mix Design Submittal Form including the following: a. Proportions of cementitious materials,fine and coarse aggregate,and water. b. Water cementitious material ratio,28-day compressive design strength,slump,and air content. c. Type of cement,fly ash,slag,and aggregate. d. Individual aggregate gradation. e. Type and dosage of admixtures. f. Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product specified. H. Attachments to Concrete Mix Design: Submit the following with the Concrete Mix Design: 1. Cementitious materials mill test reports for the following: a. Portland cement. b. Fly ash or slag. (If approved for ASR or corrosive soils mitigation) 2. Designation, type, quality, and source (natural or manufactured) of coarse and fine concrete aggregate materials. 3. Sieve Analysis Reports for Concrete Aggregate:Provide separate reports of particle distribution, calculating cumulated percentages passing for all individual aggregates required on the mix form. Sieve analysis sampling and testing for each aggregate source shall be conducted within 60 days of concrete submittal date. 4. Concrete Aggregate Supplier Statement: a. Stating if aggregate is possibly alkali-reactive,based on tests or past service b. Stating if aggregate can possibly cause pop-outs,"D"cracking,or other disruptions due to moisture gain,freezing,or other mechanisms,based on tests or past service. 5. Product data for the following concrete materials admixtures: a. Water reducing. b. Water reducing and retarding. c. Accelerating. d. Chloride ion content for each admixture. 6. Chloride-Ion Content: Measured water-soluble chloride-ion content (percent by weight of cementitious materials)in accordance with ASTM C 1218. 7. Concrete compressive strength data as required by ACI 318. 8. Past compression test reports on each mix as required by ACI 318. 9. Time of Initial Setting: Initial setting time in accordance with ASTM C 403 if supplementary cementitious material(SCM)mix is to be used. Product Data: Brand name, chemical composition, installation directions and certificates of compliance with required standards for the following products: 1. Vapor retarder and tape. 2. Curing compound. J. Slab Joint and Placement Plan: 1. Develop and submit slab joint and placement plan on a copy of Sheet S1.1. 2. Plan shall identify the following: a. Exterior walls and column grid locations. b. Extent of pours including width,length,slab placement area and volume. c. Sequence of placement. d. Location of test slab placement. e. Locations of construction joints. f. Location of sawn contraction joints if different from those shown on the structural drawings. K. Concrete Floor Protection Plan. Submit Concrete Floor Protection Plan addressing procedures specified in Part 3 of this Section. L. Pre-Slab Installation Meeting Documents: 1. Record of Notification of pre-slab meeting including company name,persons contacted,and date and method 03312-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 of contact. 2. Meeting Agenda. 3. Meeting Minutes. Submit meeting minutes including attendance record to participants and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Minutes of the meeting shall be distributed to parties in attendance by the Contractor within 5 days of the meeting.One copy of the minutes shall also be transmitted to the Walmart Construction Manager for information purposes. M. Delivery Tickets: 1. Copies of delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. 2. Indicate information required by ASTM C 94 on each ticket including additional information required for slabs. 3. Information on ticket shall include quantities of all material batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate and the quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio of the approved mix design.Aggregate moisture corrections shall be based on ASTM definitions of aggregate moisture content and absorption. 4. Mix identification number on ticket shall match number on submitted and approved mix design. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Truck Inspection: 1. Conform to ASTM C 94, NRMCA and Department of Transportation standards in state where project is located with respect to truck mixer requirements. 2. Perform inspections immediately before starting concreting operations. 3. Record the identification numbers of those trucks found to be acceptable on the basis of inspections. 4. Do not bring on site for concreting operations, any truck whose identification numbers are not recorded as acceptable.Notify CTL if non-conforming trucks are used to deliver concrete for interior. B. Concrete Supplier Approval: Concrete Supplier and materials provided shall be fully approved by and acceptable to Concrete Subcontractor as the producer of concrete which Sub-contractor is to place and finish. Prepare Statement of Approval of Concrete Supplier stating project name, name of concrete supplier, along with the statement of approval and signatures of the Contractor and Concrete Floor Sub-contractor. Submit statement as specified in Submittals paragraph. C. Floor Finisher Qualifications: 1. The concrete floor finishing subcontractor lead finisher and at least two additional members of the finishing crew shall be certified under the Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program as granted by the American Concrete Institute and shall be present during finishing of interior floor slab concrete. Certified individuals executing finish operations shall have documentation of current certification available for inspection on Site at all times. 2. The concrete floor finisher subcontractor shall be a subcontractor directly under the General Contractor and shall have experience in finishing interior floors of similar size and scope in at least 5 previous projects. D. Floor Test Slabs: 1. Prior to the Pre-Slab Installation Meeting construct a permanent test slab with approved mix design. Test slab shall be not less than 2,000 square feet and located in a Non-Sales Floor area as approved by the Wal- Mart Construction Manager. 2. Owner's Construction Manager will evaluate the test slab and indicate Owner's acceptance, corrections noted,or rejection to establish a minimum basis for acceptance of final slabs. 3. Work shall not begin on final areas until an ability to satisfy specified tolerances and other requirements routinely in test areas has been demonstrated. 4. Use same materials,tools,and methods for finishing and curing final slab work as used for test slab. 5. Replace final slab work that does not meet or exceed accepted established test slab standard. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. 03312-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. Keep containers closed and upright to prevent leakage. C. Mark reinforcing,accessories and embedded items for proper identification and placement location. D. Store materials,except aggregate,off ground in dry area and in manner to prevent damage.Protect liquid materials from freezing. E. Stockpile aggregate in manner to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates. Do not use bottom 6 inches of aggregate piles in contact with ground.Allow sand to drain until it has reached uniform moisture content before it is used. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Store admixtures in manner to prevent contamination. Protect admixtures from extreme temperatures which would adversely affect their characteristics. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.1 (hot weather) and 306.1 (cold weather) except as otherwise specified herein. In case of conflict,provisions stated herein shall prevail over the ACI standard specifications. B. Concreting in Hot,Dry or Windy Weather: 1. Determine rate of evaporation in accordance with ACI 305.1. 2. Employ precautions as required to protect fresh concrete before and during finishing when the concrete rate of evaporation exceeds 0.1 pounds per square foot per hour or when any combination of concrete materials and weather conditions are favorable for the formation of plastic shrinkage cracks. a. Cool ingredients before mixing to reduce concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water. b. Dampen subgrade and forms. c. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap so the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 3. Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the Site to check temperature of concrete 4. Temperature of concrete at time of placing: Not to exceed 95 degrees F. 5. Reject concrete if more than one slump adjustment,as defined in ASTM C 94,is required. 6. Do not place concrete when forms,subgrade,aggregate base or reinforcing bars are more than 120 degrees F or the temperature differential between the forms, aggregate base, or reinforcing bars and concrete will create conditions favorable for settlement cracks or thermal cracking. C. Concreting in Cold Weather: 1. Minimum base surface temperature and ambient building air temperature shall be 55 degrees F during placement and throughout curing period except as otherwise specified herein. In case of conflict,provisions stated herein shall prevail over the ACI standard specifications. 2. Measure and record concrete temperature during protection period at regular time intervals,but not less than 3 times per 24 hours. 3. Do not place slabs on subgrade,or base that is more than 20 degrees F cooler than concrete. Warm subgrade, or base to decrease temperature differential to 20 degrees F or less. 4. Minimum concrete temperature as measured at the point of discharge shall be 60 F.(65 F for approved SCM mix) 5. Do not use unvented combustion heaters during concrete placement so as to prevent exposure of concrete to excessive exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide(CO2)or carbon monoxide(CO). During slab placement and curing periods,maximum CO2 levels shall be 4,500 parts per million and maximum CO levels shall be 15 parts per million at concrete surface within 5 feet of any source of exhaust gases to minimize potential damage to concrete. D. Placing Environment: 03312-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Sales floor concrete shall be placed within a completely enclosed structure after the roof membrane is completely installed and watertight. a. Roof construction, skylight installation, overhead painting, and roof drainage system shall be complete and weather tight prior to placement of sales floor slabs. b. Lighting: Permanent lighting or equivalent temporary lighting shall be operational during all slab placements. 2. Non-sales floor areas, and minimum concrete slab installations required for stud wall framing, shall only require compliance with the requirements of both ACI 305.1 and 306.1,with additional focus on protection from wind and precipitation during and after placement to prevent damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent as specified hereinafter for the specific product: 1. BASF Admixture Systems,(800)628-9990. 2. BASF Building Systems,(800)433-9517. 3. Commercial Metals Company(214)689-4300. 4. Dayton Superior (877)416-3439. 5. Davis Colors,(800)800-6856. 6. DUB (Dowel Bars and Baskets)Co.816.994.9090. 7. Euclid Chemical Co.,(877)438-3826. 8. Fortifiber Building Systems Group,(800)773-4777. 9. Greenstreak Group,Inc.,(800)325-9504. 10. L.M. Scofield,(800)800-9900. 11. L&M Construction Chemicals,(402)453-6600 12. McTech Group,(866)913-8363. 13. PNA Construction Technologies,(800)542-0214. 14. Raven Industries, Inc.,Sioux Falls,SD(800)635-3456. 15. Sika Corp.,(800)933-7452. 16. Soff-Cut(951)272-2330 17. Solomon Colors,(800)624-0261. 18. SpecChem(866)791-8700. 19. Stego Industries, LLC,(877)464-7834. 20. Unitex,(800)821-5846. 21. W.R. Grace and Co.,(713)223-8353. 22. W.R. Meadows, Inc.,(847)214-2100. 23. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.,(888)839-2661. B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600 unless specified otherwise herein. 2.2 AGGREGATE BASE AND CHOKER MATERIALS A. Aggregate Base and Choker Materials are existing. Inspect to ensure existing conditions still meet this specifications prior to construction of new vapor retarder and concrete slab. B. Aggregate Base Material: 1. Gradation: Conform to gradation shown on the Structural Drawings. 2. Equivalent Gradation:Equivalent gradations may be used upon approval of the Structural Engineer of Record (SER). Submit proposed equivalent gradation to the Architect for approval within 30 days after the award of contract.Equivalent gradation shall be one of the following. a. Any state DOT approved road base material meeting the following gradation: Standard Sieve Size %Passing 1-1/2" 100 Na.4 15-55 03312-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 No.200 3-12 b. Material conforming to the General Requirements and of the Gradation"A","C",or"D"requirements (with the modified allowance of 5%to 12%passing the No.200 sieve)as defined by ASTM D 1241. 3. Material passing the No.200 sieve shall be clean granular fill with less than 3%clay and/or friable particles. C. Aggregate Choker Material: Clean granular fill with less than 3% clay and/or friable particles. Use one of the following gradations: 1. ASTM D 448 No. 10 with 6%to 12%passing No.200 sieve. 2. Material meeting the following gradation: _ Standard Sieve Size %Passing No.4 85-100 No. 8 75-95 No. 16 55-75 No.50 22-45 No. 100 10-30 No.200 6-12 2.3 FORMWORK A. Forms: 1. Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous,straight,smooth,exposed surfaces. 2. Furnish forms in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on Drawings. 3. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 4. Bevel top outside edge of form. 5. Do not use partial depth forms. B. Form Release Agent: 1. 100% biodegradable, non-toxic, 100% natural organic chemical release agent. Will not cause surface imperfections,non-staining,and compatible with field applied paints,toppings,curing compounds,and other coatings.Use same brand form release agent for all forms. Provide one of the following: a. Form-EZE Natural by Euclid. b. Bio-Release EF by Dayton Superior. c. Star Seal EF V Release by Vexcon. d. Farm Fresh by Unitex. e. Reaxion WB by SpecChem. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. ASTM A 615,deformed,Grade 60. 2. ASTM A 706,deformed,Grade 60. B. Tie Wire: 1. Minimum 16 gage annealed type. C. Reinforcing Support Devices: 1. Manufactured support devices of metal(wire bar), concrete,or recycled plastic devices conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. Precast concrete bar supports shall have minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. 3. Plastic accessories shall have a minimum of 50%recycled content. 03312-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 4. Do not use wood,clay brick,and other devices that can expand due to moisture gain. 5. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 6. When precast concrete bar supports are used over aggregate base,or over waterproof membranes and vapor retarders, properly embed tie wires to prevent penetration of substrate. 7. Properly size foot of bar supports or similar devices to prevent settlement on base material or prevent puncture on vapor barrier. 8. When supporting multiple layers of reinforcement, provide the proper size and spacing of bar supports or similar devices to prevent deformation of plastic and to retain rebar within position tolerances. D. Plate Dowels-Construction Joints: 1. Provide plate dowels consisting of smooth steel plate bars,ASTM A 36 steel.Provide one of the following: a. Diamond Dowel System by PNA Construction Technologies,size 1/4 inch x 4-1/2 inch dowels. b. EZform EZdowel(including EZform Board)by McTech,Inc.,size 6-1/4 inch x 3-1/2 inch x 1/4inch dowels. c. Speed Plate System by Greenstreak,size 1/4 inch x 4 inch x 6 inch dowels. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II.Use only one brand throughout project. B. Fly Ash:ASTM C 618,Class C or F. Use only one type and source throughout project. C. Slag: ASTM C 989,Grade 100 or 120.Use only one type and source throughout project. D. Concrete Aggregate: 1. Conform to ASTM C 33: a. No coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by building materials or soil. b. Fine aggregate grading requirements as defined in Section 6.1 of ASTM C 33 shall be strictly met without deviation. 2. If manufactured fine aggregate is used,blend with minimum 25%natural materials. 3. Coarse Aggregate: a. Nominal maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1-1/2 inch for slabs>5-1/2 inch thick. b. Nominal maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1 inch for slabs<5-1/2 inch thick. c. The nominal maximum size of an aggregate is the smallest sieve size through which the major portion of the aggregate must pass,with 1%to 5%retained on the nominal maximum size sieve. 4. Adjust proportions of combined coarse, intermediate, and fine aggregates to provide the following particle size distribution characteristics,unless otherwise approved: 1) Coarseness Factor of 60 to 75%. a) The Coarseness Factor(CF) is the percent of combined aggregate retained on the#8 sieve that is also retained on the 3/8 inch sieve. b) The Coarseness Factor is calculated as follows:CF=Aggregate retained on 3/8"sieve/ Aggregate retained on#8 sieve. 2) Adjusted Workability Factor: a) The Workability Factor(WF)is the percent of combined aggregate that passes the#8 sieve. b) The Adjusted Workability Factor(Adj-WF)is calculated as follows: Adj-WF=WF+[(Cementitious Material-564 lbs)/37.6] c) The range of accepted Adj-WF for a given CF is as follows: Adj-WF=[(11.25-.15 CF)+36]±2.5. 3) Combined percent retained on any given sieve size shall not exceed 24%. 4) See Coarseness Factor Chart at the end of this Section. 5. Aggregate gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 may be waived in order to meet ranges specified E. Water: ASTM C 1602. 2.6 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES 03312-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Provide admixture products as specified below. Within each product listing,provide one of the products specified. When specifically allowed within each product listing, equivalent admixture products by other manufacturers meeting the specified ASTM standards may be used upon submittal of product data and approval by SER. B. Water Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494,Type A. 1. Eucon or Plastol Series by Euclid. 2. Pozzolith, PolyHeed or Glenium Series by BASF Admixtures. 3. WRDA,Daracem,Mira,Zyla or Adva Series by W.R.Grace. 4. Plastiment,Plastocrete,ViscoCrete, Sikaplast,or Sikament Series by Sika Corp. 5. Equivalent approved products. C. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type B or D. 1. Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid. 2. Pozzolith Series or Delvo by BASF Admixtures. 3. Recover or Daratard 17 by W.R.Grace. 4. Plastiment or Plastocrete Series by Sika Corp. 5. Equivalent approved products. D. Accelerating Admixture:ASTM C 494,Type C or E. 1. Accelguard 80 by Euclid. 2. Daraset Series,Daracel,Lubricon,Polarset,or DCI by W.R. Grace. 3. Pozzolith or Pozzutec Series by BASF Admixtures. 4. Plastocrete 161 FL, Plastocrete 161 HE,Sikaset NC,Sika Rapid 1,or Sikaset HE by Sika Corp. 5. Calcium Chloride(Type L)in solution form. 6. Equivalent approved products. E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F. Do not use high range, Type F, or all range water reducing admixture at Type F dosage rates. F. Evaporation Retardant:Water-based polymer,sprayable. 1. EucoBar by Euclid 2. Confilm by BASF Admixtures. 3. Conspec Aquafilm by Dayton Superior. 4. SpecFilm RTU by SpecChem. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Screed Chairs:Metal. B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, sheet membrane material, not less than 10 mils thick unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries. 2. Moistop Ultra 10 by Fortifiber. 3. Perminator 10 mil,by W.R.Meadows. 4. Vapor Block 10 mil,by Raven Industries. C. Vapor Retarder Tape and Adhesive: Tape and adhesives for sealing laps,punctures,tears and penetrations shall be pressure-sensitive,waterproof adhesive tape,2 inches minimum width and compatible with retarder. D. Epoxy Bonding Agent:ASTM C 881. 1. Euco#452 by Euclid. 2. E-Poxy Eva-Pox Fresh Concrete Bonder 2 by Chase Construction Products. 3. Concresive Liquid LPL by BASF Building Systems. 4. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL by Sika. 2.8 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS 03312-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Curing Compound:Temporary film forming type curing compound. 1. SC Cure 500 by SpecChem. 2.9 CONCRETE MIX A. General: 1. Use only materials and their proportions included in approved Concrete Mix Design. 2. Measure and mix ingredients in accordance of ASTM C 94. 3. Concrete supplier may proportion materials by field experience or proportion concrete materials by laboratory trial batches per ACI 318 for strength compliance. B. Strength:As indicated on Drawings C. Workability: Concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation,voids,or excessive bleeding. D. Supplementary Cementitious Materials(SCM): 1. Use of SCM in the concrete mix is mandatory. 2. Ternary blended materials are not acceptable.Concrete mix shall contain either fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag(GGBFS)but not both. 3. Fly Ash: Substitute fly ash for Portland cement at a minimum of 15% to a maximum of 20%of the total cementitious content. a. If used to mitigate potential aggregate reactivity,only Type F fly ash may be used and shall have the following maximum properties: 1.5%available alkali and 8.0%CaO. 4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag(GGBFS): Substitute GGBFS for Portland cement at a minimum of 25%to a maximum of 30%of the total cementitious content. If required to mitigate potential sulfate exposure or aggregate reactivity,up to 50%GGBFS substitution for Portland cement may be used. E. Cementitious Materials Content(Portland Cement+SCM): Use 520 pounds minimum for all interior slab mixes. F. Water/Cementitious Materials Ratio:Interior Floor Slabs:0.53 maximum. G. Air-Entraining Admixture:Do not air-entrain interior floor slabs with troweled finish. H. Time of Setting: Initial setting time shall not exceed 400 minutes as determined by ASTM C 403 for a laboratory sample representing the submitted mix design, admixture dosages, and concrete temperature of 60°F±5°F. Only one specimen or time of setting test is required per sample. If more than one test is performed per sample,report average times of initial setting. Test shall be performed by an independent testing agency selected by, and as a responsibility of,the Concrete Supplier. I. Slump: Slump at the point of placement shall not exceed 6 inches subject to the requirement that concrete shall be of a consistency to be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation,voids,or excessive bleeding. Maximum slump variance shall be 2 inches. J. Admixtures: 1. Water-reducing admixture may be added to improve workability beyond 2 inches to 3 inches initial water slump. Mix shall have adequate water to produce consistent plastic material properties. 2. Concrete slab mix shall contain only one water reducing admixture. 3. Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's reconunendati'on. K. Calcium Chloride Admixture: 1. Calcium chloride(Type L)conforming to ASTM D 98 may be used in solution form as part of the mixing water to accelerate concrete setting and early-strength development. 2. Amount of calcium chloride added shall not be more than necessary to produce the desired results and shall not exceed 1.5%by weight of cement 03312-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. The dosage range for the calcium chloride for the entire project shall not vary by more than 1%. Range is defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum dosages of calcium chloride for the entire project. 4. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the following applications unless approved by SER: a. Concrete containing embedded dissimilar metals or aluminum. b. Slabs supported on permanent galvanized steel forms. c. Concrete exposed to deicing chemicals. d. Prestressed or post-tensioned concrete. e. Concrete containing aggregates with potentially deleterious reactivity. f. Concrete exposed to soil or water containing sulfates. 5. Use calcium chloride in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 6. Chloride-ion Concentration: Maximum water-soluble chloride-ion concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water,aggregates,cementitious materials, and admixtures shall not exceed the following limits unless approved by SER: Maximum water-soluble chloride ion(Cl-)content in Type of Member concrete (percent by weight of cement) Prestressed Concrete .06 Reinforced concrete exposed to chloride 15 in service Reinforced concrete that will be dry or 1.00 protected from moisture in service Other reinforced concrete construction .30 7. When using calcium chloride or other admixtures containing chlorides,measure water-soluble chloride-ion content (percent by weight of cementitious materials) per ASTM C 1218. Sample shall be from concrete representing the submitted mix design and maximum chloride dosage anticipated for the project. 2.10 MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1. Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94 and ACI 301 except as specified. 2. Reset drum revolution counter to zero on concrete truck when water is added to drum. B. Site-Mixed Concrete: 1. Conform to ACI 301. 2. Use central-mix type batch plant. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Conform to manufacturer's printed instructions for materials and equipment. B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely,and will not cause difficulty in placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preplacement Inspection:All trades and participants involved shall verify that preparations are in conformance with Contract Documents. 03312-12 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Cleaning Equipment:Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from mixing and conveying equipment. C. Ensure that all work is properly coordinated: 1. Structural Drawings and Specifications with those of other disciplines. 2. Use final corrected submittals. 3.3 AGGREGATE BASE PLACEMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings,place aggregate base as specified herein. B. Aggregate Base: 1. Install aggregate base where shown on Drawings. 2. Compact to final thickness shown on Drawings in layers not exceeding 6 inches with minimum of 2 passes per layer with vibratory compactor. 3. Compact fill to 98%of aggregate's Standard Proctor as determined by Method D of ASTM D 698. 4. Leave pad up to 2 inches low until just prior to concrete placement. C. Aggregate Base Fine Grading: 1. Compact to final thickness noted with 2 passes minimum vibratory compactor to produce smooth,flat,dense surface. 2. Do not allow excess moisture or soft soil beneath vapor retarder at time of placing concrete. 3. Level off aggregate base top surface with aggregate choker material as necessary as follows: a. To reduce surface friction and to meet specified fine grade tolerances specified below. Typically required up to 3/4 inch thick in areas exposed to rain,traffic,or excavation for pits and buried utilities. b. Where aggregate base material does not have sufficient fine particles to produce a surface that is free of exposed aggregate or surface voids greater than 3/8 inch in size at time of slab installation. 4. Use laser guided equipment to establish specified base elevation. 5. Provide dry, smooth,flat, dense surface. Take corrective action if rutting or pumping is evident during the preparation of the soil support system. 6. Proof-roll 48 firs maximum prior to concrete placement.Depression under a fully loaded concrete truck shall not exceed 1/2 inch. D. Slab on Ground Aggregate Base Fine Grade Tolerance: +0 inch, -3/4 inch with transition no greater than 3/4 inch vertically to 8 inches horizontally for level slab. 3.4 FORMWORK A. Form vertical surfaces of concrete work. B. Design,construct,and remove formwork and related items in accordance with most stringent requirements of ACI 117 and 347. C. Form Preparation: 1. Clean formwork. 2. Remove rust from steel formwork. D. Erecting Forms: 1. Butt joints and provide backup splice at joints as required to prevent faulting at form. 2. Do not tape formwork joints. 3. Just before placing concrete,clean forms and adjacent surfaces again as necessary. Remove wood,sawdust, chips dirt and other debris. 4. If necessary to grease tie threads,do not allow grease to contact remainder of tie when wall will be exposed to hydrostatic pressure. E. Form Release Agent: 1. Before placing reinforcing steel,thoroughly coat contact surfaces of forms with form release agent. 2. Apply form release agent evenly without excess drip. 03312-13 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Do not allow form release agent to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. 4. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form release agents are not used. F. Provide slab side forms,of form materials specified,full depth,with beveled,level, and smooth top surface for all slabs on ground where SOV is greater than FF 35/FL 25. G. Provide slab side forms such that by placing a 10-foot straightedge,form does not exceed 1/8 inch variation. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Install vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E 1643 except that Paragraph 10—Slab Moisture Content provisions shall not apply. B. Install vapor retarder directly under slabs where shown on Drawings. C. Following leveling and tamping of prepared base for slabs,place vapor retarder sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of placement. D. Lap joints 6 inches minimum and seal continuously with specified tape. E. Seal punctures and tears in membrane caused by bar chair feet,screed anchors,or utility penetrations with specified tape. F. Sequence installation of vapor retarder no more than 40 feet in advance of laser screed strike-off. G. Do not disturb or damage vapor retarder while placing granular fill. If damage occurs, repair prior to concrete placement. 3.6 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcing in accordance with of ACI 117,ACI 301, ACI 318 and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and Placing Reinforcing Bars. B. Accurately place and secure reinforcement against displacement by firmly wiring at intersections and splices. C. Turn wire ends away from concrete exterior. D. Ensure reinforcing is clean,free from defects and kinks,loose mill or rust scale or coatings that will reduce bond. E. Protect exposed reinforcing bars,inserts and plates intended for bonding with future expansion from corrosion. F. When welding of reinforcement is specified,comply with AWS D1.4.Do not tack weld crossing bars for assembly of reinforcement,supports or embedded items. G. Slab on Ground and Pavement Dowels: 1. Secure dowels and sleeves(if required)perpendicular to joint and parallel to finished concrete surface. 2. Use prefabricated dowel supports at ends of dowels to maintain alignment,if necessary. 3. Dowel alignment shall be within specified tolerances. 4. Dowels shall be manufactured to provide bond break between steel and concrete. 5. Do not grease dowels. 6. Install dowels at construction joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Install slab on ground plate dowels within+/- 1/8 inch in dowel alignment in vertical and horizontal planes. 8. Install slab on ground plate dowels horizontally on the bulkhead at the greater depth of either mid-slab or 2- 1/4 inch from slab surface to center line of the plate. 3.7 EMBEDMENTS 03312-14 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Install anchor bolts and embedded bearing devices provided by others. B. Provide other anchor bolts and bearing devices shown on Drawings or anchor bolt setting plans or required equipment installation. C. Use templates as required for spacing between anchor bolts and set elevations with surveying equipment. D. Position and anchor steel shapes, anchor bolts, casings, conduit sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials embedded in concrete. E. Place and secure against displacement miscellaneous steel, pipe sleeves, inserts, anchors, stair abrasive nosings, preformed joint filler,vapor retarders and miscellaneous embedded items. F. Secure embedments to formwork when possible. G. Install clean embedments. After concrete placement, clean embedment exposed surfaces of concrete splatter and other foreign substances. H. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, ensure corner protection angles,bars and other similar embedded metal items are continuous between concrete joints. If shorter lengths are required for metal items, connect the ends by butt-welding entire joint and grinding smooth exposed surface. Ensure embedded metal items are discontinued at construction,contraction and isolation joints. I. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves and inserts with easily removable materials. J. Allow sufficient time between erection of forms and placing concrete for other trades to install and test their work. K. Before placing concrete on grade,piping and other utilities under concrete shall be inspected,tested,and excavations backfilled and properly compacted to solid bearing. 3.8 CONVEYING A. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable and in manner which will assure obtaining specified quality of concrete. B. Concrete materials for interior slabs on ground shall be directly deposited from the concrete ready mix truck tailgate or conveyed or transported by buggy to point of placement. Pump placement of materials shall not be performed for interior slabs unless approved in writing for access inside a previously existing structure. C. Re-tempering:Discard concrete which has already begun to set.Do not re-temper with water. D. Equipment: Provide mixing and conveying equipment of proper size and design to ensure a continuous flow of concrete to delivery end.Do not use aluminum pipe or equipment in contact with concrete. 1. Mixers,agitators and non-agitating units:Conform to ASTM C 94 and current certification requirements of Department of Transportation in state where concrete plant is located. 2. Belt Conveyers: a. Use only types which will not cause segregation. b. Discharge runs over 30 feet into hopper 3. Chutes:Metal or metal lined not to be installed at slopes greater than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. 4. Runways: a. Provide runways or other means above finished concrete level for wheeled conveying equipment. b. Do not support runways on reinforcing. c. Do not wheel equipment directly over reinforcing or metal deck. 5. Pumps: a. Use pump hoses and other slickline components with 5 inch minimum inside diameter. b. For slickline reducers,reduction in diameter shall not exceed 1 inch over a 5 foot length. 03312-15 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.9 PLACING CONCRETE A. Unless otherwise specified,place concrete in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301. B. The following personnel shall be present during all slab placements: Contractor's Superintendent, Concrete Subcontractor's Finish Foreman, Concrete Supplier's Quality Control Representative, and Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory. C. Depositing: 1. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign matter. 2. Deposit concrete continuously in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. 3. Between construction joints,place concrete in a continuous operation such that concrete is plastic at all times and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 4. Use placement procedures to avoid segregation. 5. Deposit concrete as near as possible to its final position. 6. Densified Floor Slabs:Place concrete in one continuous placement up to a maximum of 20,000 square feet. Placement over 20,000 sq ft may be performed provided written approval by Wal-Mart is obtained contingent upon the Contractor's demonstration of ability,equipment,and personnel to handle the increased areas. 7. Do not place concrete over standing water,mud,frost,ice or snow. 8. Do not use wet screeds. D. Consolidation: 1. Consolidate concrete complying with ACI 301 by vibrating,spading or rodding so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcing,embedded items and into the corner of forms. 2. Consolidate each layer of concrete with previously placed layers in manner that will eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing,pitting or places of weakness. 3. Do not insert vibrator into portions of concrete that have begun to set. 4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete. 5. Keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete operations. 6. Use internal vibrator for formed elements,not form vibrators. 7. Slabs: a. Consolidate and screed concrete slabs-on-ground to allow construction joint pattern as indicated on Structural Drawings and as specified. Consolidate concrete by vibrating laser screeds. Other vibratory screeding methods are acceptable only in areas where laser screed is not accessible. 1) Check laser screed level head a minimum of 3 times during each pour. Use feeler gauge to measure deviations. If deviations are present,replace head with a new straight one. b. Use internal vibration along construction joints at both formed and slab abutments. Vibrate under plate dowels.Mark forms before concreting to properly locate dowels after concreting. c. Do not use grate tampers,jitterbugs,or mesh rollers. E. After concrete placement,adjust forms and bracing as necessary to maintain proper alignment and eliminate leakage of cement paste. 3.10 FLOOR SLAB FINISHING A. General: 1. Do not add water to any slab surface during finishing operations. 2. Do not add cement to any slab surface during finishing operations. 3. Perform no finishing operation while water is present on slab surface. B. Initial Leveling: 1. Complete bull floating,darbying and straight-edging before any bleed water is present on slab surface. 2. Use a 10 feet wide minimum channel float for initial and later leveling instead of bull float where overall floor tolerances specified are greater than FF 20/FL15. C. Hand and Power Floating: 03312-16 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Do not start floating until following conditions are met: a. Bleeding is complete and water is gone,including water sheen on slab surface. b. Concrete will sustain the weight of finishers without creating more than 1/8 to 1/4 inch indentations. c. Mortar is not thrown by rotating blades of power float. 2. The finisher shall determine the proper time to start finishing procedures for interior slab placements on the basis the above conditions. It is noted for advisory purposes,however,that typical setting characteristics of concrete materials will allow for initial power floating to begin 3-1/2 hour's± 1 hour after initial strike-off (screeding),at which time the concrete should support a finisher on foot without more than approximately a 1/4 inch indentation in the slab surface. Variations in concrete materials, nature and proportion of supplementary cementing materials,and concrete temperature will cause setting behavior to vary. 3. Do not use following tools for floating: a. Power troweling machines with trowel blades. b. Fresno or other type of wide metal trowel. c. Power floating machine with water attachment for wetting concrete. 4. Float three times minimum with each floating at right angles to previous floating,and final pass at 45 degrees to previous pass. D. Troweling for Interior Slabs: 1. Hand or power float floor before starting troweling. 2. For first troweling, keep blade as flat as possible and use low speed, minimizing "washboard"or"chatter marks"and"pitting". 3. Trowel two times minimum with first two trowelings at right angles. Some burn marks are acceptable as determined in review of the test slab.Cease troweling before trowel blades scratch surface. 4. Allow time between trowelings for concrete to stiffen and water sheen to disappear. 5. Do not add water to slab surface during troweling. 6. Do not ride trowels on existing hardened concrete slabs.Trowels shall be carried off of slab surfaces.When parking power trowels on fresh concrete, place on top of plywood or spray area with evaporation retarder before placing trowel on top of slab. E. Pitch to drains: Form 18 inch radius around floor drains and pitch concrete surface to drains at rate of 1/4 inch per foot nominal,unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 3.11 CONCRETE FINISHES A. Formed Surfaces: 1. As-Cast Finish: a. Apply on concrete surfaces not exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. b. Clip or rub off fins exceeding 1/2 inch in height.Leave surfaces with texture imparted by forms. 2. Smooth-Form Finish: a. Apply on concrete surfaces exposed to public view and where noted on Drawings. b. Remove fins exceeding 1/8 inch in height. B. Unformed Finishes: 1. Scratched Finish:After floating lightly scratch surface with stiff brush. C. Troweled Finish: 1. After floating,power trowel or hand trowel surface. 2. Ensure kneeboard impressions,trowel marks or chattered areas are not evident after floor is finished. 3. Provide dense, smooth trowel surface, uniform in texture. Random, mottled burn marks are desired and acceptable.Refer to approved permanent test panel. 4. Finish surface to produce maximum sheen free of scratches and trowel marks. D. Floor Finish Schedule: 1. Scratched Finish: Use for surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for tile and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring materials,except bonded concrete floor toppings. 2. Troweled Finish: a. Use for exposed interior walking surfaces and surfaces to be covered with carpet, resilient flooring and other thin film finish coating systems. 03312-17 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Roughen surface until coarse aggregate is exposed. 4. Clean surface. 5. Immediately before placing concrete, clean surface again as necessary, dampen surface and remove free water. 6. Apply a commercial epoxy bonding agent or a bonding grout composed of one part cement, 1.5 parts fine sand with 100%passing No. 8 sieve,and a 50:50 bonding admixture with water to achieve the consistency of thick paint. The water/cement ratio for bonding grout shall not exceed that of the new concrete being placed on it. 3.12 JOINTS A. Provide construction,isolation,and contraction joints as indicated on Drawings and as noted below. 1. Bulkheads for construction joints shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum lumber with top outside edge beveled 30 degrees minimum, leaving 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch level surface. Do not use permanent preformed metal bulkheads. 2. Provide bulkheads full depth of member. 3. Space joints to allow one continuous placement between bulkheads. 4. Maximum length-to-width ratio for concrete panels defined by walls or joints shall be 1-1/2:1. 5. Do not locate longitudinal construction joints in action alleys. 6. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,do not extend reinforcement, corner protection angles, bars, or other fixed metal items through joints in slabs or through joints between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces. 7. Match joints in walls and curbs with joints in slabs on ground and pavements. 8. Extend joints across tops of walls and curbs unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 9. Isolation Joints:Form isolation joints in accordance with Section 07900. B. Provide contraction slab joints as indicated on Drawings. 1. After saw cutting with attached vacuum system,immediately clean slab surface of all sawing residues. 2. See Drawings for additional requirements. 3. Saw cut to width of 1/8 inch by 1/4 the slab depth,unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 4. Use saws,blades, skid plates, and accessories by Soff-Cut International, Inc., (951)272-2330 or approved equal. 5. Start cutting sawed joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling or dislodging of • aggregates. This will typically be from 1 hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold weather after completing finishing of slab in that joint location. 6. Employ sufficient number of saws and workers to complete cutting saw joints before shrinkage produces cracking. 7. Provide at least two Soff-Cut saws with specified vacuums on Site with blades capable of achieving the required depth of saw cut. 8. Extend sawed joint to the slab boundaries and abutments, including columns,drains,and other penetrations in the path of a defined joint. Implement methods and timing of the saw cut beyond the limits of the Soff- Cut saw reach to provide a consistent depth of cut with minimal raveling of joint edges. C. Saw-Cut Control Joint Dust Collection: 1. Connect a dust collection system directly to each Soff-Cut saw being used. 2. Dust Collection System: a. ProVac Dust Collection System by GladTech, Inc.,Nashville,TN(614)251-8111. b. SoffVac by Soff-Cut International,Inc. D. Joint filling and sealing of concrete floors is specified in Section 07900. Joint filling of concrete floors under resilient tile and carpet floor covering is specified in Sections 09650 and 09680 respectively. 3.13 CURING A. Curing Compound(Temporary Film Forming): 1. Apply curing compound after saw joints have been cut and as soon as concrete surface will not be damaged by curing operations. 2. Clean slab surface and joints and remove loose or compacted saw debris prior to curing compound application. 03312-18 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Apply compound at a rate of 700 to 1000 square feet per gallon with high volume,low pressure,atomized sprayer in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Prevent over-application in excess of specified rate. 4. Spread compound evenly using mopping pads.Mopping pads shall be Rubbermaid 24 inch Microfiber Wet Room Pad or equivalent. 5. If whitening from over application occurs,consult manufacturer for removal of product with hot water and aggressive scrubbing. 6. Do not allow compound to accumulate and puddle. 7. Do not use polyethylene sheets or other impervious covers on exposed interior floors. 3.14 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to support its own weight and imposed construction loads. B. Remove forms in manner to avoid damage to concrete. C. Formwork for slabs, curbs and other parts not supporting vertical load of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations,but in no case sooner than 12 hours. 3.15 DENSIFIER TREATMENT A. Densifier for concrete floor slabs is specified in Section 03362. 3.16 CONCRETE FLOOR POLISHING(BURNISHING) A. Burnishing concrete floor slabs which have received densifier is specified in Section 03362. 3.17 TOLERANCES A. Conform to most stringent requirements of ACI 117 and ACI 301 except as specified herein. B. Floor Flatness(FF)and Floor Levelness(FL): Tolerances for trowel finished slabs shall be in accordance with ACI 117 as follows: 1. The minimum local area shall be bound on each side by column lines. 2. Interior Slabs on Ground(Sales): Specified Overall Value(SOV)FF 50/FL 35 and Minimum Local Value (MLV)FF 33/FL 24. 3. Interior Slabs on Ground (Non-Sales): Specified Overall Value (SOV)FF 35 /FL 25 and Minimum Local Value(MLV)FF 24/FL 17. 4. Suspended Floor Slabs:Specified Overall Value(SOV)FF 25 and Minimum Local Value(MLV)FF 20. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not be considered a substitute for the Contractor's responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor Relative to Owner Testing: 1. Notify CTL not less than 3 working days prior to placing concrete. 2. Assist Owner's agency in securing field specimens 3. Concrete Supplier and Aggregate Supplier shall have representatives available to assist CTL in obtaining representative samples. 3.19 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) 03312-19 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B(Section 03312). 3.20 NON CONFORMING WORK A. When directed by Owner,remove and replace or repair concrete related Work which does not conform to specified requirements including strength,tolerances and finishes. B. When directed by Owner, remove and replace slabs-on-ground with surfaces measuring below either specified FF and/or FL minimum local values. C. At option of Owner,Contractor may be allowed to submit alternatives for remediation to slabs-on-ground measuring below either or both specified FF and FL minimum local values. D. Costs for corrective work,remedies for out-of-tolerance work,and extra testing as required by defective work shall be borne by Contractor. 3.21 PROTECTION A. Slab Protection: 1. Protect slabs from staining prior to application of densifier specified in Section 03362. 2. Protect finished floors to prevent damage including staining, gouges and scratching by construction traffic and activities until Owner possession. a. Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after placing and finishing. b. 3 days after placement:Foot traffic permitted.No construction materials in contact with slab surface. c. 5 days after placement: Scissor lift traffic permitted. 3. Keep slabs free from dirt and grime. 4, Provide impact protection to slab with approved sheet materials. Remove or consolidate impact protection materials on a regular basis to prevent discoloring. The use of plastic sheets for impact protection is prohibited. 5. Prohibit foot traffic by workers and others not involved in floor construction or finishing operations in areas where floor construction or finishing operations are being performed. 6. Vehicles and equipment may be driven on concrete surface within building line only if the slab is protected by the following: a. Diaper hydraulically-powered equipment. b. Place non-absorbent drop cloths or other breathable slab protection that will not stain slab surface under parked vehicles. c. Vehicles and equipment are equipped with non-marking tires. d. Tire treads are inspected for debris prior to use on slab and a least once per day. Remove embedded items which may cause damage to floor slab. 7. Clean up spills on slab immediately. Provide cleaning chemicals and absorptive materials. 8. Storage of structural steel or metal fabrications is prohibited on concrete surface within building line. 9, Storage of construction materials is prohibited on sales floor surface. 10. Pipe cutting machinery is prohibited on concrete surface within building line. 11. Adequately protect concrete inserts and other embedded items from movement, mechanical injury, or from damage by elements. 12. Provide access ramps of compacted earth or other means along exposed concrete edges of floor slabs to prevent equipment and machinery from impacting edges. Barricade other exposed edges to vehicular traffic which may damage edges. B. Concrete Floor Protection Plan: Develop Concrete Floor Protection Plan that addresses the following procedures: 1. Communication of protection plan to subcontractors and vendors,including those directly contracted by the Owner. 2. Procedures for compliance with slab protection requirements specified in this Section. 3. When and how floor covering protection will be provided in high traffic areas. 4. Condition,inspection,and operational procedures for construction equipment allowed on the slab surface. 5. Procedures for cleaning up slab spills,including use of and availability of cleaning chemicals and absorptive materials at Site. 03312-20 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 C. Submit Concrete Floor Protection Plan as specified in Part 1 of this Section. Comply with the requirements of approved Concrete Floor Protection Plan. 3.22 CLEANING A. Provide daily scrubbing of the entire exposed concrete slab surface with fuel powered riding equipment that utilizes only pads and water,Daily scrubbing shall continue from time of dried initial application of surface densifier until time of store turnover. Use white or red pads,cleaned or replaced daily,and avoid using excessive downward head pressure that may damage the slab surface. END OF SECTION 03312-21 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 WAL-MART STORES CONCRETE SLAB MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM (Section 03312—Cast-in-Place Concrete Slabs) Date ❑DISCOUNT STORE ❑ SUPERCENTER El MARKET ❑SAM'S CLUB SUBMITTED MIX DESIGN STORE INFORMATION Interior Building Slabs STORE# ❑ 03312-SLN Natural Concrete(gray) ADDRESS Mix ID# CITY,ST ❑03312-SLC Integrally Colored Concrete GENERAL CONTRACTOR Mix ID# COMPANY * Same basic proportions for all interior slab concrete JOBSITE PHONE A. CONCRETE INFORMATION Design Strength(f c) psi Water/Cementitious Ratio Total Air Content Mix Developed From ❑Trial Mix Test Data(attach test data) 0 Field Experience(attach data) Density Wet pcf Dry pcf Slump " (f 1")WITHOUT WR Admixture " (f 1")WITH WR Admixture Ambient Conditions for which mix is valid Temperature Min. Max. Humidity Min. Max. B. ADMIXTURE INFORMATION ASTM Designation Product Dosage(ounces) (Manufacturer/Brand) oz/cy oz/cwt Water Reducing Water Reducing and Retarding Accelerating _ Integral Color 03312-23 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 C. MIX DESIGN Mix Proportions(per cubic yard) Identification Weight Density Volume %Aggregate (Type,size,source,etc.) (pounds) (SSD) (cubic feet) Absorption Cement Fly Ash Slag(GGBFS) Coarse Aggregate#1 #2 #3 Fine Aggregate #1 #2 Water Entrapped Air Content Liquid Color TOTALS Coarse&Fine Aggregate Gradation Information %Passing Each Sieve (All Sieve Sizes must be entered) Combined%Retained Sieve Coarse Coarse Coarse Fine Fine Combined Size Agg.#1 Agg.#2 Agg.#3 Agg.#1 Agg.#2 %Passing Cumulative Individual 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" _ 1/2" 3/8" #4 #8 # 16 #30 #50 # 100 #200 %of Vol Aggregate Ratios Coarseness Factor= Combined%cumulative retained 3/8"sieve Combined%cumulative retained#8 sieve Workability Factor= Combined%passing#8 sieve = Adj-Workability Factor= WF+[(Cementitious Material-564)=37.6] _ Allowable Adj-WF= Adj-WF= [(11.25-.15 CF)+36]±2.5 = Low High 03312-24 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. ATTACHMENTS: Include the following with this Mix Design Report. ❑ Mill test reports for Portland cement. ❑ Mill test reports for fly ash,and ground granulated blast furnace slag materials if used in approved SCM mix. El Designation,type,quality,and source(natural or manufactured)of coarse and fine aggregate materials ❑ Mill test reports for Portland cement,fly ash,and ground granulated blast furnace slag materials ❑ Separate aggregate gradation reports including all required sieve sizes • Gradation sieve report tests dated within 60 days of this report • Report for each coarse and fine aggregate material in mix ❑ Statement if possible reactivity of aggregate,based on tests or past service ❑ Statement if possible aggregate pop-outs or their disruptions,based on tests or past service ❑ Product data for the following admixtures: • Chloride ion data and related calculations • Water reducing • Water reducing and retarding • Accelerating • Integral color ❑ Concrete compressive strength data used for standard deviation calculations. ❑ Measured water-soluble chloride ion content.(percent by weight of cement) ❑ Time of initial setting per ASTM C 403 if approved SCM mix is used. E. CONCRETE SUPPLIER INFORMATION Company Name Tel.# ( ) Address City,ST Zip Technical Contact Cell# ( ) e-mail Sales Contact Cell# ( ) PRIMARY PLANT SECONDARY PLANT Plant Location: Miles from Site: Travel Time to Site: NRMCA Certified: 0 YES 0 NO ❑YES 0 NO State DOT Certified: 0 YES 0 NO ❑YES 0 NO Batch Mixing Type: ❑DRY ❑CENTRAL MIX 0 DRY ❑CENTRAL MIX 03312-25 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 CONCRETE FINISHING SUBCONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT SECTION 03312 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLAB Project Location: Date: Project Number: Store Number: By signing below Contractor confirms that the concrete finishing subcontractor meets the following requirements: The concrete finishing subcontractor lead finisher and two additional members of the finishing crew are certified under the Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program as granted by the American Concrete Institute. The concrete floor finishing subcontractor has experience in finishing floors of similar size and scope in at least 5 previous projects. The names and locations of these projects are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Concrete Finishing Subcontractor Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: ( ) Contractor Company Name and Address: Signed by: Date: Attach certificates from the Concrete Flatwork Finisher Training and Certification Program for lead finisher and two additional members of the finishing crew. Submit one copy of this Statement to the Architect. 03312-27 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 CONCRETE SUBMITTAL REGISTER SUMMARY (Reference Submittals paragraph in Part 1 for submittal details.) SUBMITTAL SUBMIT TO SUBMITTAL DUE Concrete Finishing Subcontractor's Qualification Architect 30 days prior to first pour Statement • 3 ACI Finisher Certifications Sieve Analysis for Aggregate Base System Architect 30 days after award of • Aggregate Base MaterialContract Owner's Construction Testing • Choker Material Laboratory(CTL) Mix Design Architect 30 days prior to first pour • One mix for all interior slabs Owner's Construction Testing • Submit on form provided Laboratory(CTL) Structural Engineer of Record Owner's Construction Manager Attachments to Concrete Mix Design Architect 30 days prior to first pour • Mill test reports Owner's Construction Testing • Concrete aggregate designation,type, Laboratory(CTL) type,quality,&source • Sieve analysis for concrete aggregate Structural Engineer of Record • Concrete Aggregate Supplier Statement Owner's Construction Manager • Product data for concrete admixtures • Concrete compressive strength data • Chloride-Ion content • Time of initial setting Slab Reinforcing Bar Shop Drawings Architect 30 days prior to first pour • Installation details Owner's Construction Testing Perimeter foundation tie reinforcing submittals are Laboratory(CTL) submitted under Section 03310. Slab Joint and Placement Plan Architect 30 days prior to first pour Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL) Pre-slab Installation Meeting Owner's Concrete Consultant 3 days after meeting. • Record of notification Owner's Construction Manager Meeting agenda Owner's Construction Testing • Meeting minutes Laboratory(CTL) Submit meting minutes to all meeting attendees. Concrete Floor Protection Plan Owner's Construction Manager Prior to first pour Delivery Tickets Owner's Construction Testing With delivery of each load Laboratory(CTL) 03312-29 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 0 a. t; ! -4,,...+.. 1, :,..t:ii :}..s CS;i•I.l,.t,, i,ii ! ;-a:.,xir,�i.,h 2 1}.-'4,i...fi{i 4 •,4F, I j i N.;.,In..1'`rz t �i ,(iv{ti �,{li,t 1 F P'�.`F��{i.i I ti,t 1 -k $Nµt tpttts}.F`!h.F S3�t• ' :n t.t+:..{..,t...,y;1'd.1t.4I•.tI,..n..,....t.0t4 rr."6,»'t. }1::'!�'.,I.r.q.�; }'r,� :,J. 7!,k;:°?�}� t I ..i;;,�.'a• .. L :,,t �1 'i ' �}�331'Ii.{i }a' � ' 5- f�, ln.,.i .{ 4'. „! .I t • �� . . •L .',. da. STORE# PROTOTYPE# ❑EXPANSION DATE OF PLACEMENT w a STORE ADDRESS O GENERAL CONTRACTOR CONTACT ,„ CONCRETE FINISHER CONTACT CONCRETE SUPPLIER CONTACT TESTING FIRM TECHNICIAN ..,v:;.:;,•!4'If1b:•O:,C:',tt ..,ti .•:,f:'..'iutl 0•';d'l T it'h .4•,r":•;3'I.:'sn`i`...!,.n{ „{:`l"M",Ynr: HF'.L.!.cn..n.,ta.,t•1 z,,;t,„,...1„.,.�t,,,'n,._.,n,x,:.,.,.•...,?,,'?.z.iit.ta.,„.,{:,r,.,t....i,u+.:•,s.:,,.h,..'„.,.l»ar..h,...;},�•„.„.dY7an�.11n!„..,3,:....:l,a-.,a,.Fr.,,�..:.r•-l,1',{ri•,,„E,:r.!.•�.0,.!L.....i,,.h,,.::,.,..a,s...}.(..!.st::w:t'.(:.h'{-,.:t...a.,..j,.. ,r,, .,.F.•+i,t,..,•,.,..„..n. t.,,a..,.1,:.,,,a'.t,.!.E.$t S jt�..t_”•.r;�a...:....,.t,.+..'.,(.!t+:,�...,,'1:i.i,...s.,li:,It.r u!,,$..•:.tt,...,..•,,,t.=.,.'-r,1,,:1„..i,s°}„.,Gi.,1t.S.f.,t.!C.t'..�s..`Y,h..t.t...+.{•!.,,,,,,.}r�t,l t.s.st.....,.lus.�.:t;•_C�,�.... �t...,.,:1,.,_'.9.,.,.4r,_+t...r,r._ ,,.....1,I,1V!_,;_I_F:.r:-I::k..,-}„Fi.n...i',.,I,''"�{t�!!•,•.Ctat,{,.lr.....}!',i.-..„:..a•I$.:u•,,;n,..._!�,,3..,.•+,f.v,.t,t•,..4..a,ii.l..,L...,)I tc,..I3.:,!..(I„:!,..u:B,a_'r:,i•.;.,":.��,q.,.4,a�.,,;r•{._.+..:.;.1..l,.:n�,.t.t. il•;u},{.(,r,.,. ....,�f{,I.,.t:.s n.. i.t. i ..I,t ..,{.t, ! 7.,.r.,a,ult.•i�3.h,.k.,.ir,tn�lu.d... �:MI6!IudlatLi:ia:.�,..N.;ur,{.rl;}itieiLtilit�.`��.h,.f:,L!.v.711•�.,.i„•,1,..ch.,» :.-., ,_•ts:.bS.,'r. t, ,!,tl.+ h,r.. .,.':r�tLtsn,In.,.r:un..lu.�Pu:,..L,,,J,. .ti._.,..,,,.?fa.,,,t..{..,,ai,:.mtJ,,,..,.�.1u:�31n•I .l,.,ta.!.. ., ,. , n. ,.::.,:.!.:7., ,..t:... .._ .. ,... .:. ........ ........ ...... .. ..> ..,.,,:,._.�;..., i�:...,.{ „wu•'::,:! ,'-r: ,.r'+;,•ua';nuaa,? r.c.c•,!', r.!� ..n'x,•,8 i.t;::! ....I,+, . :.,!. .. . :r: :.... ....:... ... ,, t. y.y.!r,n 1 n.,a..r._ w,,. _,,,,i :!l :cri 1I F ni, s•.,,. fn. d,: ri u .,. f ..t,•s•',.. :,It .t t •.I.,.,,Y{{.t„e h,!1 I •."tr,. ._t 7.{::,! ,.I I ly ah, .f, 7 .r...-L, !, �7 _ }}P t 7•t r !,•U. ,t.i.7. .!. ! ',1 :, ±s;. !, Int L. 1� ,} *1:7`r,.t; :•: a`a2n 1_:J t, t .,, . .,.'t•`,. ,,:s:l•.,,.{ 1' t t x s,-.. I.d'(. !! zt at.t, 6r ,l. �„ .�-::� {{,.t hf,d ,E. t 6. r 4. 'II. tL .{. ,.tt.. a r.tltsr:. � .•t 4. �. � { ,,.i;,„.!. .�,;..��t .t•y.,,.• �!.„ ..t.., I,,,;t`t.;,,,=S„ •.!:-,•t}e t+::ter:..,...,:,,�,;t(.+;, ! t:7{,i E }'�41 1�, r 7}r�.� :4[i'” . t _,;ytn...y;,,•,.,t. t.,, ( .,,. :F.?':�hr, � .,.,4?,:. w7m et t..,h. !S}. ,�,, f,h.. 0.. ,1 vi F. }'.1 h•t uh„•..6'filra t .t•�?..!' a t t r Y i',..,•! .'h,..l..t{ ,,t,•I, 7 ,�.(”�.. ii�'ly'L .i 1 u4.t:I!, _:`7.;,110. �1. ..,1,. .1. .f! q•l.a.t. Ft;i 4.y Ln {{ a a t ! ll... -}'( wl - t i. _{': �a -CP 7•il" i. ?.l:I7 4,q ,: •p,l7�y ,a Il..- 1 :I. '�.i:.. Vii.• 'f {'f .d, .y •I.1 1.I;,r .�:. t'?��:11, .l'� f.'i ,+ 1� { .!,- I ,�..:I.. ;1.. 'I .,� -I .',..i.;�:,• .�t 1, ...,'t,.il•i::t.” �,:R'f tY.�( 141. �;I,• :~*..,, � I� ,,.dl. -�:r 1, I .t;<:4, 116 ,w:�l� .,t trn•k„. :7..1 :i.. <!' •1. a. �+..: s, .M,. .....,.,.t;:sN,:t,t,,.nett•'t:.•,.,rGa,_,t.�,_�....s�t-?r t 1 .L•,h�r�lva,k!}<.n.ts�^aF.:._... '.ia']�R!,au:',;::h yemaGnlvQt;�tt:!„_1>:ra_1efu,m;Ft,att�4.•41•.0>:1�n>,�nc� `u+t.M2aata.:=f.�nm,u:httar_�LL,.u) .,d=...,.t,1 '�tP.�t,.��,..., 7F6_ 1st Truck# Ticket# Location of placement•— 0 0 0\ COARSENESS FACTOR CHART 48 r, - — 46 IV , — 44 -- Ill Too Fme ,.'` Optimal for - --- 42 ..... --' 11r" Mone . _ 40 -s! - -- — �'4a w or smeller �,..'� :e400 — 38 es �� II w .0• — 36 It , n. _ Gap7Graded - 32 i — 30 1 It#tt 28 • — 26 Too Coarse - 24 i 1 • 1 - t - 1 • 1 - I I ---,- 22 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Coarseness Factor (% plus 48 retained on 318" sieve) 03312-31 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Unispec 012712 SECTION 03362(03 3562)—BURNISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is included to provide information on the existing interior concrete slab. All new concrete slab shall match these specifications. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new slab is required. B. Section Includes:Densification and burnishing of concrete floor slabs. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03312-Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs(Interior).Concrete for interior slabs on grade. 2. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1028-Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction(SCOF)of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 2. ASTM D1455- Standard Test Method for 60°Specular Gloss of Emulsion Floor Polish 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Dispense densifier material from factory numbered and sealed drums.Maintain record of drum numbers. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by burnishing. B. Limit and control damage from moisture.Remove standing moisture from floor after densifier application. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent as specified hereinafter for the specific product: 1. 3 M (888)364-3577 2. Convergent Concrete Technologies,Orem,UT(866)375-2280. 3. Stonekor LLC,Adairsville,GA(800)633-0519. 4. HTC,Knoxville,TN_(877)482-8700. 5. Pioneer Eclipse,Sparta,NC(800)367-3550. 6. Prosoco,Lawrence,KS,(866)363-4567. 7. Substrate Technology, Inc.,(815)941-4800 8. Superior Surface Solutions,Kansas City,MO(888)471-5227. 9. SealSource International,Orem,Utah, (800)305-9144. 2.2 DENSIFIER PRODUCTS 03362-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Pre-Densifier Floor Cleaner: As recommended by densifier manufacturer. B. Densifier: Concrete lithium based chemical densifier specifically for concrete surface treatment which reacts chemically to the concrete surface forming a clear,dense,durable,hard,abrasion-resistant surface. Product shall be a colorless,odorless,water-based solution that is less than 50 g/L VOC. 1. Prentra-Sil(NL)by Convergent. 2. Consolideck LS by Prosoco. 3. SS Harden X by SealSource. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that the correct amount of densifier is onsite and in numbered containers prior to commencement of work. 3.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. Scrubbing And Burnishing Equipment: 1. Scrubber Machines Equipment used for cleaning operations shall be Clark Encore Max38 or L38 with a head pressure of 150 lbs.or similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. 2. Burnishing Machine:High speed propane burnisher,with a min.27 inch head generating pad speeds of 1,500 RPM or higher as verified with tachometer. B. Burnishing Pads: Pads as follows or equivalent as required to produce specified results: 1. Diamond Impregnated Pads: a. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads by HTC. b. Scotch-Brite Diamond Floor Pads Plus by 3M. c. Vortex Diamond Impregnated Pad by Superior Surface Solutions. d. CASH Diamond Impregnated Pad by Substrate Technology,Inc. C. Sprayer:Manufacturer approved high volume,low pressure sprayer and sprayer tip. 3.3 GENERAL CLEANING AND BURNISHING REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with joint filling operations.Do not perform wet cleaning within 72 hrs prior to joint filling. B. Do not use stain or scuff removing agents such as"crete-strip". C. Clean floors as specified hereinafter prior to application of densifier. D. Burnish floors as specified hereinafter after application of densifier. E. Utilize riding machines to the maximum extent practical to achieve optimum efficiency. F. The final surface gloss value shall be as produced and accepted on the Floor Test Slab specified in Section 03312 and shall match existing conditions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Use sweeping compound to control airborne dust. Scrape floor to remove remaining saw cut residue and paint droppings. Remove paint droppings with soft,damp cloth and solvent stripper. Do not use stripper with an acidic pH. B. Treat oil spots with oil emulsifier and oil absorber materials. C. Double scrub floor with scrubber machine and appropriate brushes or pads and pH compatible detergent. 03362-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.5 DENSIFIER APPLICATION A. Area to be Treated:Apply densifier to all interior concrete floors. B. Examination and Preparation: 1. Examine surfaces receiving densifier. Verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 2. Vacuum and clean saw cut joints and surrounding area so that no dust remains to react with concrete finish material. 3. Remove remnant of temporary film forming curing compound prior to application of densifier. Remove compound by cleaning and scrubbing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Scrub floor with pre-densifier floor cleaner to remove latent salts. 5. Verify floor is free of curing membrane,bond-breaker,and construction laitance. 6. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Application: 1. Application shall be performed by certified applicator in accordance with manufacturers published instructions. 2. Schedule to begin 7 days after floor slab placement. 3. Employ methods to ensure concrete surface is not damaged during application,including discoloration. 4. Apply densifier finish at the rate of 500 square feet per gallon. 5. Apply with low pressure sprayer with enough coverage to keep concrete surface wet for minimum 20 minute period. 6. When treated surface gels and becomes slippery under foot, lightly sprinkle surface with water and agitate with broom to redistribute special concrete finish material evenly across surface. 7. After surface again becomes slippery,using garden hose with garden-type spray nozzle,flush entire surface with water-removing excess material,alkali,or impurities.Squeegee or wet-vac surface dry to remove excess material to avoid whitening of concrete during curing. Whitening of concrete by over-application of hardener/densifier may be cause for rejection. 8. Apply second coat of densifier 2 weeks prior to Owner Possesion,apply over surfaces to which densifier has been applied. 9. Apply densifier finish at the rate of 1000 square feet per gallon. 10. Apply with low pressure sprayer with enough coverage to keep concrete surface wet for minimum 20 minute period. 3.6 DISPOSAL A. Upon completion of each densifier treatment,dispose of excess densifier material as required by local agency having jurisdiction. B. Certified applicator shall remove all densifier product containers from job site immediately upon completion of work. 3.7 BURNISHING PROCEDURE A. Allow second coat of densifier to dry. B. Wet burnish at a slow movement pace using burnishing machine with 800 grit diamond impregnated or hogs hair burnishing pads. C. Continue wet burnishing operations until the specified gloss is attained. Achieve specified gloss not later than two weeks prior to Owner Possession and maintain specified gloss levels until Owner Possession. D. Do not use any burnishing pad that may damage the concrete slab surface prior to strength development at any given time of the burnishing process. The development of specified gloss values shall be attained through proper densification and mechanical burnishing with the correct specified pads required for the given surface condition. 03362-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 E. Provide final burnishing prior to Owner Possession to eliminate any scratches resulting from construction operations. 3.8 FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Appearance: 1. All polished slab surfaces shall have a uniform Class A (Cream), Level 3 (Semi-Polished) appearance in accordance with the Concrete Polishing Association of America (CPAA) Position Paper titled "Bonded Abrasive Polished Concrete Defined"(http://www.concretepolishingassociation.com) 2. Polishing procedure shall leave no evidence of scratching or streaking from uneven polishing. 3. White residue or hazy appearance in the finished surface will not be accepted. B. Measured Gloss Values: Measured surface gloss values within the exposed concrete(EC)floor areas shown on the drawings to receive a Measured Gloss shall be between 30 and 55 in accordance with ASTM D1455 as measured using a Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker at time of project turnover. It shall match existing conditions. 3.9 FLOOR PROTECTION A. Protect finished floor from construction traffic and weather until time of Owner Possession. B. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents to come in contact with slab. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified below shall not be considered a substitute for the Contractor's responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B. Manufacturer's Services: A technically qualified manufacturer's field representative of the densifier product shall be on site during the initial application of the densifier and occasional observations during remainder of the applications. 3.11 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B(Section 03362). END OF SECTION 03362-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 102513 SECTION 03930(03 9050)—CONCRETE REHABILITATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete rehabilitation for interior concrete floors including the following: a. Joint edge spall repair. b. Crack repair. c. Surface defect repair,including pop-outs,chips,spalls,and pitting. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03312 - Cast in Place Concrete Slabs (Interior): Concrete for new floors and control joint filler. 2. Section 03362—Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. B. Product Data: 1. Polyurea Joint Filler. 2. Low Viscosity Rigid Urethane. 3. Polymerized Portland Cement Compound. 4. Manufacturer and model of equipment to be used as specified in Part 3: a. Joint Filler Removal and Preparation Equipment. b. Dust Extraction System. c. Crack Repair Equipment. d. Surface Grinder. C. Samples: Submit one dry sample of polyurea joint filler for each color required to Owner's Construction Manager. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Owner's Concrete Consultant: Structural Services,Inc.(SSI),(214)522-6438. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer's recommendations. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cure replaced concrete a minimum of 28 days prior to joint filler installation. B. Close concrete repair area to traffic during preparation and repair for a time as recommended by repair material manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide products as manufactured by the following to the extent as specified hereinafter: 03930-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Ardex Engineered Cements,Aliquippa,PA(888)512-7339. 2. Euclid Chemical Co.,Cleveland,OH(877)438-3826. 3. Mapei Corp. (800)426-2734. 4. Metzger/McGuire,Concord,NH(800)223-6680. 5. SpecChem, LLC,Kansas City,MO(866)791-8700. 6. VersaFlex, Inc.,Kansas City,MO(913)321-1416. B. Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting,two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100%solids content,Shore hardness 85-90,compatible with construction materials in contact. 1. Spal-Pro RS 88 by Metzger/McGuire. 2. VersaFlex SL/85 by VersaFlex. 3. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. C. Low Viscosity Rigid Urethane: 1. Rapid ReFloor by Metzger/McGuire. 2. Quick Mender by VersaFlex. 3. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. D. Silica Sand: 1. Dry 00 Sandblasting sand. E. Polymerized Portland Cement Compound: 1. Fast Top Supreme by Euclid Chemical. 2. Planitop X by Mapei. 3. Ardex CD by Ardex. 4. RepCon 928 by SpecChem. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Concrete rehabilitation work specified shall be performed within the limits of the Grind and Polish area of the sales floor shown on Drawings. B. Installation of specified products shall be in accordance with product manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Evaluate existing floor slab, identifying defects to be repaired. Scope of repairs shall be agreed to by Owner's Construction Manager prior to commencement of work. 3.3 Repairs shall be approved by Owner's Construction Manager or Architect of Record. Owner's Concrete Consultant is not authorized to change any specified requirement or to approve execution of any portion of the Work. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Protect existing construction from dust and moisture damage caused by demolition,preparation and installation of slab repair. B. Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair. 3.5 EQUIPMENT 03930-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide equipment by the following: 1. HTC,Inc.,Knoxville,TN(877)482-8700. 2. Joe Due Blades and Equipment,Mauston,WI(877)563-3833. 3. Pulman-Ermator,Tampa,FL(800)232-2635. 4. SASE Company,Inc.,Kent,WA(800)522-2606. 5. U.S. Saws,Santa Ana,CA(866)987-7297. B. Use equipment as specified below. Within each equipment listing, provide one of the models specified. When specifically allowed within each product listing,equivalent products by other manufacturers meeting the specified requirements may be used upon submittal of product data and approval by Owner's Concrete Consultant. C. Dust extraction system for grinding/sawing. HEPA filtration vacuum,designed for use with hand tools when grind- ing or sawing concrete(minimum 125CFM air flow). Provide one of the following: 1. 26D by HTC. 2. S2400 by Pullman-Ermator. 3. Bull 50 by SASE Company,Inc. 4. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. D. Joint Filler Removal and Preparation Equipment. Provide one of the following: 1. Humpback Cutter Complete,by Joe Due. 2. Dust Buggy by U.S.Saws. 3. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. E. Crack Repair Equipment. Provide one of the following: 1. 5"Dustmizer 007,by Joe Due. 2. 5"Crack Attacker,by Joe Due. 3. 7"Handheld Crack Chaser,by Joe Due. 4. SawTec 5"Tile Vac,by U.S. Saws. 5. SawTec 7"Crac-Vac,by U.S.Saws. 6. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. F. Surface Grinder. Handheld 5"-7"electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. Provide one of the follow- ing: 1. Dust Avenger 5,by Joe Due. 2. Dust Avenger 7,by Joe Due. 3. SawTec 5"Grinder Vac,by U.S. Saws. 4. SawTec 7"Grinder Vac,by U.S.Saws. 5. Similar equipment as required to produce the specified results. 3.6 JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT V VV . 1/2"min. p V V o yrs new filler V V v p • ° v ° Before After Orginal material bearing on saw cut shelf A. If existing joint filler is sound and resting on top of saw cut shelf,mill top 1/2"of material and refill with specified polyurea joint filler. 03930-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Re-saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2 inch with a dry-cut,vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. Use blade of sufficient width to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. C. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up. Avoid trapping large air bubbles. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process. D. After grinding,joint shall be smooth and flush with finish floor surface without concave or intermittent darkened profile. 3.7 FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT V V o V V V p V V o v V a V V N Fill to Bottom 4. V j a V of Original N Saw Cut V V , V Before - After Saw cut shelf A. If existing joint filler is loose,easily removed,or able to be forced downward with a hand tool,remove filler material from joint and refill. B. Re-saw joint full depth with a dry-cut,vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade. Use blade of suffi- cient width to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. Remove filler material,debris,and laitance. C. If shelf width at base of saw cut is less than 1/4 inch on either side of joint, fill joint with compressible backer rod or bagged silica sand to not more than 2 inches below slab surface. D. Refill with polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up. Avoid trapping large air bubbles. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process. E. After grinding,joint shall be smooth and flush with finish floor surface without concave or intermittent darkened profile. 03930-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.8 SPALLED JOINT REPAIR(LESS THAN 1") Spalled Original or tooled Joint radiud edge � L 1 \ V• 0 3/4"min. N 1 P V depth SaBovd e 0 Concrete As required 1"maximum A. For joints that are spalled or have radius tooled edges not exceeding 1 inch in width at slab surface,re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch with a dry-cut,vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall(or top of radius)along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. B. Clean joint of loose concrete,joint filler,laitance,dirt,debris,backer rod,etc. C. Joints shall be free of visible moisture. / Repair Cavity<1" / V V Overfill and V Shave Flush V \ a p a Fo Re-establish Aggregate Interlock with Polyurea D. Gravity feed a trace amount(1/8 inch)of silica sand into joint to prevent 3-sided bonding of joint filler. E. Fill joint cavity,avoiding trapping large air bubbles. Install filler so that it penetrates the irregular aggregate inter- lock portion of the sawn contraction joint as shown above, re-establishing the aggregate interlock that may have been lost due to shrinkage,curling,and lack of reinforcement. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface prior to grinding process. 3.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINT REPAIR(GREATER THAN 1") 03930-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Saw cut patch material and refill to match original joint Rebuild joint edge with cementitious patch material V 0 3/4"min. v I 0 d 0 Polyurea Material Repair Cavity>1" , A. For construction joints exceeding 1 inch in width at slab surface or greater than 1/4 inch height differential at abutting joint edges,re-saw the construction joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch with a dry-cut,vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2 inch in 10 feet. 1. For construction joints of 1/4 inch or greater height differential at abutting joint edges,slope repair material 1/4 inch per foot at floor surface with consistent depth of material at 1/2 inch below repair surface. B. Overfill repair cavity with cementitious patch material and grind flush to slab surface. C. After cementitious patch material has cured and prior to traffic on patched surface, re-saw original slab joints and fill with polyurea joint filler. D. Burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface color after material has cured. E. Do not repair cracks less than 1/32 inch in width without surface spatting. 3.10 CRACK REPAIR -441111141111F117- o .a o ' 0 . o • .:. .i f •. • •*:** A. Cracks From 1/32 Inch to 1/4 Inch in Width: 1. Clean crack cavity. a. Clean sidewall by removing loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand grinder with twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2 inch minimum depth. b. Remove loose segments,including islands formed by crack,with sharp tool. c. Use methods that will not widen existing crack. d. Vacuum crack to remove dirt,debris and other laitance. 03930-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 3. Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material. 4. Repeat until voids are filled and material crowns slab surface. a. Do not flood area around crack. b. Avoid bubble formation and out gassing. c. Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material. , 5. Shave or grind material flush to surface. B. Cracks From 1/4 Inch to 1 Inch in Width: 1. Saw top or edge of crack to provide square edge,minimum 3/4"in depth. a. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5" diameter blade, minimizing eventual crack width while maintaining uniformity of shape. 2. Clean crack cavity. a. Vacuum crack to remove dirt,debris and other laitance. b. Remove visible moisture. 3. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 4. Install polyurea joint filler. a. Dispense sample into small bucket to test blending of material. b. Prime crack with repair material. c. Dispense material,dragging dispenser tip along crack,until it flows over the slab. 5. Wait approximately 10 minutes,periodically checking for material cure. a. Check condition of material by shaving with razor scraper. 6. Shave material flush to slab surface. 3.11 SURFACE SPALLING REPAIR )f i • ° sue s <a -1 0 ° • 0 .1•.,1•.1•.='� :.1• •1•.•r.•• 1• •• 1•.1•.•}• 1•.1•• 1•-`I•. 1•ir•}•.1•"• ••-.1•"1•-. A. Route edge of spall to provide 1/2 inch deep square edge. 1. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5 inch diameter dry diamond blade and vacuum system attachment. 2. Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface. B. Clean and prep spalled cavity. 1. Wire brush spalled surface to remove dirt and laitance. 2. Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape. C. Install low viscosity rigid urethane repair material using tube cartridge without flow restrictor. D. Polish repair area with diamond disks to blend surface. 1. Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface. 2. With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure,add a few burn marks to mottle surface to blend with adjacent floor surface. 03930-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 E. For spalled joints,use form material if required to temporarily support vertical face of spalled joint edge. Prevent repair material from adhering to form. 3.12 HIGH RACK BOLT HOLE/SPALL REPAIR A. Recess steel bolt a minimum of 1/2 inch below finish floor by either punching or cutting. B. For spall fracture edge less than 30 degrees,square edge to a minimum 3/8 inch depth with either a drill bit or chisel. C. Clean cavity of debris and laitance with drill activated,brass wire wheel. Vacuum hole to remove dirt,debris and other laitance. D. Dispense low viscosity rigid urethane at moderate pace using steady pressure. Dispense material into void,refilling as necessary to produce slight crown. E. Grind material flush to slab surface. 3.13 LARGE SURFACE REPAIR A. Edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel to produce sharp edge at least 3/8 inch deep. B. Roughen base surface and vacuum clean. Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again. C. Protect adjacent slab surface with tape at perimeter of repair area, width as required to prevent scratching during troweling operations. D. Mist floor surface until damp but without standing water. E. Prepare slurry prime coat of polymerized Portland cement compound and scrub into repair surface with stiff bristle brush. Do not allow to dry before placing pigmented repair material.Use concrete bonding agent if required. F. Mix repair material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Place repair material in floor surface defect and float level. Use float on edge. H. Lightly mist floated repair material with the finishing aid once and perform first troweling pass to smooth surface without over-working. Do not reapply finishing aid during any other troweling operations. I. Wait until material begins to set and can be indented with finger about 1/8 inch. Perform second troweling pass approximately two hours after initial placement. J. Using a fine sharp edged cutting tool,cut along edge of repair material and adjacent slab to prevent raveling of edge during tape removal. K. When material has become stiff and can be slightly indented with hard finger pressure,final trowel using firm pres- sure until mottling and shine has become apparent. Do not allow trowels to be positioned on surface flat,as surface will tear. Use circular sweeping motions. L. Keep surface clean during troweling operations to prevent laitance from coming in contact with repair material and marring surface. M. Check material set after 30 minutes to 1 hour. Surface should not dent with fingernail under hard hand pressure. N. Troweled surface shall be tight,level and smooth without surface defects. O. After repair material has cured,burnish repair material to match adjacent slab surface in accordance with the re- quirements of Section 03363. 03930-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 P. Remove tape and clean area of particles on repair surface and adjacent floor surface. Q. Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and re-filling with polyurea joint filler prior to exposure to traffic. 03930-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.14 SURFACE PITTING REPAIR � � e SLAB SURFACE PITTING • o o • • o • o o o • f�S• • r :::!7r S : i:�r. r:-f: r: r:;f: r:;r:..r...r: r...r:..r:..r...r r:-.r:;r..:r:-r..•r. q;.v.;r•f'•��r••:'r: r: r::r: r r::r• r:r::r' r•r?:r: A. Clean pitted sections with 90-degree angle grinder equipped with wire wheel to remove dirt and laitance. Pass grinding wheel over defect in multiple directions. B. Vacuum prepared pitted sections. C. Dispense low viscosity rigid urethane repair material generously in and around pitted areas. D. Immediately trowel repair material flush with slab surface and repeat troweling in opposite directions until material begins to thicken(approximately 2 minutes). If material sticks to trowel,wipe with denatured alcohol. 1. Provide thin,uniform layer of repair material over pitted areas. Refill low spots as needed. E. Allow repair material to fully cure(approximately 90-120 minutes for thin film). F. Grind overfill with 80-grit metal-bond pads until repair material is flush with slab surface. G. Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects. Extend curing time as necessary to minimize material pull out. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces of finished floor. B. Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner. END OF SECTION 03930-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 05090—POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Post-installed mechanical and adhesive type anchors for structural members and equipment support. B. Related Requirements: 1. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Reports showing evidence of published performance data for each anchor used shall be available for review by the Structural Engineer of Record (SER) upon request. Evidence may be in the form of current ICC-ER report or a report by an independent testing laboratory. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Hilti,Inc. (800)879-8000 2. ITW Red Head(800)899-7890 3. Simpson Strong Tie Co.Inc.(800)999-5099 4. Powers Fasteners,Inc(800)524-3244 2.2 MATERIALS A. Substitutions: Substitutions of products from manufacturers not listed are not permitted. B. Alternate Products: Alternate products from the manufacturers listed may be used upon approval based upon suitability for the installation involved as determined by the SER. C. Provide proprietary anchor products as specified below unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in other sections. Anchors may be any one of the products listed for the type specified unless otherwise shown or specified. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide complete installation instructions with items furnished to the field. 2.3 MECHANICAL ANCHORS A. Interior Use Anchors:Zinc plated carbon steel anchors. B. Exterior Use Anchors: Stainless steel with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. C. Wedge Expansion Anchors: Torque-controlled, with impact section to prevent thread damage complete with required nuts and washers.Type and size as indicated on Drawings.Provide one of the following: 1. Hilti Kwik Bolt 3. 2. Simpson Wedge All. 3. ITW Red Head Trubolt. 4. Powers Power-Stud. 05090-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/1'5 D. Sleeve Anchors: Torque controlled, exhibiting follow-up expansion under load, with provision for rotation prevention during installation. Provide one of the following: 1. Hilti HLC Sleeve Anchor. 2. Simpson Sleeve-All Sleeve Anchor. 3. ITW Red Head Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor. 4. Powers Power-Bolt Sleeve Anchor. E. Screw Anchors: Single piece anchor installed in a pre-drilled hole using a bit matching manufacuturer tolerances. Anchors shall have 360-degree contact with the base material and shall not require oversized or undersized holes for installation.Provide one of the following: 1. Hilti KH-EZ or KWIK-CON II Screw Anchor. 2. Simpson Titen HD or Titen HD Mini Screw Anchor. 3. ITW Red Head Tapcon or Large Diameter Tapcon(LDT)Screw Anchor. 4. Powers Wedge-Bolt or Tapper Screw Anchor. 2.4 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts:Stud-type anchors consisting of threaded steel rod,nut,and washer or deformed reinforcing bar,and anchor adhesive.Use type and size as indicated on Drawings. Use stainless steel or zinc coated carbon steel for exterior exposure. B. Adhesive:Adhesive shall be a cartridge type,two-component,epoxy,acrylic,or hybrid based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. Acceptable installation and performance temperature ranges shall be verified with manufacturer's literature prior to installation.Provide one of the following: 1. Hilti: a. HIT-HY 200 b. HIT-HY 70 c. HIT-ICE d. HIT-RE 500 e. HIT-RE 500-SD 2. Simpson: a. Epoxy-Tie(ET-HP)Adhesive b. High Strength Epoxy-Tie(SET)Adhesive c. Structural Epoxy-Tie(SET-XP)Adhesive d. Acrylic-Tie(AT)Adhesive 3. ITW Red Head: a. Epcon C6 Epoxy b. Epcon G5 High Strength Epoxy c. Epcon A7 Acrylic Adhesive 4. Powers AC100 Plus Acrylic Adhesive. , PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that structural components are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Post-installed anchors installed for missing or misplaced cast-in-place anchors shall be approved by the SER. B. Where manufacturer recommends use of special tools for installation of anchors, such tools shall be used, unless 05090-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 otherwise permitted specifically by the SER. C. Where holes are drilled in concrete or masonry,holes shall be accurately and squarely drilled,and the holes shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Post-installed Anchor Installation(General): 1. Install post-installed anchors where shown on the drawings. 2. Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions.Install anchors at not less than the minimum embedment,edge distance,and spacing recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits. Drill bits shall be of diameters as specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the concrete surface. a. Cored Holes:Where anchors are to be installed in cored holes,use core bits with matched tolerances as specified by the manufacturer. b. Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Avoid damage to existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Avoid damaging electrical and telecommunications conduit and gas lines. Notify the SER if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. c. Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete,mortar,or grout has achieved full design strength. 4. Use anchors of the same anchor manufacturer for anchors of the same type. E. Mechanical Anchor Installation: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in part to be fastened. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque,using a torque wrench. F. Adhesive Anchor Installation: 1. When the base material temperature drops below 40-degrees F,use only acrylic adhesive or type as suitable per the manufacturer.. See manufacturer's instructions for additional minimum temperature requirements. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature,humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 2. Hollow Substrates: Anchorage into hollow substrates is not allowed unless specifically indicated on the contract documents. Where applicable,the adhesive manufacturer's screen tubes shall be used for adhesive installation into hollow substrate applications. 3. Oversized Holes:Refer to manufacturer's information if drilled hole size is larger than what is recommended. 4. Core Drilled Holes:Refer to manufacturer's information if holes are drilled with a core-drill bit. 5. Clean holes per manufacturer instructions to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Inject adhesive into holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer recommendations to ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected in the hole to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess adhesive from the surface. Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in the hole. Do not disturb or load anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed. 3.3 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace misplaced, defective, or malfunctioning anchors. Anchors that fail a sheer or pullout test, if directed or installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning.Fill empty anchor holes and patch failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink,nonmetallic grout. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform 05090-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 similar routine,necessary,and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.5 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection in accordance with Appendix B. END OF SECTION 05090-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 012712 SECTION 05120(05 1200)-STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is included to provide information on the existing structural steel. All new structural steel,if any, shall match these specifications. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new structural steel is required. B. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel framing members,structural steel support members,struts,with required bracing,welds, and fasteners. 2. Base plates and shear stud connectors. 3. Teflon coated slide bearing pads. 4. Grout,for setting and anchoring items in masonry and concrete. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 3-Concrete:Anchorages cast in concrete. 2. Section 05090 -Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive type anchor studs, expansion bolts, sleeve anchors, adhesive anchors, and anchor bolts embedded in concrete and masonry for anchoring and supporting structural members. 3. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Steel bracing for joists and joist girders. 4. Section 05300-Metal Deck: Support framing for roof openings. 5. Appendix A-Owner's previous supplier of existing structural steel. 6. Appendix B-Testing and Inspection by Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC): 1. AISC 303-Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC 360-Structural Steel Buildings. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 53-Pipe,Steel,Black and Galvanized,Seamless and Welded. 3. ASTM A 108-Steel Bars,Carbon And Alloy,Cold-Finished, 4. ASTM A 123-Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A 307-Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A 325-Structural Bolts,Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 7. ASTM A 490-Structural Bolts,Alloy Steel,Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A 500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 9. ASTM A 501 -Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 10.ASTM A 992-Structural Steel Shapes. 11.ASTM C 1107-Packaged Dry,Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Non-Shrink). 12.ASTM D 1187-Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 13.ASTM E 709-Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing D. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. 05120-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 E. Research Council on Structural Connections(RCSC): 1. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. F. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-SP 2-Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC SP-3—Power Tool Cleaning. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Convene Pre-installation Meeting at Site one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to, the Owner's representative, Contractor, steel erector sub-contractor and foreman, and Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory. 2. Notify all attendees at least two weeks prior to the meeting. 3. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 4. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to the work,including the following: a. Tour,inspect,and discuss condition of preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review structural loading limitations and bracing requirements. c. Review drawings,specifications and other contract documents including submittals. d. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. e. Review required inspections,testing,certifying,and material usage accounting procedures. f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions,and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. 5. Record discussions of the meeting and decisions and agreements(or disagreements)reached,and furnish copy of record to each party attending. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures:Unless otherwise specified herein,submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email, unless otherwise specified, to Architect of Record. B. Shop Drawings: Submit within 10 working days of Contract Date. 1. Indicate profiles,sizes,spacing,and locations of structural members,connections,attachments,and fasteners. 2. Include supplementary parts and members necessary to complete structural steel work,regardless of whether parts are definitely shown or specified, and furnish bolts, gussets,plates, and related items as required for proper assembly of items. 3. Include miscellaneous deck support angles as required for proper support of metal deck around columns, gussets,openings,and obstructions. 4. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.Indicate net weld lengths. 5. Provide setting drawings,templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by other trades. 6. Indicate top of bearing plate elevations, and elevations above finish floor to the centerlines of embedded plate,anchor bolts,and all control joint locations. 7. Templates shall be furnished by fabricator with instructions for setting of anchor bolts and bearing plates. 8. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which Project is located. 9. Omission from shop drawings of materials required by Contract Documents does not relieve Contractor of responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials even though shop drawings may have been returned and reviewed. C. Calculations: Within 10 days of Contract Date, submit design calculations for structural steel connections not detailed on Contract Documents or proposed differently than as shown on Contract Documents, signed and sealed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which Project is located. 05120-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Substitutions: Submit substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and reasons for proposal,with shop drawings.Clearly identify substitutions as such.Accepted substitutions,modifications,and necessary changes in related portions of Work shall be coordinated by fabricator and shall be accomplished at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. C. Design connections not detailed on Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in the design of this Work registered in State in which the project is located. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery:Owner's Structural Steel Supplier will deliver products to Site for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. To establish product delivery date, contact the Owner's Account Contact person indicated,immediately upon notice of Award of Contract. B. Product Packaging:Steel will be shipped with identification markings on each component or package.Identification markings will coordinate with identification markings for components indicated on Owner's Structural Steel Supplier setting drawings. C. Acceptance at Site:Receive products as specified in Appendix A. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with setting drawings and Bills of Lading provided by Owner's Structural Steel Supplier. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered,or damage to products delivered to Owner immediately. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. Upon notification,Owner will arrange for delivery of replacement products. D. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Owner's Construction Manager and Owner's Structural Steel Supplier. Upon notification, Owner will arrange for repair of product manufacturing defects. E. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600. F. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. G. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets,platforms,or other supports. H. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage members or supporting structures. 3. Remove salt residue from steel members by power spraying when present as a result of salted roads during winter weather transport. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Ellis Steel Company, Inc., West Point,MS, Account Projects Manager(888)494-5955. . 05120-3 ' Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2.2 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: 1. Wide Flange Steel Shapes:ASTM A 992. 2. Steel Channels,Angles,Anchor Bolts,Plates and Bars:ASTM A 36. B. Structural Tubing:ASTM A 500,Grade B. C. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B; ASTM A 500, Grade B; or ASTM A 501 as shown on the drawings. D. Bolts,Nuts,and Washers:ASTM A 325 or A 307 as shown on Drawings. E. Accessories: 1. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded or as shown on Drawings. E 7024 electrodes("Jet Weld"rods)are not permitted;use only"All Position"rods.(7018LH)] 2. Headed Stud Anchors:ASTM A 108,Grades 1010 through 1020,headed-stud type,cold-finished carbon steel;AWS D1.1,Type B. 3. Adhesive Anchors: Adhesive anchors associated with structural steel specified herein shall conform to requirements specified in Section 05090. 4. Alkyd Primer:Gray color,E61AS28 by Sherwin-Williams(800)474-3794. 5. Touch-Up Primer(Contractor Furnished): Field applied touch-up primer shall match shop applied alkyd primer 6. Asphaltic Mastic(Contractor Furnished): Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 7. Teflon Coated Slide Bearing Pads: Provide one of the following products: a. Fluorogold by Seismic Energy Products, LP(formerly Furon),Athens,TX(903)675-8571. b. Dura-Slide by Tobi Engineering,Glenview,IL(847)724-7880. c. Type CSA by Con-Serv, Inc.,Georgetown,SC(843)546-1044. 8. Non-Shrink Grout(Contractor Furnished): Pre-mixed non-shrinking,high strength grout,ASTM C 1107, Type A,B,or C;compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 28 days. Provide one of the following products: a. NS Grout by Euclid Chemical,Cleveland,OH(800)321-7628. b. Construction Grout by BASF Building Systems. c. Certi-Vex Grout 1000 by Vexcon Chemicals,Philadelphia,PA(888)839-2661. d. Conspec Enduro 50 by Dayton Superior,Miamisburg,OH(888)977-9600. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 360. B. Do not splice structural steel members unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2.4 FINISH A. Clean,prepare,and shop prime structural steel members. B. Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete,or surfaces specified to be galvanized. C. Galvanized Finish:Minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc(hot-dipped galvanized)coating complying with ASTM A 123. Galvanize the following items: 1. Structural steel angles and plates, exposed to weather and in contact with or embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Anchor bolts exposed to weather and in contact with or embedded in concrete or masonry. D. Primer Finish: Prepare structural steel items scheduled to recieve primer finish by SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning)method.Prime steel with primer finish specified;minimum dry mil thickness of 2 mils.Apply primer finish to the following items: 1. Structural steel items not specified as galvanized. 05120-4 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Exposed rooftop refrigeration and HVAC support framing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorage. Verify that all conditions are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting diagrams. 3.3 SURVEY A. Employ Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor registered in State in which Project is located,experienced in survey work,to establish permanent bench marks as shown and as necessary for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Owner's Construction Manager. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Owner. 3.4 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Make provision for erection loads,and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe,plumb,and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members. D. Anchor Bolts:Install anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work.Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Provide post-installed anchors in accordance with Section 05090. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces.Clean bottom surfaces of base and bearing plates. 1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on adjusting nuts. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 3. Grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases of plates. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Slide Bearing Pads: Permanently affixed to member and support,respectively,by welding or bolting as indicated. Align and level member faces to maintain full contact between surfaces before completing installation. F. High-strength Bolting: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts for type of bolt and type of joint shown or specified. G. Erection Bolts: 1. Comply with ASTM A 307. 2. Hand tighten nut to minimum depth of nut. H. Field Welding: Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.3,as applicable.After installation, grind sight-exposed field welds smooth,touch-up welds,scratched,or damaged surfaces with primer. 05120-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint.Apply paint to exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting.Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. J. Protective Coating: Field apply heavy coat of asphatic mastic bituminous coating to anchor bolts,base plates, and columns below finished floor where shown on the drawings. K. Field Painting: Specified in Section 09900. 3.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Responsibilities: Unless otherwise specified, quality control tests and inspection specified below will be conducted by Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL) at no cost to Contractor in accordance with Section 01458. Contractor shall perform additional testing or inspection as considered necessary by the Contractor for assurance of quality control. 1. Work shall be performed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I. a. In addition to the Special Inspector qualification stated in Section 01458, the Technical II Inspector shall be an American Society for Non-destructive Testing (ASNT) Non-destructive Testing Technician,TC-1A Level I,or an American Welding Society(AWS)Certified Associate Weld Inspector(C.A.W.I.) 2. CTL shall report results after each observation visit. B. High Strength Bolting(Field Installed): 1. General: a. Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all slip-critical bolted connections for general conformance with the contract documents prior to bolting. b. Verify that requirements for bolts,nuts,washers,paint and installation/tightening standards are met. c. Observe calibration procedures and verify that selected procedure is used to tighten bolts. d. Test High Strength bolted connections in accordance with bolting standard specified above. 2. Slip Critical and Tension Bolts: Test bolt tightening in 100% of all bolts. Verify that all surfaces of connected elements have been brought into contact at 100%of connections.Verify all tips are removed from twist-off bolts. 3. Bearing Bolts: Visually inspect to confirm all surfaces of connected elements have been brought into contact, at 100% of connections. This shall apply only to bolts designed for values not requiring exclusion of threads from failure plane.All other bolts shall be tested as for tension bolts. C. High Strength Bolting(Shop Installed):For shop fabricated work,perform tests required for field installation, except that bolt testing may be reduced or deleted if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program-Category STD(Standard for Steel Building Structures),or more stringent criteria,or is approved by Building Official and SER. D. Welding(General): 1. Prior to start of fabrication, determine if fabrication shop meets the criteria for exempting shop welds from inspection and confirm in writing to Building Official and SER. 2. Verify qualifications of welders as AWS certified. 3. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. 4. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. 5. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence of welding, and cleaning and number of passes are provided as required. E. Welding(Field): 1. Single Pass Fillet Welds less than or equal to 5/16inch:Visually inspect 100%of all fillet welds for size, length,and quality,per AWS D1.1. 2. Single Pass Fillet Welds greater than 5/16inch: Continuously inspect 100%of all fillet welds for size, length,and quality,per AWS D1.1. 3. Multi-pass Fillet Welds: Continuously inspect 100%of all fillet welds for size,length,and quality,per 05120-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 AWS D1.1. 4. Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS.D1.1.Test 100%of all partial penetration welds less than 5/16 inch,using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709,performed on root pass and on finished weld. 5. Complete Penetration Welds: Test 100%of all complete penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch,using Ultrasonic Testing per A.W.S. D1.1 Test 100%of all complete penetration welds less than 5/16 inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709,performed on root pass and on finished weld. 6. Miscellaneous Metals,Inserts and Prefabricated Components:Where integrity of the connections impact life safety or performance of the building structure,provide testing and inspection as for typical welds previously specified. F. Welding (Shop): Perform inspections as for field welding except weld testing may be reduced or deleted if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program - Category I, or more stringent criteria, and is approved by Building Official and SER. G. Submittal Verification: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation for compliance with Contract Documents. H. Materials Verification:Verify materials delivered to Site comply with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.Materials and verifications include: 1. Structural Steel: a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards. b. Manufacturer's certified mill test reports. 2. High Strength Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. 3. Welding Electrodes: a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. Verification of Detail Compatibility. 1. Inspect on a periodic basis. 2. Review project documents affecting integrity of the structure, including Contract Documents and pertinent submittals including approved shop drawings. 3. Visit Site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to perform review of the structure and visually confirm general compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details indicated in Contract Documents and approved shop drawings: a. Bracing and stiffening members. b. Structural member locations. c. Proper applications of joint details at connections for structural members. d. Other work critical to the integrity of the building structure. END OF SECTION 05120-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec lI 102811 SECTION 05210(05 2100)-STEEL JOISTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is included to provide information on the existing steel joists. All new steel joists, if any,shall match these specifications. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new steel joists are required. B. Section Includes: 1. Open web steel joists,with extended ends,and attached bearing plates. 2. Joist girders. 3. Bridging and connection angles for bridging at side walls. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 3 -Concrete: Grouting base plates and bearing plates. 2. Section 05090-Concrete and Masonry Post Installed Anchors. Mechanical and adhesive type anchor studs, expansion bolts,sleeve anchors,adhesive anchors,and anchor bolts embedded in concrete and masonry for anchoring and supporting steel joists and joist girders. 3. Section 05120-Structural Steel: a. Support plates and angles. b. Bolts,nuts,and washers for attachment of steel joists to structural steel. c. Frames for rooftop HVAC units and roof openings larger than 10 inches by 10 inches. 4. Section 09900-Paint and Coatings: Field painting of exposed joists and roof deck. 5. Appendix A—Owner's previous supplier of existing steel joists. 6. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC): 1. AISC 303 -Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 242-High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A 570-Steel,Sheet and Strip,Carbon,Hot-Rolled,Structural Quality. 4. ASTM A 572-High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. 5. ASTM E 709-Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing D. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. E. Research Council on Structural Connections(RCSC) 1. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts F. Steel Joist Institute(SJI): 1. SJI Standard Specifications,Load Tables&Weight Tables for Steel Joist&Joist Girders G. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC SP-2—Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC SP-3—Power Tool Cleaning. 05210-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. SSPC Paint 15-Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures:Unless otherwise specified herein,submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email,unless otherwise specified herein. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings shall indicate: a. Standard designations,configuration,sizes,spacing,and locations of joists and joist girders. b. Joist and joist girder loading. c. Bridging,connections,attachments,and cambers. 2. Shop drawings shall]be prepared under the direction of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which the Project is located. 3. Submit Shop Drawings within 3 working days of Contract date. C. Qualification Data: Submittal Procedures:Unless otherwise specified herein,submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email,unless otherwise specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI"Specifications." A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600 and SJI. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. C. Keep joist members off ground by using pallets,platforms,or other supports. D. Protect members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage members or supporting structures. 3. Remove salt residue from joist members by power spraying when present as a result of salted roads during winter weather transport. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Vulcraft, Alpharetta,GA(678)965-6667. a. Account Sales Manager: Bobby Wesley or Jimmy Owens. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joist Members: In accordance with SJI Standard Specifiations. 1. SJI Type K Open Web. 2. SJI Type H Open Web. 3. LH Longspan. 4. DLH Longspan. 5. Joist Girders. 05210-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Bridging: ASTM A 36,ASTM A 242,A 570,or A 572. C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15,gray. D. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Bridging bolts and joist to girder bolts. 2. Clips for bridging wall anchors. 3. Bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening joists to structural steel components will be furnished in accordance with Section 05120 and paragraph"Related Requirements"in Part 1 above. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Steel joists and joist girders will be fabricated in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications including headers and other supplementary framing.Top and bottom chord extensions will be provided where indicated on Drawings. B. Joists,joist girders,and accessories will be prepared and shop primed with one coat of primer,minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils. C. Fabrication Testing and Inspection: 1. Testing and inspection will be performed as specified in Appendix B (05210). 2. Fabrication of joists and joist girders is subject to inspection and testing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements.Verify that steel joist supporting framing components are ready to receive Work.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect steel joists,joist girders,and bridging in accordance with approved final field use drawings and SJI Standard Specifications. B. Position joists and joist girders on supports in accordance with approved final field use drawings and SJI. During erection,provide temporary bracing, as required by joist manufacturer for induced loads and stresses on joists and joist girders. C. Limit sweep of joists to span length/180 or a maximum of 2 inches. D. Coordinate placement of anchorages in concrete and masonry construction for making connections to joists and joist girders,and for securing bearing plates.Concrete and masonry post installed anchors are specified in Section 05090. E. Connect or field weld joist seat to placed bearing plates after alignment,positioning after installation of bridging. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced and bridged. F. Do not field cut or alter joists without written approval from Structural Engineer of Record and Owner's Steel Joist Supplier. G. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.3,as applicable.After installation,grind sight-exposed field welds smooth. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the descretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with 05210-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B (Section 05120) shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.4 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B (Section 05120). 3.5 PROTECTION B. Touchup Painting: After installation,promptly clean,prepare,and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2,or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type and color as primer used on adjacent surfaces. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of primed or painted erected members to remove stains, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other surface contaminants. END OF SECTION 05210-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 102811 SECTION 05300(05 3000)-METAL DECK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is included to provide information on the existing metal decks. All new metal decks,if any,shall match these specifications. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new metal decks are required. B. Section Includes: 1. Metal roof deck. 2. Sidelap fasteners. 3. Framed openings up to 10 inches by 10 inches. 4. Metal canopy deck. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05090-Post-installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive type anchor studs, expansion bolts,sleeve anchors, adhesive anchors,and anchor bolts embedded in concrete and masonry for anchoring and supporting steel deck. 2. Section 05120-Structural Steel: a. Structural steel for rooftop HVAC units and framed openings larger than 10 inches by 10 inches. b. Support plates and angles. 3. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Support structure for metal decking. 4. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field painting of exposed deck. 5. Appendix A—Owner's previous supplier of existing metal deck. 6. Appendix B-Laboratory Testing Services: Procedures for inspection,testing,and documentation by Owner furnished testing laboratory. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Iron and Steel Institute(AISI): Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653-Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot- Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened,and Bake Hardenable. D. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3-Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. E. Steel Deck Institute(SDI): 1. Design Manual for Composite Decks,Form Decks,Roof Decks.(SDI Design Manual) F. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating Type I-Inorganic And Type II—Organic. 2. SSPC-Paint 25-Red Iron Oxide,Zinc Oxide,Raw Linseed Oil,and Alkyd Primer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 05300-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Submittal Procedures:Unless otherwise specified herein,submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email, unless otherwise specified, to Architect of Record. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings shall indicate: a. Decking plan,deck profile dimensions,supports,projections,openings and reinforcements,fastening method and installation accessories. b. Locations,types,and sequence of connections. c. Welds by standard welding symbols adopted by AWS. 2. Prepare Shop drawings under the direction of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which the Project is located. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. B. Installer Qualifications: Powder and air actuated fasteners shall be installed by a tool operator licensed by the pin manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Keep materials dry. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers;slope for positive drainage.Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. C. Prevent damage to edges,ends and surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Verco Decking, Inc.—A Nucor Company,Phoenix,AZ. a. Account Sales Manager: Bobby Wesley or Jimmy Owens(678)965-6667. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metal Deck,General: Conforming to SDI standards,type,metal gage,and depth as shown on Drawings.Fabricate panels,without top-flange stiffening grooves,to comply with"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Design Manual. B. Metal Roof Deck: Prime painted steel sheet,ASTM A 1008,Classification SS(Structural Steel).Shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on,rust-inhibitive primer. 1. Grade: a. 22,20 and 18 gage: Grade 80(80 ksi). b. 16 gage: Grade 33(33 ksi)minimum. 2. Primer Color if White Finish Coat is Scheduled on Drawings: Grey top side and white bottom sides. 3. Primer Color if Non-White Finish Coat is Scheduled on Drawings:Grey top and bottom sides. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Side Lap Fasteners: As noted in the Fastener Schedule shown on the Structural Drawings. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. C. Primers For Field Touch-Up: 05300-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. For shop applied primer: SSPC 25. 2. For galvanized surfaces: SSPC 20. D. Screw Fasteners: Self-drilling,self tapping No. 12 HWH Tek screws,by ITW Buildex, Itaska,Il(800)323-0720, or Owner approved substitute. E. Powder Actuated or Air Actuated Fasteners: Fasteners shall be as noted in the Fastener Schedule shown on the Structural Drawings. F. Masonry Anchorage: Specified in Section 04200. G. Premolded Closure Strips: Manufactured panel manufacturer's standard, size and configuration to match panel flutes. H. Flashing and Counter Flashing: Specified in Section 07620. I. Gutters and Downspouts: Specified in Section 07711. J. Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel decking in accordance with the SDI Design Manual and AIS'I,to accommodate the following: 1. Metal Roof Deck and Metal Canopy Deck: Maximum working stress of 0.6 times the yield stress and maximum span deflection of L/240. B. Shop Prime Finish: Mechanically clean and apply primer at a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mils. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements.Verify that metal deck supporting framing components are ready to receive Work.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate locations and sizes of openings for skylights, smoke vents (if specified), roof top mechanical equipment and penetrations of metal deck. 2. Verify steel joist spacing,bracing,and layout. 3. Coordinate structural steel support framing for metal deck openings. B. Erect metal decking and connect to structure in accordance with SDI Design Manual. Coordinate attachment sequence and procedure with placing of units;show on final field use drawings. C. On steel support members provide 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. On masonry support surfaces provide 3 inch minimum bearing. D. Align and level deck on supports. E. Attach welds,fasteners,and side lap connectors of size,spacing,and location as indicated on Drawings. F. Install Hilti powder actuated fasteners using DX 860 HSN, DX 460 SM, DX 860 ENP or DX 76 tools, by Hilti. Installed pin height shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and verified with manufacturer approved inspection gage.Determine power level by jobsite testing. 05300-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 G. Install Hilti air actuated fasteners using the R4x12 decking system, by Hilti. Installed pin height shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and verified with manufacturer approved inspection gage. Determine power level by jobsite testing. H. Install Pneutek air actuated fasteners using decking system, by Pneutek. Install pins in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pin head shall clamp deck tightly to supporting member without gaps between underside of head and top side of deck. Pin shall not cause excessive dimpling of the deck greater than 1/2 the thickness of the pin head. I. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.3.Provide welding washers when welding 24 gauge or lighter steel in conformance with SDI standards. Install 6 inch wide sheet steel cover plates where deck changes direction. Spot weld in place 12 inches on center maximum. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls,columns,and openings. J. Immediately after welding deck in place, touch-up welds, burned areas, and surface coating damage with prime paint. K. Field Painting: Field paint finish as shown on Drawings and in accordance with Section 09900. L. Metal Canopy Deck: 1. Install panels such that panel joint occurs at top of rib. 2. Coordinate with work of other Sections to produce watertight assembly, capable of withstanding loading pressures and thermal and lateral loads. 3. Install gutter and downspouts furnished under other Sections. 4. Lap panels,set into sealant,and fasten at spacing indicated on Drawings. 5. Coat welded connections with zinc-rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 6. Isolate metals from dissimilar metals or corrosive substrates using bituminous coating. 7. Fill space between metal panel and support beam and between metal panel and light fixtures with pre-molded closure accessory strip to eliminate nesting space for birds. 8. Field Finish: Paint canopy supports, structural steel, metal fabrications and accessories on tops, bottoms, edges,and other weather-exposed surfaces as indicated on Drawings,in accordance with Section 09900. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified below shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform similar routine,necessary,and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Powder and air actuated fasteners. 5. Inspection: Manufacturer's representative(not a distributor or agent)shall be on site to inspect and verify proper installation of 100%of fasteners. 6. Report: Manufacturer representative (not a distributor or agent) shall submit inspection report indicating verification to Owner's Construction Manager. 3.4 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection(T&I)as specified in Appendix B. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots,welds,and abraded areas on exposed surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view. 3.6 CLEANING 05300-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Clean exposed surfaces of primed or painted erected members to remove stains, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other surface contaminants. END OF SECTION 05300-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 05400(05 4000)-COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold formed steel stud exterior and interior framing 20 gauge and heavier. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05090 - Post-installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Mechanical and adhesive anchors drilled into concrete or masonry. 2. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Connecting to structural building framing. 3. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Connecting to steel joists. 4. Section 05300-Metal Deck: Connecting to decking 5. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips,plywood,and blocking. 6. Section 07210-Building Insulation: Thermal insulation installed in exterior framing. 7. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Non-load bearing steel stud partition framing lighter than 20 gauge. 8. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Iron and Steel Institute(AISI): 1. North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 123 -Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. ASTM A 1003-Steel Sheet,Carbon,Metallic-and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 4. ASTM C 1007-Installation of Load Bearing(Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 5. ASTM C 1513-Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections. D. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code-Steel. 2. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Steel Sheet. E. Gypsum Association(GA): 1. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. F. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating Type I Inorganic And Type II Organic. G. Steel Framing Industry Association(SFIA): 1. Member listing. H. Steel Stud Manufacturer's Assocation(SSMA): 1. Member listing. I. Certified Steel Stud Association(CSSA): 1. 1.Member listing. 05400-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of cold formed metal framing components with minimum five years documented experience. B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with Standard Qualification Procedures as required by AWS D1.1. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Protect metal framing from corrosion,deformation,and other damage during delivery,storage,and handling. C. Store and protect metal framing products with waterproof covering;ventilate to avoid condensation. D. Where framing is stored outdoors, stack materials off ground, supported on level platform, fully protected from weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members and Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H,metallic coated, Grade: ST33H (33 ksi)unless otherwise indicated,Coating G60. C. Material Thickness: Gauge shown on Drawings shall have the following minimum base metal thickness. 1. 20 gauge: 33 mils. 2. 18 gauge: 43 mils. II 3. 16 gauge: 53 mils. 2.2 FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the following: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems,West Chester,OH(513)870-1100. 2. The Steel Network,Durham,NC(888)474-4876. 3. Ceinco Steel,Ft.Worth,1'X(817)568-1525. 4. Telling Industries, LLC Willoughby,OH(866)372-6384. 5. Marino/WARE,South Plainfield,NJ(800)627-4661. 6. Other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. B. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,with stiffened flanges,depth,flange width,and gauge as indicated on Drawings. C. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated,with stiffened flanges. D. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: Galvanized sheet steel, C-shaped; same depth and gauge as studs; tight fit; solid web. E. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,unpunched,with unstiffened flanges,and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. F. Deflection(Capture)Track: Deep-leg,U-shaped steel track;unpunched,with unstiffened flanges,of web depth as 05400-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 shown to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,with flanges or legs as shown designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.Provide fasteners as indicated on Drawings. 1. Contractor's Option: One of the following manufacturer's standard double or single deflection tracks modified as required for web depth as shown. a. VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network, Durham,NC (888)474-4876. If this option is used, track may be 20 guage(30 mil)for all stud sizes. b. FastTop Clip by ClarkDietrich Building Systems,West Chester,OH(513)870-1100. c. SLP-TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by Cemco. d. Comparable modified deflection tracks by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA, SSMA, or SFIA G. Vertical Deflection Clip(Slide Clip):VertiClip SLB by The Steel Network as shown on Drawings. H. Load-Bearing Wall Furring and Partition Bracing: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Cold-Formed Channels: 3/4 inch x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inch x 17/32 inch or as shown on Drawings. 2. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gauge x 1/4 inch less than stud width or a. Bridge Clip by The Steel Network. b. EasyClip U-Series Clip Angles 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 16 gauge x 1/4 inch less than stud width by ClarkDietrich. 3. Contractor's Option: In lieu of cold-formed channels and clip angles for horizontal bridging,provide one of the following: a. Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b. TradeReady Spazzer 5400 spacing bar by ClarkDietrich. c. Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. I. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36,zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. J. Framing Attachment Angles: Galvanized sheet steel, size, shape and configuration as indicated on Drawings, 14 gauge,unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 1. Contractor's Option: Contact ClarkDietrich Clip Express(866)638-1908 for alternative selections. K. Ceiling Joists and Runners: Galvanized sheet steel,C-shaped. L. Flat Metal Straps and Plates: Galvanized sheet steel,gauge,shape,and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 1. Contractor's Option: In lieu of 2-inch continuous metal strap at deflection(capture)tracks, Contractor may provide one of the following: a. Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b. TradeReady Spazzer 5400 bridging and spacing bar by ClarkDietrich. c. Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials,with capability to sustain,without failure,a load equal to 10 times design load. B. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513,corrosion-resistant-coated,self-drilling,self-tapping steel drill screws. C. Framing to Framing: ASTM C 1513; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self- tapping steel screws. D. Framing to Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. E. Wall Floor Track Anchorage Device: Carbon steel wedge type expansion anchor; minimum 3/8 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/2 inch embedment unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Refer to Section 05090 for approved anchors. F. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head screw anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x 05400-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Refer to Section 05090 for approved anchors. G. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.3. I. Wood Furring,Blocking,and Plywood,Attached to Framing Fasteners: Specified in Section 06100. 2.4 FINISHES A. Galvanizing: G60 coating class. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20,Type II-organic. 2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements.Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work.Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing in accordance with AISI North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Install system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners,or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. C. Install system to accommodate construction tolerances,deflection of building structural members,and clearances of intended openings. D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. F. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.3. 3.3 INSTALLATION- STUD FRAMING A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to studs,install studs in accordance with GA-216 and ASTM C 1007. B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center,maximum,unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Align stud web openings horizontally. D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. 05400-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 E. Place studs as indicated on Drawings,minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. F. Erect studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs not permitted. G. Erect studs,brace,and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. H. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped joists. I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. J. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. K. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. L. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bent at each end,fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3. Position a cut-to-length stud(extending to top runner)at vertical panel joints over door frame header. M. Install bridging for stud partitions over 8 feet high at mid-height with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels through studs and screw attach in place using clip angles.Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a length of at least 8 inches and wire fasten together. N. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions,wall cabinets,toilet accessories,and hardware. O. Where optional framing products by the named manufacturers are specified in Part 2 above in lieu of conventional components specified,install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. P. Touch up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. Q. Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. FASTENERS MINIMUM CONNECTION Floor Track to Concrete 1 Anchor at 36 inches on center. Partition Stud to Floor Track 1 Screw each side at flange. Stud Web to Stud Web 2 Screws. Plates and Straps to Studs 2 Screws. Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles 2 Screws to stud and 2 Screws to cold rolled channel. Runner to Header 1 Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end. Welded Connections Indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION-JOIST FRAMING A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Make provisions for erection stresses.Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Place joists at locations and spacing as indicated on Drawings. D. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 05400-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 E. Fastening: Indicated on Drawings. 3.5 INSTALLATION-CEILING JOISTS A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to joists,install joists in accordance with GA-216,and ASTM C 1007. B. Ceiling Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center beginning from center of room unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Install joists in direction of shortest span,parallel and level,with lateral bracing and bridging. D. Install joists in one piece full length.Splicing of joists not permitted. E. Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach joist runner track to wall framing with minimum 2 screws per stud and at corners and ends. F. Attach joist ends to joist runner tracks with minimum 1 screw each side at each flange. G. Install bridging at 48 inches on center beginning from center of room with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels screw attached to joists. 1. Stagger bridging at light fixture locations as required. 3.6 INSTALLATION-FURRING A. Furring Channels: Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center,unless otherwise shown on Drawings, to masonry and concrete surfaces with specified powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal furring at maximum 16 inches on center unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 3.7 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door frames and overhead coiling door frames. B. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports,and blocking for mechanical,electrical, and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified in Appendix B shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform similar routine,necessary,and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.9 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B(Section 05400). END OF SECTION 05400-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 042514 SECTION 06100(06 1000)-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Blocking and nailers for roofing system and related metal flashings. 2. Preservative and fire resistive treatment. 3. Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items. 4. Structural panel products. 5. Non-structural panel products including the following: a. Backing for electrical and telephone equipment. b. Panels concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. c. Panels used as finish material;walls,ceilings,wainscots,and bases. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06616-Simulated Stone Fabrications: Plywood substrate for countertops. 2. Section 07243 -Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Finish over plywood sheathing at exterior signage. 3. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Lumber Standards Committee(ALSC): 1. Softwood Lumber Standards. C. American Plywood Association(APA): 1. Grades and Standards. D. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 123/A-Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A 153 -Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. ASTM A 653-Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot- Dip Process. 4. ASTM A 307-Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 5. ASTM B 117-Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus. 6. ASTM E 1333-Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates from Wood Products Using a Large Chamber. E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME B18.6.1 -Wood Screws(Inch Series) F. American Wood Prrotection Association(AWPA): 1. AWPA UI -User Specification for Treated Wood. 2. AWPA M4-Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. G. Department of Commerce(National Institute of Standards and Technology)—Product Standard(DOC): 1. DOC PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. DOC PS 2-Performance Standard for Wood Based Structural Use Panels. 3. DOC PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. 06100-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 H. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau(SPIB): 1. Grading Rules. I. Western Wood Products Association(WWPA): 1. Western Lumber Grading Rules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading Agency: Lumber to be grade stamped by an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee(ALSC). B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/smoke ratings. D. Composite Wood Products: Hardwood plywood,particleboard,and medium density fiberboard composite wood products specified herein for exterior or interior applications shall meet the requirements for formaldehyde as specified by the California Air Resources Board, Air Toxics Control Measure for Composite Wood as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1333,and Chap 5 of the CALGreen requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges,ends and surfaces. C. Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground a minimum of 12 inches or if on concrete slab-on-grade a minimum of 1-1/2 inches,fully protected from weather. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Lumber: PS 20; S4S. Maximum of 19 percent moisture content, surfaced dry, No. 2 any species graded under WWPA grading rules or No. 3 Grade Southern Pine graded under SPIB grading rules. B. Nonstructural Panel: DOC PS 1 or PS 2. 1. Type 1 (Interior):Grade C-D Plugged veneer plywood,Exposure 1,locations and thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2. Type 2(Exterior): Grade C-C or better veneer plywood,Exterior,locations and thickness as indicated on the Drawings. C. Structural Panels: DOC PS 1 or PS 2. 1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior for exterior, Exposure 1 for interior, span rating required to support spacing indicated on Drawings.Thickness: Indicated on Drawings. D. High Density Wood Fiber Panel Products: Provide one of the following panels with span rating as required to suit support spacing indicated on Drawings. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 1. EnergyGuard High Density Fiberboard,by GAF,(800)766-3411. 2. Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by Huebert Brothers Products, LLC;Booneville,MO (816)882-2704. E. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS2, Exposure 1, for interior signage backing indicated on drawings. Thickness: Indicated on drawings. 2.2 FASTENERS 06100-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity: Comply with the treated lumber manufacturer's recommendations for fasteners and metal components in contact with treated lumber. 1. Fasteners: ASTM A 153,class D for hot dip galvanized fasteners or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. 2. Other components: ASTM A 653, G-185, with minimum of 1.85 ounces of zinc coating per square foot coverage or type 304 or type 316 stainless steel. B. At no time shall any galvanized metal,stainless steel,or other dissimilar metals be in contact with one another. C. Nails,Brads and Staples: 1. ASTM F 1667 galvanized for exterior locations and high-humidity areas and for treated wood. 2. ASTM A123 plain finish for other interior locations; 3. Size and type to suit application,unless otherwise noted. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Lag Screws: ASTM A307, Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations,high humidity areas,and treated wood;plain finish for other interior locations,of size and type to suit application,unless otherwise noted. E. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. F. Toggle Bolt Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to hollow masonry. G. Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and concrete. H. Powder Actuated Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to steel. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck(up to 10 gage,0.1345 inch): Self- drilling flat head wood-to-metal screws. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti,Tulsa,OK(800)879-6000. b. ITW Buildex,Itasca,IL(800)323-0720. 2. Wood and Plywood Up to 3/4 Inch Thick: a. Hilti: S-WD 8-18 x 1-15/16 PFH#3 Black Phosphated. b. ITW:Traxx 10-16#3 point. c. Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch or use heavier fastener specified below. 3. Wood less than or equal to 1-1/8 inch thickness to 18 Gage(0.0478 inch)and 20 Gage(0.0359 inch)Metal: a. Hilti: S-WD 10-24 x 1-1/2 PWH#3 wafer head screw. b. ITW: Traxx 10-16#3 point. c. Pre-drill wood if wood thickness is greater than 1/2 inch. 4. Wood less than or equal to 1-3/4 inch thickness to 16 Gage(0.598 inch)and Heavier Metal(less than or equal to 0.232 inches): a. Hilti: S-WW 12-24 x 2-1/2 PFH#4 Wings. b. ITW: Traxx 12-24#4 Point with Wings. 5. Wood less than or equal to 2-inch thickness to 16 Gage(0.598 inch)and heavier metal (less than or equal to 1/4 inch): a. Hilti: S-WW 1/4-20 x 2-3/4 PFH#4 Wings. J. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117 with wafer heads or reamer wings as specified above,length as shown or as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. K. Fasteners for Structural Wood Members to Solid Grouted Masonry: Adhesive anchors,size and length as indicated on Drawings. 1. Anchor adhesive: Cartridge type two-component adhesive for embedding anchors. a. HIT HY-70 by Hilti Corp. b. Epcon System,Ceramic 6 by ITW Ramset/Red Head c. Epoxy-Tie SET by Simpson Strong Tie Co., Inc. Pleasanton,CA (800)925-5099. 06100-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 d. Substitutions: Not permitted. L. Fasteners for Non-Structural Wood Members to Masonry: Masonry screw anchor with Phillips or Torx flat head, size and length as shown on the drawings. 1. Hilti: Kwik-Con II fastener. 2. ITW: Tapcon masonry anchor. M. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements,fasteners by alternate manufacturers of equal types to those specified may be provided,except where substitutions specifically prohibited. 2.3 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber Treatment: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: a. Wolman CCA by Arch Wood Protection,Smyrna,GA,(770)801-6600. b. CCA Pressure Treatment by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc.,Thomson,GA,(800)832-9663. c. SupaTimber by Viance,Charlotte,NC,(800)421-8661. 2. Treat lumber in accordance with AWPA Ul;Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground,Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 3. Preservative chemicals shall be acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and contain no arsenic or chromium where prohibited. 4. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to 15-19 percent moisture content. Do not use warped material or materials that do not comply with requirements for untreated material. Material to be painted or stained shall have knots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood. 5. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review and acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B. Field-Applied Lumber Preservative: 1. Provide the following: a. Inorganic boron. b. Copper naphthenate. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide any of the following: a. Dricon FRT(exterior and interior),by Arch Wood Protection,Smyrna,GA(770)801-6600. b. Exterior X (exterior) and Pyro-Guard (interior) by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc., Thomson, GA(800)832-9663. c. D-Blaze(interior)by Viance,Charlotte,NC(800)421-8661. 2. Identify fire retardant treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish,use chemical formulations that do not bleed through,contain colorants,or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to an average moisture content of 19 percent or less. 5. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less. 6. Chemicals used to treat material shall be free of halogens,sulfates,ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. 7. Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U. S.Environmental Protection Agency. D. Wood Requiring Treatment: 1. Lumber,Preservative Treated: a. Nailers,blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other con- struction. b. Sills,blocking,furring,stripping,and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Lumber,Fire Retardant Treated: a. Wood in concealed spaces. b. Wood exposed within the roof/ceiling assembly. 06100-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Interior Plywood,Fire Retardant Treated: a. Plywood used as finish material,walls,wainscots,and bases in fire-rated corridors. b. Plywood backing for electrical and telephone equipment. 4. Plywood Not to be Fire Retardant Treated: a. Structural plywood performing a structural function,such as a component of roof,floors or shear walls unless otherwise shown. b. Exterior plywood used as non-structural sheathing,substrate,or parapet cap assembly. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive rough carpentry work and verify following: 1. That installation of building components to receive rough carpentry work is complete. 2. That surfaces are satisfactory to receive work. 3. That spacing,direction and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking,backing, stripping,furring and nailing strips. 3.2 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Treatment at Site: Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line,cut,and fitted.Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 1. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 2. Do not splice structural members between supports,unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide blocking and framing indicated and necessary to support facing materials,fixtures,specialty items,and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing orblocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Secure members in place with specified fastener.Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood.Do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. D. Wood Ground,Sleeper,Blocking,and Nailer: Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. 1. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Recess heads of fasteners below surface of wood members. E. Wood Furring: Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. F. Install firestopping complying with Section 07840 in concealed spaces with wood blocking, horizontally and vertically in accordance with drawings,minimum 2 inches thick where space is not blocked by framing members. G. Tapered Wood Shim(edge strip)at Parapet Cap: 1. Provide shaped high density wood fiber or wood material as indicated at the optional Parapet Detail. 2. Shape wood material for continuous support of metal coping. 06100-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 H. Fasteners: Install fasteners with manufacturer's recommended power tool for each type of fastener. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect rough carpentry from weather throughout construction period. END OF SECTION 06100-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 06615 (06 6415)—NON-FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Non-fiberglass reinforced plastic(NRP)coated panels and accessories. 1.2 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. C. Product Delivery: Owner's Supplier will deliver Owner furnished products to site to be received by Con- tractor.Contact Owner's Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. D. Product Packaging: Deliver in manufacturer's original packaging with identification markings on each component or package. E. Acceptance at Site: Inspect products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of products fur- nished and shall report discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to the site. F. Store in clean, dry, enclosed, and secure storage area. Store flat and in accordance with manufacturer's published requirements. G. Protect non-fiberglass reinforced plastic products and accessories,especially adhesive,from freezing temperatures, excessive heat,temperature fluctuations,humidity and moisture penetration. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Enclose and weatherproof installation areas prior to beginning installation. B. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature and humidity within ranges recommended by panel manufacturer for at least 24 hours prior to installation,during installation,and after installation. C. Maintain panel and adhesive material in an environment of a minimum of 68 F and within humidity range recom- mended by panel manufacturer for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. Haines,Jones&Cadbury.Contact: Customer Service(800)459-7099,WMT(a,hjcinc.com 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer of Non-Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(NRP)products and accessories specified herein shall be by the following unless otherwise specified: 1. Parkland Plastics,Inc,,Middlebury,Indiana(800)835-4110. 2.3 DESCRIPTION 06615-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Plas-Tex NRP by Parkland Plastics. Waterproof,mineral reinforced,sanitary wall covering sheets fabricated from recycled polyethylene and polypropylene resins mixed with calcium carbonate and extruded to form a chemically inert sheet. Sheets with fiberglass reinforcement are not acceptable. 1. Recycled Content: 90 percent minimum. 2. Recyclable Content: 100 percent. 3. Panel Thickness: 3/32 inch thick. B. Physical Characteristics:Meet the following minimum characteristics: 1. Resistant to fungi and bacteria growth,cleaning agents,acids,and other chemicals. 2. No yellowing or color change with corrosive environments. 3. Water Absorption(ASTM D570):0.055 percent maximum. 4. Fire Rating(ASTM E84: Class C). a. Flame spread: 105 maximum. b. Smoke development:435 maximum. 5. Shear Strength(ASTM D732):970 psi minimum. 6. Hardness(ASTM D2240):51 Shore D minimum. 7. Compressive Strength(ASTM D695):5293 psi minimum. 8. Impact Resistance(ASTM D5420): a. 22.6 inch pounds minimum at 73 degrees F. b. 5.9 inch pounds minimum at minus 4 degrees F. 9. Heat Deflection Temperature(ASTM D648): 124 F. 10. United States Department of Agriculture(USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. C. Finish: Matte. D. Color: 1. NRP1 (White): Manufacturer's standard color Bright White. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive. Pressure sensitive,low VOC adhesive.One of the following as determined by Owner's supplier: 1. X7029 Parkland Panel Adhesive by Parkland. 2. Spray-Lock by Interlock Industries,Inc. Chattanooga,TN,(423)305-6151. B. Moldings: Extruded polyvinyl chloride(PVC)channel type moldings with flanges to fit beneath wall sheets. 1. Shapes for panel division,inside and outside corners,and edge caps. 2. Color:Match NRP panel color. C. Sealant: Silicone type as specified in Specification Section 07900 and approved by NRP manufacturer for this application. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that substrates to receive panels are flat,clean,dry,solid,and free from coatings and defects detrimental to installation.Verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION 06615-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Install NRP panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Follow the Plas-Tex installation online video for installation instructions except as may be otherwise instructed by the adhesive manufacturer. http://wwvv.park- landplastics.com/install-nrp-polywall.shtml B. Assure HVAC is in operation and a minimum temperature of 68 F and a maximum relative humidity of 80% is maintained at time of installation and 48 hours subsequent to installation in accordance with manufacturer's instal- lation instructions. C. Cut sheets by scoring and snapping,with sheet metal shears,or sawing with fine toothed blade. D. Position sheet against wall. Allow recommended gap at top,bottom,and sides of sheets. Secure sheet by applying pressure with roller over entire surface.Ensure adhesive contact is even and complete. E. Penetrations and openings: Drill round openings. For rectangular cutouts, first drill hole at each corner to relieve stress. Provide minimum 1/8 inch space around pipes, electrical fittings, obstructions and other items penetrating panels. F. Install panels with edges vertical and plumb.Use maximum length pieces to provide minimum number of end joints. 1. Align panel to panel vertical joints at inside and outside corner conditions. G. Adhesive: Apply in accordance with manufactures application instructions for substrates listed below: 1. CMU: Parkland Adhesive. Follow on-line video installation instructions referenced above. 2. Gypsum Board, Plywood And Glass-Mat Faced Gypsum Backing Board: Spray-Lock Adhesive. Follow on-line video instructions as follows: http://spraylock.com/wm nrp.html H. Moldings:Install accessory panel trim pieces concurrently with installation of panels.Miter cut accessory panel trim at corners to provide smooth transition. 1. Provide moldings for wall covering joints, perimeter edges, and corners. Neatly cut molding to required lengths.Ensure moldings are straight and correctly aligned. 2. Allow space in molding channels as recommended by manufacturer for wall covering expansion. I. Apply continuous bead of sealant in all molding channels. 1-. Seal corner seams,base and ceiling junctures,and junctures between panels and wall with sealant. 2. Provide sealant around all openings,corners,and joints. J. Immediately remove excess adhesive and sealant from wall covering and moldings. K. Adhesive and sealant shall not be visible in completed system. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed panels from subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION 06615-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 093011a SECTION 07210(07 2100)-BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Batt Insulation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Metal furring. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM C 578-Rigid,Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C 665 -Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 4. ASTM E 136-Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube furnace at 750 C. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Insulation: Insulation concealed within framing system,both faces protected by finish material. B. Exposed Insulation: Insulation exposed within framing system,one or both faces unprotected. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer's recommendations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers as specified in the Materials paragraph below: 1. CertainTeed Corporation,Valley Forge,PA (800)523-7844. 2. Guardian Fiberglass Incorporated,Albion,MI (800)748-0035. 3. Johns Manville Insulations,Denver,CO (877)766-3295. 4. Owens-Corning,Toledo,OH (800)438-7465. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteris- tics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics and other methods specified.Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665 mineral fiber blanket insulation. 07210-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: Type I(blankets without membrane facing);with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2. Faced,Glass-Fiber: Type III(blankets with reflective membrane facing),Class A(membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier),faced with vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. 3. Sound Attenuation Insulation(Sound Batts): Unfaced glass fiber batt insulation as specified above. 4. Provide batt insulation by one of the following manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Guardian Fiberglass,Inc. c. Johns Manville. d. Owens Corning. B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self-adhering type;two inches wide. B. Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. Adhesive VOC shall be within the limits of not greater than 70 g/L in accordance with the California's South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)Rule No. 1168. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. 2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3.2 INSTALLATION-BATT INSULATION A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,without gaps or voids. B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.Use batts free of damage.Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. C. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side in winter of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane. Attach insulation in place to framing;tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal tears or cuts in membrane. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings. CONDITION TYPE OF INSULATION THICKNESS Interior Partitions Unfaced Batt Insulation 3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. Sound Attenuation Unfaced Batt Insulation 3-1/2 inches or 6 inches as Shown. END OF SECTION 07210-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 012712 SECTION 07500(07 5000)-MEMBRANE ROOFING PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is included to provide information on the existing roofing system. All new roofing,including patching and sealing of existing and new penetrations,shall match these specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new roofing is required. B. Section Includes: 1. TPO Membrane Roofing System including insulation. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry:Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal fascia and edge trim, counter flashings, and other sheet metal. 3. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 578-Rigid,Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C 1289-Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 3. ASTM C 1303 -Standard Test Method for Predicting Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Closed-Cell Foam Insulation. 4. ASTM D 6878-Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing. C. Factory Mutual Research Corporation(FM): 1. FM Approvals Building Materials Approval Guide,Chapter 3-Approved Combinations and Assemblies. 2. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28-Design Wind Loads. 3. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29-Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Components. 4. FM Approval Standard 4450-Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs. 5. FM Approval Standard 4470-Class 1 Roof Covers. D. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL): 1. UL-Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. 2. UL 1256-Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. Submit required submittals within 30 days after contract award. Submittals shall be available at all times to the Owner's Construction Manager. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing: 1. Fastener patterns to meet uplift requirements. 2. Layouts for Crickets and saddles. 3. Walk pad layouts. 4. Details for patching and sealing new and existing penetrations. 5. Details required for completion but not shown on Drawings. 07500-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 6. Techniques for nighttime or weather tie offs. C. Closeout Submittals: Comply with the requirements of Section 01770. 1. Roofing System Warranty Form included at the end of this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers,dry and undamaged with seals and labels intact. C. Store materials in weather-protected environment,clear of ground and moisture. Storage requirements for insulation are as follows: 1. Cut or remove plastic shipping wrap from insulation. 2. Cover with tarpaulin,shield from moistures and ultraviolet rays. 3. Elevate minimum of 4 inches above substrate. 4. Secure to resist high winds. 5. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads. 6. Do not install wet insulation. Insulation shall be thoroughly dry prior to installation. D. Store cements, primers, and caulks in heated area above 40 degrees F during cold weather and in area below 80 degrees F in warm weather. E. Do not store materials on completed roofing. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Follow industry standards for environment requirements including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F,follow specified Cold Weather Application Procedures as specified herein. 2. Do not apply finished roofing system to wet,damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. 3. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranty commencing at date of Grand Opening,on form provided at the end of this Section that includes cost of labor and materials for loss of weather tightness without financial limit for a period of 15 years. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and to the extent specified hereinafter,provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. Firestone Building Products Company, Indianapolis, IN, Jason Flack, National Accounts Representative, (317)816-3989,flackjason(wfirestonebp.com 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single Ply Membrane Roofing System:Single ply membrane roofing system consisting of insulation on metal deck with reinforced membrane mechanically fastened. B. Flashing and Waterproofing Membranes: Reinforced membrane and unreinforced,fully adhered,as defined herein and indicated on Drawings. 07500-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: Comply with FM Approvals Building Materials Approval Guide or Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.Roofing Materials and Systems Directory as specified: 1. Factory Mutual: Provide roofing assembly meeting Class 1A-90 requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM Approvals Standard 4470 and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29. 2. Provide roof assembly meeting requirements of UL 1256 for Flame Spread developed from underside of deck and roof assembly meeting requirements of FM Approvals Standard 4450 for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs(construction materials calorimeter). 2.4 ROOFING SYSTEMS A. Single Ply Mechanically Attached TPO Membrane Roofing System. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. UltraPly TPO Roofing System by Firestone. B. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.5 ROOF MEMBRANE A. Roof Membrane: Single ply membrane composed of thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) sheet as specified for the specific product hereinbefore and reinforced with polyester scrim conforming to ASTM D 6878. 1. Membrane Type: Reinforced,60 mil thickness,white, 10 ft.maximum sheet width. B. Flashing Membrane: Reinforced and non-reinforced TPO membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by Roofing System manufacturer,thickness to match roofing membrane,specifically designed for use in flashing at perimeters and around projections through roofing system. 2.6 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. TPO System: 1. Waterproofing Membrane: Membrane waterproofing composed of thermoplastic polyolefin(TPO) formed into uniform,flexible sheets by Roofing System manufacturer,thickness to match roof membrane. 2. Waterproofing Flashing: Reinforced and non-reinforced TPO membrane and pressure-sensitive flashing by Roofing System manufacturer, thickness to match membrane, specifically designed for use in flashing at perimeters and wall,and around projections through roofing system. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. Isocyanurate Foam Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board insulation, ASTM C 1289,Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, with an LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) value of 17.2 based on ASTM C 1303. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following products: a. HPH by Carlisle. b. ISO 95+GL,by Firestone. c. E'NRG'Y 3 or ISO 3 by Johns Manville. d. Products meeting the specified requirements by other manufacturers as recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer. 2. Thickness: 2.8 inches min. B. Prefabricated EPS Tapered Insulation:Rigid expanded polystyrene(EPS)foam insulation,ASTM C 578,Type VIII (1.15 pcf minimum)or Type II(1.5 pcf minimum), flame retardant additive,with an LTTR(Long Term Thermal Resistance)value of 20.0 based on ASTM C 1303. 1. Provide products meeting the specified requirements by one of the manufacturers specified above as applicable. 07500-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 C. Roof Curb Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Foam; both faces covered with glass fiber felt; thickness to match wood nailer. 2.8 COVER BOARD A. Cover Board for Application over Prefabricated EPS Tapered Insulation: Glass-mat,water-resistant gypsum roof board, 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1177. 1. Product: Dens Deck Roof Board by Georgia-Pacific. 2.9 ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING AND SEALS A. Molded Pipe Flashing: Pre-molded flexible pipe flashing as recommended and supplied by the roofing manufacturer. B. Urethane Rubber Seal System: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric pourable sealer pockets including two-part pourable urethane sealer. C. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for patching and sealing of all existing and new penetrations to maintain existing roofing warranty. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories as shown on the drawings and manufacturer's system accessories for a complete and warranted Roofing System,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Weathered Membrane Cleaner. 2. Lap Sealant. 3. Bonding Adhesive. 4. Membrane Fasteners. 5. Termination Bar. 6. Insulation Fasteners. 7. Walkway/Isolation Pads. 8. Preformed Accessories including pipe flashings. 9. Preformed Corner Patching. 10. Draw Bands. 11. Foam Filler Insulation:Polyurethane Expanding Foam as specified in Section 07900. 12. Pressure-sensitive Flashing. 13. Primer. 14. Insulation and Membrane Fasteners. 15. In-seam Plates. 16. Splice Tape. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify deck is clean and smooth,free of depressions,waves,or projections,properly sloped to drains,valleys,and eaves.Verify flutes of steel deck are evenly spaced at intersections.Defects in the substrate surface shall be reported and documented. B. Verify roof openings, curbs,pipes, sleeves, ducts,or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place.Verify deck is supported and tightly secured. C. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of water,snow,and ice. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage during 07500-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 roofing work. B. Where Work shall continue over finished roof membrane,protect roof system from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. 3.4 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Mechanically fasten insulation, through fire resistive layer if specified, to deck with FM approved fasteners and plates in accordance with requirements of FM. 1. Install insulation with long joints of insulation ina continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows,abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 2. Lay insulation boards such that edges(sides or ends)of board running parallel to the direction of the metal deck flutes are fully supported on the top flange as close as practical to the center of the flange with a minimum bearing of 1 inch.Trim board edges if they veer off the flange center. 3. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 3 inches or greater,install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 4. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 5. Install fasteners using drill with torque clutch;other types of drills will not be permitted. 6. In no case shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in approved submittals. B. Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly around protrusions through roof. At parapet walls, cope insulation around protrusions and embed plates; butt tight to wall, sealing conditioned building. 1. Fill gaps over 1/4 inch wide with Foam Filler Insulation.After foam sets and before installation of membrane, trim foam flush with insulation surface. C. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following: 1. Mechanical Unit Crickets and Saddles: Install field-fabricated tapered isocyanurate foam insulation to achieve slope as shown on Drawings but not less than 1/4 inch per foot finished slope. 2. Roof Counterslope: Where tapered insulation is indicated to counter roof slope, install field-fabricated tapered isocyanurate foam insulation to achieve 1/4 inch per foot min.finished slope. 3. Edge Taper Insulation: Adjacent to gutter assembly, slope field-fabricated tapered isocyanurate foam insulation at minimum rate of 1/2 inch per foot. Provide insulation having a starting thickness of one inch, tapering insulation up to match nominal roof insulation thickness. D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. E. Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with bonding cement. 3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Mechanically Fastened Membrane: 1. Run membrane perpendicular to steel deck flutes. Unroll membrane over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Mechanically fasten membrane using manufacturer's fastening system. Install fasteners in accordance with submitted engineered layout pattern to resist specified wind uplift. 3. Install fasteners using drill depth sensing or torque limiting screw guns to limit under/over drive of fasteners. Drill motors and other non-limiting drivers shall not be used. 4. Seam Sealing: Heat-weld seams according to the system manufacturer's recommendations, and with a minimum weld width of 1-1/2 inches. 07500-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Cold Weather Application Procedures: When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, follow Cold Weather Application Procedures as follows: 1. Store materials in heated storage units prior to installation. Rotate adhesive, cement,and sealant containers to maintain their temperature above 40 degrees F. 2. Allow membrane to relax until no wrinkles are visible. 3. Allow adequate time for solvents in cements to flash off. Check dryness of applied cements before sealing joints. 4. Verify that frost, dew, and other forms of moisture have evaporated prior to covering insulation with membrane to prevent entrapment of moisture within finished roof system. 3.6 WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION A. Install water cut-offs at end of day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane from moisture entry.If inclement weather appears imminent during roofing application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, flashings,penetrations and membrane from moisture infiltration with water cutoffs.Insulation and roofing materials not so protected prior to inclement weather will be considered damaged and will be cause for rejection. B. Remove water cut-offs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofmg work.Remove materials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean,dry condition before proceeding with roofing operations.Remove damaged materials from job site. C. The water cut-offs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system specified. 3.7 FLASHING MEMBRANE AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Flashing Membrane: Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's standard peel and stick flashing. 1. Reinforced Flashing Membrane: Where conditions permit, flash penetrations and walls with reinforced flashing membrane. 2. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes, to flash inside and outside corners,scuppers,and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls as approved by the manufacturer. B. Roof Penetrations: 1. Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where shown and elsewhere whenever configuration of penetration will permit except when urethane rubber seals is shown. 2. Urethane Rubber Seal System: Install at locations shown including electrical,gas line,condensate pipe,and flue penetrations. Install also where molded pipe flashing cannot be installed due to configuration of penetration. 3. Install flashings and seals per manufacturer's application instructions. 4. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for flashing for pipe penetrations larger than 6 inches. 5. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for patching and sealing of all existing and new penetrations to maintain existing roofing warranty. C. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane. D. Fasten termination bars at 12 inches on center or less to maintain constant compression. E. Isolation Pads: Install isolation pads at pipe supports. F. Walkway Pads:Install walkway pads as shown on Drawings.Maximum pad section length shall be 10 ft with three inch spacing between pad sections, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Adhere pads to roofing system to prevent displacement in maximum anticipated design wind velocity and to allow drainage of moisture from beneath pads. Install pads to allow roof surface drainage without ponding water. Install pads after adjacent equipment installation. 3.8 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 07500-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Waterproofing Membrane: Install waterproofing membrane to be fully adhered to parapet using bonding adhesive as recommended by membrane manufacturer.Run membrane waterproofing over top of parapet and turn down front side of parapet 3 inches. 1. Provide continuous weather tight seal from 3 inches below parapet cap,over parapet,down interior face,and onto roof surface. 2. Conceal adhesive on exterior face of parapet with waterproofing. 3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for patching and sealing of all existing and new penetrations to maintain existing roofing warranty. 3.9 WATERPROOFING FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Waterproofing Flashing:Apply waterproofing flashing to seal membrane to vertical elements using manufacturer's peel and stick flashing. B. Comply with the following requirements when using TPO waterproofing flashing: 1. Reinforced Waterproofing Flashing: Where conditions permit, flash walls with reinforced waterproofing flashing or as required by the manufacturer. 2. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes,to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls where use of reinforced waterproofing flashing is not practical or as required by the manufacturer. 3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for patching and sealing of all existing and new penetrations to maintain existing roofing warranty. 3.10 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate Work with installation of associated metal counterflashings specified under other sections as the Work of this Section proceeds. B. Complete installation of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Roofing Inspection: 1. The Owner's Independent Roofing Inspector(IRI)will conduct roof construction inspections at no cost to the Contractor.The IRI shall be the responsible person in charge of overall supervision and implementation of Roof Observation Program in accordance with Section 01458. Inspection includes the following: a. Training and supervision of CTL Roofing Technicians. b. Site visits during the roof installation at least once and as many times as necessary to ensure adequate observations and proper installation. c. Field reports. d. Periodic roof installation observation. e. Field testing recommendations. f. Oversight of remedial repairs in the field. g. Administration and maintenance of the online Owner's Observation Log with respect to roofing defects and repairs. h. Verification of completion of magnetic sweeping prior to Grand Opening. i. Conducting comprehensive roof inspection upon completion of roofing together with all parties to be signators to Roof Inspection Checklist. j. Issuance of Certification of Quality of Roof Construction upon completion of roof installation. 2. The activities and responsibilities of the IRI shall not preclude any quality control responsibilities by the Contractor,the Roofmg Contractor,or the Manufacturer as specified herein. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for sampling and testing specified herein. 4. The Roof Inspection Checklist included herein shall be used by the Contractor as a tool to measure quality roofing work as the work progresses. B. Core samples shall be taken only when required to evaluate problems observed during quality-assurance inspections of roofing membrane as follows: 07500-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Sample cutting and patching shall be by and at the expense of the Contractor. 2. Cut samples shall be taken when and as recommended by the IRI,and approved by the Owner's Construction Manager, when determined necessary for quality assurance validation or to determine the extent of deficiencies discovered during construction or during final roofing inspection.Except where cut samples are taken to investigate deficiencies,no more than two cut samples per 100 squares or one cut sample from each day's work shall be required. Cut samples at locations identified by the IRI. 3. Submit core samples to the IRI for examination. Deficiencies shall be reported by the IRI. C. Manufacturer Services: 1. Provide site inspection and reports by Manufacturer's Technical Representative at the following periods: a. After 30%but prior to 50%of roof installation. b. At 100%completion of roof installation. c. Final Inspection: Two weeks prior to Grand Opening. 2. Inspection shall conform to the inspection requirements specified herein. 3. Prepare Certificate of Acceptance of completed roof installation by the Manufacturer. 4. Perform a final audit 10 months after acceptance with Owner's representative as scheduled by Owner. 3.12 CLEANING A. Replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. B. One week prior to turnover to Owner, sweep entire roof surface with a magnetic sweeper to remove nails, screws and other metal items which may cause subsequent damage to the roof. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof installation,protect roof surfaces as recommended by roofing system manufacturer to protect manufacturer's warranty. 3.14 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Maintain roofing system and related work from time of roofing completion until occupancy. Repair material or installation defects or damage resulting from any subsequent work on the roof or from any weather-related damage. Maintain roof system in watertight condition including repair of conditions that show signs of inferior workmanship that may result in potential leaks. Repair leaks occurring prior to occupancy in accordance with good roofing practice and the requirements specified herein. Remove and replace wet insulation caused by water leaks and repair the roofing system. END OF SECTION 07500-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 ROOFING SYSTEM WARRANTY Owner: Address of Owner: Type and Name of Building: Location: Roofing System Specification Number: Area of Roof System: Date of Store Grand Opening: Date Warranty Expires: Manufacturer's 24 hour Emergency Telephone: ( ) (no answering machines or message Center) Contact Name: Contractor's Telephone: ( ) (no answering machines or message center) Contact Name: Upon completion of and after inspection by the Manufacturer of such Work,Manufacturer agrees to warrantee the aforesaid Roofing System for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth: Manufacturer Warrantees,subject to the conditions herein set forth,that during a period of 15 years from the date of store Grand Opening,it will,at its own cost and expense,make or cause to be made such repairs to said Roofing System resulting solely from faults or defects in materials and/or workmanship applied by or through the Roofing System Contractor as may be necessary to maintain said Roofing system in watertight condition.Owner's remedies and manufacturer's liability shall include cost of labor and materials for loss of weather tightness without financial limit.In accordance with good roofing practice,the Manufacturer shall remove and replace all wet insulation(as defined in specifications)caused by water leaks covered under this Warranty(i.e.leaks resulting from circumstances other than those listed in the exclusions)and repair the Roofing System at no cost to the Owner. Should the investigation reveal that the leak is the result of something other than a defect in materials and/or workmanship applied by or through the Roofing System Contractor,the reasonable investigative work and reasonable repair costs shall be paid by the Owner.Failure by the Owner to pay these costs shall render this warranty null and void. Warranty shall include materials and workmanship from the following items: 1. Membranes(including parapet waterproofing). 2. Membrane flashings including attachment to sheet metal flashings and trim. 3. Fasteners,cements,and adhesives. This warranty is made subject to the following conditions: 1. The Owner shall notify Manufacturer within 24 hours of notice by the Owner's Roof Maintenance Department of leaks. The Manufacturer will respond with service within 24 hours of notice from owner(if not possible,than no later than 48 hours,however Owner retains the right to make repairs at Warrantor's expense to mitigate damages). 2. Specifically excluded from this Warranty is any and all damage to said roof system,the building,or contents caused by natural disasters,including,but not limited to:earthquake,hail,lightning,hurricane,tornado,strong gale wind force(72 MPH or greater),or structural failure of the building or of the roof deck(as defined by a licensed Structural Engineer and except that caused by the Manufacturer),fire,and acts of war.If the roof system is damaged by reason of any of the foregoing,this warranty shall become null and void(AFFECTED AREAS ONLY)for the balance of the warranty period unless such damage is repaired at the expense of the owner. 3. Manufacturer is not liable for consequential damages to the building or contents resulting from any defects in said roof system,including,but without limitation,any interruption of business experienced by Owner or occupants of the building. 07500-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 4. All additions and/or alterations to the roof system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations and the manufacturer should provide prior to acceptance to said additions or alterations.Should unauthorized additions/alterations be discovered by the Owner's Roof Maintenance Department,the manufacturer will be notified in writing within fourteen days of such discovery.Provide at manufacturer's discretion an inspection of the unauthorized additions/alterations and notify the Owner in writing of any remedy required by the manufacturer within fourteen days.This Installation/Inspection by the Manufacturer is to be done at a cost to Owner of not more than$500.00 to cover travel and time for the inspector.Provide inspection of said roof during business hours.Failure to notify the Owner of any required remedy shall deem the addition/alteration acceptable to the Manufacturer and the warranty will remain in effect. 5. The area of additions and/or alterations shall be the only area of the roof system where warranty is suspended.All other roof system areas will have continual coverage under the roof warranty, 6. This Warranty is transferable within the 15-year warranty period,subject to Manufacturer's inspection,written approval and transfer fee payment. 7. During the term of this warranty,the manufacturer,its agents and employees,shall have free and unlimited access to the roof during the hours of store operation. 8. The terms and conditions of this warranty are controlling. Any other warranty conditions attached or referenced that are in conflict with this warranty are ineffective and invalid. 9. This limited warranty shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Arkansas without regard to conflict of laws. 10. The Manufacturer does not warrant products incorporated or utilized in this installation that it has not furnished.The Manufacturer specifically disclaims liability under any theory of law arising out of the installation or performance of,or damages sustained by or caused by,products not furnished by the Manufacturer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this instrument has been duly executed this day of By END OF WARRANTY 07500-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 ROOF INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS TOOLS AND SUPPLIES: Provide the following during inspections: • Copy of roof plan and copy and specifications. • Tape measure,metal thickness gauge,paint for marking defects on roof,roof coring tools and repair materials,and seam probe(to be supplied by Roofing Contractor). INSPECTION PROCEDURE • Owner's Independent Roofing Inspector shall arrange and conduct inspection and complete checklist and identify defects. • All undersigned parties shall accompany inspection. • Inspect underside of decking from inside of building for proper insulation fastener spacing and sheet fastener spacing. • Roof Inspection shall start at the parapet wall on the GM side of the building,at the back corner. • Proceed around perimeter,(including Auto Center,Garden Center,etc). • Continue across front wall and down sidewall at GR. • Inspect all metal flashings,base and wall flashings,perimeter attachments,perimeter membrane sheet layout, parapet waterproofing membrane,and all accessories. • Inspect condition of paint on exterior walls. Inspect CMU for proper paint coverage. • Inspect all painted metals for proper coverage. • Inspect back wall gutter or internal drainage system. • Inspect field of roof system,beginning approx. 10'from back wall,walking side to side of building. • Inspect roof area no more than 10 feet on each side of walking paths,from back,to front of building. • Inspect all checklist items at field seams, flashings,RTUs,mechanical equipment,skylights,refrigeration units,gas lines,expansion joints,crickets,walkpads,and other roof accessories. • Mark defects on roof by paint markings and identify each defect using corresponding defect number. • After roof inspection is complete FAX signed inspection form to Owner's Construction Manager within 24 hours. COMPLETION OF CHECKLIST AND DEFECTS FORM • Answer each checklist item Yes or No. • Mark"N/A"on checklist items which do not apply. • Identify defects on the Owner's Observation Log.(www.bldgoortal.com,enter username and password,select Observation Log) • Number each defect as follows: o Identification Symbol-Checklist Item No.-Defect No.(E.g.MF-1-3) o Identification symbol and checklist item number shall correspond to the Roof Inspection Checklist. The defect number shall be numbered in sequence for each checklist item. • Complete all applicable information in the Observation Log including the resolution of each item. 07500-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 ROOF INSPECTION CHECKLIST (GI)GENERAL: 1. Is specified roof system installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Is construction materials,trash,and other debris removed from the roof? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are all punch list items addressed and signed off? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is there any visible physical damage to roof? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are RTU's numbered so they can be seen from the roof hatch? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Is roof hatch painted? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Is there roofing mastic or other foreign substance on roof membrane? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (MF)MECHANICAL FASTENERS: (Check from inside building) 1. Is insulation attachment pattern installed per manufacturers required spacing and pattern? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Is membrane sheet attachment in the seams at minimum 12"inches o.c. or per manufacturers required spacing? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are all seams mechanically attached? YES_ NO_ N/A (PF)PERIMETER WALL FLASHING Metal Flashing Types(Check all that apply) [ ] Embedded edge metal [ ] Metal cap flashing [ ] Wall/Parapet [ ] Coping [ ] Other [ ] Pre-finished metal [ ] Painted metal.Paint condition: 1. Is edge metal fascia attached with fastener spacing at 3"o.c. staggered? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Is edge metal fascia continuously attached to the cleat? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is edge metal lapped a minimum of 4"? YES_ NO N/A_ 4. Are laps sealed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Is edge metal properly stripped into roof system? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Is metal sealed at the flashing? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Is metal coping fastened with neoprene gasket fasteners at 12"o.c.? YES_ NO_ N/A (PW)PARAPET WALL MEMBRANE 1. Is membrane fully adhered in all areas to the parapet walls? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are there any voids,wrinkles,or disbonded areas? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is termination bar installed at the base flashing? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is base flashing run onto the roof membrane and seam sealant used? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are corner flashings installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Are there any open seams? YES_ NO N/A_ 7. Is membrane terminated and sealed at parapet end wall conditions? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 8. Are all parapet end walls fully painted or flashed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (PA)PERIMETER MEMBRANE SHEETS ATTACHMENT 1. Are the required number perimeter sheets per system specification installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are fasteners spaced per the manufacturers requirements? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are T-Lap patches installed at all T-joints? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Are seams properly sealed? YES_ NO N/A (EW)EXTERIOR WALL PAINT(Inspect every 25'minimum.) 1. Is wall painted/sealed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are there visible voids in the paint? YES_ NO N/A_ 3. Are there cracks in blocks or open mortar joints? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Are walls painted behind downspouts? YES_ NO_ N/A 07500-12 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 DRAINAGE SYSTEM(Check all that apply) [ ] Gutters and downspouts [ ] Interior drains [ ] Overflow drains [ ]Overflow scuppers [ ] Scuppers with leaders&downspouts [ ]Overflow scuppers Specified gauge(Check all areas with gauge) • Main roof area gauge • Auto Center gauge • Garden Center gauge • Receiving gauge • Other gauge (GD)GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 1. Is specified type of metal installed? YES_ NO_ N/A 2. Is gutter sized as indicated on the drawings? YES_ NO_ N/A 3. Is gutter holding water? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is gutter painted inside? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are gutter straps installed every 36"o.c.? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Are gutter expansion joints installed every 40'maximum? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Are gutter outlets soldiered to the gutter? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 9. Are gutter brackets installed every 36"o.c.?(Inspect from the ground level) YES_ NO_ N/A_ 10. Are downspouts the specified size and configuration? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 11. Are downspout straps installed at top,center,and bottom? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 12. Are downspouts spaced as called out in the documents? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 13. Are splash blocks installed? YES_ NO N/A_ 14. Are downspouts properly tied to the storm sewer? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 15. Are joints in gutter leaking? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 16. Are outlets in gutter leaking? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (RE)ROOF EDGE 1. Is gravel guard properly installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Is gravel guard properly stripped into roof system? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is gravel guard prefinished or painted? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is gravel guard nailed at 3"o.c.staggered? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Is roof edge ponding water? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (DR)INTERIOR DRAINS 1. Are roof drains the specified diameter? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are overflow drains the specified diameter? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Does the roof drain outlet diameter match the diameter of the leader pipe? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is roof membrane properly trimmed inside the roof drain? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Is roof drain free of debris and draining properly? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Is insulation tapered around the roof drains? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Are roof drains checked for leaks inside the store? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 9. Are roof drain strainers in place? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 10. Does ponding exist? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (SC)SCUPPERS 1. Are scuppers the specified height and width? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are scuppers located directly in line with the primary and over flow drains? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are scuppers flush with the roof? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Does ponding exist? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Is scupper box installed and sealed to the wall? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Are scuppers properly flashed to roof system? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 07500-13 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (JC)JIB CRANE 1. Is jib crane located with unobstructed clear space below? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Is jib crane usable in a safe manner? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is safety chain installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is ladder safety chain installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Is GFI outlet installed within 6'reach of the jib hoist arm? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Are walkway protection pads installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Is parapet door in place(on raised parapet projects)? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (RM)ROOF FIELD MEMBRANE: (Seams should be checked in random areas for proper seals and voids. No wrinkles in seams will be acceptable.) 1. Is maximum width field sheet used? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are all seams properly lapped and sealed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are T-lap patches in place at all T-Laps? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Are all edges of cut sheet sealed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are there wrinkles in any laps? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Does any ponding exist in roof area? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Is membrane shingled properly with the slope of the roof? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (RI)ROOF INSULATION 1. Is insulation the specified thickness?(Verify by roof cores if necessary) YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are there visible gaps in the insulation boards? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is there ponding along horizontal insulation joints? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Are there voids or missing insulation? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (RTU)ROOF TOP UNITS&REFRIGERATION UNITS FLASHINGS: 1. Are base flashings fully adhered to curb? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are corner flashings on curbs installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are seams to roof membrane sealed with no voids or wrinkles? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Are crickets installed to divert water around unit? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are counterflashings installed and properly attached? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Are walkpads installed as per the documents? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Are condensation P-traps installed on all units? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (SK)SKYLIGHTS: 1. Are base flashings fully adhered to curb? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Are corner flashings on curbs installed? YES NO_ N/A_ 3. Are seams to roof membrane sealed with no voids or wrinkles? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Are crickets installed to divert water around unit? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are counterflashings installed and properly attached? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 6. Are skylights attached to curbs at 12"o.c.? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Do screws have neoprene washers? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 8. Are cracks visible in domes? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 9. Is there moisture between domes? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 10. Are any of the units damaged? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 11. Are any of the corners open? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 07500-14 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (GL)GAS LINES: 1. Are gas lines painted? YES_ No_ N/A_ 2. Is blocking spaced under line at 8'o.c max.? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is blocking located within 2'of RTU? YES_ NO_ N/A 4. Is blocking located within 1'-6"of each corner? YES_ NO N/A_ 5. Are protection pads under each block? YES NO_ N/A_ 6. Are protection pads the correct size and fully adhered? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 7. Are pipe clamps correct sizes and installed per the documents? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 8. Are gas pipe dirt legs touching roof? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (EJ)ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 1. Is expansion joint installed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 2. Is joint properly terminated at the parapet at the front? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Is joint properly terminated at the rear? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 4. Is joint properly flashed to roof system? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 5. Are there any open seams? YES_ NO_ N/A_ (MI)MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 1. Are soil stacks properly flashed and clamps installed? YES NO_ N/A_ 2. Are roof jacks properly flashed and collars sealed? YES_ NO_ N/A_ 3. Are protection pads under support? YES_ NO_ N/A_ ATTENDED BY: GENERAL CONTRACTOR (Printed name and title) ROOFING CONTRACTOR (Printed name and title) MANUFACTURERS REP. (Printed name and title) OWNER'S CONST MGR. (Printed name and title) STORE MANAGER (Printed name and title) INDEPENDENT ROOFING INSPECTOR 07500-15 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 (Printed name and title) 07500-16 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 013114 SECTION 07620(07 6200)-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Counterflashing over base flashing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Section 07500-Membrane Roofing: Roof penetration flashing and seals. 3. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 4. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA): 1. AAMA 621 -Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized(HDG)and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653-Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot- Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755/A-Steel Sheet,Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792/A-Steel Sheet,55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 4. ASTM B 749-Lead and Lead Alloy Strip,Sheet,and Plate Products 5. ASTM D 523 -Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss 6. ASTM D 4586-Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos Free. D. National Roofing Contractors Association(NRCA): 1. NRCA-Low Slope Roofing Manual. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA): 1. SMACNA-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,Fifth Edition, 1993. F. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 12-Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic(Extra Thick Film). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and NRCA"Low Slope Roofing Manual"standard details and requirements. B. Supplier Certification: Provide certification from galvanized sheet steel supplier stating that materials conform to ATSM A 653,G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting,bending,or abrasion,and to provide ventilation. 07620-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Prevent contact with materials during storage that may cause discoloration,staining,or damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653 Commercial Quality and Lock-Forming Quality,G90 coating designation hot-dip galvanized,mill phosphatized for painting where exposed to view from ground level. Sheet metal gages shall be as shown or as follows where not shown: 1. Flashing and Counter Flashing: 24 gage. B. Option: In leiu of galvanized steel flashing and counter flashing specified above and not to be painted,the following may be provided at the option of the Contractor. 1. Thermoplastic (TPO) Coated Sheet Metal; ASTM A 653, Type B Commercial Steel, 24 gage, G90 zinc coating,with a layer of.035 inch min non-reinforced membrane flashing. Color shall match TPO roof color. Product shall be Sure-Weld Coated Metal by Carlisle or equivalent. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel finish exposed fasteners to match flashing metal. Furnish exposed fasteners with soft EPDM washers as manufactured by the following: 1. Kwik-Pro Screws,by HiltL 2. Trugrip GT,by ITW Buildex. B. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. C. Sealing Mastic: Single component gun grade butyl or polyurethane sealant as recommended by roofing manufac- turer. D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic,nominally free of sulfur,compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. E. Draw Band: Stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape,accurate in size,square,and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet,interlockable with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch;miter and seam corners. E. Fabricate corners to form one piece with minimum 18 inches long legs;rivet for rigidity. F. Fabricate exposed sheet metal components with provisions for thermal expansion. 2.4 FINISH A. Sheet metal finish shall be as shown on Drawings. B. Where paint finish is shown,field paint in accordance with Section 09900. C. Paint metal surfaces exposed to view from ground level in accordance with Section 09900, and as indicated on Drawings,unless otherwise shown to be prefinished. 07620-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Sheet metal surfaces not designated or specified to receive a finish shall remain uncoated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify roof openings,curbs,pipes,sleeves,ducts,or vents through roof are solidly set. B. Verify roofing membrane termination and base flashings are in place,sealed,and secure. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim in accordance with applicable details of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA"Low Slope Roofing Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units;conceal fasteners where possible,and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Bed flanges of metal flashings in plastic cement or sealing mastic where required for waterproof performance. C. Apply bituminous coating on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials including the following: 1. Dissimilar metals as defined in SMACNA Appendix A-3. 2. Preservative treated wood. D. TPO Coated Metal: Install TPO coated metal flashing and trim in accordance with manufacturer's reqirements and instructions. When used, TPO peel and stick strip edging may be eliminated by welding membrane directly to the TPO coated metal as allowed and recommended by the manufacturer of the roofing system installed. END OF SECTION 07620-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 07721 (07 7213)-MANUFACTURED CURBS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured structural and non-structural metal roof curbs and adapter curbs for installation by Contractor. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Roof opening frames and headers. 2. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Joists supporting roof curbs. 3. Section 07500-Membrane Roofing:Board insulation for roof curbs. 4. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal flashing installed in conjunction with roof penetration curbs. 5. Section 09900—Paints and Coatings: Field painting 6. Section 15700-Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment. 7. Section 15800—Air Distribution: Grease duct exhaust fan curbs.Grease duct curbs are included as a part of the 3G Grease Duct System by Metal-Fab. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Welding Society(AWS): AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Roof Curb: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb,bearing on structural steel joists or headers, designed to support equipment dead load and roof dead and live loads. B. Non-Structural Roof Curb: 1. Deck Penetrations- 10 Inches by 10 Inches or Less: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb,bearing on top of metal roof deck,designed to receive sheet metal flashing skirt,not used for support of equipment. 2. Deck Penetrations - Greater Than 10 Inches by 10 Inches: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb bearing on structural steel angle frame, designed to support equipment dead load. Roof dead and live load supported by structural angle frame. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Welding Work:Qualify field welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that field welders have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 1. If recertification of welders is required,provide without additional cost to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures:Unless otherwise specified herein,submit in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01330. Submit all submittals electronically in PDF format via email, unless otherwise specified, to Architect of Record. B. Calculations and Design Drawings: Supplier will submit calculations design drawings for curbs showing calculations for seismic loading for each size curb for each different size and type of roof top equipment. Supplier will submit to Architect of Record for EOR review to verify seismic requirements and compliance.Calculation shall 07721-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 be signed and sealed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which Project is located. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. Receive products as specified. B. Ship curbs to site palletized and banded. C. Curb Manufacturer will furnish Curb Schedule to Contractor identifying curb"Type"and roof penetration for which curb is to be used.Curb Schedule will identify identical curbs as single"Type"(i.e.Type A- 10 ton RTU's,Type B -5 ton RTU's,Type C-skylights,Type D-satellite dish,Type E-expansion joints,etc.).Each curb will be identified with"Type"designation painted in 1 inch high letters on outside face of curb. D. Stack curbs at site to prevent twisting,bending or permanent deformation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS 1. AES Industries,Tallassee,AL,Contact: Chad Burt(800)786-0402. 2.2 SUBMITTALS A. Calculations and Design Drawings: Supplier will submit calculations design drawings for curbs showing calculations for seismic loading for each size curb for each different size and type of roof top equipment. Supplier will submit to Architect of Record for EOR review to verify seismic requirements and compliance.Calculation shall be signed and sealed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which Project is located. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: One of the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, SS (Structural Steel) Classification, Grade 33, G60 hot-dip zinc coating. 2. Aluminum-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 463,SS(Structural Steel)Classification,Grade 33,Type 2,T2 100 aluminum coating. 3. Aluminum Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet (GAVALUME): ASTM A 792, AZ55 aluminum zinc alloy coating. B. Board Insulation: Specified in Specification Section 07500. C. Wood Nailers: CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C,"Standard"grade lumber of any species. D. Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. E. Deck Support Clip: Galvanized steel sheet. F. Finish Paint: 1. Primer: One coat Speedhide Super Tech Dry-Fog Epoxy Ester#6-157 by PPG. 2. Finish: One coat Speedhide Super Tech Alkyd Dry-Fog Enamel,Eggshell#6-151'by PPG. 2.4 STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS A. Fabrication,General: Coated 14 gauge steel sheet curb sections,corners fully mitered and welded;2 inch by 4 inch (nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened with corrosion resistant fasteners at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 07721-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Adapter Curbs: Curbs shall be fully welded and insulated. Blank off open areas not used for supply and return air to prevent air mixing. Construct adapter curbs with the minimum height required to achieve proper airflow. Verify curb type,size,and unit prior to fabrication. C. Curb Height: Unless otherwise required by local codes,minimum curb height from top of bar joist to top of curb shall be as specified below but in no case less than 8 inches from top of roof membrane to top of curb: 1. All Rooftop Unit Curbs Unless Otherwise Shown or Specified: 18 inches. D. Reinforce curb sections as required for design loads indicated on Drawings. E. Welding: AWS D1.1. F. Mechanical Unit Curbs. Manufacturer shall label curbs with"FRONT"designating the curb orientation to the front of store prior to shipment.Mechanical curbs will be provided as follows as applicable: 1. Roof Top Unit(RTU)Curbs: Provide continuous height rail curbs. It is acceptable for units to follow roof slopes not exceeding 3/8 inch per foot only if the unit outdoor air intake (return air end) is oriented toward the high side of the roof pitch. 2. Make-Up Air Unit(MAU)Curbs: Provide tapered rail curbs.Construct curb for MAU to be level(verify roof slope). 3. Air Handling Unit(AHU)Curbs: Provide tapered rail curbs.Construct curb for AHU to be level(verify roof slope). 4. Evaporative Cooler(EC) Unit Curbs: Provide tapered rail curbs. Construct curb for EC to be level (verify roof slope). 5. Double Sloped and Side-Sloped Curbs: Provide tapered rail curbs for level mounting of RTUs when located in a cross-sloped or side-sloped section of roof as shown on the structural roof plan. Curbs fabricated for cross-sloped or side-sloped installation shall be clearly marked by the manufacturer to indicate for special application. G. Shop Painting: Shop finish interior surfaces of skylight curbs including safety screen and hardware kit of items that will be exposed to the public after installation. Use PPG dry fog coating as specified; color to match Sherwin- Williams#SW6385"Dover White".]NON-STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS A. Coated 18 gauge steel sheet curb sections,corners fully mitered and welded;2 inch by 4 inch(nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb.Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. Profile and dimensions shall be as shown. 1. Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height,but in no case shall curb height be less than 18 inches for deck penetrations greater than 10 inches by 10 inches and not less than 14 inches for deck penetrations 10 inches by 10 inches or less as measured from top of steel roof deck to top of curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. 2.6 WIND/SEISMIC RESTRAINT BRACKETS A. When noted on the Mechanical Rooftop Unit or Air Handling Unit Schedules, install wind and seismic restraint brackets with curbs for anchorage of rooftop equipment to curbs. 2.7 ROOF CURB SCHEDULE A. Provide curbs and adapter curbs for the following applications as shown on the drawings. 1. HVAC roof top units(RTU). 2. Air handling units(AHU). 3. Exhaust Fans. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 07721-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Install curbs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation with roof membrane installation requirements specified under other Sections. B. Install roof curbs and adapter curbs in accordance with the Roof Curb Schedule shown in Appendix A (Section 07721). C. Roof Curbs Bearing on Steel Angles,Joists,and Headers: 1. Set units in place and secure base to roof structure by welding to top chord of structural member. 2. Secure metal deck to perimeter of curb as indicated on Drawings. 3. Prime paint field welds with zinc-rich primer. D. Roof Curbs Bearing on Roof Deck: 1. Set units in place and secure base to steel roof deck by self-tapping screw fasteners spaced at a maximum of 12 inches on center,staggered. E. Install wind/seismic restraint brackets prior to installation of HVAC equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Field finish paint the interior of curbs the same as ceiling/exposed overhead structure(if scheduled to be painted)in accordance with Section 09900. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate project requirements for custom adapting and connecting to roof curbs with manufacturers and suppliers of curb mounted items and equipment. END OF SECTION 07721-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 07900(07 9000)-JOINT SEALERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joint sealants for interior and exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 2. Joint sealants and fillers in interior concrete floor slab-on-grade joints. 3. Joint sealant and fillers in exterior concrete sidewalks and pavement adjacent to building. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07500-Membrane Roofing: Sealants associated with roofing. 2. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Protection of wall joints from painting prior to sealing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 920-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C 1330-Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. 3. ASTM D 1056-Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 4. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Certified by the manufacturer as qualified to install the material to be used. 2. At least 15 projects performed by Installer within the last 3 years and similar in type and size to this project. B. Interior sealants in food preparation areas shall meet the compositional requirements for use in USDA regulated facilities,as required by FDA according to 21 CFR 177.2600,and local Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS(BUILDING) 07900-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified,including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade,class,and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food,provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600, Sealants identified as(Non-USDA)shall not be used in food preparation areas. C. Sealants specified herein shall be used unless otherwise recommended by manufacturers for the surfaces,joints,and conditions of the specific application involved. D. Manufacturers:Provide products by the following manufacturers to the extent specified for the specific product. 1. Sonneborn Products by BASF Building Systems. (800)433-9517 or(952)496-6000. 2. Convenience Products,(800)325-6180. 3. Dow Corning Corporation.Mary Altenburg, (989)496-7767. 4. Euclid Chemical Co.,(877)438-3826. 5, GE Silicones&GE Sealants and Adhesives. (Momentive Performance Materials)(877)943-7325. 6, HI-TECH Systems(800)454-5530. 7. Metzger/McGuire,(800)223-6680. 8, Pecora Corporation. (215)796-1401,Keith Waters. 9, Tremco Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.(800) 841-3778. 10. VersaFlex Inc.,(913)321-1416. 11. W. R. Meadows, Inc.,(847)214-2100. E. Polyurethane Sealants: (USDA compliant,unless otherwise noted): 1. Polyurethane Sealant#1 (P1): ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,single component. a. Vulkem 116,Dymonic,or Dymonic FC by Tremco. b. Dynatrol I-XL,by Pecora. c. MasterSeal NP 1 by BASF-Sonneborn. 2. Polyurethane Sealant#2(P2): ASTM C920,Type S,Grade P,Class 25,single component. a. Vulkem 45(Non-USDA),by Tremco. b. Urexpan NR-201,by Pecora. c. MasterSeal SL I by BASF-Sonneborn. 3. Polyurethane Sealant#3(P3): ASTM C 920,Type M,Grade NS,Class 50,multi-component. a. Dymeric 240FC,by Tremco. b. MastserSeal NP 2 by BASF-Sonneborn. c. Dynatrol II(Non-USDA)by Pecora. F. Silicone Sealants: (USDA compliant,unless otherwise noted): 1. Silicone Sealant#1 (S1): ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25. a. Spectrem 1,Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3 by Tremco. b. 791 Silicone Perimeter Sealant(Non-USDA)by Dow. c. 864 or 890 by Pecora. d. MasterSeal NP 150 by BASF-Sonneborn. e. SilPruf(Non-USDA)by GE. f. Titebond 100%Silicone Sealant by Franklin International. 2. Silicone Sealant#2(52): ASTM C 920,Type 5,Grade NS,Class 25,mildew resistant. a. Tremsil 200,by Tremco. b. 898 by Pecora. c. 786 Silicone Sealant(Non-USDA)by Dow. d. Sanitary SCS 1700(Non-USDA)by GE. G. Sealant Color: 1. For interior and exterior exposed to view areas, match color of adjacent paint color finish or other adjacent finish color. 2. For joints where plumbing fixtures meet adjacent floor and wall finishes,match color of plumbing fixture. 3. Use clear sealant where applied to stainless steel surfaces. 07900-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2.2 EXPANDING FOAM SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealants: 1. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealant #1 (EF1): Closed-cell foam and non-flammable propellant; urea formaldehyde-free,CFC-free;UL Class 1 Foam with flame spread of 20 and smoke developed of 25 as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. a. Touch'n Seal Quick Cure by Convenience Products. b. Space Invader by GE Sealants&Adhesives. 2.3 JOINT FILLER(BUILDING) A. Preformed Control Joint Filler: 1. Regular Joint: 2-5/8 inches by 1-1/2 inches;rubber. a. RS-STANDARD Control Joint by Hohmann&Barnard. Inc.,Hauppauge,NY(800)645-0616. b. Masonry Control Joint No.571 by Greenstreak,St.Louis,MO(800)325-9504. 2. Tee Joint: 2-5/8 inches by 1 inch;rubber. a. RS-TEE Control Joint by Hohmann&Barnard,Inc. b. Masonry Control Joint No.572 by Greenstreak. B. Expansion Joint Filler(Compression Seal): 1. Backerseal (Grayflex) expanding precompressed foam by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Westborough, MA (800)526-8365. 2. Willseal 600 polyurethyene foam joint sealing tape by Willseal USA,Pelham,NH(800)438-0684. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING(BUILDING) A. Sealant Backing(Backer Rod): Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,sealants,primers,and other joint fillers;and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: Closed or bi-cellular backer rod conforming to ASTM C 1330 Type B or Type C,approved by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. The use of ASTM C Type 0 open cell backer rod is prohibited. a. Backer Rod for Exterior Masonry: Closed cell foam,oversized 50 percent;self-expanding. 2. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid,inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A. Isolation Joint Filler Material: Flexible closed-cell synthetic foam,non-extruding,for full depth of concrete. 1. Ceramar Flexible Foam Expansion Joint by W.R.Meadows. 2. Deck-O-Foam Expansion Joint Filler by W.R.Meadows B. Elastomeric Joint Materials: 1. Sealant: a. Polyurethane Sealant: No.2(P2)as specified above. b. Color:Match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete slab.. c. Sealant shall be compatible with construction material placed against it. 2. Joint Back-Up Material: a. Polyethylene Foam, 100%closed cell. b. Material shall be compatible with construction material to be placed against it such as tile adhesive. 07900-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 C. Polyurea Joint Filler(PYI): Rapid setting,two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100%solids content,Shore A Hardness 85 to 92,compatible with construction material placed against it. (USDA compliant,unless otherwise noted) 1. Spall-Pro RS 88 by Metzger/McGuire. 2. Euco Qwik Joint 200(Non-USDA)by Euclid Chemical. 3. Hi-Tech PE85 by HI-TECH Systems. 4. VersaFlex SL/85 by VersaFlex. 5. Match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete floors. D. Joint Filler Stain Preventing Film: 1. SPF by Metzger/McGuire. 2. Euco CleanCut by Euclid. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 2.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on Draw- ings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Remove joint backing material previously inserted to protect joint from painting. D. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. E. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. 07900-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. F. Install sealant free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter,ridges,and sags. G. Tool joints concave. 3.4 INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALING AND FILLING A. General: 1. Seal/fill contraction,isolation and construction joints in floor slabs and pavements,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein. 2. Unless noted otherwise,use polyurea joint filler in floor slab contraction and construction joints. 3. Use elastomeric joint sealant in isolation joints and textured concrete joints. 4. Do not seal joints under resilient flooring or carpet with materials specified herein. Reference Section 09650 or 09680 for joint subfloor filler materials and placement under floor covering. B. Cleaning: 1. Immediately prior to sealing/filling, clean joints to full depth of sealant/filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Remove dirt,debris,saw laitance,and other foreign material from joint.Clean inner joint walls mechanically using dustless dry-cut saw, or similar tool, to the full depth of saw cuts and 2 inch minimum depth in construction joints that may have not been saw cut to create a support shelf. 3. Remove form release agent,curing compound,or other components. C. General Installation: 1. Commence placing floor joint sealant/filler no sooner than 30 days after first placement of concrete. 2. If joint is wet or damp,allow joint to dry for 72 hours prior to filling. 3. Delay floor joint sealing / filling operations until facility's environmental systems have been placed in operation for 14 days. 4. Mix and install sealant and filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use primer if recommended for specific application. 5. Choke off shrinkage crack if necessary at bottom of contraction joint or void below construction joints by the following methods. a. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: 1) Place 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch (maximum) layer of dry-bagged silica sand in joint to be epoxy filled.Do not use compressible backer rod. b. Construction Joints Through Slab:Fill by one of the following methods: 1) Fill joint with dry-bagged silica sand to within 2 inches of slab surface. 2) Insert compressible backer rod to a minimum depth of 2 inches below slab surface. 6. Do not allow sealant/filler to extend over joint edges in finished condition. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Installation: 1. Use joint back-up material. 2. Tool surface where required to provide smooth,attractive appearance and geometry recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Polyurea Joint Filler Installation 1. Installation shall be by Installer who is approved in writing by the manufacturer's corporate office for this project. 2. Cleaning: a. Immediately prior to filling, clean and prepare joint bottom and sidewalls to full depth of saw cut, with one of the following dustless dry-cut saws: 1) Humpback Dustless Joint Saw by Joe Due Blades&Equipment www.joedue.com 2) Dust Buggy by U.S.Saws,www.ussaws.com 07900-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 b. Remove dirt,debris,saw laitance, and other foreign material from joint. Clean inner joint walls me- chanically to the full depth of saw cuts or two inch minimum depth in construction joints that does not have a sawed bottom shelf ledge. c. Remove all form release agent,curing compound,or other components. 3. Do not use joint back-up material(i.e.backer rod,sand,etc.)except below bottom of saw cut in construction joints.Provide a minimum joint filler depth of 2 inches for backer rod material. 4. Determine slab surface stain preventative measures best suited for each installation,including: a. Manufacturer's preventative film. b. Bar or liquid soap. c. Shaving technique. 5. Install test sample of the polyurea joint filler to determine if filler will leave a stain,shadow,or film on slab surface. 6. If test sample reveals stain,shadow,or film,use joint filler stain preventing film at joints to receive polyurea joint filler. 7. Fill joint using single pass method.Fill joint full depth from bottom to top,leave slight crown at slab surface. 8. Add extra filler prior to filler set if needed to prevent depressed areas. If concave filler is already set,abrade with wire wheel or similar tool to minimum depth of 1/4"below surface prior to refilling. 9. Razor off crowned filler flush with floor surface after filler has sufficiently set. 10. Remove all remnants of joint filler and stain preventing membrane if used. Film shall be removed by joint filler installer immediately after shaving joint filler. 11. If surface shaving creates slab surface pitting directly below removed joint filler, stop immediately and contact the manufacturer for recommendation of proper alternate installation methods,including: a. Re-application(s)of reactive densifier to enhance surface hardness prior to filling. b. Use of bar soap as a stain preventative film and lubricant for shaving. 12. One week prior to Grand Opening,refill joints if: a. Joint filler sidewall separation or splitting exceeds 1/32 in. b. Joint filler surface profile is concave,crowned,or chattered or if voids occur. F. Isolation Joints:Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips(PMEJ)where indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler or otherwise provide joint sealant cavity of not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal,plastic,or other temporary preformed cap.Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on.both sides of joint. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide sealants in accordance with the following schedule as applicable.Joint sealing required by the drawings or required for a complete and proper installation but not listed in the following schedule shall be sealed as necessary regardless of whether shown or scheduled. Such joints not shown or scheduled shall be sealed with sealants con- sistent with specified materials or as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application. 07900-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 EXTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TO MATERIAL JOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH BUILDING CMU Wall Control Joint,3/8" CMU Wall 3/8" P1 or P3 WALL CMU Wall Expansion Joint,1" CMU Wall 1" P1 or P3 EIFS Wall CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 EIFS Wall Cast Concrete 1/2" P1 or P3 Shapes EIFS Wall Expansion Joint EIFS Wall 1" P1 or P3 EIFS Cornice/Trim EIFS Cornice/Trim 1/2" P1 or P3 EIFS Cornice/Trim CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 WALL Metal Flashing Metal Flashing Si FLASHING G Metal Flashing CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 Metal Flashing EIFS Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 Metal Flashing Aluminum Store- 1/4" P1 or P3 front Frame SOFFITS Metal Soffit Panel Trim EIFS P1 or P3 Metal Soffit Panel Trim CMU Wall P1 or P3 WALL Aluminum Storefront Frame Aluminum Store- 1/4" P1 or P3 PENETRATIONS front Frame Aluminum Storefront Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 Aluminum Storefront Frame EIFS Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 Aluminum Storefront Sill Cast Concrete 1/4" P 1 or P3 Shapes Aluminum Storefront Sill Concrete Slab 1/4" P1 or P3 Aluminum Storefront Door Concrete Slab P1 or P3 Threshold Translucent Insulated Panels Translucent Insu- 1/4" S1 lated Panels Translucent Insulated Panels EIFS Wall 1/4" Si Translucent Insulated Panels Metal Flashing 1/4" S1 Hollow Metal Door Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 or P3 Hollow Metal Door Frame Tube Steel Frame 1/4" P 1 or P3 Hollow Metal Door Threshold Concrete Slab P 1 or P3 Steel Corner Angle Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P 1 or P3 Steel Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Steel Pipe Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Steel Pipe Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Steel Conduit Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Steel Conduit Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Steel Conduit Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Ganged Steel Conduit Through CMU Wall 1/2" P3 Ganged Steel Conduit Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P3 Ganged Steel Conduit Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P3 PVC Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 PVC Pipe Through EIFS Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 PVC Pipe Through _ Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 07900-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 EXTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL TO MATERIAL JOINT SEALANT TYPE WIDTH Copper Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 Copper Pipe Through EIFS Wall 1/2" PI or P3 Copper Pipe Through Concrete Wall 1/2" P1 or P3 ROOF Roofing Membrane Roofing Membrane See Section 07500 MEMBRANE Roofing Membrane Waterproof Wall See Section 07500 AREA Membrane Roofing Membrane Metal Fascia See Section 07500 Roofing Membrane Molded Pipe Flash- See Section 07500 ing Waterproof Membrane Metal Fascia P 1 or P3 Waterproof Membrane Metal Plates and P1 or P3 Bolts Waterproof Membrane Steel Conduit 1/2" P1 or P3 Skylight Flashing Joints Skylight Flashing Si Vent Flashing Joints Vent Flashing S1 Smoke Vent Flashing Joints ; Smoke Vent Flash- S1 ing RTU Flashing Joints RTU Flashing Si Waterproof Membrane Termi- CMU Wall 1/4" S1 nation Bar Steel Gutter Steel Gutter S1 Steel Gutter Steel Downspout S1 Steel Downspout Steel Downspout S 1 Urethane Rubber Seal System Steel Pipe/Flue Varies See Section 07500 ROOF Roof Panel Flue Penetration P1 or P3 Flashing METAL/' Roof Panel Gutter P 1 or P3 FIBERGLASS Roof Panel End Closure P 1 or P3 PANELS INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL MATERIAL JOINT SEALANT TYPE TO WIDTH FLOOR Concrete Floor: Concrete Floor Contraction and Construction 1/4" See Par MATERIALS Joint Expansion Joint 3/4" Same Isolation Joint See Same Dwgs Concrete Curb In Grocery Concrete Floor Same Ceramic Tile Expansion Joints Ceramic Tile Manuf P1 or P3 Quarry Tile Expansion Joints Quarry Tile Manuf PI or P3 Floor Joints Beneath Floor Fin- See Section 09650 ish Materials(VCT or PVC (Resilient Flooring) Flooring or Carpet) See Section 09680 (Carpet) 07900-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL MATERIAL JOINT SEALANT TYPE TO WIDTH Mop Sink Floor P1 or P3 Transition Strip(Korlyte) Concrete Slab PY 1 Sanitary Cove Base(SCB) Floor See Section 09655 Wood Base Concrete Floor P1 or P3 WALLS CMU Wall Control Joint,3/8" CMU Wall 3/8" P1 CMU Wall Expansion Joint, 1" CMU Wall 1" P1 Rated Gypsum Board Wall Rated Gypsum Control Joint Board Wall Rated Gypsum Board Wall Metal Roof Deck See Section 07840- Firestopping Rated Gypsum Board Wall Rated CMU Wall Same Gypsum Board CMU Walls 3/8" P1 Cement Board Cement Board P1 or P3 Cement Board Gypsum Board P1 or P3 Ceramic Tile Wood Trim P1 or P3 Ceramic Tile Galvanized Steel P1 or P3 Base Trim Ceramic Tile Stainless Steel S1 or S2 Ceramic Tile Ceramic Tile P1 or P3 Non-Fiberglass Reinforced Galvanized Steel S1 or S2 Wall Panel(NRP) Base Trim Non-Fiberglass Reinforced Ceramic Tile S1 or S2 Wall Panel(NRP) Stainless Steel Corner Guards Ceramic Tile S1 or S2 Stainless Steel Corner Guards Wall S1 or S2 Stainless Steel Backsplash Wall Si or S2 Plastic Base Grocery Equipment P 1 or P3 Wall Plastic Base Ceramic Tile Wall P1 or P3 Plastic Base Gypsum Board Wall P1 or P3 Plastic Base Concrete Floor P1 or P3 Plastic Base Quarry Tile Floor 131 or P3 Sanitary Cove Base(SCB) Wall See Section 09655 Joints shown on the drawings to EFI be sealed with Expanding Foam Sealant Wood Base Plywood Wainscot P1 WALL Aluminum Storefront Frame Alum Storefront 1/4" P1 PENETRATIONS Frame Aluminum Storefront Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 Aluminum Storefront Frame Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 Aluminum Storefront Sill Cast Concrete 1/4" P1 Shapes Aluminum Storefront Sill Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 Hollow Metal Door Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 Hollow Metal Door Frame Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 Steel Structural Member Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 Through 07900-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 INTERIOR JOINTS MATERIAL MATERIAL JOINT SEALANT TYPE TO WIDTH Steel Corner Angle Frame CMU Wall 1/4" P1 Steel Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 Steel Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 Steel Conduit Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 Steel Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/4" P1 PVC Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 PVC Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/2" P1 Copper Pipe Through CMU Wall 1/2" P1 Copper Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall 1/2" P1 Steel Pipe Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 Steel Pipe Through Rated Gyp Board See Section 07840 Wall Steel Conduit Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 Steel Conduit Through Rated Gyp Board See Section 07840 Wall PVC Pipe Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 PVC Pipe Through Rated Gyp Board See Section 07840 Wall Copper Pipe Through Rated CMU Wall See Section 07840 Copper Pipe Through Rated Gyp Board See Section 07840 Wall TOILET Sink Ceramic Tile Wall S2 FIXTURES Floor Mount Toilet Ceramic Tile Floor S2 Wall Mount Toilet Ceramic Tile Wall S2 Wall Mount Urinal Ceramic Tile Wall S2 EWC Electric Water Coolers Wall SI or S2 END OF SECTION 07900-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 08110(08 1100)-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel doors,panels,frames. 2. Glazed light frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08710-Door Hardware: Door hardware coordination. 2. Section 08800-Glazing: Glass in steel doors and frames. 3. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Door frame attachment to metal wall framing. 4. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors and frames. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A250.8(Formerly SDI-100)-Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI A250.11 (Formerly SDI-105)-Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 578-Rigid,Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600—Product Requirements:Transport,handle,store,and protect products. B. Product Delivery: Supplier shall make delivery of products to jobsite ready for installation.Contractor shall contact to establish a product delivery and installation date and establish a coordination procedure. C. Product Compliance Inspection: Inspect delivered products for compliance with product descriptions in Part 2 herein. Report discrepancies to the Architect. D. Product Packaging: Doors will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. E. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified. F. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bills of Lading provided with products. 1. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered,or damage to products delivered immediately to supplier. Upon notification,Supplier shall arrange for delivery of replacement products.Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. G. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Supplier.Upon notification,supplier will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. H. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging.Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 08110-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Coordination: Coordinate the work with door opening construction,door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. D.H.Pace Inc,Springfield,MO,Mark Lyons,(417)831-5585,mark.lyons@dhpace.com 2.2 DESCRIPTION—STEEL DOORS A. Interior Doors: ANSI A250.8, Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard-Duty), 1-3/4 inches thick, Model 1 (Full Flush),0.032 min.thickness(20 gage)cold-rolled steel,optional core construction as specified below. B. Exterior Doors: ANSI A250.8;Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B(Heavy Duty), 1-3/4 inches thick,Model 1,(Full Flush),0.042 min. Thickness(18 gage)unless heavier gage is required to meet wind load requirements as shown on structural drawing SO, ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed)coating cold-rolled steel,polyurethane or polystyrene foam insulated core construction as specified below. 1. Fabricate head flush with top edge to exclude water. C. Core Construction: 1. Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb,polystyrene,polyurethane,polyisocyanurate,mineral-board of vertical steel stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated(Insulated)Doors: R-value of not less than 2 when tested according to ASTM C 1363. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so that delamination will not occur under operating conditions. 2.3 DESCRIPTION-FRAMES A. Interior Drywall Frames: 0.053 min.thickness(16 gage),cold-rolled steel,mitered welded units. 1. Jamb depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. B. Interior Masonry Frames: 0.053 min.thickness(16 gage),cold-rolled steel,mitered and welded units. 1. Jamb depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. C. Exterior Frames: 0.053 min. thickness (16 gage) steel, A60 galvannealed coating (ASTM A 653), mitered and welded units. 1. Jamb depth: 5-3/4",unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.4 DESCRIPTION-FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1, Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,not less than 0.042 inch thick,with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long;or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud,welded to back of frames;not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. Specified in Specification Section 08710. 08110-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape,butted corners;prepared for countersink style screws. C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes,welded to frame,at back of hardware cutouts in masonry openings. D. Board Insulation Blocking: ASTM C 578,Type IV (density 1.6 pcf minimum), 1 inch thick, Provide one of the following or equivalent by another manufacturer: 1. Greenguard-CM,by Pactiv Building Products,Atlanta,Georgia(800)241-4402.www.green-guard.com. 2. Styrofoam SM,by The Dow Chemical Co,Midland MI,(800)232-2436.www.dow.com/styrofoam. 3. Foamular 250,by Owens-Corning,(800)438-7465.www.owenscorning.com. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8. C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners,edge channels,and hardware reinforcement from either cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Fabricate top and bottom edges of doors with closures of same material as face sheets. E. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint,fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously;grind,fill,dress,and make smooth,flush,and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise in- dicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. F. Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type,of same profiles as jamb and head. G. Silencers: Prepare frames for silencers. 1. Single Doors: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on strike side. 2. Double Doors with Mullions: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on each door,on strike side. 3. Double Doors without Mullions: Provide 2 single silencers on frame head. H. Undercut non-fire rated doors as indicated on drawings. I. Where multiple openings are indicated,fabricate double wide frames of material gauge as scheduled. Joint frames at swing jamb using minimum 16 gauge insert spline connection full length. After assembly, fill joint with epoxy filler,allow to harden,and finish smooth and flush. 1. Fabricate impost base anchor,providing for minimum of two anchors per impost.Base shall fit impost inside profile with"force fit." J. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware as specified in Specification Section 08710. 1. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place. 2. Locate hardware as indicated,or if not indicated,according to ANSI A250.8. 3. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated,mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 08110-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 4. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 5. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 electrical Spec- ification Sections. 6. Provide mortar guard boxes. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. B. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.8 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion, field applied. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions,opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable for proper installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11. B. Install pocket door frames as recommended by manufacturer to provide proper operation of door. C. Install doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8. D. Do not field cut hollow metal doors. E. Coordinate with adjacent wall construction for anchor placement. F. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710. H. Provide board insulation blocking at exterior hollow metal frames. Glue blocking in frame jambs (strike side and hinge side)at height indicated on Drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test for smooth operation through full range of swing;make necessary adjustments. B. Coordinate adjustment of doors with installation of hardware.Adjust doors and hardware for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 08110-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec-Base 042415 SECTION 08710(08 7100)-DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hardware for doors. 2. Thresholds. 3. Weatherstripping,seals and door gaskets. B. Related Requrements: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Blocking for miscellaneous hardware mounting. 2. Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware coordination. 3. Section 16100-Wiring Methods: Electrified hardware coordination. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect door hardware products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Product Delivery: Supplier shall deliver products to Site ready for installation. Contact Supplier to establish product delivery and installation date and coordination procedure. C. Product Packaging: Products will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. D. Acceptance at Site: 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bills of Lading provided with products. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity or quality, or damage or damage to products to Owner's Construction Manager immediately. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. 3. Upon notification,arrange for delivery of replacement products. E. Store products in unopened packages in protected dry area to prevent damage from environmental and construction operations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Specifications Section 01330. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. Positive Lock Exit Device(Owner Furnished): Positive Lock,Contact:Kimbra White(800)342-7670. B. All Other Hardware Items (Owner Furnished): D.H. Pace Inc., Springfield, MO, Mark Lyons, (417) 831-5585, mark.lyons(c)dlipace.corn. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide hardware as scheduled in Hardware Schedule in Part 3 of this Section. 08710-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Product Designations: Hardware may be any of the products listed within the tables below for each specific type. Substitutions will not be permitted. C. Hardware Manufacturer Designations: ID Manufacturer Telephone ID Manufacturer Telephone Ar Arrow(ASSA ABLOY) (800)233-0478 Re Reese Enterprises, Inc. (800)328-0953 De Detex Corporation (800)729-3839 Ri Rixson (ASSA ABLOY) (800)457-5670 GJ Glynn-Johnson (800)525-0336 Ro Rockwood(ASSA ABLOY) (814)926-2026 H Hager Companies (800)325-9995 Sc Schlage (800)847-1864 I H. B. Ives (877)613-8766 Sec Securitron(ASSA ABLOY) LCN LCN Closers (800)526-2400 Sel Select Hinges (800)423-1174 Mc McKinneyJASSA ABLOY) (717)346-7551 S Stanley Hardware (800)622-4393 NG National Guard Products, Inc. (800)647-7874 T Trimco(Triangle Brass Mfg) (800)637-8746 P Pemko Mfg. Co. (805)642-2600 VD Von Duprin (800)999-0408 Po Positive Lock (800)342-7670 2.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI A117.1 2. NFPA 101. 3. NFPA 80. 4. NFPA 252. 5. UL 10B. 6. UL 305. B. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Conform to applicable local,State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation and operation of door hardware. 2.4 FINISHES A. Provide finishes as specified in Part 2 of this Section unless otherwise indicated in the Hardware Schedule for the specific hardware item. 2.5 HINGES A. Material: 1. Mortise Butts: Provide full mortise-type hinges with stainless steel pins, except steel pins with steel hinges; non-removable pin(NRP)for exterior and public interior exposure,non-rising pin,flat button with matching plugs,4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches unless otherwise shown. 2. Ball-bearing Type Hinges: Swaged,inner leaf beveled,square corners. 3. Continuous Geared Hinge: Full surface type hinge of 6063 T6 Aluminum with thermoplastic polyester bearings,90 min. fire rated,clear finish. Provide self-drilling threaded fasteners for frame and thru bolts for door. B. Hinges by types: 08710-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Type Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL Stanley Hager McKinney H-2 Butts: Medium weight door,low frequency, 652 F179 1279 T2714 steel H-4 Butts: Medium weight door,average 652 FBB 179 BB 1279 TB2714 frequency,steel Select Hinge Hager Pemko H-7 , Hinge: Continuous geared hinge CL SL21 SD x Roton 780- CFS SDTF x 210 FDH Stanley Hager McKinney H-8 Hinge: Surface mounted 3 inches x 3 inches US2H 808BP 1808 705 H-9 Butts:Heavy weight,stainless steel 630 FBB 199 BB 1199 T4B3386 H-11 Butts:Medium weight,stainless steel 630 FBB191 BB1191 TB3386 2.6 LOCKS,LATCHES,AND BOLTS A. Materials: 1. Cylindrical Locks: ANSI A 156.2,Series 4000 Grade 1 or 2 as scheduled,equipped with 7 pin tumbler Brass Small Format Interchangeable construction cores(SFIC); "keyed alike". Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. 2. Mortise Locks: ANSI A 156.13,Grade 1,equipped with 7 pin tumbler Brass Small Format Interchangeable construction cores(SFIC);"keyed alike. Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. 3. Provide six construction keys total for the project. 4. Owner will furnish and install permanent SFIC cores. 5. Owner will maintain control keys for temporary core removal&permanent core installation. 6. Final keying will be coordinated by the Owner. 7. Upon completion of permanent core installation all keys,including control key will be turned over to the store manager. 8. Latch Sets: Provide push-button releases by turning lever, closing door, or turning emergency release key through hole in outside knob. 9. Strikes:ANSI Strikes, 1-1/4 x 4-7/8 inches,with curved lip.Wrought box strikes,with extended lip for latch bolts,except open strike plates may be used in wood frames.Provide dustproof strikes for foot bolts. 10. Tactile Warning: Provide locks with tactile warning for handicapped codes when required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Locks by types: Typ Description Finis MANUFACTURER/MODEL e h Schlage L-1 Mortise Cylinder 626 80-103XK 510-711 SFIC Housing Less Core L-2 Mortise Cylinder 626 80-102XK 510-730 SFIC Housing Less Core L-3 Rim Cylinder 626 80-129 SFIC Housing Less Core L-4 Classroom Lock 626 ND70BD-Rhodes-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core L-5 Storeroom Lock(F86) 626 ND80BD-Rhodes-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core L-6 Office Lock(F82) 626 ND50BD-Rhodes-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core L-7 Passage Latch(F75) 626 ND10S-Rhodes-10-025 L-8 Privacy Lock(F76) 626 ND40S-Rhodes-10-025 L-9 Dead Bolt Lock 626 B661BD SFIC Deadlock Less Core L-10 Access Control Lock 626 CO-100-CY-70-KP-RHO-626BD SFIC Digital Lock Less Core L-11 Entrance Lock(F81/82) 626 ND53BD-Rhodes-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core L-42 Storeroom Lock with 626 L9480BD-06L SFIC Mortise Lock Less Core deadbolt L-13 Institutional Lock(F87) 626 ND82BD-Rhodes-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core L-15 Entrance Lock with deadbolt 626 L9453BD-06L SFIC Lock Less Core 08710-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Typ Description Finis MANUFACTURER/MODEL e h Schlage L-16 Dead Bolt Lock with 626 B663BD SFIC Lock Less Core Thumbturn(Classroom Function) L-17 Storeroom Lock(Grade 2) 626 AL80BD-Saturn-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core L-18 Privacy Lock(Grade 2) 626 AL40S-Saturn L-20 Office Lock 626 AL50BD-Saturn-10-025 SFIC Lock Less Core (Grade 2) L-21 Passage Latch(Grade 2) 626 AL10S-Saturn L-22 Thumbturn 626 09-905NHxB502-292 L-23 Construction Core TBD Brass'Construction Core,7 Pin. 2.7 EXIT DEVICES A. Materials: 1. Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 2. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. Exit Devices by types: Type Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL Von Duprin unless otherwise noted. E-1 Exit Device: Rim,exit only,UL listed. 626 99E0-F E-2 Exit Device: Rim,exit only,with alarm.Provide exterior 600 Positive Lock: access model,time delay,or weatherproof when scheduled. THPA Series(Size as required for door scheduled) O/A-Outside Access TDL-Time Delay WE-Weatherproof E-3 Exit Device: Surface vertical rod(top rod only),lever trim, 626 9927L-F-BE-LBR blank escutcheon,UL listed. E-4 Exit Device: Concealed vertical rod,lever trim,blank 626 9948L-F-BE escutcheon,UL listed E-5 Exit Device: Rim,lever trim,blank escutcheon,UL listed. 626 99L-F-BE E-7 Exit Device: Rim,pull trim. 626 99NL x 697NL E-8 Exit Device:Mortise delay exit device,pull trim,with alarm. 626 CX9975L x Power Transfer#EPT-10 SP28 992L Power Supply#PS 914 (06 Lever) E-10 Exit Device:Rim,exit only 626 99EO E-11 Exit Device:Rim,weatherproof,exit only,with alarm. 626 Detex: V40 EB W AL RWE E-14 Exit Device:Vertical Rod,exit only,with alarm.Provide 600 Positive Lock: outsite access model or time delay when scheduled. THPA Series (0/A)-Outside Access (TDL)-Time Delay E-16 Exit Device:Rim,lever trim 626 99L-996L-NL E-18 Exit Device:Rim,lever trim,UL Listed 626 99L-F-992L-NL E-19 Exit Device: Surface vertical rod,no outside trim, exit only, 626 9927E0-F UL listed. E-20 Exit Device:Rim,lever trim,blank escutcheon 626 99L-BE E-21 Exit Device 626 99EO 08710-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Type Description Finish MANUFACTURERJMODEL Von Duprin unless otherwise noted. E-23 Exit Device:Rim,pull trim,with alarm 626 CX99NL-F x 696-NL Power Transfer#EPT-10 SP28 Power Supply#PS-914 E-24 Exit Device:Rim,exit only,with alarm 626 CX99EO-F Power Transfer#EPT-10 SP28 Power Supply#PS-914 2.8 PULLS AND PUSHES A. Materials: ANSI A 156.6 for 0.050 inch thickness. B. Push and Pulls by types: Type Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL Ives Trimco Rockwood P-1 Push 3-1/2 x 15 630 8200 1001-2 70B P-2 Pull 3-1/2 x 15 630 8311-5 1012-2 137x70B P-3 Pull 8 inches CTC x 3/4 inch 630 8103-8 1194-2 107 dia 13-4 Pull 5-1/4 cc 630 8111-5 1102T 132 P-5 Pocket Door Pull Latching black 1069L 2.9 CLOSERS A. Materials&Features: 1. ANSI A 156.4,grade 1. 2. ADA/ANSI A117.1 3. UL listed. 4. Non-handed,non-sized;adjustable 1-6. 5. 180 degree door opening. 6. Standard cover. 7. Multiple backcheck location valve. 8. Extreme temperature fluid. 9. Sex nuts and bolts(SNBs). 10. Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 11. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. B. Closers by types: Type I Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL LCN C-4 Closer:Regular Arm 689 4011-REG C-5 Closer:Parallel Arm 689 4111-EDA C-6 Closer:Regular Arm 689 4031-REG C-7 Closer:Parallel Ann 689 4031-EDA C-8 Closer:Parallel Arm,HO 689 4111-HEDA C-9 Closer:Parallel Arm,HO,positive 689 4111-H-CUSH stop C-10 Closer:Regular Arm,HO 689 4031-H C-11 Closer:Parallel Arm,positive stop 689 4031-CUSH C-12 Closer:Parallel Arm,positive stop 689 4111-CUSH 2.10 DOOR PROTECTION PLATES 08710-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Materials: J 100 Protection Plates conforming to ANSI A 156.6,stainless steel,0.050"(1.2 mm)minimum thickness. Mount centered,flush with bottom of door. Screws: Phillips head sheet metal screws plated to match plate. B. Protection Plates by types: Type Description I Size Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL Ives Trimco . Rockwood K-2 Kick Plate 10"x(DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J102 K-3 Armor Plate 34"x(DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J101 K-4 Armor Plate 41"x(DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J101 Notch for lockset K-5 Kick Plate 18"x(DW-2") 630 8400 K1050 J102 K-6 Armor Plate (UL 34"x(DW-2") 630 8402 UL KA050-2 Fire Rated K1050F Rated) K-7 Armor Plate (UL 36"x(DW-2") 630 8402 UL KA050-2 K1050F Rated) Fire Rated 2.11 STOPS,HOLDERS AND BUMPERS A. Materials: 1. Door stop mounting: Methods to suit substrates encountered (plastic anchor, drywall anchor, expansion shield). 2. Provide gray rubber exposed resilient parts. 3. Do not furnish aluminum floor stops. 4. For most doors,the preferred door stop is Wall Stop type S-1 and is specified as such in the hardware schedule. However,if circumstances prevent a wall stop installation(door too far from perpendicular wall,door swing into adjacent glass,etc.)then substitute a type S-3 or S-4 floor stop as indicated for use intended. 5. Adjust height of floor stops to suit undercut of adjacent door. B. Stops,Holders and Bumpers by types: Typ Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL e Ives Trimco Rockwood S-1 Wall Stop 630 WS407CVX W1276CS 409 • S-2 Stop&Holder 626 WS445 1207 477 S-4 Floor Stop 626 FS438 1212 3/4ES 442 Rixson Glynn-Johnson S-5 Overhead Stop-3-0 doors 626 9-336 904S S-6 Overhead Stop-2-6 doors 626 9-236 902S Ives Trimco Rockwood S-7 Stop&Holder.Kick down FS452-4 1220-4FF 458 type satin chrome Rixson . Glynn-Johnson S-8 Overhead Stop.Medium duty 630 10-336 454S 2.12 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Materials&Features: 1. ANSI A 156.15,Grade 1. 2. UL listed. 3. Magnet protected against transients and surges up to 600 volts. 4. 24V DC 5. Holding force 35 lbs.,nominal. 6. Low residual magnetism for easy release of door. 7. Electrical values+10%-15%. 08710-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 8. Provide exposed metal to match hardware. B. Electromagnetic Door Holders by types: Type Description Finish MANUFACTURER/MODEL LCN Rixson DH-1 Door Holder 689 SEM 7850 689 FM-998 SA 2.13 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds by types: Type Description MANUFACTURER/MODEL National Pemko Reese Guard T-1 Threshold: 5 inches x 1/2 inch,abrasive. 425HD-SIA 1715AK 5" 5" T-4 Threshold: 2 inches x 1/8 inch,stainless steel plate,smooth surface, BAR6SS-2- beveled 1 side only.Transition threshold between concrete slab and 10bevel vinyl tile. Set threshold in full bed of silicone sealant,butted to adjacent vinyl tile.Anchor into concrete slab with Hilti Kwik-Con II,#14-134 TFH fasteners spaced at 6-inch centers using Matched Tolerance drill bit for dense concrete. T-9 Threshold: 5 inches,aluminum,stop seal 896S 2005AT S483AS T-10 Threshold: 5 inches,aluminum,stop seal 898V 2006AT 2.14 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Weatherstripping by types: Type Description MANUFACTURER/MODEL National Guard Pemko Reese W-3 Door Bottom Sweep,surface mounted sweep,anodized 201NA 315CN 323A aluminum,neoprene seal. W-4 Meeting Stile Gaskets,aluminum,silicone insert seal. 160S 303AS 807A W-5 Jamb Door Gaskets,adhesive application,silicone seal. 5050B S88D 797B W-9 Jamb and Head Weatherstripping: Self Adhesive Seal 5075B S773D 2.15 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A. Silencers: Provide in metal door frames,unless not permitted for fire rating,or unless bumper-type weatherstripping is provided;three for each single door frame,two for double-door frame. B. Miscellaneous Hardware by types: Type Description Size Finis MANUFACTURER/MODEL h Stanley Ives Rockwood M-1 Hasp& 3-1/2 602 SP915 WS1920 Staple inches M-2 Surface Bolt 8 inches 652 SB453 M-3 Surface Bolt 4 inches 626 40 630 M-4 Viewer 626 700 620 Ives Trimco Rockwood M-5 Extension 12 626 458 3917 555 Flush Bolts inches (UL) 08710-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Type Description Size Finis MANUFACTURER/MODEL h Stanley Ives J Rockwood M-6 Automatic 626 FB42 1948 Flush Bolt Ives Trimco Rockwood M-8 Silencers SR64 1229-A 608 National Guard Pemko Reese M-9 Drip Cap 16A 346CxFW R201 A Ives Trimco M-10 _ Door Coordinator COR x MB x FL 3092 x MB x W Arrow Detex M-11 Door Alarm 626 130 Series AL EAX-500 M-d'2 Door Alarm gray Alarm: EAX-2500F Transformer: PP5152-3 Rockwood M-14 Mail Slot 630 MS 1000 32D M-15 Latch Protector 630 321 Von Duprin Schlage Securitron M-16 Electric Strike,grade 1, 630 6211 FSE(fail secure), 24VDC unless noted otherwise in schedule M-17 Power Supply PS902 M-18 Push Button 660PB M-19 Electric Strike 626 UNL-24 M-20 Power Supply BPS-24-1 M-21 Keypad&Controller DK-26SS M-21a Keypad DK-26PSS Von Duprin M-24 Mullion 626 9954 M-25 Strike 626 499F 2.16 FABRICATION A. Finish and Base Material Designations: Number indicates Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association(BHMA) Code or nearest traditional U.S.commercial finish. B. Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least commercially recognized quality. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine,wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended,except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 4) Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 08710-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 5) Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.17 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware Set numbers below correspond to doors shown on the drawings. B. Any hardware item specified in the Tables in Part 2 above which corresponds to the mark associated with the item (E.g.H-1,E-2,etc.)as shown in the Hardware Schedule below may be provided. Typical Toilet Door: HM,Single 1 ea. H-7 Continuous Geared Hinge 1 ea. L-18 Bathroom Privacy Lock 1 ea. C-11 Closer 3 ea. M-8 Silencers Typical Utility Door: HM,Single 1-1/2 pr. H-4 Butts 1 ea. L-17 Storeroom Lock 1 ea. L-23 Construction Core 1 ea. C-7 Closer 1 ea. S-1 Wall Stop 3 ea. M-8 Silencers 1 ea. K-3 Armor Plate PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware Mounting Heights: Door and Hardware Institute Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames,except as otherwise indicated. 1. Conform to requirements of applicable local,State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation and operation of door hardware. 2. Install electromagnetic door holder at 24 inches above finish floor elevation at manufacturer's recommended distance from the door's leading edge. B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise specified. C. Thru-bolt closers on doors. D. Vestibule Thresholds: Install as shown on Drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the ultimate responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the descretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner site observation specified below shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform similar routine,necessary,and customary testing and inspection. 08710-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.4 OWNER SITE OBSERVATION A. Owner site observation will be performed by a Manufacturer's Technical Representative enlisted'by the Owner as specified in Appendix B(Section 08710) B. Contractor shall notify the following manufacturer's represententive at completion of installation of doors and hardware: 1. Bob Maas,Director Key Accounts and Mechanical OEM,Allegion, (814) 836-0283 (Office), (814)450-5920(Mobile), bob Maas(nallegion.com. C. Manufacturer's Technical Representative will prepare Observation Report and submit to Architect for posting of deficiencies noted on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust hardware for proper operation and function one month after Substantial Completion. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. END OF SECTION 08710-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 012712 SECTION 08800(08 8000)-GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This section is included to provide information on the existing glazing at the storefronts. All new glazing, if any, shall match these specifications. General contractor shall field verify all existing components and areas where new glazing is required. 2. Translucent window film. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and fixed window frames. 2. Section 08710-Door Hardware: Hardware coordination. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1 -Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 920-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C 1036-Flat Glass. 3. ASTM C 1048-Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS,Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 4. ASTM D 2000-Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 5. ASTM E 1886-Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors,and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s)and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 6. ASTM E 1996 - Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. D. Consumer Product Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing. CPSC 16 CFR,Part 1201. E. Flat Glass Marketing Association(FGMA): 1. FGMA-Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. F. National Fire Protection Agency(NFPA): 1. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. G. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL): 1. UL 10B-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For translucent window film indicating compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 08800-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Conform to FGMA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Provide permanent labeling for safety glass indicating conformance with specified standards. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MATERIALS A. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036,Type I(Transparent Glass,Flat),Class 1 (Clear)and Quality q3(Glazing Select). 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch unless indicated otherwise. B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048,Kind FT(Fully Tempered),Condition A(Uncoated),Type I(Transparent Glass, Flat),Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 1. Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. 2. Tempered glazing panels as specified in the Glass Schedule below(including doors,sidelights, storefronts, and transoms)shall comply with the CPSC 16CFR Part 1201 criteria for Category I or II as follows: a. Glazing Panels 9 sq.ft.or less:. Category I. b. Glazing Panels more than 9 sq. ft.: Category H. c. Thickness: 1) 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 3. Class 1 (Clear)unless otherwise indicated. C. Translucent Window Film: Vinyl,pressure sensitive`frosted'window film. Applied on fourth surface. 1. Available films: a. 3MTM CrystalTM Glass Finishes Frosted(7725E-324) 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 72 percent or less 3. Roll Width: 60 inches or greater. 4. Fire Performance: Class A per ASTM E—84 as defined in NFPA 101. 2.2 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Polysulphide Sealant: Two component,chemical curing,non-sagging type;cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component,chemical curing;capable of water immersion without loss of properties;non- bleeding,non-staining;cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. 1. Color: Clear. C. Acrylic terpolymer compounded especially for glazing;non-hardening,non-staining,and non-bleeding. 2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness;compatible with glazing sealant. B. Spacers: Resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness; self-adhesive on one side; compatible with glazing sealant. C. Filler Rods: Closed cell or jacketed foam rods of polyethylene,butyl,neoprene,polyurethane,or vinyl;compatible with glazing sealant. D. Joint Cleaners,Primers,and Sealers: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer. E. Gaskets: ASTM D2000,SBC 415 to 3BC 620;extruded or molded neoprene or EPDM,black. 2.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 08800-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean,free of obstructions,and ready for work of this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces;prime or seal where recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended application. B. Inspect glass edges immediately prior to setting; discard those with edge damage that will contribute to glazing failure. 3.3 GLAZING A. Locate setting blocks at quarter points of sill; set in sealant if heel or toe bead is required. B. Install spacers inside and out except where preshimmed tape or glazing gaskets are to be used. C. Set each piece in a series to other pieces in pattern draw,bow,or other visually perceptible characteristics. D. Provide glazing sealants and gaskets as required for particular glazing application. Coordinate with other Sections for material compatibility. E. Gaskets: 1. Provide adequate anchorage,particularly for driven-in wedge gaskets. 2. Miter and weld ends of channel gaskets at corners to provide continuous gaskets. 3. Seal face gaskets at corners with sealant to close opening and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners. F. Do not leave voids in glazing channels except as specifically indicated or recommended by glass manufacturer. Force sealant into channel to eliminate voids.Tool exposed surfaces to slight wash away from joint.Trim and clean promptly. G. Do not allow sealant to close weeps of aluminum framing. H. Provide filler rod where sealants are used in the following locations: 1. Head and jamb channels. 2. Colored glass over 75 united inches in size. 3. Clear glass over 125 united inches in size. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately prior to Walmart acceptance of Project,replace broken or otherwise damaged glass.Wash and polish glass inside and out. 3.5 GLASS SCHEDULE A. Provide type of glass specified for the applications scheduled as follows: APPLICATION/LOCATION TYPE OF GLASS Interior Hollow Metal Doors Clear tempered or fire-rated glass as scheduled on Drawings. Exterior storefront Clear tempered glass, 08800-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Exterior storefront doors Match exterior storefront. END OF SECTION 08800-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 09250(09 2900)-GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing(designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition). 2. Suspension system for interior gypsum ceilings. 3. Gypsum board. 4. Gypsum sheathing. 5. Backer materials: Glass-mat backer board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05400-Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing 20 gage and heavier and ceiling joists.Metal stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof structure. 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips,plywood,blocking,and fasteners attached to partition framing. 3. Section 07210-Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 4. Section 09511 -Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Metal grid suspension system for suspended acoustical panel ceilings. 5. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653-Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot- Dip Process. 2. ASTM C 475-Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 557-Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 4. ASTM C 645-Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 5. ASTM C 754-Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6. ASTM C 840-Application And Finishing Of Gypsum Board. 7. ASTM C 954-Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 8. ASTM C 1002-Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws For The Application Of Gypsum Panel Products Or Metal Plaster Bases To Wood Studs Or Steel Studs. 9. ASTM C 1177-Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 10. ASTM C 1178-Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 11. ASTM C 1396-Gypsum Board. 12. ASTM C 1629-Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels. 13, ASTM C 1658-Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. 14. ASTM D 3273 -Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 15. ASTM D 3274-Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial(Fungal or Algal)Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. C. Gypsum Association(GA): 1. GA-214-Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 09250-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. GA-234-Control Joints For Fire-Resistance Rated Systems. 4. GA-600-Fire Resistance and Sound Control Design Manual. D. Steel Framing Industry Association(SFIA): 1. Member listing. E. Steel Stud Manufacturer's Assocation(SSMA): 1. Member listing. F. Certified Steel Stud Association(CSSA): 1. Member listing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing components and gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Protect metal framing from corrosion,deformation,and other damage during delivery,storage,and handling. C. Store and protect metal framing with weatherproof covering,and ventilate to avoid condensation. D. Deliver materials in original packages,containers,or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. E. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations:Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board in conformance with GA-216. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet,those that are moisture damaged,and those that are mold damaged. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies,provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the following: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems,West Chester,OH(513)870-1100. 2. The Steel Networks Durham,NC(888)474-4876. 3. Cemco Steel,Ft.Worth,TX(817)568-1525. 4. Telling Industries, LLC Willoughby,OH(866)372-6384. • 5. Marino/WARE, South Plainfield,NJ(800)627-4661. 6. Other manufacturers listed as a member of CSSA,SSMA or SFIA. 09250-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide steel framing products with an average recycled content of steel products such that the postconsumer recycled content plus 1/2 of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. C. Interior Nonload-Bearing Partition Framing: ASTM C 645 and C 754;galvanized sheet steel,channel shaped, punched for utility access,depth and gages as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Partition having an unbraced length of 12 feet or Less: Minimum 25 gage(18 mil). 2. Partition having an unbraced length greater than 12 Feet: Minimum 20 gage(30 mil). 3. Partition(bulkheads)suspended from overhead having an unbraced length of 10 Feet or Less: Minimum 25 gage(18 mil). 4. Partition height 8 feet and less: Minimum 25 gage(18 mil). 5. Partition height 8- 16 feet: Minimum 22 gage(27 mil) 6. Partition height 16 feet and higher: Minimum 20 gage(30 mil). D. Contractor's Option: In lieu of traditional framing members,Contractor may use modified framing members of equivalent thickness for 20 and 25 gage metal such as ProSTUD Drywall Framing System by ClarkDietrich or comparable framing members by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. E. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM C 645;galvanized sheet steel,channel shaped,same depth and gage as studs,tight fit; solid web. F. Deflection(Capture)Track: ASTM C 645;deep-leg U-shaped steel track at roof deck or structure,of web depth as shown to contain studs while allowing free vertical movemen indicated. 1. Contractor's Option:One of the following manufacturer's standard double or single deflection tracks modified as required for web depth as shown: a. VertiClip or VertiTrack by The Steel Network. If this option is used,track may be 20 guage(30 mil) for all stud sizes. b. FastTop Clip by ClarkDietrich. c. SLP-TRK by Brady Innovations as distributed by Cemco. d. Comparable modified deflection tracks by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. G. Furring and Bracing: ASTM C 645;galvanized sheet steel. 1. Studs: ST25- 2-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage(18 mil). 2. Studs: ST25-3-5/8 inch deep, 25 gage(18 mil). 3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep x 2-1/2 inch wide,25 gage(18 mil) 4. Hat-Shaped Channels: 7/8 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide,25 gage(18 mil)or 1-1/2 inch deep x 2-1/2 inch wide(30 mil)as shown on the drawings. 5. Cold-Formed Channels: 3/4 x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage(54 mil). 6. Z Furring Channel: 1-1/2 inch deep,25 gage(18 mil). 7. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage(54 mil)x 1/4 inch less than stud width. 8. Contractor's Option:In leiu of cold-formed channels and clip angles for horizontal wall bridging,Contractor may provide one of the following: a. Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b. TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by ClarkDietrich. c. Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. H. Ceiling Joists,Tracks,Headers at Partition Openings,Framing Attachment Angles,and Fasteners: Specified in Section 05400. • Partition Framing Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. 1. 22 Gage(27 mil)Framing: ASTM C 1002;3/8 inch Type S pan head. 2. 20 Gage(30 mil)and Heavier Framing: ASTM C 954;5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head. J. Bracing to Framing Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling screws. K. Partition Floor Track Anchorage Device: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins;minimum 0.138 inch shank 09250-3 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 diameter x 1-1/2 inch shank length with 7/8 inch diameter washer. 1. Hilti PAT System using X-C 37 P8S36 Pins,by Hilti,Tulsa,OK.(800)879-8000. 2. Ramset/Red Head System using 1500SD Pins,by ETW Ramses/Redhead,Wood Dale,IL(630)350-0370. L. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors;minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. 1. Sly Anch HLC-HX 5/16 x 2-5/8,by Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800)879-8000. 2. Dynabolt HN-1413,by ITW Ramset/Redhead,Wood Dale,IL(708)350-1558. M. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application. N. Flat Straps and Plates: ASTM A 653;galvanized sheet steel,gage,shape,and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 1. Contractor's Option: In lieu of 2-inch continuous metal strap at deflection tracks,Contractor may provide one of the following: a. Bridge Bar by The Steel Network. b. TradeReady Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar by ClarkDietrich. c. Comparable products by other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. O. Suspension System: 1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper,double strand of 16 ga wire. 2. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A,Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper,8 ga. 3. Carrying Channels: ASTM C 645;galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage(54 mil). 4. Furring Channels: ASTM C 645;galvanized,hat-shaped,rigid furring channels, 7/8 inch deep. 5. Furring Channel Clips: ASTM C 645;galvanized sheet steel, 1-1/2 inch. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to specified requirements,provide gypsum board and accessories by the following manufacturers: 1. American Gypsum Company,Dallas,TX(800-545-6302) 2. CertainTeed Corp(Saint-Gobain).,Tampa,FL. (800)233-8990. 3. Georgia-Pacific,Atlanta,GA.(800)284-5347. 4. National Gypsum Company,Gold Bond Building Products,Charlotte,NC. (800)628-4662. 5. The Steel Network,Raleigh,NC(888)474-4876. (Accessories only) 6. ClarkDietrich Building Systems,West Chester,OH(513)870-1100. (Accessories only) 7. Fry Reglet,(800)237-9773. (Accessories only) 8. Other manufacturers listed as members of CSSA, SSMA,or SFIA. B. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. 1. Thickness: '/2 inch and 5/8 inch. 2. Length,Long Edges,Cut:Maximum permissible length,edges tapered,ends cut square. 3. Provide one of the following products: a. Gypsum Wallboard by American Gypsum. b. Sheetrock by United States Gypsum. c. CertainTeed Regular Gypsum Board by Certainteed. d. ToughRock Gypsum Board by Georia-Pacific. e. Gold Bond Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. • C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396,Type X. 1. Thickness: '/2 inch. 2. Length,Long Edges,Cut:Maximum permissible length,edges tapered,ends cut square. 3. Core:Moisture or mold resistant gypsum core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5. Provide one of the following products: a. M-Bloc Mold and Moisture Resistant by American Gypsum. 09250-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 b. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough by United States Gypsum. c. Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. d. ToughRock Mold-Guard Gympsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. e. M2Tech Gypsum Board by Certainteed. D. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396,Type X. 1. Thickness:5/8 inch. 2. Length,Long Edges,Cut:Maximum permissible length,edges tapered,ends cut square. 3. Provide one of the following products: a. FireBloc Type X by American Gypsum. b. Sheetrock Firecode X by United States Gypsum. c. CetainTeed Type X Gypsum Board by Certainteed. d. ToughRock Fireguard X by Georgia-Pacific. e. Gold Bond Fire Shield by National Gypsum. E. Water and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396,Type X. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Length,Long Edges,Cut:Maximum permissible length,edges tapered,ends cut square. 3. Core:Noncombustible fire-resistant and mold resistant core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5. Provide one of the following products: a. M-Bloc Mold Resistant Type C by American Gypsum. b. Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode"C"Core by United States Gypsum. c. Gold Bond Brand XP Fire-Shield C Gypsum Board by National Gypsum. d. ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard Gypsum Board by Georgia Pacific. e. M2Tech Type X Gypsum Board or Diamondback Glasroc Tile Backer Type X by CertainTeed. F. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396;ASTM C 1629;Type X. 1. Thickness: As shown on drawings. 2. Length,Long Edges,Cut:Maximum permissible length,edges tapered,ends cut square. 3. Core: Enhanced and mold resistant gypsum core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5. Surface Abrasion:Meets or exceeds Classification Level 1. 6. Surface Indentation:Meets or exceeds Classification Level 1. 7. Soft-Body Impact:Meets or exceeds Classification Level 1. 8. Provide one of the following products: a. M-Bloc AR Type X by American Gypsum. b. Fiberock Brand Interior Panel AR by United States Gypsum. c. Gold Bond Brand Hi-Abuse XP by National Gypsum. d. AirRenew Extreme Abuse Type X Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. e. ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. G. Abuse and Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396;ASTM C 1629;Type X. 1. Thickness:As shown on drawings. 2. Length,Long Edges,Cut:Maximum permissible length,edges tapered,ends cut square. 3. Core:Enhanced and mold resistant gypsum core. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM 3273/3274. 5. Surface Abrasion:Meets or exceeds Classification Level 1. 6. Surfact Indentation:Meets or exceeds Classification Level 1. 7. Soft-Body Impact:Meets or exceeds Classification Level 1. 8. Provide one of the following products: a. M-Bloc AR Type X by American Gypsum. b. ToughRock Fireguard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board by Georgia-Pacific. c. Gold Bond Brand Hi-Abuse XP by National Gypsum. d. AirRenew Extreme Abuse Type X Gypsum Board by CertainTeed. e. Fiberock Brand Interior Panel AR or Fiberock Aqua-Tough Interior Panel AR by United States Gypsum. 09250-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 H. Gypsum Board Fasteners: 1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002,Type S-12 bugle head,corrosion-resistant self-drilling self- tapping steel screws. a. One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 inch. b. One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1/8 inch. c. Two Layers: 5/8 Inch: 1-7/8 inch. 2. Wood Furring: ASTM C 1002, 1-1/4 inch,Type W bugle head,corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel screws. I. Gypsum Board Accessories: Subject to compliance with project requirements and unless otherwise specified, provide the specified gypsum board accessories below or equivalents by one of the manufacturers listed above: 1. Corner Beads: Sheetrock Brand No. 104 Dur-A-Bead galvanized steel corner bead by United States Gypsum. 2. Edge Trim: Galvanized steel casing. a. No.200-B,L shape by United States Gypsum for tight abutment at edges. b. No.200-A,J shape by United States Gypsum at other locations. 3. Control Joint Accessory Piece: No.093 roll-formed zinc by ClarkDietrich or by oher manufacturers listed as members of CSSA,SSMA,or SFIA. 4. Vertical Movement Joint Trim: No. DRMZ-625-200 aluminum Z shape trim by Fry Reglet. 5. Adhesive:Commercial adhesive complying with ASTM C 557. 6. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07210. 7. Firestopping: Specified in Section 07840 for penetrations of fire-resistive rated gypsum board. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper tape. 2. Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. 3. Glass-Mat Backer Board: 10/10 grid glass mesh tape. C. Joint Compound: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: a. Sheetrock Brand Ready-Mixed Lightweight All-Purpose Joint Compound with Dust Control by United States Gypsum. b. ProForm Lite Ready Mix Joint Compound with Dust-Tech by National Gypsum. 2. Exterior Applications: a. Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. 3. Backer Materials: a. Glass-Mat Backer Board: 1) Setting-type taping compound as recommended by backer panel manufacturer scoring a 10 in accordance with ASTM D 3273/3274. 2.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD A. ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 1177;water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats;thickness shown on the drawings,maximum permissible lengths;ends square cut.Provide one of the following products: 1. M-Glass Exterior Sheathing by American Gypsum. 2. SecureRock by United States Gypsum. 3. eXP Sheathing by National Gypsum. 4. Dens-Glass Gold sheathing by Georgia-Pacific. 5. GlasRoc sheathing by CertainTeed. B. Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1 inch length for 1/2 inch sheathing board and 1-1/4 inch length for 5/8 inch thick sheathing board,Type S-12 bugle head,corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel screws. 2.6 BACKER MATERIALS 09250-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Glass-Mat Backer Boards:Glass-mat moisture resistant gypsum core backer materials complying with ASTM C 1178,score of 10 when tested according to ASTM D 3273. Thickness as shown on Drawings. Provide Type X where required as shown on the drawings. Provide one the following products: 1. DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia-Pacific. 2. Diamondback GlasRoc Tilebacker by Certainteed. 3. Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer by National Gypsum. 2.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Reference Section 01600. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements.Verify that building framing components are ready to receive Work.Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine panels to assure they are dry and free of moisture and mold damage as evidenced by discoloration, sagging,irregular shape,fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination,and discoloration. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door and window frames,sliding window,and overhead coiling door frames. B. Coordinate installation of anchors,supports,and blocking for mechanical,electrical,and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.3 INSTALLATION-STEEL FRAMING,GENERAL A. Installation Standards: Comply with ASTM C 754,and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation and with further details and instruction by gypsum board manufacturer's written construction guidelines. B. Install supplementary framing,blocking,and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures,equipment services,heavy trim,grab bars,toilet accessories,furnishings,or similar construction.Comply with United States Gypsum's"Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.4 INSTALLATION-PARTITION FRAMING A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions,ASTM C 754,GA-216,and GA-600. B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. D. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. E. Metal Stud Spacing: Unless otherwise noted,provide interior framing at maximum 24 inches on center.Provide 16 inches on center maximum spacing for walls to receive ceramic tile. F. Align stud web openings horizontally. 09250-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 G. Splice studs with minimum 8 inch nested lap,fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws. H. Construct corners using minimum three studs. I. Double stud at wall openings,door and window jambs,maximum 2 inches from each side of openings. J. Place studs as indicated on Drawings,minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. K. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing C-shaped joists specified in Section 05400. L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. M. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. N. Install tracks(runners)at floors and overhead supports. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above. O. Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 1. Where indicated,construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection. 2. Install optional products by The Steel Network specified in Part 2 above in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. a. Install clip with step bushing in center of slotted hole. b. Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing. c. Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing. P. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames,partition intersections,and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bend at each end. Fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3. Position a cut-to-length stud(extending to top runner)at vertical panel joints over door frame header. Q. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. R. Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs: 1. In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet,install lateral bracing using one of the following methods: a. Install 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip angles.Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. b. Install optional Bridge Bar by the Steel Network specified in Part 2 above in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. c. Install field-cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall,adjacent to wall openings,and 10 feet on center maximum.Install 1-1/2 inch wide,20 gage(30 mil)strap bracing on both sides of stud. Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a. Provide bracing at ceiling line or at mid-span of studs at areas without ceilings. S. Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings.Use only screw attachments. T. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures,toilet partitions,wall cabinets,toilet accessories and hardware. U. Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 09250-8 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Connection Fastener Floor Track to Concrete 1 -Pin at 32 inches on center Partition Stud to Floor Track 1 -Screw each side at each flange Stud Brace Web to Stud Web 2-Screws Plates and Straps to Studs 2-Screws Stud Web to Stud Web 2-Screws Stud Brace Web to Attachment Angle 2-Screws Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using Clip 2-Screws to stud and 2-Screws to cold Angles rolled channel Runner to Header 1 -Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end 3.5 INSTALLATION-SUSPENDED CEILING A. Unless otherwise shown,install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following requirements. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install carrying channels 4 feet on center with hanger wire spaced a max of 4 feet on center along carrying channels.Attach furring channels spaced 16 inches on center-perpendicular to carrying channels with double strand of saddle tied tie wire or furring channel clips.Apply 1/2 inch gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the furring channels.Attach gypsum board with 1 inch self drilling drywall screws 12 inches on center in the field of the board 8 inches or 12 inches on center at butt joints,located not more than 1/2 inch from edges. 2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying,or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying,either directly to structures or to inserts,eyescrews,or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes,or conduit. C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. D. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 3.6 INSTALLATION-FURRING A. Furring Channels: 1. Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center,to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. 2. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing. B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center. 09250-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings,and to GA-600 requirements. 3.7 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces,around cut openings,behind!and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions,and tight to items passing through partitions as specified in Section 07210. 3.8 INSTALLATION-GYPSUM BOARD A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions,ASTM C 840,GA-2I6,and GA- 600. 1. Use water resistant gypsum board at wet areas including walls and ceiling in toilet rooms,janitor closets,and food prep areas as applicable and where shown. 2. Use fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 3. Use water and fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies where water resistant gypsum board is specified. 4. Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water resistant type. B. Where applicable,install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. C. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction in'accordance with ASTM C 840,with attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members.Do not align panel joints with edges of openings. D. Treat cut edges,holes,fastener heads,and joints,including those at angle intersections,in water resistant gypsum board with specified joint compound. Treat prior to installation. E. Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing members. Leave bottom edge spacing above floor in accordance with GA-216. F. Install fasteners spaced and located in accordance with GA-216 or ASTM C840. 3.9 INSTALLATION-GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Erect single layer gypsum board sheathing horizontally with attachment to firm bearing. C. Place edge trim where gypsum board sheathing abuts dissimilar materials.Use longest practical length. D. Using screws,attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center,perimeter and field,to supporting framing. E. Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges and penetrations by covering core with metal trim. 3.10 INSTALLATION—BACKER MATERIALS A. Install glass-mat backer materials where indicated on drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.11 JOINT TREATMENT A. Install joint treatment in accordance with GA-216. B. Install corner bead,trim,and casing in accordance with GA-216. C. Install control joints full height of partition with 1/2 inch gap between board edges and between studs.Control joints 09250-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 shall be installed in accordance with the gypsum manufacturer's recommended guidelines for control joints or the Gypsum Association GA-234 for control joint in fire rated systems.Apply sealant at base of joint and control joint accessory piece at face.Install control joints at the following locations: 1. Where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 2. At pairs of doors,install vertical control joint at each jamb.At single doors,install control joint at latch side of jamb. 3.12 FINISH A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA-214 finish levels. B. Provide gypsum board fmish levels at locations as follows: 1. Level 0(GA-214): No taping,finishing,or accessories necessary. a. Exposed surfaces above 12 ft high in Cart Storage Area. 2. Level 1 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedment set in joint compound.Surface free of excess joint compound.Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable. a. Areas above ceilings where required by drawings. b. Concealed areas. c. Interior exposed gypsum surfaces not indicated to be painted. 3. Level 3 (GA-214): Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles and two separate coats of joint compound are applied over joints,angles,fastener heads,and accessories.Surface smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Interior gypsum surfaces indicated to be painted. b. Exterior exposed gypsum surfaces. C. Painted Gypsum Sheathing: Exposed exterior gypsum sheathing to receive a paint finish shall be prepared as follows in accordance with manufacturers instructions: 1. Apply fiberglass mesh joint tape over joints and embed in setting-type joint compound specified. 2. Skim coat surface with setting-type joint compound for smooth finish. 3. Finish painting is specified in Section 09900. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect metal framing erection,placement, spacing,fasteners,and connections to building. B. Inspect gypsum board installation,fastener type,spacing,and finish level. C. Inspect installation of firestopping penetrations of fire-restive rated partitions and at voids between top of partition and building structure. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. B. Protect installed interior non load-bearing steel stud partition framing,gypsum board,and gypsum sheathing and backer materials from damage until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 09511 (09 5113)-ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 2. Acoustical panels. 3. Perimeter trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 13900-Fire Suppression: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 2. Section 15800-Air Distribution: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 3. Section 16500-Lighting: Light fixtures attached to ceiling system. 4. Appendix B—Testing and Inspection by Owner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 635-Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C 636-Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 3. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E 1264-Acoustical Ceiling Products. C. American Society of Civil Engineers(ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data for suspension systems,showing all components. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Layout of grid components and hanger spacing,including perimeter support wires. 2. Locations and methods of attachment of grid to walls.Clearance where grid is not attached to walls. 3. Connection of ends of main beams and cross tees. 4. Locations and details of compression struts and horizontal restraint wires or rigid bracing. 5. Locations and details of seismic separation joints. 6. Bracing for changes in ceiling plane. 7. Locations and support details for light fixtures,diffusers,and other items within the ceiling system. D. Evaluation Report: ICC-ES report verifying code compliance for systems with alternative materials, design or methods of construction not specifically prescribed by the building code. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Deliver acoustical units in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. 09511-1 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 C. Store under cover in dry,watertight conditions. D. Prior to installation,store acoustical units for 24 hours minimum at same temperature and relative humidity as space where Work will be installed. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature range of 60-85 degrees F, and humidity of no more than 70 percent relative humidity prior to,during,and after installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturers as specified: 1. Armstrong World Industries Incorporated,Lancaster,PA (800)448-4405. a. Contact:Louis John,Armstrong Strategic Account Manager,(407)697-6768,ljjohn(a)armstrong.com or Sherry Brunt,Armstrong Customer Service(800)442-4212 armstrongcsa@armstrong.com 2. CertainTeed Ceilings,Valley Forge,PA(800)233-8990. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation,Chicago,IL (800)323-7164. 4. Gold Bond Building Products,National Gypsum Company,Charlotte,NC (704)365-7300. 5. USG Interiors,Chicago,IL (800)950-3839. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class A finish: 1. Flame Spread: Less than 25. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 50. B. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7. C. Food Serving and Preparation Areas where Scheduled: 1. United States Department of Agriculture(USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Provide suspension system specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the drawings. Provide suspension system compatible with acoustical panels selected. B. Grid: ASTM C 635,heavy duty,steel exposed T;nominal 1 inch width;stab-in connections. C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars,clips,and splices. D. Grid Finish: White. E. Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels;galvanized hanger wire,minimum 12 gage. F. Edge Moldings: Metal channel with exposed flange to match suspension system. Minimum 2 inch wide horizontal leg. G. Hold-Down Clips: 1. Heavy Duty Clip:Armstrong Model EHDC58 hold-down clip. H. Compression Struts: Telescoping compression strut designed to attach to main tees at each splayed wire location, preventing upward movement of ceiling grid system. Provide either of the following: 1. Donn Compression Post by USG. 09511-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Field fabricated compression struts as detailed on drawings. I. ACT: Non Fire-Rated Suspension System: Provide one of the following: 1. Prelude 15/16 inch,XL#7300 Exposed Tee System by Armstrong. 2. Classic Stab System, 15/16 inch,#CS12-12-15 by CertainTeed. 3. 1200 System by Chicago Metallic. 4. Donn DX System by USG. J. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN PANELS: A. Provide acoustical panels specified herein for the corresponding ACT system as applicable as shown on the drawings. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. C. ACT: Non Fire-Rated Panels,square edge,nonperforated,abuse-resistant vinyl film facing,size as shown.Provide one of the following: 1. Vinyl Faced Fiberglass Ceiling Panels,Random Fissured;Item#2911 by Armstrong. 2. Premier Hi-Lite ClimaPlus Kapok Panels,unperforated,Item#7057G by USG. 3. Versatone Unperforated Vintage,Item#1530-VIN-1 by CertainTeed. D. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, heating is provided, dust generating activities have terminated,and overhead work is completed,tested,and approved. 2. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is completed. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. B. Site Tolerances: 1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3.3 INSTALLATION-SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C 636,ASCE 7 and manufacturer's published instructions. B. Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. C. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs,coordinate installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 09511-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Hang system independent of walls,columns,ducts,pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced,avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers,reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. E. Locate system on room axis to a balanced grid design. F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Do not eccentrically load system,or produce rotation of runners. G. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Secure at 16 inches on center. H. Install compression struts and secure system with tie wires as indicated on Drawings. 1, Fasten strut to main runner and extend to and fasten to structural member supporting roof. 2. Locate compression strut and splayed hanger wires at maximum of 12 feet on center in both directions with first point within 6 feet from each partition as shown. 3.4 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Fit acoustic units in place free from damaged edges or other defects. Install acoustic units level,in uniform plane, and free from twist,warp,and dents. B. Install manufacturers heavy duty hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system at each ceiling acoustical panel. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Except as specified as mandatory, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. Owner T&I specified below shall not be considered a substitute for the Contractor's responsibility to perform similar routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.6 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection as specified in Appendix B. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings including trim,edge moldings,and suspension system members. END OF SECTION 09511-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 09655(09 6513)-RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber or Vinyl Resilient Base B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Sealant between bases and floor or wall surfaces. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM F 710-Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 3. ASTM FI861 —Resilient Wall Base 4. ASTM F 2169-Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 and manufac- turer's recommendations. B. Product Packaging: Deliver in manufacturer's original packaging with identification markings on each component or package. C. Product Delivery: Supplier will deliver products to site to be received by Contractor.Contact Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. D. Acceptance at Site: Inspect products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of products furnished and shall report discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to the site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIER A. Haines,Jones&Cadbury.Contact: Customer Service(800)459-7099,WMT@hjcinc.com 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Base Accessories: 1. Special Shapes: Inside and outside corners,splicers,and end caps. a. 90 degree Corners: Shop prefabricated heat welded corners. b. 45 degree Corners: Shop prefabricated heat welded corners. c. Other than 90 and 45 degree Corners: Field fabricated as shown on Drawings. 2. Button Caps. 3. Splicers. B. Installation Accessories: 1. Forstner Bit: 1/2 inch diameter. 09655-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 C. Adhesive/Sealant: Water resistant type,VOC less than 50 g/L.: 1. Seal Bond 96(SB96)by Michigan Adhesive Mfg.,Inc. Color: Match base. 2. Greenchoice Titebond Weathermaster by Franklin International. Color: Match base. D. Building Tape: 25 mil polyethylene backed rubberized adhesive membrane tape, BT-25XL Building Tape by Proteco Wrap Co.,Denver,CO(800)759-9727. E. Rubber or Vinyl Resilient Base: ASTM F1861,Type TV(vinyl),TS(rubber,vulcanized thermoset),or TP(rubber, thermoplastic); 1/8 inch thickness;with matching end stops and preformed corner units: 1. Color: RB-1 -Black: Armstrong No.60 Jet Black or equivalent by other manufacturers. 2. Adhesive: Water resistant type,VOC less than 50 g/L as recommended by resilient base manufacturer for application intended. F. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E 84. G. Substitutions: Comply with the requirements of Section 01600. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Rubber or Vinyl Resilient Base: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 2. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 3. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece,with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 4. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 5. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 6. Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. B. Building Tape: Install building tape at base of wall behind resilient base or at joints as shown on Drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor,base,and wall surfaces without damage. END OF SECTION 09655-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415a SECTION 09900(09 9100)-PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Field applied paints and finishes for interior and exterior surfaces. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01351 —Regulatory Compliance: Disposal and removal of hazardous construction and demolition waste. (Formerly included in Section 01743) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 2129-Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. VOC Content:Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State,and Local restrictions for Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)content. 2. Toxicity/EQ: Comply with federal,state,and local toxicity and environmental quality regulations and with federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and heavy metals. Do not use solvents in paint products that contribute to air pollution. B. Elastomeric Coating Field Sample: 1. Apply elastomeric coating weatherproofing system to 10 ft by 10 ft sample panel at location on the building as directed. 2. Apply in accordance with specified colors,texture,workmanship,and application requirements. 3. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager inspection and approval of sample panel. 4. Maintain approved sample panel during construction as-a standard for judging completed Work.Do not alter, move,or destroy panel until Work is completed. 5. Apply scheduled final elastomeric coat to sample panel simultaneous with final coat of adjacent wall surface. C. Elastomeric Coating Applicator-Qualifications: Applicator having minimum 5 years documented experience in the application of elastomeric coatings and approved by coating manufacturer. D. Elastomeric Coating Manufacturer's Technical Representative: A coating manufacturer's representative shall pro- vide field service at site as required. E. Elastomeric Coating Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Pre-Installation Conference: a. Convene a pre-installation conference at the site,one week,prior to commencing Work of this Section. b. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. c. Attendance: 1) Contractor. 2) Coating subcontractor. 3) Coating manufacturer's technical representative. d. Agenda: 09900-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1) Substrate condition including manufacturer's written approval. 2) Sequence and method of application of coating system. e. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements(or disagreements)reached,and affix signatures of all attendees.Furnish copy of record to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and to each party attending. 1.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Elastomeric Coatings: 1. Manufacturer's Representative Inspection: At completion of application,provide Manufacturer's Representa- tive (must be same individual present at pre-installation conference) inspection of application and color. Compare application with sample panel. Provide Manufacturer's Representative Report of deficiencies to Contractor and Wal-Mart Construction Manager.] 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Product Order and Delivery: Prepare and order all coating materials and accessories for products and arrange de- livery and submit together to Supplier specified hereinbefore:Supplier shall deliver products to site on delivery date established by Contractor. To arrange product order and delivery,contact Supplier. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Materials provided. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to Supplier. 3. Upon notification by Contractor, Supplier shall arrange for delivery of replacement products. 4. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Materials. D. Paint orders shall identify the store number,location,and address of project. E. Delivery of paint materials shall be in sealed original labeled containers,bearing manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name,lot number,brand code,coverage,surface preparation,drying time,cleanup requirements,color desig- nation, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. Notify Supplier when delivered products to not conform to these requirements. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply paint finishes only when moisture content of surfaces is within manufacturer's acceptable ranges for type of finish being applied. B. Minimum surface temperatures or ambient air temperature shall be as follows for the specified coatings unless oth- erwise specifically stated by the manufacturer for the specific coating: 1. Alkyd and interior and exterior latex finishes: 50 degrees F. 2. Varnish and transparent finishes: 65 degrees F. 3. All coatings: 5 degrees F above dew point. C. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain temperatures above the manufacturer's stated min- imum surface and air temperature for 24 hours prior to,during,and 48 hours after application of interior finishes. D. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated. E. Provide lighting level in areas being painted of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. F. Waste Management: 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01351 Supplement. 09900-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Obtain paint in containers of the largest size practical for each color,sheen,and type. 3. Remove excess paint from containers and dispose in accordance with MSDS data and local environmental regulations for paint products. 4. Expose waste paint to air and allow paint to dry. 5. Return reusable drums and totes to manufacturer. 6. Clean and recycle containers that cannot be returned to manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIER A. Sherwin Williams Company.Contact:Kevin Behm,(216)566-1558,Kevin.c.behm(a),shenvin.com B. Coating materials shall be the product of Sherwin Williams Co. as specified in the Painting Schedule hereinafter. Substitutions will not be permitted. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS: Accessory materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified,shall be of highest quality and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Paint Thinners: Type recommended by paint or coating manufacturer for paint or coating system, VOC compliant, first line commercial quality.Do not use solvents for thinning paint materials. 2. Patching Materials:Low VOC Latex filler. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. B. Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Apply paint only on surfaces free of dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, and conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's published instructions for each particular substrate condition. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. 2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be painted or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.Reinstall all removed items after completion of paint work. 3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatment. Remove oil and grease prior to me- chanical cleaning. C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces that are not galvanized or shop-coated,of oil,grease,dirt,loose mill scale, and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats where damaged or bare.Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent.Apply coat of etching primer if required by paint manufacturer. E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease,oils,and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. a. Alkalinity shall be a maximum ph of 13 and a minimum of 6. 09900-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 b. If surface alkalinity is outside range specified above,correct condition before application of paint. c. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Clean and etch floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid,or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid and allow to dry before painting.Mask floor surfaces not to be cleaned and etched. a. Sealer Removal: Prior to etching,remove curing compound and sealers with strong solvents such as xylene,MEK, toluene or commercial paint strippers or by sandblasting or other similar mechanical action. F. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt,oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer,before application of priming coat.After priming,fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 1. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends faces,undersides,and backsides of such wood,including cabinets and counters. 2. Seal tops,bottoms,and cut-outs with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. G. Gypsum Board: 1. Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 2. Exterior Gypsum Board Sheathing: Exterior gypsum board sheathing to receive a paint finish shall be pre- pared for painting with joint treatment and skim coating as specified in Section 09250. H. Previously Painted Surfaces: Prepare previously painted surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda- tions. Remove loose paint by scrape or wire brush as necessary. Clean surfaces thoroughly and roughen existing paint surfaces by lightly sanding.Clean and remove mildew using trisodium phosphate.Touch up bare surfaces with prime coat scheduled. Painted surfaces with existing sound prime or finish coats do not require additional prime coating. Finish coats shall be applied in number and DFT specified. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coating systems specified in the Painting Schedule hereinafter for the corresponding surface. Shop primed surfaces will not require field applied 1st coat(primer)specified in the Painting Schedule. B. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions using application procedures ap- proved for the particular application and substrate. C. Apply each coat to the Dry Film Thickness(DFT)specified which represents the minimum Dry Film Thickness in mils per coat. Apply each coat to uniform coverage. D. Apply each coat slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Sand smooth surfaces lightly between coats to achieve specified finish. E. Allow drying time between coats as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners shall receive minimum dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry units at rate to provide complete coverage with pores filled. H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats,apply a prime coat of material as scheduled or as recommended by manufacturer to material scheduled to be painted or finished that has not been shop primed. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to assure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 09900-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. B. Where exposed piping,conduit,and electrical equipment are to be painted,paint color and texture shall match adja- cent surfaces. C. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment prior to installation. D. Prepaint Gas piping prior to installation when shown or scheduled to be painted. Touch up paint after installation. Colors shall be as follows: 1. Exterior Piping on Roof(Yellow): P5,OSHA Standard Safety Yellow. 2. Interior Piping in Receiving and Stockroom Areas(Yellow): P5,OSHA Standard Safety Yellow. 3. Piping in all Other Areas: Color to match adjacent surfaces. 3.5 APPLICATION OF ELASTOMERIC COATINGS A. General: 1. Concrete masonry unit walls shall have been installed at least 21 days prior to elastomeric coating application. 2. Begin system application at rear of building and work toward front.Begin system application at top of wall and work down.Begin application of system in the presence of Manufacturer's Technical Representative. 3. Do not paint sealants.Paint wall prior to sealant application in building joints.Protect joints to be sealed by inserting calking backer rods at face of wall. 4. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Apply cold weather coatings at surface and ambient temperatures at or above manufacturer's recommended application temperatures and rising. B. Application: 1. Primer: a. Apply primer to masonry surfaces when and as recommended by the manufacturer as a part of the elastomeric system. Provide written documentation from manufacturer if primer coat is or is not re- quired 2. Block Filler: a. Apply using brush,roller,or spray unless recommended by manufacturer to use brush only.For spray application,use airless equipment and back roll material into voids of substrate. b. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for application rate appropriate for profile,texture, and porosity of substrate. 3. Coating: a. Allow block filler to dry 24 to 48 hours before proceeding with subsequent coating. b. Apply material by brush,roller,plaster type sprayer,or low pressure sprayer unless recommended by manufacturer to use brush only. Back roll brushed or sprayed material. Cross roll roller-applied ma- terial.Finish material with brush and roller strokes in one direction.For spray application,use airless equipment. c. Apply two coats with a minimum dry film thickness(DFT)as specified in the Painting Schedule. d. Provide pinhole free finish coat. e. Match approved elastomeric coating field samples for color and sheen. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect painting and coating application for scheduled material,color,sheen,specified thickness(DFT),and cover- age. B. Elastomeric Coatings: 1. Maintain schedule of application of system in field office for Owner's review. 2. Manufacturer's Representative Inspection: At completion of application,obtain Manufacturer's Representa- tive (must be same individual present at pre-installation conference) inspection of application and color. 09900-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Compare application with sample panel. Provide Manufacturer's Representative Report of deficiencies to Contractor and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 3.7 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion,promptly remove paint where spilled,splashed,or spattered. B. During progress of work keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools,equipment,surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect waste,cloths,and material which may constitute a fire hazard,place in closed metal containers,and remove daily from site. D. Upon completion of work,leave premises neat and clean. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect other surfaces from paint and damage.Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. 3.9 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE A. Provide following colors as applicable as shown or scheduled on the drawings. Color Number/Name By Sherwin Wil- Color Number/Name By Sherwin Wil- Mark hams unless otherwise shown. Mark hams unless otherwise shown. PI SW# 1234 Evening Shadow P29 SW#6420 Queen Anne's Lace P2 SW#7664 Steely Gray P30 SW#2018 Pink Beige P3 SW# 1504 Nobility Blue,OR P31 ' SW#2016 Canberra , SW#6510 Loyal Blue _ P32 , SW#6387 Compatible Cream P4 SW# 1602 Theater Red P33 SW#6385 Dover White P5 , OSHA Standard Safety Yellow P34 SW#6519 Hinting Blue P6 SW#6811 Honorable Blue P35 SW#7071 Gray Screen P7 Pittsburgh Paints#2537 Blossom White P36 SW#6989 Domino P8 SW#7005 Pure White P37 SW#0046 White Hyacinth P9 SW#7042 Shoji White. Apply over tex- P38 SW#6102 Portabello tured coating specified in Section 09250 P39 : SW#6122 Camelback P10 SW#6061 Tan Bark P40 SW#6665 Gardenia P11 SW#6115 Totally Tan P41 SW#6100 Practical Beige P12 SW#6112 Biscuit P42 SW#6372 Inviting Ivory P13 SW#6454 Shamrock P43 SW#6667 Afterglow P14 SW#6677 Goldenrod P44 , SW#6666 Enjoyable Yellow P15 SW#7669 Summit Gray P45 SW#0044 Hubbard Squash P16 SW#7074 Software P46 SW#7006 Extra White P17 SW#7689 Row House Tan P47 SW#0051 Classic Ivory P18 SW#7507 Stone Lion , P48 SW#7722 Travertine P19 SW#6094 Sensational Sand _ P49 ' SW#7019 Gauntlet Grey P20 SW#7036 Accessible Beige P50 SW#6382 Ceremonial Gold P21 _ SW#4081 Safety Red P51 SW#6662 Summer Day P22 Pantone Color System PMS 286C. P52 SW#6334 Flower Pot P23 SW#7005 Pure White P53 SW#6810 Lupine P24 SW#2819 Downing Slate ' P54 SW#6432 Garden Spot P25 SW#0045 Antiquarian Brown . P55 SW#6285 Grape Harvest P26 SW#6080 Utterly Beige P56 SW#6500 Open Seas P27 SW#6103 Tea Chest P57 SW#2848 Roycroft Pewter P28 SW#6124 Cardboard 1 P58 SW#6006 Black Bean 09900-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Color Number/Name By Sherwin Wil- Color Number/Name By Sherwin Wil- Mark hams unless otherwise shown. Mark hams unless otherwise shown. P59 SW#0077 Classic French Gray P110 SW#7043 Worldly Gray P60 SW#6053 Reddened Earth P111 SW#7531 Canvas Tan P61 SW#6079 Diverse Beige P112 SW#6676 Butterfield P62 SW#6172 Hardware. P113 SW#6674 Jonquil P63 SW#2340 Buff P114 SW#7720 Deer Valley P64 SW#6332 Coral Island P115 SW#6076 Turkish Coffee P65 SW#6378 Crisp Linen P116 Pantone Color System 368C P66 SW#6085 Simplify Beige P117 SW#6429 Baize Green P67 SW#6114 Bagel P118SW#6720 Paradise P68 SW#6113 Interactive Cream P119 SW#6895 Laughing Orange , P69 SW#6340 Baked Clay. P120 SW#6887 Navel P70 SW#2838 Polished Mahogany P121 SW#6905 Goldfinch P71 SW#7051 Analytical Gray. , P122 SW#6413 Restoration Ivory P72 SW#6658 Welcome White. P123 SW#6380 Humble Gold P73 SW#6214 Underseas P124 SW#7522 Meadowlark P74 SW#6659 Captivating Cream P125 SW#6923 Festival Green P75 SW#2804 Renwick Rose Beige P126 SW#6885 Knockout Orange P76 Custom Match#076 Walmart Medium P127 SW#7719 Fresco Cream Blue P128 SW#7510 Chateau Brown P77 SW#6087 Trusty Tan P129 SW#6683 Bee P78 SW#2445 Creamy White P130 SW#6922 Outrageous Green P79 SW#6359 Sociable P131 SW#7102 White Flour P80 SW#6060 Moroccan Brown P159 SW#7571 Casa Blanca P81 SW#6148 Wool Skein P82 SW#7679 Golden Gate P83 SW#6082 Cobble Brown P84 SW#7641 Collonade Gray P85 SW#2823 Rookwood Clay P86 SW#6356 Copper Mountain P87 SW#2807 Rookwood Medium Brown P88 SW#7517 China Doll P89 SW#6062 Rugged Brown P90 SW#7502 Dry Dock P91 SW#7513 Sanderling P92 SW#7536 Bittersweet Stem P93 SW#7538 Tamarind P94 SW#6258 Tricorn Black P95 SW#7702 Spiced Cider P96 SW#7705 Wheat Penny P97 SW#7710 Brandy Wine P98 SW#7718 Oak Creek P99 ' SW#7722 Travertine P100 SW#6521 Notable Hue SW#7694(EXT)Exterior Dromedary P104 , Camel P102 SW#7518 Beach House P103 SW#6095 Toasty P104 SW#6867 Fireworks P105 SW#6526 Icelandic P106 SW#6675 Afternoon P107 SW#7698 Straw Harvest P108 SW#6991 Black Magic P109 SW#7506 Loggia 09900-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.10 PAINT SHEEN SCHEDULE A. Gloss: 1. Exterior metal surfaces. 2. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames(inside and outside surfaces). 3. Roof hatch(inside and outside surfaces). 4. Interior&exterior pipe bollards. 5. Interior&exterior metal railings. 6. Metal stair stringers and handrails. 7. Metal fixed ladders and cages. 8. Interior CMU walls to receive Epoxy Paint. B. Semi-gloss: 1. Interior hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Interior hollow metal window frames. 3. Wood trim or simulated wood trim scheduled to be painted. 4. Coiling metal counter doors. 5. Toilet gypsum board ceilings. 6. Interior columns surfaces to receive epoxy finish. C. Eggshell: 1. All surfaces to be painted where a sheen is not otherwise specified. D. Flat: 1. Exterior gypsum board ceilings. 2. Exterior concrete. 3.11 ITEMS TO BE PAINTED SCHEDULE A. Paint surfaces as shown or scheduled on the drawings including,but not limited to,the following items. 1. Exterior:Paint existing exterior surfaces as indicated by Painting Schematic and Exterior Building Elevations on the Drawings. Paint all new exterior surfaces including,but not limited to: a. Hollow metal doors and frames. b. Metal opening frames and trim. c. Metal flashing and downspout(surfaces exposed from ground level). d. Metal gutters(surfaces exposed to view from ground level). e. Cast iron downspout boots. f. Metal fascias(vertical face). g. Parapet walls,roof side(where roofing does not occur). h. Pipe bollards where shown to be painted. i. Metal railings. j. Roof hatch. k. Satellite dish support(from bottom of deck to top of support). 1. Exposed rooftop refrigeration and HVAC support framing. m. Shop primed metal canopies and canopy supporting steel structure. n. Underside of metal roof panels where exposed. o. Overhead doors if shown. P. Concrete masonry unit. q. Paving graphics and markings. r. Exposed piping and conduit,hangers and supports. 2. Interior:Paint existing interior surfaces as indicated on the Drawings and Paint Color Schedule at end of this Section.Paint all new interior surfaces as scheduled on Drawings including,but not limited to: a. Hollow metal doors and frames. b. Hollow metal window frames. c. Overhead coiling doors. d. Metal opening frames and trim. 09900-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 e. Gypsum wallboard. f. Exposed concrete unit masonry. g. Pipe Bollards shown to be painted. h. Metal railings. i. Exposed plywood(except plywood wainscot). j. Exposed mechanical ductwork,hangers and supports(if exposed structure is scheduled to be painted). k. Exposed piping and conduit,hangers and supports(if exposed structure is scheduled to be painted). 1. Exposed piping,conduit,and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas where it will be exposed to the public. m. Exposed fireprotection piping,hangers and supports(if exposed structure is scheduled to be painted). n. Exposed overhead structure including joists,girders,bridging,miscellaneous metal fabrications and deck(if scheduled to be painted). o. Exposed structure columns. p. Wall signage and graphics. q. Floor striping,graphics,and markings. r. Metal stair stringers and handrails. s. Exposed wood trim. B. Do not paint the following Items: 1. Aluminum,brass,bronze,stainless steel,and chrome plated steel. 2. Pre-finished items, such as toilet compartments, acoustical ceiling materials, mechanical, and electrical equipment or factory finished metal panels and trim. 3. UL,FM,and other code-required labels. 4. Equipment identification,performance rating,and name plates. 5. Finish hardware. 3.12 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Apply paint to the substrate surface scheduled as applicable as specified or as shown on the drawings in accordance with the following: DFT VOC DFT VOC Surface Sheen 1st Coat (mils) (g/II) ! 2nd and 3rd Coats r (nera) WA) coat) coat) EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Ferrous Gloss I Pro,Industrial ProCryl Universal 3.0 100 2 Coats:Pro Industrial Zero VOC 4.0 0 Metal _ Primer B66-3 10 Enamel,B66-600 Series Ferrous Gloss j. Pro Industrial,Zero VOC Enamel, 4.0 0 1 Coat:Pro Industrial Zero VOC 4.0 0 Metal B66-600 Series Enamel,B66-600 Series Over factory painted sur- face _ Ferrous Gloss All States except CA: lEpolon H 4.0 300 2 Coats:WB Acrolon 100 Water 2-4 <100 Metal Rust Inhibitive Epoxy Primer I Based Urethane B65-720,B65V720 (Existing B67W400,B67A400,B67A400 roof ! ' mounted State of CA: Macropoxy 646- 5.0- <100 equip fram- 100,B58W620,$58V620 10.0 ing to re- main) Ferrous Gloss Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 4.0 100 2 Coats:WB Acrolon 100 Water 2-4 <100 Metal(Sat- Primer B66-310 ! Based Urethane B65-720,B65V720 ellite dish support and exposed rooftop re- frigeration and HVAC 09900-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 DFT VOC DFT VOC Surface Sheen 1st Coat Viers) �) 2nd and 3rd Coats Is) (g/1) (per coat) coat) support framing. Prefinished Gloss PrepRite Bonding Primer 4 42 1 Coat:Pro Industrial Zero VOC 4.0 0 Ferrous ' B51W50 Enamel,B66-600 Series Metal(Un- derside of metal roof panels where exposed) Pretinished Low Bond-Plex Waterbased Acrylic 4.0 48 1 Coat:Bond-Plex Waterbased 4.0 48 Metal Trim Sheen B71-200 Series Acrylic B71-200 Series (If shown to be repainted) Galvanized Semi- Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 3.0 100 2 Coats:Pro Industrial Zero VOC 4.0 0 Trim gloss Primer B66-310 Enamel,B66-600 Series Nonferrous Semi- Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 3.0 100 2 Coats:Pro Industrial Zero VOC 4.0 0 and Galva- gloss Primer B66-310 Enamel,B66-600 Series nized Metal Concrete Flat Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46 18.0 100 2 Coats:Conflex XL High Build 6-7.5 97 Masonry Elastomeric,A5-400 Unit Elastomeric (50 degrees F or above) Concrete Flat Loxon Block Surfacer,A24W200 8.0 81 2 Coats:UltraCrete Solvent Borne 6-8 400 Masonry (Above 35°F) Masonry Coating,B46 Series(Above Unit 20°F) Elastomeric (Below 50 degrees F) Fiber Ce- Flat Loxon Concrete and Masonry 3.2 96 2 Coats:A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, 1.3 49 ment Siding Primer,B28W8300 A6-100 Series Precast Con- Flat Loxon Concrete and Masonry 3.2 96 2 Coats:A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, 1.3 49 Crete Primer,B28W8300 A6-100 Series Exposed Tim- Semi- WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain 1.3 79 1 Coat:WoodScapes Polyurethane 1.3 79 ber,Purlins, Trans- Al 5T5 Stain Al 5T5 Plywood, want Wood Stain Exposed Tim- Opaqu 1 Coat:WoodScapes Latex Stain 1.3- <100 1 Coat:WoodScapes Latex Stain 1.3- <100 ber,Purlins, e Stain . A15W51 2.6 Al5W51 2.6 Plywood, Wood Gypsum Flat A-100 Exterior Latex Primer, 1.4 87 2 Coats:A-100 Exterior Latex Finish, 1.3 49 Board 842W43 A6-100 Series (Ceiling) Concrete Egg- Setfast Acrylic Waterborne Traf- 8.5 100 1 Coat:Setfast Acrylic Waterborne 8.5 100 Pavement shell f c Marking Paint,TM 226/227 _ Traffic Marking Paint,TM 226/227 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Ferrous Gloss Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 2 100 All States except CA: 1.5 143 Metal Primer B66-310 2 Coats: Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex (Except as Gloss Enamel,B21 W200 otherwise scheduled) State of CA: 2 Coats:Solo Gloss Low VOC 1.6 49 Enamel,B21 WJ Series Ferrous Semi- ProCryl Universal Primer B66- 2 100 2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Inte- 1.6 0 Metal gloss 310 rior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31- 2600 Series 09900-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 DFT VOC DFT VOC Surface Sheen 1st Coat (nils) WO 2nd and 3rd Coats (mils) (g/i) (per (per coat) coat) (Except as otherwise scheduled) Ferrous Egg- Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 2 100 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.7 0 Metal shell Primer B66-310 rior Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20- (Except as 2600 Series. otherwise Exception: Interior columns shall re- scheduled) ceive only 1 coat. Ferrous Flat Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall,B42 4.5 58 Metal Series (Dryfall sys- Touch up prime welds,bare spots, tern over ,•blemishes,and scratches with Pro shop primed ; Industrial ProCryl Universal Pri- steel-over- mer B66-310 head struc- ture) Ferrous Flat Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 2 100 1 coat:Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, 4.5 58 Metal Primer B66-310 1342 Series (Dryfall sys- tem over un- primed steel -overhead structure) Ferrous Semi- All states except CA: Epolon II 4.0 300 1 Coat:WB Acrolon 100 Water 2-4 <100 Metal gloss Rust Inhibitive Epoxy Primer Based Urethane B65-720,B65V720. (Columns B67W400,B67A400,B67A400 and Hollow Metal Door State of CA: Macropoxy 646- 5.0- <100 Frames as 100,B58W620,B58V620 10.0 shown on Drawings to receive epoxy) Galvanized Flat Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 2 100 1 coat:Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, 4.5 100 Metal Primer B66-310 B42 Series (Exposed Ductwork) Galvanized Egg- Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal 2 100 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.7 0 Metal shell Primer B66-310 rior Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20- (freezer/cool 2600 Series er panels) Concrete Gloss Loxon Concrete and Masonry 3.2 96 All States except CA: 1.5 143 Walls Primer,B28W8300 2 Coats: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel,1121 W200 State of CA: 2 Coats: Solo Gloss Low VOC 1.6 49 Enamel,B21WJ Series Concrete Egg- Loxon Concrete and Masonry 3.2 96 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC bite- 1.7 0 Walls shell Primer,B28W8300 rior Latex Eggshell Enamel,B202- 2600 Series Concrete Gloss PrepRite Block Filler,B25W25 8.0 45 All States except CA: 1.5 143 Masonry 2 Coats: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Unit Gloss Enamel,B21 W200 State of CA: 2 Coats: Solo Gloss Low VOC 1.6 49 Enamel,B21WJ Series Concrete Egg- PrepRite Block Filler,B25W25 8.0 45 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.7 0 Masonry shell rior Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20- Unit 2600 Series 09900-12 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 DFT VOC DFT VOC Surface Sheen '1st Coat (mils) WO 2nd and 3rd Coats (mils) WO (per (per _coat) coat) Concrete Gloss PrepRite Block Filler,B25W25 8.0 45 2 Coats:Pro Industrial Water Based 2.0- 0 Masonry Catalyzed Epoxy,Gloss B73-300 Se- 4.0 Unit(Walls, ries as shown on Drawings to receive epoxy) Gypsum Gloss ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Pri- 1.5 0 All States except CA 1.5 143 Board mer,B28W02600 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel',B21W200 State of CA: 2 Coats: Solo Gloss Low VOC 1.6 49 Enamel',B21WJ Series Gypsum ' Semi'- ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Pri- 1.5 0 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.6 0 Board ' gloss mer,B28W02600 rior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31- 2600 Series Gypsum Egg- ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Pri- 1.5 0 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.7 0 Board shell mer,B28W02600 rior Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20- , 2600 Series Wood Semi- ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Pri- 1.5 0 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.6 0 gloss mer,B28W02600 rior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31- 2600 Series Wood Wood Classics Varnish Sanding 1.2 522 (Transpar- Sealer,B26V43 ent sealer (Finish Sl) Wood Semi- PrepRite ProBlock Interior/Exle- , 1.4 97 2 Coats:ProMar 200 Zero VOC Irate- 1.6 0 (Exposed gloss rior Latex Primer Sealer B51 Se- rior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,1331- laminated ries 2600 Series wood roof structure) Concrete 'Semi- Macropoxy'646-100,B58W620, ' 5.0- <100 Macropoxy 646-100,B58W620, 5.0- <100 Floors gloss B58V620 10.0 B58V620 10.0 END OF SECTION 09900-13 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 10810(10 2813)-TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Toilet accessories and attachment hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to products. 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Blocking for attachment of accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. ANSI International(ANSI): 1. ANSI Al 17.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. Haines,Jones&Cadbury.Contact: Customer Service(800)459-7099,WMT(a,hjcinc.com. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products from the following manufacturers as specified in the Schedule of Accessories hereinafter: 1. American Specialties Co.,Inc.;Yonkers,NY,(914)476-9000. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc., North Hollywood,CA,(818)982-9600. 3. Brady Worldwide,Inc.,Milwaukee,WI,(888)272-3946. 4. Bradley Corporation,Menomonee,WI,(800)272-3539. 5. Excel Dryer Corporation,East Longmeadow,MA,(800)255-9235. 6. Foundations(Brocar),Inc., Medina,OH,(330)722-5033. 7. Henkel Corporation,Rocky Hilt,CT,(800)624-7767. 8. Koala Kare Products(A Division of Bobrick),Englewood,CO, (888)733-3456. 9. Laurel Metal Products, Inc., Lincolnwood, IL, (888) 528-7358, National distributor: Haines,Jones & Cad- bury,Inc.Contact: Customer Service,(800)459-7099,fax(479)756-8998,WMT@hjcinc.com 10. Meek Mirrors,Fort Smith,AR,(800)643-2533. 11. Saniflow Corp.,Miami,FL,National distributor:Haines,Jones&Cadbury,Inc. 12. SourceOne,Fort Smith,AR,National distributor:Haines,Jones&Cadbury,Inc. 13. Styles and Stainless,Montoursville,PA,(888)764-4343. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304. B. Mounting Devices: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or of same material as accessory unit. C. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement. D. Thread Lock Compound(For Coat Rack'Fastener): Loctite 242,by Henkel. E. Finishes: 10810-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Chrome/Nickel Plating: Polished finish. 2. Stainless Steel: No.4 satin finish,unless specified otherwise. 3. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean,spray apply one coat primer and bake. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth-joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. C. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. E. Shop-assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 2.5 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES A. Provide one of the products where more than one model or manufacturer is listed for an item. B. Soap Dispensers: Model as specified above and provided by the listed manufacturers. C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Surface mounted. 1. Model No.ASI 0473-1A by American Specialties,Inc. a. Finish: Stainless Steel. 2. a. Finish: Stainless Steel. D. Toilet Paper Dispensers: 1. Model No. 0040 by American Specialties. E. Electric Hand Dryers: Stainless steel,surface mounted,automatic(no-touch)model. 1. Model MO6ACS-UL Speedflow by Saniflow. 2. Model 2902-287400 Aerix by Bradley. F. Toilet Seat Cover Dispensers: Surface mounted(one per each water closet),22 gage 18-8 type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. 1. Model No.0477SM,by American Specialties. 2. Model No.B221,by Bobrick. 3. Model No.5831,by Bradley. G. Small Framed Mirrors: No. 1 quality 1/4 inch float glass electrolytically copper plated,tempered glass.Mitered 22 gage stainless-steel frame;concealed theft resistant wall hanger.Mirror size shall be 24 x 36 unless otherwise shown. 1. Model No.M2513,by Meek. 2. Model No. 781-024362,by Bradley. H. Grab Bars: 18 gage stainless steel; 1-1/4 inch diameter,(1-1/2 inch diameter where required by Local Code).textured grip surface;concealed mounting consisting of welded-on mounting flange with snap-on cover flange or escutcheon. Location,quantity,and length shall be as shown. 1. Model No.3700 P,by American Specialties. 2. Model No.B-5806.99,by Bobrick. 3. Model No. 832-2,by Bradley. 4. Model No.PB23XX Series by Mainline(1-1/2 inch diameter only). PART 3 -EXECUTION 10810-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3.1 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to Site at appropriate time for building-in.Use templates and rough-in measure- ments as required. B. Verify that blocking is appropriately installed and ready to receive accessories. C. Rough Wall Openings: Provide rough wall opening(RWO)in compliance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines,as detailed on architectural drawings,and as described in the Schedule of Accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Drawings. Install accessories within toilet rooms and install accessories and soap dispensers in other areas in addition to toilet rooms where shown on Drawings.Use tamper-proof fasteners. B. Install true,plumb,and level,securely and rigidly anchored to wall framing. 3.3 CLEANING A. Protection and Cleaning of Toilet Accessories and Attachment Hardware Prior to Possession. 1. Immediately prior to possession,clean stainless steel accessories and attachment hardware thoroughly using soap, ammonia, or mild detergent and water. Apply with sponge or soft cloth, rinse with clear water and wipe dry. Always rub in the direction of polish lines. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water after every cleaning operation. Clean and polish to a spotless luster. Wipe dry to avoid water marks. 2. Clean and polish stainless steel accessories and mirror surfaces to a spotless luster. END OF SECTION 10810-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 093005 SECTION 13080—SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The requirements for seismic protection measures to be applied to mechanical and electrical equipment and systems specified herein. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07721 —Manufactured Curbs: Requirements for seismic roof curbs. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1, Coordinate with the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer,including all shop drawings,equipment cut sheets and other data required by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer for their seismic design work. 2. Install seismic restraint equipment specified by the Seismic Restrain Manufacturer in accordance with the construction documents provided by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. 3. Provide seismic restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps,etc.in accordance with the requirements of the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. 4. Submit a certification letter, per specification Section —01330 "Submittal Procedures" and specification Section — 01770 "Contract Closeout", from the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer, stating that the factory trained representative of the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer has received the factory training necessary to perform the field inspection required in Part 3 of this specification. 5. Submit a certification letter,stating that all seismic restraint calculations for all connections of equipment to the structure or anchored to the floor have been coordinated with the structural engineer of record,as de- scribed in specification Section—01330 "Submittal Procedures" and specification Section—01770"Con- • tract Closeout". 6. Submit the inspection report described in the"Special Inspection"paragraph below,per specification Sec- tion—01330"Submittal Procedures"and specification Section—01770"Contract Closeout". • D. Seismic Restraint Manufacturer Responsibilities: 1. Determine the type and location of seismic supports required for the mechanical and electrical elements shown on the contract drawings based on the Seismic Zone or Design Category,the size and weight of the supported element and the distance from the structure that the element will be installed. 2. Prepare submittals in accordance with requirements in individual specification sections and specification Section—01330"Submittal Procedures". 3. Provide Seismic Certification and Analysis as follows: a. Seismic restraint calculations shall be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure or anchored to the floor. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the project location, and em- ployed by the manufacturer of the seismic restraint products. b. All restraining devices shall have a pre-approval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-approvals based on inde- pendent testing are preferred to pre-approvals based on calculations. Where pre-approved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Testing and calculations shall include shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45°to the weakest mode. c. Analysis shall indicate calculated dead loads,static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods,bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept,without failure,the seismic forces prescribed by the applicable building code requirements,acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 13080- 1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard,OR—5935-500 06/162015 A. The Seismic Restraint Manufacturer shall provide submittals for products, per specification Section — 01330 "Submittal Procedures" and specification Section—01770 "Contract Closeout". Submittals shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience,licensed in the state of the job location,and employed by the manufacturer of the seismic restraint products. The submittals shall contain the following: 1. Descriptive Data: a. Catalog cut sheets or data sheets on specific restraints detailing compliance with the specification. b. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment,showing seismic restraints. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Provide templates,erection details,and installation details. b. Indicate thickness,type,grade,class of metal,and dimensions. c. Show construction details,reinforcement,anchorage,and installation with relation to other building systems and construction. d. Show details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. e. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors;and include number,size and locations for each piece of equipment. f. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, provide•details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts,conduit and pipe to these portions of the building structure. 3. Layout Drawings: a. Show locations and types of seismic restraints for all equipment,piping and conduit. Locations for seismic restraints shall be coordinated with the structure and with other mechanical and electrical components. B. Seismic Restraint Manual: A seismic restraint manual shall be prepared by the Seismic Restraint Maufacturer and submitted by the Contractor, per specification Section 01770"Contract Closeout", that contains the basis of the design for the seismic support systems, product data, shop drawings and layout drawings. A copy of the seismic restraint manual shall be kept on the jobsite for the duration of the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: The professional engineer employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer shall be legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and shall be experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,design,and extent. 1.4 SEISMIC ZONES A. Seismic protection for seismic concerns of all mechanical and electrical systems shall meet minimum requirements of the local building code for the Seismic Zone or Seismic Design Category as described in the structural drawings. 1.5 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS PROTECTED BY SEISMIC RESTRAINT A. Equipment and systems protected by seismic restraint shall include,but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mechanical Systems a. Gas Distribution Systems b. Domestic Water Supply Systems c. Sanitary Drain,Waste and Vent Piping Systems d. Oil Piping Systems e. Compressed Air Systems f. Roof Mounted HVAC Equipment g. Suspended HVAC Equipment h. Drop Box Diffusers i. Water Heaters j. Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks 13080-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard,OR—5935-500 06/162015 2. Electrical Systems a. Conduit b. Bus Duct c. Cable Tray d. Panelboards e. Switchgear f. Light Fixtures g. Transformers 1.6 RELATED WORK A. Housekeeping Pads 1. The Seismic Restraint Manufacturer shall prepare housekeeping pad reinforcement and pad attachment de- tails and design. 2. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten(10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow develop- ment of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used,the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. B. Supplementary Support Steel 1. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment,piping,etc. including roof mounted equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Seismic restraint,and flexible couplings shall be provided by the following manufacturers. No substitutions will be permitted. 1. Mason Industries,Inc. a. Contact:Jim Sadler,(631)348-0282. 2. Amber/Booth Company,Inc. a. Contact:Chip Morrow,(713)466-0003. B. All seismic restraints shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Water Service 1. For flanged connections —A double sphere arch rubber expansion joint constructed of molded reinforced neoprene with integral steel floating flanges. Connectors shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure (4 to 1 safety factor) of 150 psi and 225 degree F. Spring loaded control units shall be furnished to limit movement to within acceptable tolerances. 2. For threaded connections—A double spherical rubber hose connector,constructed of molded neoprene,ny- lon cord reinforced,with female pipe unions each end. Connectors shall be suitable for a maximum work- ing pressure(4 to 1 safety factor)of 150 psi and 225 degree F. Connectors shall have cable control units to limit movement to within acceptable tolerances. B. General 1. Flexible metal hose type joints may be used for aboveground or underground piping, up to 8" pipe diame- ter. Where permitted in other sections of these specifications,joints utilizing split-half couplings with grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used. 2.3 RESTRAINTS,BRACES,ANGLES A. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cables must be pre-stretched to 13080-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard,OR—5935-500 06/162015 achieve a certified minimum modulus of elasticity. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval"R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. B. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. C. Steel angles,sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval"R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. D. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval"R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. E. Joist attachment hardware shall consist of 2 cast pieces. The top piece shall incorporate a groove that fits between the two angles making up the upper cord of the bar joist. Lower assembly shall neoprene friction pad. Top piece shall have threaded hole to allow attachment of cable brace assemblies. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT A. Sway braces shall be installed to preclude damage during a seismic event. Bracing shall be installed in accordance with the seismic restraint manufacturer's instructions and shop drawing submittals. 3.2 PIPING AND CONDUIT PENETRATION REQUIREMENTS A. All piping 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be installed with 1" clearance from all obstructions. A 2" clearance is required for pipe sizes larger than 3 inches. B. Insulated and un-insulated pipes and conduit passing through walls and partitions(except smoke and fire walls and partitions)shall be run through not less than No. 12 gauge steel pipe sleeves finishing flush with the finished wall surfaces. Piping and conduit shall be centered in the sleeves to assure free movement. Caulk between piping or conduit and sleeves. 3.3 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS OR JOINTS A. Flexible couplings shall be installed to preclude damage during a seismic event. Bracing shall be installed in accordance with the seismic restraint manufacturer's instructions and shop drawing submittals. 3.4 ANCHOR BOLTS A. All floor or pad mounted equipment required by any Section of these specifications shall use cast-in-place or female wedge type anchor bolts. Anchor bolts must conform to ASTM A 307. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from ICBA Evaluation Service. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight length equal to at least twelve times nominal diameter of the bolt.Anchor bolts shall conform to the applicable codes and standards for the various equipment weights or the manufacturer's installation recommendations,whichever is the more stringent. 3.5 COORDINATION WITH STRUCTUAL ENGINEER 13080-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard,OR—5935-500 06/162015 A. Overstressing of the building structure shall not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor shall submit loads to the structural engineer of record for coordination purpose. Generally bracing may occur from: 1. Flanges of structural beams. 2. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction. 3. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Seismic protection systems shall be installed in strict accordance with all applicable local, state, and/or federal codes. Installation shall also be in strict accordance with component manufacturer's requirements and standards and with industry construction standards. Whenever conflicts occur between codes or standards and the manufacturer's requirements,the more stringent shall apply. B. Anchor interior mounts and hangers. C. Anchor exterior mounts and hangers. D. Install cables to prevent excessive seismic motion and arrange them in a manner such that they do not engage during normal operation. 3.7 SPECIAL INSPECTION A. Special Inspector: Employ a factory trained representative during construction to observe the work specified and to ensure that it conforms to the Contract Documents. Factory trained representative shall be a qualified person employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer,who shall demonstrate competence and specialized experience, to the satisfaction of the engineer of record employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer,for inspection of the seismic protection of mechanical and electrical equipment. B. Inspection Reports: Ensure that the inspection report is furnished from the special inspector to the engineer of record employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. At the end of the work,ensure that a final, signed report is submitted by the special inspector,stating whether the work requiring special inspection was,to the best of the special inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the Contract documents. The inspection Report shall be submitted as described above in"Submittals"paragraph. C. Discrepancies: Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction, and then, if uncorrected, to the Architect, Owner, and engineer of record employed by the Seismic Restraint Manufacturer. END OF SECTION 13080-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard,OR—5935-500 06/162015 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic sprinkler systems. 2. Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping,branch line piping, test valves,test connections,and sprinklers. 3. Flow indicators,valves,gauges,alarms,drain piping,and supervisory switches. 4. System design,installation and observation. 5. Fire extinguishers for installation and certification by the Contractor. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 02510-Water Distribution Systems. 2. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings. 3. Appendix A-Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 4. Appendix B -Testing and Inspection by Owner: Procedures for observation by Owner's Fire Protection Engineer. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only., B. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 47-Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A 53-Pipe,Steel,Black And Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded And Seamless. 3. ASTM A 135-Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. 4. ASTM A 234 - Piping Fittings Of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel For Moderate And High Temperature Service. 5. ASTM A 536-Ductile Iron Castings. 6. ASTM A 795 - Black And Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use. 7. ASTM A 865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For Use In Steel Pipe joints. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME B 16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings. 2. ASME B 16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME B 16.4-Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. ASME B 16.5-Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 5. ASME B 16.9-Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 6. ASME B 16.11 -Forged Fittings,Socket-Welding And Threaded. D. Building Code: 1. As shown on the Drawings. E. Factory Mutual System(FM): 1. Approval Guide,Latest edition. F. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 13900-1 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 1. NFPA 13,2007 Edition-Installation of Sprinkler Systems. G. Underwriters Laboratory(UL): 1. UL Fire Protection Directory—Latest Edition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Code Compliance Submittals: Submit to Authorities Having Jurisdiction(AHJ): 1. Provide Deferred Submittals to AHJ per requirements of 01330. Drawings and calculations have not been submitted to the AHJ for code compliance by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. a. Submit the following: 1) Product data. 2) Shop drawings. 3) Additional data as may be required by NFPA 13 and Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. 2. Drawings and calculations have been submitted to the AHJ for code compliance and to obtain permit at the time of the permit application. 3. Drawings and calculations have been submitted to the AHJ for code compliance by Owner 's Fire Protection Consultant. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data including components of system, servicing requirements, inspection data,and owner's manuals. C. Submittal Procedure: 1. Reference Section 01330 for general submittal procedures. Conform to provisions of Section 01330 unless otherwise specified herein. 2. Within 30 days after award of prime contract, send submittals to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant as specified in Section 01330. Allow 30 day turn-around on submittals sent to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. a. If the Contractor fails to submit a complete Fire Suppression submittal package within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner$250.00 per day as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, until the fully completed Fire Suppression submittal package is received by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. b. Send a copy of the Letter of Transmittal sent with the submittals to the Architect indicating date of and content of transmittal. 3. Fire Protection Consultant will review electronic file submittal as an alternate to requirements of Section 01330. Obtain the electronic submittal procedure from Owner's Fire Protection Consultant during the Pre- Construction Conference Call. 4. Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 5. Contractor shall respond to shop drawing review comments within 15 days of receipt. 6. Maintain two copies of approved documents on site. D. Submittal Rejection: 1. Owner's Fire Protection Consultant will reject submittals which do not comply with Contract Documents. If submittal is rejected by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant for any reason, Owner shall back-charge the Contractor $200.00 via Change Order, to cover the processing costs of each subsequent review until submittal is approved.Submittal rejections include,but are not limited to,the following reasons: a. Design Issues: Incorrect densities, design areas,equipment sprinkler spacing, hose station missing, incomplete system design, etc. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes,number of branch lines,number of mains,or deviation of water supply from that shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. b. Incorrect Water Test: Failure to use Owner's water test found on project fire protection Contract Documents. No other water test data is permitted for system design submittals to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. c. Incorrect Material: Do not propose pipe,sprinklers or backflow preventers not indicated in Contract 13900-2 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 Documents.Products not specified in contract documents are cause for rejection. d. Incorrect Valves: Do not propose OS&Y valves when wall PIV's are indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Rejected submittals shall be revised and resubmitted until approved. Extension of time will not be allowed for rejected submittals. a. The Fire Suppression subcontractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 15 days of receipt of rejected submittals. b. The Contractor shall verify that the Fire Suppression subcontractor has addressed all required revisions in the resubmittal. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770. 1. Contractor's Material Test Certificates: Provide Copies of completed Underground, Aboveground, and Fire Pump (if applicable) Contractor's Material Test Certificates. Contractor's Material And Test Certificate For Underground Piping is attached at the end of this Section. 2. As-Built Shop Drawings: Indicate installed location of components including piping, sprinklers, hangers, valving, inspector's test stations,auxiliary drains, and hose stations(if required). Also include corrections noted during the site observation process and reflect revisions,addenda,and construction change directives implemented on the project. B. At Project completion, present to the Store Manager the As built Drawings enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end)for storage in the Riser Room. C. In addition to the copies of Documents delivered to the Store Manager, distribute additional copies of documents as indicated below: 1. Contractor shall deliver copies of the As-Built shop drawings and Contractor's Material Test Certificates (Underground,Overhead,and Fire Pump)in both hard copy and electronic form(PDF or PLT)to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall provide coverage for all building areas including,but not limited to,areas scheduled in this Section. Contract Documents have been prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 (working plans) except for fabrication information. The Contract Documents are prepared to a level consistent with that level required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction to gain plan check approval.No changes in design area,number of sprinklers operating,pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains, or deviation of water supply from that shown on the drawings shall be approved by Fire Protection Consultant. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents for completeness and to ensure that the Contract Documents meet all Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements. Discrepancies with NFPA or Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Fire Protection Consultant prior to bid.The Contractor shall complete the fire protection Contract Documents to provide all fmal required detail such as fabrication details, final pipe cuts, hanger cuts, and other miscellaneous details not required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Contractor is responsible to coordinate design with all trades and disciplines. 1. Fire Protection Consultant has submitted Contract Documents to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for review and approval, Contractor shall provide all other documents, qualifications, submittals and coordination necessary to obtain approval by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. All changes made to the Contract Documents by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Fire Protection Consultant for approval prior to fabrication or installation.Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements. B. Provide system complying with NFPA 13, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Contract Documents. Densities and areas of application shown or specified have been developed based on NFPA requirements, engineering judgment and insurance carrier requirements. C. Provide 5 psi safety factor between supply curve and demand point,including hose stream allowance. 13900-3 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 D. Base areas of application on actual floor area protected by sprinklers. E. Include hose allowance as required in schedule in the hydraulic calculations as required by NFPA 13. F. Provide hangers, supports and earthquake bracing per applicable building codes,Contract Documents,and NFPA 13 and Authority Having Jurisdiction. G. Interface sprinkler system with fire protection supervisory system. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years experience and a minimum of a NICET Certified Engineering Technician(Level III) Fire Sprinkler Designer on staff responsible for project. B. Installer shall have a sprinkler contractor license issued by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide certificate of compliance from Authorities Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. D. Pre Construction Conference Call: Owner's Fire Protection Consultant as specified in Section 01330 will conduct a Pre Construction Conference Call. The purpose of the Pre Construction Conference call is to review status of project, notify contractor of status of approvals, and review project expectations. The Contractor shall contact Owner's Fire Protection Consultant within 2 weeks after Prime Contract award to schedule the Pre Construction Conference Call with the Contractor, Fire Sprinkler Contractor, and Fire Pump Vendor (if applicable). The conference call will be held not more than 30 days after Prime Contract award 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinklers under the provisions of NFPA 13.Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. B. Provide sprinkler and sprinkler wrench cabinet(s)per NFPA 13,adjacent to sprinkler risers. C. Provide hydraulic calculation placard attached to each riser. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps.Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Supplier will furnish fire extinguishers and mounting hardware as specified in Appendix A (Section 13900)for installation by Contractor within the store. 1. Fire extinguishers and mounting hardware at the fuel station(if applicable) shall be Contractor furnished and installed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide UL Listed(for Fire Protection)or FM Approved(for Fire Protection)materials complying with NFPA 13, unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 13900-4 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 A. Stores: Fire extinguishers and mounting hardware shall be as furnished by the Owner. B. Fuel Station(if applicable):Fire extinguishers and mounting hardware shall be as shown on the drawings. 2.4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING-ABOVE GROUND A. Pipe: Steel pipe, conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 13, and ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795,as applicable. 1. Wet Pipe Systems,Utilizing Threaded Pipe: a. Schedule 40 black steel pipe. b. Threadable lightwall sprinkler pipe with corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater after threading. c. Use galvanized pipe, zinc coated internally and externally, outdoors, inside coolers and freezers, or in non-conditioned spaces. 2. Wet Pipe Systems,Utilizing Roll Grooved Pipe. a. Schedule 10 black steel pipe. b. Lightwall sprinkler pipe with corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater. c. Use galvanized pipe, zinc coated internally and externally, outdoors, inside coolers and freezers, or in non-conditioned spaces. 3. Dry Pipe Systems: Same as wet pipe systems except pipe shall be galvanized, zinc coated internally and externally. B. Fittings: Provide one of the following: 1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4. 3. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3. 4. Steel,Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. 5. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234,ASME B16.9,or ASME B16.11. 6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 7. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. Roll groove only,cut groove unacceptable. 8. Steel Fittings and Cast Iron fittings shall not be used for dry pipe systems. 9. Fitting type shall match pipe. 10. Crimp-type couplings shall not be used. 11. Plain end fittings(socket,FIT,roustabouts,etc)shall not be used. C. Flexible Piping Systems: At Contractor's option, UL listed or FM approved flexible piping connections to sprinklers may be used for both acoustical panel and gypsum board ceilings when suitable for their intended use. 1. Description: Connections shall include a fully welded(non-mechanical fittings), leak-tested sprinkler drop with a minimum internal corrugated hose diameter of 1 inch. 2. Flexible piping lengths shall not exceed 6 feet. 3. Installation shall not exceed the minimum bend radius and maximum allowable bends as specified by the manufacturer. 4. Change in direction shall be gradual enough to allow flexible piping to bend without crimping,distorting or reducing internal diameter. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. Replace any existing sprinkler that has signs of leakage,paint applied(other than by the sprinkler manufacturer), corrosion,damage,or loading;or is installed in the improper orientation. Provide new sprinkler with identical K- Factor,temperature rating,and response type as the existing. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UL Listed or FM Approved automatic sprinklers. Provide sprinklers with nominal 5.6, 8.0, 11.2, or 16.8 K-factor. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable, unless noted otherwise.Provide the following sprinkler types: 1. Areas With Exposed Structure Above:Upright or pendent sprinkler,bronze. 2. Areas With Ceilings and Surface Mounted Light Obstructions: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece 13900-5 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 white escutcheon plate. 3. Areas With Gypsum or Lay-in Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, white, with two-piece semi-recessed white escutcheon plate. C. Standard Sprinklers: Glass bulb sprinklers are acceptable. Sprinklers with o-rings not permitted. D. Dry Pendent Sprinklers shall be Concealed type Globe Model GL568,1,Tyco Model TY3555,or Victaulic V3301. 1. Substitutions: Not permitted. E. Dry Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers shall be Tyco Model TY3355,TY5339 or Reliable R5734. 1. Tyco Model TY5339 for extended coverage ordinary hazard(ECOH)installations. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. F. Manufacturer: Reference Appendix A(Section 13900). G. Contractor's responsibility of Work under this Section includes,but is not limited to,the following: 1. Contact skid mounted fire pump vendor to coordinate and schedule delivery to site. 2. Coordinate and install underground fire sprinkler service entry prior to completion of skid mounted fire pump pad. 3. Coordinate and install underground electrical service prior to completion of skid mounted fire pump pad. 4. Coordinate and install concrete pad for skid mounted fire pump. 5. Receipt and placement of skid mounted fire pump within the building structure. 6. Place skid mounted fire pump in full operation. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Control Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Equip post indicator valves with tamper switches, Model No. PCVS-2, by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri,or Model No. PIBV2, by System Sensor of St. Charles, Illinois. Owner will connect to alarm system. ' 2. Equip outside screw and yoke valves with tamper switches, Model No.OSYSU-2 by Potter Electric Signal of St.Louis,Missouri.Owner will connect to alarm system. 3. Provide ball type control valves leading to alarm initiating devices, Model No. RBVS, by Potter Electric Signal of St.Louis,Missouri.Owner will connect to alarm system. 4. All other valves capable of controlling water to the Fire Protection Sprinkler systems shall have appropriate tamper switches.Owner will connect to alarm system. B. Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise noted. 2.7 FIRE PUMP A. Fire Pump not permitted. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install system and equipment in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION-ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Provide piping in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Locate top beam clamp or thru bolt connection near panel points of top chord of joist per pipe support detail. C. Provide piping to conserve building space.Do not interfere with use of building space and other work. 13900-6 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Protect sprinkler to ensure sprinklers do not receive field paint. Remove protective covering after painting. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited. F. Examine other work indicated on the Drawings and conditions at job site. Coordinate routing of work with other construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. Do not cut building structural members, beams, joists,etc.for routing of sprinkler piping. G. Seal pipe penetrations through fire rated walls or floors to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. H. Provide wall plates at all penetrations. I. Provide zinc coated(galvanized)all-thread rod for hanging dry system piping. J. Provide valves with stems upright or horizontal. K. Route piping and locate sprinklers as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, heating and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts, and similar work. Locate center of sprinkler a minimum of 6 inches off ceiling grid. 1. Final location of lighting and exposed ductwork shall have priority over pipe routing and final sprinkler locations. 2. Sprinkler piping in sales area without a ceiling and stockroom shall be located above bottom of joists. Minimum height of sprinkler piping in areas with ceilings shall be 1'-0"above ceiling. L. Provide one inspector's test valve for each system at end-of-the-line, piped to non-public areas at location indicated on Contract Documents. M. Provide pressure relief valves on gridded wet pipe systems. N. Provide protection from freezing for sprinkler piping exposed to freezing conditions per Contract Documents and NFPA 13. O. Provide valves, backflow prevention devices, check valves, and drains per Contract Documents and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. P. Use full lengths of pipe except where needed to accommodate changes in direction or for space limitations. 3.3 INSTALLATION—FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Install fire extinguishers at sales floor every other row,every other column and install at other locations as shown on the drawings including fuel station if applicable. Coordinate with Walmart Store Planning Department with respect to location of installation. Install using brackets and installation hardware furnished with extinguisher. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their functions. Provide lettering sizes and styles per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Provide hydraulic placard for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13. Stencil riser/zone numbers on risers. B. Provide a sprinkler zone map that clearly identifies the location of all: areas protected, control valves, dry pipe valve, inspector's test valves, auxiliary drains, pumps, and tanks. Sprinkler Zone Map shall be laminated in plastic.Permanently attach to wall in fire sprinkler riser room. 13900-7 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. In addition to required tests to be conducted by the Contractor specified herein below, field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. B. Contractor shall schedule, coordinate and conduct tests required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Contractor shall modify, replace or retest as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction or Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. C. Flush,test, and inspect sprinkler system according to NFPA 13 "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.Test the systems, including the underground water mains,and the aboveground piping and components to assure that equipment and components function as intended. Pressure test the systems in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. The Contractor shall have available copies of as-built drawings. 1. Above Ground Fire Protection Piping: a. Test per NFPA 13. b. Inspect welds and verify welder's qualifications per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. c. Perform Hydrostatic tests per NFPA 13. 2. Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test. 3. Operation of control valves and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of alarm devices including alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, assure that control valves are in the open position. 4. Main Drain flow test. D. The following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor and witnessed by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Generally this is the order the tests shall be conducted, but the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant may require tests be conducted in any order deemed appropriate. Determination of order will be made while on site. 1. Water Flow Test: Contractor or Sprinkler Contractor shall conduct a water flow test in accordance with NFPA 291 near the lead in to the fire sprinkler system to verify anticipated water supply is available. If a fire pump is present,and tested,this test will not be required. 2. Inspector's Test: Sprinkler Contractor shall operate each Inspector's Test to verify flow switch operates within 90 seconds(preferred time is 45 seconds,minimum time is 30 seconds). This test typically follows the Dry pipe system Acceptance Test. 3. System Control Valves: Sprinkler Contractor shall operate each system control valve to verify functionality.This test typically follows the Inspector's Acceptance Test. 4. Hydrostatic Test: Sprinkler Contractor shall hydrostatically test all systems simultaneously. Typically this will be the last test initiated, and depending on schedule may not be fully witnessed by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor shall certify and provide signed off copies of test certificates proving successful completion of Hydrostatic tests prior to full acceptance. E. Fire Protection Acceptance Test(FPAT): 1. The Contractor shall initiate and conduct a Fire Protection Acceptance Test. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, material, equipment, lifts, air and water pumps, hand tools, and apparatus necessary to complete the required FPAT testing. 2. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant, Sprinkler Contractor,and Owner's Alarm Contractor representatives at the scheduled time. At scheduled time, Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor shall be ready to initiate the FPAT. The Contractor shall notify the store management that the above tests are scheduled. Prior to initiating tests, review the following information and provide copies to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant: a. Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping. Provide the completed Contractor's Material And Test Certificate For Underground Piping provided at the end of this Section.All portions of the certificate shall be completed prior to Acceptance testing. b. Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping(By System).As a minimum,the form shall contain information indicated in sample form shown in NFPA 13 (i.e. Figure 16.1 of 2002 edition). Certificate shall be complete and verify all information except Dry pipe test section 13900-8 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 and hydrostatic test section. Dry pipe section may be completed during Acceptance Test. Hydrostatic test may be completed in the future and a copy forwarded to Owner's Fire Protection Consultant at a later date. c. Sprinkler Zone Map. d. Approved Shop Drawings. e. Fire Pump Factory Test Curve(if applicable). 3. After these documents have been reviewed,the FPAT shall be initiated by Contractor/Sprinkler Contractor in the order determined by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Each of these tests shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system.Contractor shall arrange for system to be put in test and arrange to be able to silence local alarms during the FPAT. The Owner's Alarm Contractor Technician shall be on site and available to assist during the FPAT.Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's Alarm Contractor. F. Replace sprinkler system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. The installation shall not be considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly completed and received. G. If any portion of the system acceptance process, including but not limited to site observation, acceptance testing and fire pump testing, is required to be repeated or rescheduled due to non-compliance with Contract Documents or code,unpreparedness of site or equipment for testing on scheduled date,and/or unsatisfactory results obtained, and a revisit is required,rescheduling may take up to four weeks and may result in Contractor being back charged for Owner's Fire Protection Consultant's additional time and expenses as well as Owner Supplied Equipment Representative's time and expenses required to be present for testing(i.e.,fire pump). 3.6 OWNER SITE OBSERVATION A. The Owner will perform site observation as a means to satisfy the Owner of contract compliance and as assurance to the Owner of Contractor quality control performance. Owner observation shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. B. Site Observation: Owner's Fire Protection Consultant will conduct a site observation. The purpose of the Fire Sprinkler System Site Observation is to determine if the fire sprinkler systems are in general conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. A Fire Sprinkler Acceptance Test(FPAT)performed by the Contractor shall be supervised and witnessed by the Fire Protection Consultant. The Contractor shall contact the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant to coordinate the time and date of the observation and FPAT. Scheduling for the FPAT shall begin one month prior to possession with FPAT being conducted one to two weeks prior to possession. FPAT shall occur prior to possession. A representative sample checklist is available upon request. At the conclusion of the observation, an exit interview will be conducted with the Contractor to review and identify issues that need correction prior to acceptance of the system and deficiencies will be uploaded to Owner's electronic log for tracking. 3.7 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CERTIFICATION A. Certify and tag new extinguishers using individuals who are trained and certified to perform maintenance on portable fire extinguishers per NFPA 10, Chapter 7, Paragraph 7.1.2.3. Certification and tagging may be performed concurrently with, and by the same qualified and authorized personnel as, inspection of the fire suppression system. 3.8 TRAINING A. Provide operational training to Owner. Include system control operation, Fire Pump (if provided) manual and abort functions,trouble procedures,auxiliary functions and emergency procedures. END OF SECTION 13900-9 Tigard,OR-5935 06/16/15 UniSpec II 102513a SECTION 15050-BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and Supports:Pipe supports. 2. Mechanical equipment labels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15100-Building Service Piping and Equipment: Domestic water, reverse osmosis, sanitary drain and vent,interior storm water,and condensate piping.Piping Insulation.Pipe freeze protection. 2. Section 15190-Fuel Gas Piping:Natural and LP gas piping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute(CISPI): 1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook. D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.(MSS): 1. MSS SP-69-Pipe Hangers and Supports—Selection and Application. 2. MSS SP-89-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation Practices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal department affected by connection of services. B. Laws,codes, and ordinances shall take precedence except where work called for by Drawings and Specifications exceeds code requirements in quality or quantity. C. Comply with guidelines set forth in the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,Chapter IV,for installa- tion of hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Specifications show pipe and duct sizes,general routing and location,and describe various systems. These documents describe equipment,including size,general location,usage,support,and auxiliary requirements. Contract Documents do not,however,detail certain job requirements.Drawings are intended to cover layout and design of the Work and are not to be scaled for exact measurements. Where specific detail and dimension for me- chanical Work are not shown on Drawings,take measurements and make layouts as required for proper installa- tion of mechanical Work in coordination with other Work on project. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's published directions in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping, and wiring, and start-up of equipment and materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 15050-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe Hanger Schedule: Pipe hangers,except for fire suppression piping,shall be as specified in Schedule I at the end of this Section.Trapeze hangers for multiple parallel pipes shall be installed as shown on the drawings. B. Hangers and supports for fire suppression piping shall be as shown on the drawings. C. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches:Steel riser clamp. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp, adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches•and over. E. Vertical Support:Steel riser clamp. F. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping. Provide plastic inserts for uninsulated copper piping penetrating metals studs. 2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Provide label for each type of mechanical equipment installed on the project B. Provide equipment labels as specified below unless otherwise required in the individual sections for the specific piece of equipment specified. C. Labels: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving 1/16 thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content,but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 6. Attachment: Either of the following a. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. b. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive,compatible with label and with substrate. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support pipes throughout building,both horizontally and vertically in accordance with requirements herein and as shown on the drawings.Attach to structure overhead as shown on drawings.Do not use fasteners which penetrate the roof deck. 1. Provide seismic restraints and other components as required on Drawings and Section 13080. B. In areas without ceilings,secure insulation shields to insulation with pressure sensitive tape at each end of shield. C. Hangers for PEX or polypropylene (PP) pipe shall be suitable for the type of pipe used and designed to prevent gouging of the pipe. Verify with manufacturer of the hangers and/or clamps that hanger or clamp products are compatible with PEX or PP piping. Fasteners shall be approved by the pipe manufacturer. D. Piping Support Spacing:Support horizontal piping above slab,except fire suppression piping, as shown in Sched- ules I-III at the end of this Section. 1. Support fire suppression piping at spacing as shown on the Fire Protection(FP)drawings. E. Underslab Piping Support Spacing: Support horizontal piping underslab as shown in Schedules I and II at the end 15050-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 of this Section. F. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. G. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. H. Support vertical pipe runs at roof,at floor,and at maximum 10-foot intervals. I. Space supports not more than five feet apart at valves,strainers or piping accessories larger than 2 inches. J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems,to permit free- dom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops,expansion bends,and similar units.Provide expansion devices as required for the specific piping material used. K. Comply with the requirements of Section 09900 for field painting and touch-up. L. Cast Iron Piping Below Slab: 1. Install piping in'accordance with the Above Ground Installation Procedures outlined in Chapter IV of the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook with the exception of hanger spacing. 2. Support cast iron soil pipe below slab on a maximum of 3 foot centers and within 18 inches of each hub. 3. Support piping and fittings to maintain alignment and prevent sagging,grade reversal,or joint separation. 4. Support terminal ends of horizontal runs or branches and at each change of direction. 5. Secure closet bends,traps,trap-arms,and similar branches against movement in any direction. 6. Install hanger rods as indicated on the drawings and in a straight and vertical line, and tightly adjusted to prevent pipe settlement and to carry the full weight of the pipe after soil subsidence occurs. 7. Secure piping and hangers to prevent misalignment when the slab is placed. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Load Distribution: Adjust hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. C. Pipe Slopes: Adjust hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe de- flections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. D. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inch. 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. C. Where equipment,such as VAV boxes,is concealed by accessible drop or lay-in ceilings or other accessible barri- er,attach label to ceiling grid or a visible location to identify location of hidden equipment. 3.4 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor may operate any equipment provided that the operation is supervised and the Contractor retains full re- sponsibility for properly maintaining equipment and the full manufacturer's warranty remains unaffected from the time of Owner's possession. 15050-3 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 3.5 SCHEDULES: Schedules below apply to all piping,except fire suppression piping,hung inside the building. SCHEDULE I-PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE Pipe Service Pipe Size Hanger Type B-Line Globe Grinnell PHD ` (Anvil)No. 2"&smaller Split Ring B-3173 with 721 108 with 114 500 with 114 Uninsulated B-3224 Steel or PVC or CPVC 2-1/2"& Clevis 8-3100 404/407 260 450 larger 2"&smaller Ring B-3170-CT 301 CT 99 152 Uninsulated Copper 2-1/2"& Clevis B-3104-CT 407 CT 65 442 ' larger Cast Iron All Clevis B-3102 404 260 420 Soil Pipe Insulated 2"&small- Clevis B-3100 with 404 with 260 with 450 with Steel,PVC, er, shield shield shield shield PEX,or PP 2 1/2 & larger Insulated 2"&smaller, Clevis B-3100 with 404 with 260 with 450 with ABS(Glycol 2 1/2"& shield shield shield shield Refrigeration larger Piping Only) 2"&smaller Clevis B-3104 with 411 with CT 65 with 442 with Insulated , shield shield shield shield Copper 2 1/2"& Clevis B-3100 with 408 with 260 with 442 with larger shield shield shield shield SCHEDULE I-PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE Service Pipe Size Hanger B-Line Gulf Globe . Grinnell PHD Empire Type State (Anvil) Hangers 2"& Split B-3173 721 108 500 41 BT-H Uninsulated smaller Ring with B- with with, Steel or 3224 114 114 PVC or _ CPVC 2-1/2"& Clevis B-3100 404/407 260 450 11 larger Uninsulated 2"& Ring B-3170- 301 CT 99 152 310CT Copper smaller CT 15050-4 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 2-1/2"& Clevis B-3104- 407 CT 65 442 110CT larger CT Suspen- B386 FIG. 124 sion Rod (Stainless (Stainless Pipe Steel) Steel) Clamp Cast Iron Soil Pipe All Trapeze B2000 G7000 Anvil 2000 8200 Series (below (unistrut (Stainless (Stainless AS series slab) with Steel) Steel) 1100 clamp pipe SS Se- with clamp) ries 1000 series strut Insulated 2"& Clevis B-3100 404 with 260 450 11 with Steel,PVC, smaller, with shield with with shield PEX,or PP 2 1/2"& shield shield shield larger Insulated 2"& Clevis B-3100 404 with 260 450 11 with ABS(Gly- smaller, with shield with with shield col Refrig- 2- 1/2"& shield shield shield eration Pip- larger ing Only) 2"& Clevis B-3104 411 with CT 65 442 110 with smaller with shield with with shield Insulated shield shield shield Copper -- 2 1/2"& Clevis B-3100 408 with 260 442 11 with larger with shield with with shield shield shield shield SCHEDULE II-PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE Maximum Spacing In Feet Copper , Steel Cast Iron PVC PEX Polypropylene ABS(Glycol CPVC (PP) Refrigeration Piping Only 6'max up to 5'max,except may be 32"max 32"max upto 3' max up to 3'max up 1-1/4"I.D. 10'max where 10 1" 1-1/2"I.D. to 1"I.D. 12' lengths are installed. 4'max 10'max all max 4'max all 4' max all 4'max all other Min one hanger at each other other joint. other SCHEDULE II-PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE Maximum Spacing In Feet Copper Steel Cast Iron PVC PEX Polypropylene(PP) CPVC 15050-5 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 UNDER-SLAB:3'max 32"max 32"max 32"max up to 1" and within 18"of each p joint. 3'max up 6'max u to 4'max all other to 1"I.D. 1-1/4"I.D. 12'max ABOVE-SLAB:5'max, 10' max all other except may be 10'max 4'max all where 10'lengths are other installed.Min one hang- er at each joint. SCHEDULE II-PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE Maximum Spacing In Feet ABS(Glycol Pipe I.D. Copper • Steel Cast Iron Refrigeration PEX Polypropylene CPVC Piping Only (PP) 10'max& 3' max up to 1- 32"max 32"max up to 1" 3'max up to 1" min one 1/2"I.D. LD, hanger at each joint 4' max all other 4'max all other 4'max all other. Up to 1-1/2" 6' 8' 10 max& 3' max up to 1- 3' max 32"max up to 1" 3'max up to 1" 2"and larger 10' 10' hanger one 1/2"I.D. I.D, hanger at each joint 4' max all other4'max all other 4'max all other. SCHEDULE HI-PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE (GAS PIPE) Maximum Spacing In Feet Pipe I.D. Steel 1/2" 6' 3/4"and larger 8' END OF SECTION 15050-6 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 15100(22 1000)-BUILDING SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL L1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Sanitary waste and vent piping. 3. Interior storm drainage piping. 4. Water piping and drain piping specialties. 5. Water heater thermometers. 6. Pipe freeze protection. 7. Connection of miscellaneous equipment furnished under other Sections. B. Related Requirements: 1. Appendix A-Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 2. Section 02300-Earthwork:Backfilling and compacting trenches. 3. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry:Preservative pressure treatment for wood blocking pipe supports. 4. Section 07500-Membrane Roofing:Isolation pads for pipe supports on roofing. 5. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:Flashing of roof penetration. 6. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods:Piping hangers and supports. 7. Section 15480-Domestic Water Heaters:Recirculating pumps for domestic water heating system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. C. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): t. ANSI B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ANSI B 16.22-Wrought Copper&Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure. D. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE): 1. ASHRAE 90.1 -Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low-Rise Residential Buildings. E. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A53-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A74-Flub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 3. ASTM A536-Ductile Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A888-Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM B75-Seamless Copper Tube. 6. ASTM 1388-Seamless Copper Water Tube. 7. ASTM B135-Seamless Brass Tube. 8. ASTM B306-Copper Drainage Tube(DWV). 9. ASTM B584-Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 10. ASTM C564-Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 15100-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR-5935-500 06/16/15 11. ASTM C921 -Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 12. ASTM C1277-Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Castiron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 13. ASTM C1540-Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 14. ASTM D1785-Poly vinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40,80,and 120. 15. ASTM D2000-Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 16. ASTM D2467-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80. 17. ASTM D2564-Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 18. ASTM D2609-Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene(PE)Plastic Pipe. 19. ASTM D2665-Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Drain,Waste,and Vent Pipe and Fittings 20. ASTM D2855-Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl':Chloride(PVC)Pipe and Fittings. 21. ASTM D3311 -Drain,Waste,and Vent(DWV)Plastic Fittings Patterns. 22. AASTM E84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 23. ASTM E96-Water Vapor Transmission Materials. 24. ASTM F439-Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80. 25. ASTM F441 -Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40 And 80. 26. ASTM F493-Solvent Cements for CPVC Pipe and Fittings. 27. ASTM F656-Primers For Use in Solvents Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 28. ASTM F876-Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing. 29. ASTM F877-Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems. 30. ASTM F 1807-Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX)tubing. 31. ASTM F1960 - Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing. 32. ASTM F2014-Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications. 33. ASTM F2023 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Plastic Piping to Hot Chlorinated Water. 34. ASTM F2098 - Stainless Steel Clamps for Securing SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing to Metal Insert Fittings. 35. ASTM-F2389-Pressure-rated Polypropylene(PP)Piping Systems. F. American Water Works Association(AWWA): 1. AWWA C104-Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C115-Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 3. AWWA C151 -Ductile-Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast. 4. AWWA C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains. G. Hydraulic Institute(HI): 1. HI M103(ANSI/HI 1.4)-Centrifugal Operations. H. NSF International(NSF): 1. NSF 61 -Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects. 2. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. I. Plumbing and Drainage Institute(PDI): 1. PDI WH 201-Water Hammer Arrestors. J. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL 778-Motor-Operated Water Pumps. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01330. B. Water Samples: Submit to Authorities Having Jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of Cleaning and Disinfection paragraph in Part 3. 15100-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR-5935-500 06/16/15 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following as described in the testing and inspection requirements in Part 3 below as a part of closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01770. B. Video Inspection Report: Furnish one copy of Video Inspection Report to Owner's Construction Manager within one week after completion of inspection. 1. Certification:Provide statement of certification of the following: a. Statement of completion that Work is in accordance with specified requirements. b. Name and signature of General Contractor. 2. Certification:Provide statement of certification of the following: a. Statement of completion that Work is in accordance with specified requirements. b. Name and signature of General Contractor. c. Names and signatures of Video Inspection Contractor. 3. Polypropylene Pipe Warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Domestic Water Supply Copper Piping Assembly Installer Qualifications: If Contractor provides any of the optional domestic water supply copper piping assembly systems specified in Part 2, Installer shall be a certified installer of system provided. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Lead-Free Compliance: Domestic water piping and fittings,pumps,water piping specialties and specialty plumbing fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. C. Product Delivery: 1. Owner's Supplier will deliver Owner furnished products to site to be received by Contractor. Contact Owner's Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. 2. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage,store in clean,dry,enclosed,and secure storage area. 3. Receive Owner Furnished products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01640. D. Acceptance at Site: 1. Inspect Owner furnished products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of products furnished and report to Owner discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to the site. 2. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements,those damaged in transit,or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. E. Polypropylene piping shall remain in its UV resistant packaging until ready to be installed. If the piping is to be exposed to the sun for more than 30 days,take appropriate measures to protect the pipe from UV radiation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty for polypropylene(Aquatherm)pipe and fittings for 10 years to be free of defects in materials or manufacturing. B. Warranty shall cover labor and material costs of repairing or replacing defective materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due to defects in materials or manufacturing. 15100-3 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 C. Contractor shall submit to the manufacturer,the pressure/leak test documentation indicating that the system was tested and passed the manufacturer's pressure/leak test in order to receive the warranty from the manufacturer. Submit pressure test to Aquatherm at http://www.aquatherm.com/pressure-test-submission. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Suppliers will furnish the following products as specified in Appendix A(Section 15100)and shown on the drawings for installation by either Contractor or Owner. 1. Water piping specialties. 2. Drainage piping specialties. 3. Domestic water booster pumps. 4. Garden center watering mats. 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Water Piping Above Grade: 1. Type"L"hard drawn,seamless copper water tube,ASTM B88. 2. Jointing: Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B 16.22. Make joints using "lead free" solder and a non-corrosive,paste-type flux.Core solder is not permitted. Solder shall be solid string or wire type. Where soldered copper piping is connected to threaded brass piping,use cast brass adaptor. 3. At Contractor's option,in lieu of a soldered copper piping system as specified above, any of the following copper pipe assembly systems may be used. a. CTS Copper Grooved Piping System by Victaulic Company of America: Copper tubing systems from 2 inch through 8 inch shall be installed using mechanical pipe couplings of a bolted type,with pressure-responsive gaskets and grooved end copper or bronze fittings. The CTS System shall include the following components: 1) Copper Tube:Type"L"hard drawn,seamless copper water tube,ASTM B88. 2) Mechanical Couplings: Style 606 rigid couplings 2 inch—8 inch for copper consisting of a ductile iron cast housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a pressure-responsive design, with plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. 3) Coupling Housings:Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536,Grade 65-45-12,with a copper color alkyd enamel paint coating. 4) Gaskets: Molded of Grade "E" EPDM synthetic rubber, conforming to ASTM D2000, designation 2CA6I5A25B24F17Z, and recommended for potable water service within the specified temperature range of—30 to +230 degrees F. Gaskets shall conform to the copper tube size(CTS)outside diameter and coupling housing inside diameter. 5) Flange Adapters: Style 641 adapters 2 inch-6 inch,ductile iron ASTM A536,Grade 65-45- 12,engaging directly into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly to ANSI Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flanged components; installer shall provide standard flange bolts. 6) Fittings: Full flow copper fittings with grooves designed to accept Victaulic grooved end couplings.Fittings shall be copper per ASTM B75 alloy C12200;or bronze sand castings per ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 844 (81-3-7-9) per ANSI B16.18. Use Style 47 dielectric waterways when connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems. 7) Valves: Series 608 Butterfly valves,2-1/2 inch—6 inch, 300 psi, with grooved ends, cast bronze body to CDA-836 (85-5-5-5), rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.Bubble tight,dead-end or bi-directional service as required. b. Press-connect copper pipe fitting system by one of the following: 1) ProPress by Viega. 2) Xpress by Elkhart Products Corporation. 3) Pressystem by NIBCO. 4. Mechanically formed tee fitting system by T-Drill Industries in accordance with ASTM F 2014. 5. Crosslinked PE(PEX)Tubing. 15100-4 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 a. PEX Tube: Tube shall be tested and certified for potable water systems, and shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14,ANSI/NSF Standard 61,and ASTM F876 and/or ASTM F877.Tube shall be labeled with the above certifications. a. Provide PEX tubing system by one of the following: 1) NIBCO,Inc. 2) REHAU 3) Uponor(Formerly/Wirsbo) 4) Watts Water Technologies 5) Zurn Engineered Water Solutons b. Tube shall be white in color. c. Fittings: Lead free brass or copper fittings, copper crimp connectors, stainless steel clamp connectors and cold expansion sleeves shall be tested and certified for potable water systems and shall comply with one of the following Standards:ASTM F 1807,ASTM F 1960,ASTM F2098. d. PEX tube,brass or copper fittings and connectors shall be by the same manufacturer and assembled with the manufacturer's approved tools. The same connection method shall be used throughout the installation. 6. Polypropylene(PP-R)Piping: a. Polypropylene(PP-R)piping SDR 7.4(faser)for hot water and SDR 11 (non-faser)for cold water. b. Pipe and fittings shall be Aquatherm®Greenpipe manufactured by Aquatherm, Inc..Lindon, Utah, (801)805-6657,www.aquathermpipe.com. c. Pipe shall be tested and certified for potable water systems, and shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 14,ANSI/NSF Standard 61,ASTM F2023,ASTM F2389 and ASTM D635. Pipe shall be labeled with the above certifications. d. PP pipe,fittings and adapters shall be by one manufacturer. Use only manufacturer approved heat fusion tools. e. Fittings: Connections and transition to other pipe material or types shall be made by manufacturer approved products and tools f. Valves with PP-R bodies shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389. The valves shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. Valves shall be Aquatherm® Fusiotherm® by Aquatherm. B. Water Piping Below Grade(Under Slab): 1. 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: a. Crosslinked PE(PEX)tubing,ASTM F876 without joints beneath the slab. b. Type"K"soft copper without joints beneath slab. 2. 2 Inches and Larger:Type KM hard drawn with brazed fittings. C. Chrome-Plated Seamless Brass Tube:ASTM B135. D. Insulation if White Ceiling Finish Coat is Scheduled on the Drawings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: a. CertainTeed. b. Imcoa(Nomaco K-Flex). c. Knauf. d. Owens-Corning. e. Johns Manville. f. Armacell. 2. Provide one of the following types of insulation throughout the project: a. Rigid Glass Fiber: Type ASJ/SSL, maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.23 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 3 lb/cu.ft density. Vapor barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film conforming to ASTM C921, with a maximum moisture vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perm-inch in accordance with ASTM E96. Insulate fittings with PVC covers with glass fiber inserts. 15100-5 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 b. Polymer Foam Insulation: Arctictherm by Imcoa or equal. Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.25 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 1.5 lbs/cu. ft.density,maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50,respectively per ASTM E84.Insulate fittings with pre-formed foam covers. c. Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation: AP Armaflex W (white) by Armacell or equal. Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.28 Btu-in/hr.fsq ft, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50,respectively.Insulate fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Insulation Color:White. E. Insulation if Non-White Ceiling Finish Coat is Scheduled on the Drawings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: a. Armacell. b. Imcoa(Nomaco K-Flex). c. Halstead. d. Rubatex. 2. Provide one of the following types of insulation throughout the project: a. Polymer Foam Insulation: Imcolock by Imcoa or equal. Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.25 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, 1.5 lbs/cu. ft. density, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50,respectively.Insulate fittings with pre-formed foam covers. b. Elastomeric Flexible Closed Cell Insulation:AP/Armaflex Tube by Armacell or equal.Maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.28 Btu-in/hr.f.sq ft, maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50,respectively per ASTM E84.Insulate fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Insulation color:black. F. Insulation Thickness: Provide minimum insulation thickness for water piping in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 and the following: 1. Hot Water: a. Branch runouts for non-recirculating systems up to 1-1/2" in diameter and less than 12 feet in length: 1/2 inch insulation. b. Pipes 2 inch in diameter and less: 1 inch insulation. c. Pipes 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1-1/2 inch insulation. 2. Cold Water: 1/2 inch insulation. 2.3 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping:Provide any of the following as applicable: 1. PVC Pipe: May be used for sanitary drainage pipes(drain, waste,and vent) where permitted by Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular (foam) core PVC not permitted. b. PVC Socket Fittings, ASTM D2665,made to ASTM D3311,drain,waste,and vent patterns. 2. Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings,coated inside and outside, ASTM A74 or ASTM A888.Provide weight of pipe as required by code for location and duty. 3. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA CI51 or AWWA C115 ductile-iron pipe, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. 4. Copper Drainage Tubing(Above grade only):Copper drainage tubing conforming to ASTM B306. 5. ABS Pipe:Not Permitted. B. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping: 1. Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings,coated inside and outside, ASTM A74 or ASTM A888.Provide weight of pipe as required by code for location and duty. a. Cast Iron Pipe connection to PVC Pipe:Compression Joint Sealer for dissimilar pipe materials. 2. PVC Pipe (Above grade only): May be used for sanitary drainage pipes (drain, waste, and vent) where permitted by Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular (foam) core PVC not permitted. b. PVC Socket Fittings, ASTM D 2665,made to ASTM D3311,drain,waste,and vent patterns. 15100-6 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 3. Copper Drainage Tubing(Above grade only):ASTM B306. 4. ABS Pipe:Not Permitted. C. Joints: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: Push-on compression gasketed type joint for hub and spigot, ASTM C564. No-hub mechanical joints with center stops,ASTM C1277 or ASTM C1540. 2. PVC Pipe: Solvent-welded joints. 3. Copper Drainage Tubing: Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. Make joints using "lead free" solder and a non-corrosive paste type flux.Core solder shall not be used. Solder shall be solid string or wire type. D. Traps: 1. Provide deep seal P-traps for floor drains, including drains furnished as integral parts of floor-type mop basins,and similar fixtures. 2.4 INTERIOR STORM DRAINAGE PIPING A. Pipe:As specified for sanitary waste and vent piping. B. Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, maximum k factor at 75 degrees F of 0.27 Btu-in/hr.f.ft,3Ib/cu.ft density,minimum of 1 inch thick. Vapor barrier jacket shall be white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film conforming to ASTM C921,with a maximum moisture vapor transmission rate of 0.02 perm-inch in accordance with ASTM E96. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: a. CertainTeed. b. Knauf. c. Owens-Corning. d. Johns Manville. 2.5 WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES(OWNER FURNISHED,CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Piping specialties include products of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as specified in Appendix A (Section 15100) and as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Water piping specialties shall include such items as hose bibs,hydrants,valves,vacuum breakers,mixing valves,pressure reducing(regulating) valves,expansion tanks and accessories therefor. 2.6 SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURE A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements,provide plumbing fixture specialties of manufacturers,types,and model numbers as indicated on the SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the Drawings. Plumbing fixture specialties shall include such items as backflow preventers,water hammer arresters,trap primers, and ball valves. 2.7 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES(OWNER FURNISHED,CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Piping specialties include products of manufacturers, types, and model numbers as specified in Appendix A (Section 15100)and as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Drainage piping specialties shall include floor and roof drains,deck drains,cleanouts and accessories therefor. 2.8 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION A. Pipe freeze protection system shall include the following: 1. Parallel circuit heating cable. 2. Transformers. 3. Outdoor ambient thermostat. 4. Junction boxes. 15100-7 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 5. Branch circuit wiring and conduit as specified in Section 16100. 6. Other items as necessary to complete system. B. Components: 1. Heating Cable: Parallel circuit,jacketed cable,self-limiting, 120 volt. Provide XL-Trace as manufactured by Raychem/Tyco or CO Series by Delta-Therm. a. Provide minimum 5 watts per lineal foot (or more) as required for specified piping and insulation per manufacturer's published instructions. b. Provide termination fittings for direct connection to junction boxes. 2. Junction Boxes:NEMA 5 watertight.. 3. Outdoor Ambient Thermostat: Provide thermostat with adjustable contacts. Set contacts to close at 40 degrees F on decreasing temperature. 2.9 SUBSTITUTIONS Reference Section 01600. 2.10 THERMOMETERS,GENERAL A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. B. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg with 2-degree scale divisions(0 to 115 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions(minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1- degree scale divisions). 3. Hot Water: 30 to 300 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 150 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 4. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions(minus 18 to 70 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 2.11 GLASS TUBE INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS A. Case: Die cast,aluminum finished,in baked epoxy enamel,glass front,spring secured,9 inches long. B. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane,with locking device. C. Tube:Non-red color reading,non-toxic organic spirit-filled glass tube,magnifying lens. D. Scale: Satin-faced,non-reflective aluminum,with permanently etched markings. E. Stem: Copper-plated steel,aluminum or brass,for separable socket,length to suit installation. 2.12 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel,pressure rated to match piping system design pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap. B. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated,in vertical position. Fill well with oil or graphite and secure cap. 2.13 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass Tube Industrial Thermometers: 15100-8 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 a. H.O.Trerice Co.,http://www.trerice.com/temperature.asp b. Marsh Bellofram Group,http://www,marshbellofram.com/marsh/products/industrial-thermometer/ c. Miljoco Corporation http://www.miljoco.com/thermometers/industrial-thermometers/ d. Weiss Instruments,Inc.http://www.weissinstruments.com/industrial-glass-thermometers.html e. Weksler Instruments Corp.http://www.weksler.com/ f. Winters Instruments http://www.winters.com/ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping and accessories at locations and of sizes shown on the drawings. B. Install proprietary piping systems, accessories, and products in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Connect piping and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using specialty tools as required and recommended by the manufacturer. D. Install piping neatly and parallel with,or perpendicular to,lines of the structure.Install pipe hangers as specified in Section 15050 to maintain accurately aligned piping systems,adequately supported both laterally and vertically. E. Backfill and compact trenches for piping below the slab per Section 02300. F. Provide Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve,minimum of one size larger than the protected pipe,for underground piping routed beneath structural footings.Extend sleeve 24 inches in both directions beyond the footing. G. Where practical,connect two or more vents together and extend as one vent through roof.Make vent connections to stacks by appropriate use of 45 degree wyes,long sweep quarter bends,sixth,eighth,or sixteenth bends,except that sanitary tees may be used on the vertical stacks. H. Extend vent piping 12 inches above roof line or more if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Coordinate installation with roofing. I. Conceal piping in chases,interior walls,furred spaces,and above ceiling. J. Identify non-potable water systems by color markings or metal tags in accordance with ASME A13.1. K. Make piping connections to fixtures and equipment with chrome-plated seamless brass tube with cleanout plug and escutcheon. L. For items to be installed on split face CMU, grind surface of CMU to a smooth finish for tight installation. Seal with silicone sealant in accordance with Section 07900. M. PEX Domestic Water Tubing: 1. Install piping similar to copper piping as shown on drawings. Do not use manifold system. 2. Protect tubing from UV radiation during pre-installation storage and after installation. 3. Provide adequate tubing length for contraction and expansion of tubing. 4. Tubing may be bundled.Do not bundle cold water lines with hot water or hot water return lines. 5. Protect tubing routed through metal studs with grommets or sleeves at each stud. 6. Do not install PEX tubing in masonry walls. 7. Install type"L"copper pipe at the inlet and outlet of the water heater,minimum 18 inches long. 8. Utilize water hammer arrestors-as specified for the copper tube system. 9. Tubing sizes shall be as shown on the Equivalent Pipe Size Schedule on the drawings. 10. Coordinate PEX to plumbing fixture fittings with the furnished fixture accessories. a. Use copper stub-outs and stub-out brackets secured to wall for fixtures furnished with compression stops. 15100-9 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 b. Do not use PEX for flush valves. 11. Provide recommended methods for controlling thermal expansion in hot water piping for straight runs every 50 feet. N. Polypropylene(PP-R): 1. Install piping similar to copper piping as shown on drawings. 2. Store piping and fittings in factory-issued protective bag until immediately prior to installation to protect the pipe from dust,scratches and UV radiation damage. 3. Utilize water hammer arrestors as specified for the copper pipe system. 4. Pipe sizes shall bees shown on the Equivalent Pipe Size Schedule on the drawings. 5. Coordinate piping to plumbing fixture fittings with the furnished fixture accessories. a. Use copper stub-outs and stub-out brackets secured to wall for fixtures furnished with compression stops. b. Use manufacturer's threaded fittings for connections to flush valves. 6. Fusion Welding of Joints a. Install fittings and joints using socket-fusion, electrofusion, or butt-fusion as applicable for the fitting type. b. Fusion-weld tooling, welding machines,and electrofusion devices shall be as specified by the pipe and fittings manufacturer. c. Prior to joining, the pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with F 2389 and the manufacturer's specifications. d. Joint preparation,setting and alignment,fusion process,cooling times and working pressure shall be in accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer's specifications 7. Provide recommended methods for controlling thermal expansion in hot water piping for straight runs every 120 feet. 3.2 PIPING INSULATION-INSTALLATION A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines:Insulate lines above slab. B. Interior Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping Above Grade: Adhere insulation with 6 inch wide adhesive strips on 16 inch centers. Provide 16 gage annealed tie wire, spiral wound, or tied at 16 foot centers for securing insulation until adhesive sets. Butt insulation and seal joints with 2 inch wide foil tape adhered over joints. Insulate horizontal piping and vertical elbows.Do not insulate drain bodies. 3.3 WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment where shown and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air- gap fitting,or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. D. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valves and pressure-reducing valves. 15100-10 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 F. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. G. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent,and connect to floor-drain body,trap,or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. H. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates: Manufacturer's standard 3/32 inch thick black plastic laminate nameplates with 5/32 inch holes for fasteners. Provide nameplates and signs no smaller than 1-1/2 inches square. 1. Provide engraved white lettering indicating piping system abbreviation in characters 1/4 inch high and sequenced valve numbers in characters 1/2 inch high. B. Signs: In addition to identifying unit,provide signs which distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,indicate safety and emergency precautions,and warn of hazards and improper operation. C. Install equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure-reducing valves. 5. Primary,thermostatic,water mixing valves. 6. Supply-type,trap-seal primer valves. 3.5 DRAIN PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation,provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover,and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors,install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated,with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain,unless otherwise indicated. E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. F. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets,if indicated. G. Install floor-drain,trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. H. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. 15100-11 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 I. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. J. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.6 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION A. Install at locations shown on drawings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.7 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION A. Install heating cable at locations shown on drawings for pipe freeze protection. B. Cut heating cable to length required for pipe lengths and watt per foot requirements. Secure to pipe and install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.8 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,extended,or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.If methods are not prescribed,use procedures described in AWWA C651 or follow procedures described as follows: a. Flush piping system with clean,potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. After the standing time, flush system with clean,potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system. B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pipe Tests: 1. Test plumbing drainage systems under 10 foot static head for a period of not less than 24 hours. 2. Test water systems under 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. 3. Test underground piping prior to backfilling and before installing equipment and before insulation is applied, using specified methods and conditions. Subject piping to test for not less than 24 hours. Make necessary replacements or repairs and repeat tests until entire system, including equipment,is accepted as satisfactory. 4. Pressure test PEX piping systems in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Do not exceed 150 psig. 5. Pressure test polypropylene piping in accordance with manufacturer's Installation Manual.Test Aquatherm piping per manufacturer's instructions. Submit pressure test to Aquatherm at http://www.aquatherm.com/pressure-test-submission. 6. Install equipment, operate systems, clean out scale, dirt, oil, waste, and foreign matter, and correct additional leaks. 7. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. 8. Pipe tests specified in this Section shall be to five feet outside building lines or to point of connection to exterior lines. Drains to oil/grease interceptor (separator) shall be tested to the point of the oil/grease interceptor outlet. B. Underground Piping Inspections 15100-12 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 1. Underground piping systems shall be inspected by the Engineer of Record and the Owner's Construction Manager.Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Construction Manager at least ten business days prior to the following milestones being started on the site: a. Backfilling of underground piping and associated structural support systems. b. Placement of the floor slab. 2. Performance of the above backfilling and slab placement without proper coordination and inspection shall result in removal of in-place work at the Contractor's expense to allow appropriate inspections. C. Underground Piping Video Inspection 1. General: Perform video inspection of underground sewer piping from the point of connection to the manhole outside the building through the mains and through the single takeoff to each fixture. 2. Perform video inspection of existing sewer piping and coordinate repair of deficiencies with Owner's Construction Manager. An equitable adjustment will be made in the contract price for additional work directed and performed. 3. Video Inspection Contractor Qualifications: Specified in Part 1. 4. Video Inspection Certification: Provide video inspection certification as specified in Part 1. 5. Video Taping Requirements: a. Video camera designed for express purpose of sewer line inspection. b. Camera and apparatus capable of extending to all points of piping required within 2 inch to 8 inch diameter pipe. 6. Procedure: a. Inspect sewer pipes with video camera no earlier than 30 days after floor slab has been poured. Sections of sewer determined to be deficient shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner.Retest repaired section. b. Adequately flush and clean sewer piping prior to video inspection c. Provide additional video inspection at contractor's expense if there are clogging problems within the first year warranty and if requested by owner. 7. Video Inspection Report: a. Submit in accordance with requirements in Part 1. b. Submit bound report in MS Word format. c. Provide summary report of pipes inspected and defects noted d. Log shall show the exact measure location of faults such as,but not limited to: 1) Open joints. 2) Broken,cracked or collapsed pipe. 3) Accumulation of debris or obstructions. 4) Evidence of infiltration. 5) Water depth variation and sags. 6) Protrusions. e. The reference location shall include the distance away from the reference point of entry such as manhole or cleanout and the position of the fault as to the bottom,top or side of the pipe. f. Provide plan of piping network covered with notations. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. 15100-13 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 END OF SECTION 15100-14 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 UniSpec 013015 SECTION 15190—FUEL GAS PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Natural gas piping. 2. Propane gas piping. 3. Gas valves and regulators. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings 2. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI B31.9-Building Services Piping Code. 2. ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22—Line Pressure Regulators. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME B 16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. D. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 53-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A 234-Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temper- atures. E. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Product Certificates: Provide Manufacturer's Certification for gas regulators if required by Authority Hav- ing Jurisdictions. 2. Welding: Pipe welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior to commencing work on this project. When directed,welders shall be retested at Contractor's expense when evidence indi- cates a lack of welder proficiency. Certification will be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other ap- proved authority. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FUEL GAS PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Piping: Black steel,standard weight,Schedule 40 ASTM A 53. 1. Piping 2 inches and smaller:Welded or threaded with malleable iron fittings including couplings. 2. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger: Welded,with butt-welded fittings. B. Fittings: ASME B 16.3,malleable iron or ASTM A 234,forged steel welded type. 15190-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/12/15 C. Joints: NFPA 54,threaded or welded to ANSI B31.9,ASME Section 1. 2.2 GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES A. Quarter-turn Ball Valve:UL listed for natural gas service or LP gas service as required;threaded ends,with bronze body,chrome plated brass ball, "Teflon" or"TFE" seats and seals,blowout-proof stem,adjustable packing gland, and vinyl-covered steel handle.Provide valves by one of the following: 1. Conbraco(Apollo):80-100 series(1/4"-3") 2. Nibco:T-585-70-UL series(1/2"-1"),T-580-70-UL series(1-1/4"-3") 3. Watts:B6000-UL series(1/4"-4") 2.3 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Gas Pressure Reducing Regulators: ANSI 221.80/CSA 6.22,provide commercial style regulators by one of the manufacturers as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install interior piping neatly and parallel with, or perpendicular to, lines of the structure. Install pipe hangers as specified in Section 15050 to maintain accurately aligned piping systems,adequately supported both laterally and vertically B. Extend rigid gas piping to exterior gas appliances and install shut-off valve,dirt leg,and union at each appliance. C. Provide flexible gas hose connections to all indoor heating equipment,maximum length of 24". D. Conform to NFPA 54 and applicable local codes. E. Roof Protection: Protect roofing with welding blankets. F. Prime interior gas piping before installation. Complete installation of gas piping before roof deck is painted. Con- form to Section 09900 for painting and for touch-up on the job site. G. Prime and paint exterior gas piping before installation.Conform to Section 09900 for painting and for touch-up on the job site. H. Identify interior gas piping with color markings on top of pipe in accordance with ASME A13.1. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Pressure test piping at 60 psig,or as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction if more stringent. 2. Maintain full test pressure for a period of 30 minutes,and make visual inspection for tightness of system. END OF SECTION 15190-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/12/15 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixtures and plumbing fixture trim furnished by Owner for installation by the Contractor. B. Related Requirements: A. Related Requirements: 1, Section 01770—Contract Closeout: Operation and maintenance data requirements. 2. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Sealant for fixtures at wall and floors. 3. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. NSF International(NSF): 1. NSF 61 Annex G-Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance Section 01330. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, maintenance and repair data,and parts listing for plumbing fixtures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection:Listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated,and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2. Disabled Access: Conform to applicable local,State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation,mounting heights,and operation of plumbing fixture. 3. Lead-Free Compliance: Fixtures and fixture trim shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G for lavatories,sinks and water coolers. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging.Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. C. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. D. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. 15410-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-50006/16/15 06/16/15 E. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them.Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage,store in clean,dry,enclosed,and secure storage area. F. Product Delivery: Owner's Supplier will deliver Owner furnished products to site to be received by Contractor. Contact Owner's Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. G. Acceptance at Site: Inspect Owner furnished products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of prod- ucts furnished and report to Owner discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to the site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Suppliers will furnish plumbing fixtures and fixture trim as specified in Appendix A(Section 15410)and shown on the drawings for installation by Contractor. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed. Verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements and installation conditions.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 2. Verify that plumbing piping for fixture is in the correct location and of the correct type. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated on Drawings for particular fix- tures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.Make final connections. B. Support each fixture in rigid manner which permits no perceptible movement of fixture by manually applied forc- es.Seal space between fixtures and floor or walls with silicone sealant. C. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. Install each fixture with trap which is easily removable for servicing and cleaning. D. Install components level and plumb.Install toilet seats on water closets. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with carriers and bolts. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor or wall as required. G. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900,color to match fixture. H. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. I. Install insulation kits on ADA compliant sink and lavatory waste,continuous wastes,hot and cold water supplies where indicated on the drawings and as required by the ADA 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 15410-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 06/16/15 A. Inspect plumbing fixture and trim installation,attachment to building,operation,and connections.Ensure that fix- tures are installed and operate in conformance with disabled access requirements. 1. Prior to final acceptance,inspect faucets,flush valves,stop valves,and similar devices,to determine that they operate properly and discharge proper quantities of water.Correct any deficiencies as directed by Owner's representative. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,noise or overflow. 1. Replace malfunctioning units. 2. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. B. Clean fixtures,trim,and accessories of foreign materials,including labels,before final acceptance. END OF SECTION 15410-3 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-50006/16/15 06/16/15 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Owner furnished water heaters and associated equipment for installation by the Contractor as follows: 1. Domestic water heaters. 2. Accessories. 3. Recirculating pumps associated with domestic water heating system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport,handle,store,and protect products in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600. B. Product Delivery: 1. Owner's Supplier will deliver Owner furnished products to site to be received by Contractor. Contact Owner's Supplier to coordinate product delivery and installation. 2. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage,store in clean,dry,enclosed,and secure storage area. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. Inspect Owner furnished products upon delivery of products to Site to verify quantity of products furnished and report to Owner discrepancies in quantity delivered or obvious damage to products delivered to the site. 2. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements,those damaged in transit,or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Suppliers will furnish water heaters and associated equipment as specified in Appendix A (Section 15480)for installation by Contractor. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance to requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction,and written recommendations of equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. 15480-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 B. Set air charge,mount,and install expansion tanks in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Install gas piping adjacent water heater to allow service and maintenance. D. Connect Gas piping to gas burner with drip leg,tee,shutoff valve,and union. E. Install and connect gas water heater in accordance with NFPA 54. END OF SECTION 15480-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Heating,ventilating,and air conditioning systems. a. Roof Top Air Conditioning Units. b. Roof Exhaust Fans. c. Unit Heaters:Gas and Electric B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01454-Architect-Engineer Site Observation. 2. Section 01455-Mechanical Equipment Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing:Test and balance. 3. Section 01600-Product Requirements:Direct purchased products through pre-negotiated suppliers. 4. Section 07815-Mineral Fiber Fireproofing(if specified):Grease exhaust duct fireproofing. 5. Section 07721 -Manufactured Curbs:Curbs for roof top heating,ventilating,and air conditioning equipment. 6. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 7. Appendix B—Owner Testing and Inspection. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: Each item of equipment available with capacity ratings certified by AMCA and/or ARI, shall be furnished with capacity ratings so certified. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning Equipment Furnished by Owner and Installed by Contractor:Include in Contract Amount costs incurred for receiving, storage,and labor.Contractor shall be responsible for costs arising when replacement materials must be reshipped due to loss or damage on job site after acceptance of original shipment. Immediately upon award of Contract, coordinate release of units for delivery to site with contacts specified in this Section.Provide crane service to hoist HVAC units directly from truck to roof. 1.4 SCHEDULING A. Milestone Completion Date: Complete Work of this Section on or before Delivery date specified in Appendix A, "Owner Furnished Equipment Shown on Drawings." B. Coordinate Contract interface Work of this Section to provide for Building Automation System operation and testing in accordance with Building Automation System Milestone Completion date. C. Schedule testing and balancing in accordance Appendix B(Section 01455). 1.5 WARRANTY A. Owner furnished equipment shall be turned over to Owner in good working order.Prior to acceptance by Owner, equipment failures are under manufacturer's warranty. Notify equipment warranty contact specified herein for replacement or reimbursement information prior to beginning repairs. After acceptance by Owner, Contractor is not responsible for warranty repair. 1.6 SYSTEM STARTUP 15700-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 A. Roof top air conditioning units (RTU) and air handling unit(AHU) start-up shall be by the manufacturer factory trained personnel as specified in Appendix A(Section 15700)at no cost to the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate start-up visits. Final start-up of RTUs and AHUs shall include equipment manufacturer(OEM),and the Engineer of Record(EOR at EOR's discretion)in attendance.Final start- up shall be scheduled six weeks in advance and shall be scheduled to occur two weeks prior to Possession week. Verify actual schedule with Owner's Mechanical Construction Manager. C. Equipment installation shall be complete and made ready for start-up including electric, gas, water, or other utilities as required for functioning and start-up procedures. D. Failure by the Contractor to have equipment ready for start-up at scheduled time shall result in reimbursement by the Contractor to the equipment manufacturer at arate of costs incurred by required attendees plus 10 percent. Contractor shall make reimbursement to equipment manufacturer prior to rescheduling the follow-up start up visit. E. The Contractor shall conduct start-up operations for equipment specified herein other than RTUs and AHUs. Perform start-up in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation and start-up instructions. Mechanical failure, prior to acceptance by Owner, shall be repaired by Contractor through warranty agreement with manufacturer. Record start-up data on forms included at the end of this section. Retain one copy on site and submit one copy to EOR for review and approval. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish the following heating,ventilating,and air conditioning equipment as specified in Appendix A (Section 15700)for installation by the Contractor. 1. Roof top air conditioning units unless otherwise shown. 2. Exhaust Fans 2.2 UNIT HEATERS-GAS FIRED A. Unit Heaters:Heavy-duty type,design certified by A.G.A.,complying with current OSHA requirements,accepted by FIA/FM, and UL listed. Provide heaters with direct ignition spark of pilot igniter through a solid-state, direct-spark ignition system. Loss of gas or power shall cause 100 percent shut-off of main burner and pilot.Equip heater with controls for 24 VAC thermostatic operation as scheduled on Drawings. B. Provide heaters with aluminized steel or stainless steel heat exchanger and aluminized steel burners with stainless steel burner insert. C. Cabinet Panels:Minimum 20 gauge cold rolled steel with enamel finish.Adjustable hangers and hanger assembly. D. Where altitude is above 2,000 feet,derate gas unit heaters per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Clean each unit and record verification of proper operation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment per manufacturer's instructions and requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). B. Air Handling and Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: 1. Coordination: a. Coordinate installation, testing, and completion dates with Building Automation System (BAS) installer. b. Coordinate installation with equipment manufacturers and Engineer of Record c. Coordinate installation and testing and balancing with ITBA as specified in section 01455. 15700-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 2. Label units with 6 inch black permanent paint stencil.Number units as indicated on Drawings.Locate label for each unit so it can be read from the roof hatch. 3. Do not set roof top equipment on curbs until installation of roofing base flashing has been completed. 4. Label RTUs scheduled with CO2 sensors with 3 inch red permanent paint stencil. Label units "IAQ"and locate label for each unit so it can be read from the roof hatch. C. Exhaust Fan: 1. Label units with 6 inch black permanent paint stencil.Number units as indicated on Drawings.Locate label for each unit on top of fan. 2. Do not set exhaust fans on curbs until installation of roofing base flashing has been completed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall be the ultimate responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with Section 01452. Field quality control testing and inspection shall be at the discretion of the Contractor as necessary to assure compliance with Contract requirements. B. Contractor's Responsibilities with respect to Owner Testing and Inspection: 1. Coordinate observation and acceptance testing schedule with fire suppression system representative. 2. Require sub-contractors involved in work related to the fire suppression system to attend observation and acceptance testing. 3. Verify all electrical, mechanical, and gas piping systems are complete and functioning prior to and at the time of the test. 4. Additional charges incurred by Owner's Fire Protection Consultant, and fire suppression system representative due to Contractor's lack of preparation shall be paid by Contractor. 3.3 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. The Owner will perform testing and inspection(T&I)as specified in Appendix B(Section 15700). but only as a means to satisfy the Owner of contract compliance and as assurance to the Owner of Contractor quality control performance. Owner T&I specified below shall not preclude Contractor responsibility to perform routine, necessary, and customary testing and inspection of the methods and frequency suitable for the type of work involved. 3.4 OWNER SITE OBSERVATION A. Functional Performance Testing(FPT): FPT will be conducted by Engineer of Record at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Appendix B(Section 01454 and 15700). 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect RTUs and AHUs from damage, including but not limited, to paint spray and drywall dust. Replace air filters regularly to preclude damage. Damage incurred due to Contractor neglect will be repaired by manufacturer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 15700-3 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT START-UP REPORT Page of • PROJECT UNIT NO.* LOCATION ALTITUDE IN FEET MANUFACTURER OUTPUT(BTUH/KW) MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. GAS HEATING DATA EAT/LAT Degrees F Verify Ignition-Stage 1/2 Gas Line Pressure,In.WC Upstream of Unit Control ** Gas Manifold Pressure,In.WC Downstream of Appliance Regulator ** Burner Orifice Size Fuel(Natural Gas or Propane) * Unit Number shall correspond to marked number on Drawings. ** Most remote unit only.Read gas pressure when equipment in building is in full operation. ELECTRICAL Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage Stage HEATING DATA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 EAT/LAT Degrees F Voltage-Stage 1/2 T-1-T-2 T-2-T-3 T-3-T-4 AMPS-Stage 1/2 Tl T2 T3 START-UP DATE TIME READINGS BY VERIFIED BY (General Contractor) REMARKS: 15700-4 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATER START-UP REPORT Page of PROJECT LOCATION ALTITUDE IN FEET UNIT DATA UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT NO.* NO.* NO.* NO.* NO.* NO.* Manufacturer Area Served Model No. Serial No. Nameplate BTUH TEST DATA ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL Units have been cleaned (YES) (NO) Gas line pressure(Upstream of appliance regulator),in.W.C.** Gas manifold pressure(Downstream of appliance regulator,In.W.C.)** Orifice size used.(Verify size required with Manufacturer based on above pressures and altitude.) * Unit number shall correspond to number on Drawings. ** These gas pressures are to be read at a time when gas equipment in building is in full operation. START-UP DATE TIME READINGS BY VERIFIED BY (General Contractor) REMARKS: 15700-5 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 - GENERAL L1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Ductwork,dampers,inlets and outlets for HVAC systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01455 -Mechanical Equipment Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing: Testing and balance of HVAC systems. 2. Section 15700-Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning. 3. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 1. AMCA 500-D—Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. AMCA 500-L—Laboratory Methods for Testing Louvers for Rating. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. 2. ASTM C 553-Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications 3. ASTM C 1071 -Thermal and Acoustical Insulation(Mineral Fiber,Dust Lining Material. 4. ASTM C 1136-Flexible,Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation 5. ASTM C 1290-Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts 6. ASTM E 84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. ASTM E 96-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 8. ASTM E 119-Fire Tests Of Building Construction And Materials. D. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NEPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B-Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems 3. NFPA 96-Ventilation Control And Fire Protection Of Commercial Cooking Operations E. Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA): 1. SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible F. British Standards Institution(BSI): 1. BS 302-Stranded Steel Wire Ropes. G. North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association(NAIMA) 1. AH 124-Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING 15800-1 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 A. Owner Furnished items Installed by Contractor: Include in Contract Amount costs incurred for receiving,storage, and labor of Owner furnished product to be installed by the Contractor. Contractor shall assume costs for replacement materials reshipped due to loss or damage on job site after acceptance of original shipment. B. Coordinate release of products for delivery to site with contacts specified herein. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Milestone Completion Date: Complete Work of this Section on or before Delivery date specified in Appendix A (Section 15800),"Owner Furnished Equipment Shown on Drawings" B. Schedule testing and balancing in accordance Appendix B (Section 01455) after completion of system start-up requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant ductwork for period of one year from date of final acceptance of job against noise and vibration under full range of operating conditions. B. Warrant new and modified ductwork for period of one year from date of final acceptance of job,against noise and vibration under full range of operating conditions. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's supplier will furnish the following items as specified in Appendix A(Section 15800) for installation by the Contractor.All other items specified in this section shall be Contractor furnished and installed. 1. Volume Control Dampers—Manual 2. Air Inlets and Outlets 3. Drop Box Diffusers 4. Duct transitions and return air plenums B. Duct transitions and return air plenums for RTUs and AHUs without drop boxes shall be provided by Contractor. 2.2 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Sheet Metal Ductwork: Continuous hot-dip mill galvanized,minimum coating of G60,lock-forming quality steel sheets,in accordance with ASTM A653. B. Gages: Sheet metal gage as specified in SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards but not less than the following. 1. Rectangular Duct:26 gage for all sizes. 2. Round Duct: Prime grade steel sheets,by United Sheet Metal Co.Inc.or equivalent. a. 14 inch diameter and smaller:26 gage. b. 15 inch diameter through 26 inch diameter:24 gage. c. 27 inch diameter through 36 inch diameter:22 gage. C. Round ductwork shall be spiral seam where exposed and not insulated on sales floor area and spiral or longitudinal seam in all other areas. D. Ductwork connections for round duct may be made using SpiralMate self-sealing duct connection system by Ductmate Industries(800)245-3188. 2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed. 15800-2 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 2. Knauf. 3. Schuller(Manville). 4. Owens/Corning. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Duct Liner: Fibrous-Glass complying with ASTM C 1071,NFPA 90A,or NFPA 90B;and NAIMA AH124. I. Minimum Thermal Conductivity: R-Value at 75 deg F mean temperature. a. Type I,Flexible: R-3.7 per inch b. Type II,Rigid: R=4.2 per inch. D. Duct Wrap: Mineral-fiber blanket insulation with factory applied FSK or vinyl jacket. Insulation shall be mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin, complying with ASTM C 553, Type II (for use on surfaces at temperatures up to 1700 deg.F)and ASTM C 1290.Factory-applied jackets shall conform to the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136,Type II. 2. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A,and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.4 SELF-SEALING SPIRAL DUCTWORK SYSTEM(CONTRACTOR OPTION) A. General: • 1. At the option of the Contractor,self-sealing ductwork system may be used in lieu of round built-up system. 2. Conform to SMACNA Class A requirements with no additional sealants. B. Manufacturer: 1. Lindab Inc.,Stamford,CT(800)797-7476. C. Round Spiral Sheet Metal Ductwork System: 1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab,Inc. 2. Duct: Galvanized,minimum coating designation of G60, lock-forming quality steel sheets, in accordance with ASTM A653. 3. Substitutions:Not permitted. D. Fittings: 1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab,Inc. 2. End gaskets EPDM rubber,factory installed,U-profile,double lipped. E. Control Dampers: SPIROsafe DSU as manufactured by Lindab,Inc. F. Supply Grilles: SPIROcomfort RGS-3 as manufactured by Lindab,Inc. 2.5 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Motorized Control Dampers: Provide motorized control dampers where indicated on drawings. Dampers shall be extruded aluminum, low leakage, parallel blade design, with nylon bearings and blade and frame sales on all mating surfaces. Damper leakage shall not exceed 6 CFM per square foot at 4.0" water column, tested in accordance with AMCA 500. 1. Manufacturer: Ruskin CD-50 or equal. B. Field fabricated dampers shall not be used. C. Substitutions: Not permitted unless otherwise specified. 2.6 FIRE DAMPERS A. Dampers: UL labeled,constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL instructions.Size dampers to provide free area equal to duct dimensions. 15800-3 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 B. Provide hanger design,and methods of hanging and supporting compatible with the structure. 2.7 DUCT TRANSITIONS AND RETURN AIR PLENUMS A. General: Fabricate supply air duct transitions and return air plenums for RTUs and AHUs with drop boxes of minimum 24 gauge paint grip steel per SMACNA duct construction standards. Provide 1 1/2 inch flange turned out to fasten to roof curb. Size supply transitions as required to transition from roof curb to drop boxes. Insulate duct transitions with 1 inch x 2 lb density duct liner glued with 100%coverage of adhesive and pin spotted to all interior surfaces per SMACNA. Provide neoprene gasket material sufficient for installation of transitions and plenums. Mounting accessory packages shall be provided with the drop box assembly. 2.8 HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANT(FLUE SEALANT) A. Manufacturer: Provide high temp sealant as follows or equivalent: 1. RTV 4500 1-Part Silicone Sealant by Silco,Inc. 2.9 DUCT SEALERS A. Manufacturer: Provide duct sealers of one of the following: 1. Kingco 11376 or 10526 by ITW Polymers Sealants North America(formerly ITW TACC). 2. Ductmate PROseal. 3. United McGill Duct-Sealer. 4. Trans-Continental Equipment Co.(TCE)-MP Multi-purpose Duct Sealant. 5. Hardcast#601 Iron-Grip. 6. Hardcast Aluma-Grip Tape. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.10 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL FLUE VENTS A. Products: Where shown on drawings, provide flue systems from the same manufacturer throughout the project. Type "B" gas vent flue, double-wall, air insulated venting system for gas fired equipment,tested under UL 441 testing standard and labeled "UL". Flues shall be complete with flue caps, necessary fittings, connectors, high temperature sealants, flashing cone, storm collar, supports, and other accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements. B. Manufacturer: Provide Type B gas vent flue of one of the following: 1. Selkirk Metalbestos:Type B RV or QC. 2. Hart&Cooley:Type B Gas Vent System,round. 3. Metal-Fab:Type B Gas Vent or BigVent,round. 4. American Metal:AmeriVent®Type B Vent,round. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.11 DOUBLE WALL FLUE VENTS FOR CATEGORY III(POSITIVE PRESSURE) A. Products: Where shown on Drawings, provide flue systems from the same manufacturer throughout the project. Gas flue vent, double-wall, air insulated venting system for gas fired equipment, tested under UL 1738 testing standard and labeled"UL."Flues shall be complete with flue caps,necessary fittings,connectors,high temperature sealants,flashing cone,storm collar,supports,and other accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements. B. Manufacturer: Provide gas flue vent of one of the following: 1. Selkirk(HeatFab):Gas Flue Vent Model Saf-T Vent Cl. 2. Metal-Fab:Gas Flue Vent Model Corr/Guard. 2.12 SINGLE WALL FLUE VENTS 15800-4 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 A. Products: 18 gage continuous hot-dip mill galvanized,minimum coating of G60,lock-forming quality steel sheets, in accordance with ASTM A653. 2.13 WIRE ROPE HANGER SYSTEMS(CONTRACTOR OPTION). A. General: At the option of the Contractor, wire rope hanger system for ductwork may be used in lieu of conventional hangers. Hanger systems shall be approved in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards(HVAC-DCS)with a minimum load safety factor of 5:1. B. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries,Charleroi,PA(800)245-3188. 2. Erico,Inc.,Solon,OH(800)462-4797. 3. Gripple,Inc.,Batavia,IL.(630)208-0111. C. Wire Rope Hanger System: One of the following: 1. Clutcher Mechanical Hanger System by Ductmate. 2. Hang Fast Wire Rope Hanging System by Gripple. 3. Caddy Speed Link Universal Support System by Erico. D. Wire Rope: 1. Gripple: Zinc galvanized steel wire rope. Standard lengths of 5, 10, 15,and 30 feet with a preformed loop at one end. 2. Ductmate:Zinc coated steel aircraft quality rope,field cut to length. 3. Erico:Galvanized steel aircraft quality wire rope.Available in 3.3,6.6,9.9, 16.4,and 32.8 feet lengths with factory hook at one end. E. Locking Device: 1. Gripple Fastener:Zinc housing with stainless steel springs. 2. Ductmate:Clutcher cast zinc housing with stainless steel springs. 3. Erico:Stainless steel housing with all steel locking device. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabrication requirements apply to new and modified ductwork. B. Fabricate,erect,and install ductwork for heating,ventilating,and air conditioning systems per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Make joints air tight on supply,return,and exhaust ducts. Seal transverse and longitudinal joints with duct sealer unless otherwise noted. Seal exhaust ducts with exterior seal as required to assure positive seal. Comply with SMACNA Duct Class[A[B 3.2 DUCT INSULATION A. Insulate ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards_. Do not insulate exhaust ductwork unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Rectangular Duct: 1. Supply duct and air plenums: 1 inch liner. 2. Return duct and air boots: 1/2-inch liner. 3. Supply duct and air plenums: 1-1/2 inch liner. 4. Return duct and air boots: 1-1/2 inch liner. 5. Supply duct and air plenums:2 inch liner. 6. Return duct and air boots: 2 inch liner. 7. Supply duct and air plenums: a. Non Food Prep Areas: 1-inch liner. b. Food Prep Areas: I-inch wrap. 15800-5 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 8. Return duct and air boots: a. Non Food Prep Areas: 1/2-inch liner. b. Food Prep Areas: 1/2-inch wrap. C. Round Duct: 1. Insulate the following round duct with duct wrap: a. Supply and return duct in receiving areas. b. Supply and return duct above finished ceilings. 2. Duct Wrap Thickness: a. 2-inch(R=6.0 minimum installed value). b. 2-1/2-inch(R=7.0 minimum installed value). c. 3-inch(R=8.0 minimum installed value). 3. Overlap facing and staple securely. 3.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Install manual volume control dampers where indicated on the drawings.Provide ceiling doors where required in accordance with Section 08311. 3.4 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Locations of outlets indicated on Drawings are approximate. Coordinate with other trades to make symmetrical patterns. Determine locations by established pattern of lighting fixtures, merchandise racks, or architectural reflected ceiling plan. B. Install fire radiation dampers and other devices at air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of governing authorities.Dampers shall be UL labeled,constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL instructions. 3.5 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Duct support requirements apply to new and modified ductwork. B. Support horizontal and vertical sheet metal duct work in accordance with Schedule(s)at the end of this section. C. Wire Rope Hanger System(Contractor Option): 1. Comply with manufacturers'load ratings and recommended installation procedures. 2. Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards(DCS)with the following exceptions. a. Use is not restricted to the SMACNA DCS diametrical limits for single wires. b. Wire rope system shall not be used for hanging risers nor for two-tier trapeze hanging method. 3. Provide stress distribution saddles as required when a single wire rope is passed continuously under round and rectangular duct as required to retain duct shape 4. Support wire rope from the top chord of roof joists within 3"of panel points,or from 2 x 2 x 1/4 or 1 5/8 x 1 5/8 unistrut spanning the bottom chords and overhanging a minimum of 6"on each end. D. Do not use fasteners which penetrate roof deck. 1. Provide seismic restraints and other components as required on Drawings and Section 13080. 3.6 FIRE DAMPERS A. Install approved fire dampers in air ducts or air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of governing authorities.Install access doors in ducts at all fire dampers. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect work,equipment and material to prevent obstruction,damage or breakage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation.Cover and protect equipment against dirt,water,chemical or mechanical injury.At the completion of work,thoroughly clean all equipment and deliver the entire system in an unblemished condition 15800-6 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 3.8 TESTING A. Prepare systems for test and balance as specified in Appendix B(Section 01455). B. In coordination with Section 01455,make changes in pulleys,belts,ductwork,and dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by air balance and testing agency. 3.9 SCHEDULES SCHEDULE h-DUCT SUPPORT SCHEDULE MINIMUM HANGER SIZE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK Maximum Half of Pair at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft spacing Pair at 5 ft spacing Pair at 4 ft spacing Duct Perimeter* Strap Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod P/2=30" 1"x 22 ga 10 ga 1"x 22 ga 10 ga 1"x 22 ga 12 ga 1"x 22 ga 12 ga P/2=72" 1"x 18 ga 3/8" 1"x 20 ga 1/4" 1"x 22 ga 1/4" 1"x 22 ga 1/4" *Perimeter=Sum of Sides ROUND DUCTWORK Diameter Maximum Spacing Strap 24"and less 12' 1"x 22 ga 26"-36" 12' 1"x 20 ga SCHEDULE II-WIRE ROPE HANGER SYSTEM SCHEDULE -OPTION MINIMUM HANGER SIZE _SOUARE/RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK Maximum Half of Single Loop at 10 ft Spacing Single Loop at 8 ft Spacing Single Loop at 5 ft Spacing Single Loop at 4 ft Spacing Duct Perimeters Wt Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico (lbs/ft) _ P/2=12" 5.20 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L P/2=16" 7.09 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No 2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=24" 10.62 No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=32" 14.16 No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=36" 15.94 No.3 No.20 SLD3L No 3 ' No.20 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=48" 21.25 No.4 No.20 - No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No 10 SLD2L P/2=56" 24.78 No.4 No.20 - No.4 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No 10 SLD2L P/2=60" 26.56 No.4 No.30 - No.4 No.20 _ - No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No 10 SLD3L P/2=108" 47.81 No.4 No.30 - No.4 No.30 - No.4 No.20 - No.3 No.20 SLD3L Maximum Half of Pair at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft Spacing Pair at 5 ft Spacing Pair at 4 ft Spacing Duct Perimeter* Wt Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico (lbs/ft) P/2=12" 5.20 No 2 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L P/2=16" 7.09 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L P/2=20" 8.84 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No 2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.1 No.10 SLD2L P/2=28" 12.40 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No 10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=48" 2125 No 3 No 10 SLD3L No 2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=60" 26 56 No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No 10 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L P/2=108" 47 81 No.4 No 20 - No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L ROUND DUCTWORK Maximum Diameter Single Loop at 10 ft Spacing Single Loop at 8 ft Spacing Single Loop at 5 ft Spacing Wt Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico pbs/R) 8" 6.7 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L _ No.2 No.10 SLD2L 14" 117 No.3 No.10 SLD3L _ No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 _ No.10 SLD2L 16" 13.4 No.3 No.20 SLD3L _ No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 _ No.10 SLD2L 20" 16.7 No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L 26" 217 No.4 No.20 - No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 _ No.10 SLD3L 32" 26.7 No.4 No.20 - No.4 No.20 - No.3 No.20 SLD3L 15800-7 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR-5935-500 06/16/15 Maximum Diameter Pair at 10 ft Spacing Pair at 8 ft Spacing Pair at 5 ft Spacing Wt Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Cripple Ductmate Erico Obs/t0 20" 16 7 No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L 26" 21.7 No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No.10 SLD2L No.2 No.10 SLD2L 32" 26.7 No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.10 SLD3L _ No 2 No.10 SLD2L 36" 30.0 No.3 No.20 SLD3L No.3 No.10 SLD3L No.2 No 10 SLD2L NOTES: 1.Schedule is based on 16 gauge maximum ductwork. 2.Hanger sizes are based on vertical hanging only.Refer to manufacturer's data for load limits of hangers at angles•other than vertical. 3.Wire•diameters are based on the following sizes: Gripple Ductmate Erico Size No. 1=3/64" No.10=5/64" SLD2L=0.079"=5/64" Size No.2=5/64" No.20.=1/8" SLD3L=0.118"—1/8" Size No.3=1/8" No.30=3/16" Size No.4=3/16" 4.The locking device numbers corresponds•to the wire numbers for all three manufacturers END OF SECTION • 15800-8 Oulot Buildings,Tigard OR—5935-500 06/16/15 UniSpec II 013114 SECTION 16050(26 0500)-BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical Identification 2. Hangers and Supports 3. Conduit Sleeves 4. Grounding and Bonding B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16100-Wiring Methods 2. Section 16402—Low Voltage Service and Distribution 3. Section 16500-Lighting 4. Section 16700-Communication PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates:Provide laminated plastic nameplates with 3/4 inch minimum contrasting-color engraved letters. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut Metal Framing,Unistrut Corporation,Wayne,MI,(800)521-7730 or contact Steve Goldstein 800- 243-1054 ext 111. 2. ERICO,Solon,OH,(440)349-2630. 3. Minerallac Fastening Systems,Hampshire,IL,(877)285-2200. B. Conduit and Equipment Supports: Hangers shall be Series P3000 or P3300 channels by Unistrut depending on load and span involved. Use Pipe Hangers by Minerallac , or Caddy Clips by ERICO only where impractical to install Unistrut Hangers. C. Attach hangers and supports to structure overhead by methods approved at job site. Do not use fasteners which penetrate the roof deck. 2.3 CONDUIT SLEEVES A. Sleeves: Galvanized,black steel or schedule 40 PVC pipe. 2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Insulated Grounding Bushing: Steel with feed-thru lugs. B. Insulated Equipment Ground Wire: Copper. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. 16050-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. Cutting and Patching: Where cutting is required through walls, floors, or ceilings, make openings no larger than required and repair affected surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. C. Nameplates: Bolt or pop-rivet nameplates to equipment. Clearly identify equipment or equipment served, such as "BALER","COMPACTOR,"etc. Install nameplates for each safety switch,contactor,time switch,pushbutton and other similar equipment. D. Electrical Equipment Supports: Support electrical equipment with hangers and supports specified above or in another approved manner where details are not indicated. E. Sleeves: Install where conduits pass through concrete floors. Caulk sleeves through outside walls above grade with sealant as specified in Section 07900. F. Fastening and Anchoring: Fasten conduit straps,disconnect switches,panelboards, and other equipment secured to walls and slabs with cadmium plated screws or bolts and lead cinch anchors or expansion bolts and install in holes drilled with proper size masonry drill. Properly size anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for load to be supported. G. Torque all conductor connection terminations including those in EDC to manufacturer's recommended values. Inspect panelboards for physical damage,proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers,fusible switches,and fuses. 3.2 GROUNDING A. General: Ground all metallic conduits, supports,cabinets, equipment, system neutrals, metal building structures, and other items required to be grounded in accordance with the NEC and other applicable codes and as indicated on drawings. B. Equipment Grounding: 1. Make conduits electrically continuous using proper fittings,connections,grounding bushings,etc. 2. Where Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit(GRC)penetrates the grade outdoors or penetrates the slab, install insulating grounding bushings. 3. Install an insulated equipment ground wire as shown on drawings. C. Metal Underground Cold Water Pipe: Connect to electrical system if available and permitted by local codes. Install jumpers around water meters, valves, or other devices which might cause an interruption of continuity during service. D. Concrete Encased Electrodes: Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install electrodes, jumpers, and approved fittings in accordance with Grounding Electrode Detail. E. Ground Rods: If ground rods are required, install two 5/8 inch minimum diameter Copperweld rods driven vertically not less than 12 feet apart and each with 8 feet of length in contact with the soil. 3.3 TESTING A. Upon completion of installation, perform continuity tests on power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage.Verify proper phasing connections. B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground point on building water pipe using suitable ground testing equipment. C. Test receptacles with circuit tester to ensure proper polarity,grounding,and continuity of circuits. D. Load test GFCI receptacles. END OF SECTION 16050-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 PART l -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wire and Cable. 2. Conduit. 3. Outlet boxes and Conduit Fittings. 4. Wiring Devices. 5. Wire Connectors. 6. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Rough-In. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 13810—Building Automation System(BAS). 2. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Hangers and Supports. 3. Section 16402—Low Voltage Service and Distribution. 4. Section 16500-Lighting. 5. Section 16700-Communication. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code(NEC). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA): 1. NEMA VE 1 —Metal Cable Tray Systems. D. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM D 698-Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft- ibf/ft). 2. ASTM D 1557-Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft- bf/ft3). E. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL 1569-Metal Clad Cables. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish and install fire and security alarm system. Contractor shall provide rough-in as specified herein. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a nationally recognized testing agency and marked for use. B. Wire and cable shall bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory and shall conform to standards established for such materials by nationally recognized agencies. C. Provide code gauge,soft annealed copper wire,not less than 98 percent conductivity and of 600 volt class. 16100-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Aluminum Alloy Conductors: Compact, stranded Stabiloy AA-8000 series. Aluminum alloy conductors may be used at Contractor's option where permitted by local utility company and Authority Having Jurisdiction unless otherwise noted on drawings. Limit use of aluminum alloy conductors to service entrance and feeder conductors #6 AWG and larger.Aluminum alloy conductors shall not be used on branch circuits. E. Conductors: 1. Insulation type shall be one of the following: a. THHN. b. THWN. c. XHHW, d. XHHW-2. 2. Type: a. #10 and smaller—stranded or solid. b. #8 and larger-stranded F. Interlocked Armor Metal Clad (MC) Cable: Contractor's option as allowed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. MC cable shall have the following characteristics: 1. Aluminum MC-Lite or Standard MC. 2. Minimum size conductor,#12 AWG copper, including green insulated equipment ground,sized in accordance with the NEC. 3. Overall moisture resistant tape. 4. Galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked cladding. 5. Manufactured in accordance with UL 1569. G. Wire smaller than#12 AWG not permitted unless otherwise noted. #14 AWG, type MTW or TFF permitted for signal and pilot control circuits unless otherwise noted. H. Color code: SYSTEM NEUTRAL ISOLATED PHASE GROUND VOLTAGE COLOR GROUND 240/120V White A-black green green W/yellow tracer B-red 208/120V white A-black green green W/yellow tracer B-red C-blue 480/277V Light gray or white with colored A-brown green green W/yellow tracer stripe other than yellow B-orange C-yellow I. Color code#6 AWG and smaller phase and neutral conductors by continuous outer covering.Conductors#4 AWG and larger may be color coded by tape. Tape shall have minimum of two complete wraps around conductor at 6 inches from terminations,splices,and junction points. J. Identify circuit numbers with synthetic cloth or plastic labels at splice and junction points. 2.3 CONDUIT A. Conduit types shall be as follows and shall bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory: 1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit(GRC): Hot-dip galvanized. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC): Hot-dip galvanized. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): Hot-dip galvanized. 4. Schedule 40 heavy-wall Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC). 5. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel or Aluminum. 16100-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 6. Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit with PVC jacket. 7. MC Cable: Steel or Aluminum Cladding B. Conduit Sizes: Size conduit in accordance with NEC unless noted otherwise on Drawings, but not less than the following: 1. Alarm and Data Systems: 3/4 inch. 2. Flexible Metal Conduit: For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings,3/8 inch. For connection of other equipment subject to vibration: 1/2 inch. 3. Underground Conduit in Parking Lot: 1 inch. 4. Other Uses: 1/2 inch. 2.4 OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory and be rated for environmental conditions where installed. B. Boxes: Comply with NEC in regard to maximum allowable number of conductors. 1. Interior Boxes: Hot-dip galvanized,4 inches minimum octagon or square,unless otherwise noted. Provide single or multiple gang outlet boxes as required for flush installation in drywall construction.Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry.Provide single surface-mounted outlet boxes for utility type boxes. 2. Exterior Boxes: Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. 3. Outlet Boxes: Suitable for supporting lighting fixtures if intended for that purpose. 4. Ceiling Fan Boxes: Rated and listed for mounting ceiling fans. C. Conduit Fittings: 1. EMT Fittings for Dry Locations: Diecast or steel set screw type. 2. EMT Fittings For Wet or Damp Locations: Steel Compression type. 3. GRC,IMC,or EMT Box Connectors For Wet or Damp Locations: Weather-tight hubs. 4. Threadless GRC or IMC Fittings: Not permitted. 5. GRC or IMC connectors for dry locations. 6. PVC Fittings: Solvent weld type for PVC conduit. 2.5 WIRING DEVICES A. Branch Circuit Switches: Specification grade rated 20A 120/277V AC as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Single Pole HBL1221GY PS20AC1-GRY 2221GY 1221-2GY 3-Way HBL1223GY PS20AC3-GRY 2223GY 1223-2GY 4-Way HBL1224GY PS2OAC4-GRY 2224GY 1224-2GY Dimmers _ Lutron:NT-600-GR Single Pole AD1277GY1 Sensor Switch: Not Available OSSMT-MD-G Occupancy Sensor PDT-GY (Dual Technology) Double Pole AD1277GY2 Sensor Switch: Not Available Not Available Occupancy Sensor WSD-PDT-2P-GY (Dual Technology) B. Receptacles-Straight Blade Nylon Grounding-Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Single Receptacle 20A 125V(5-20R) HBL5361GRY 5361GRY 5361GY 5361-GY Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V(5-20R) HBL5362GY 5362GRY 5362GY 5362-GY 16100-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V Isolated IG5362 IG5362 IG5362RN 5362-IG Ground(5-20R) GFCI Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V(5- GF2OGYLA 2095-GRY VGF2OGY 7899-GY 20R) GFCI Weather Resistant Duplex GFTR2OGY 2095TRWRGR WRVGF20 W7899-GY Receptacle 20A 125V(5-20R) Y GY Single Receptacle 15A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL5661I 5671-I 5661V 5661-I Wire Grounded(6-15R) Single Receptacle 20A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL54611 58711 5461GY 5461-GY Wire Grounded(6-20R) Single Receptacle 30A 250V 2 pole 3 HBL9330 3801 5700N 5372 Wire Grounded(6-30R) Single Receptacle 20A 125/250V 3 pole 4 HBL8410 3820 5759 Not Available Wire Grounded(14-20R) Single Receptacle 30A 125/250V 3 pole 4 HBL9430A 3864 5744N 278 Wire Grounded(14-30R) Single Receptacle 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8420 Not Available Not Not Available pole 4 Wire Grounded(15-20R) Available Single Receptacle 30A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8430A 5740 8430N 8430 pole 4 Wire Grounded(15-30R) Single Receptacle 50A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL8450A 5750 8450N 8450 pole 4 Wire Grounded(15-50R) C. Receptacles-Locking Nylon Grounding-Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V HBL4710 4710 CWL515R 4710 (L5-15R) Single Locking Receptacle 15A 125V IG4710 1G4710 IGL515R 4710-IG Isolated Ground(L5-15R) Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V HBL4700I 4700 4700 4700 (L5-15R) Duplex Locking Receptacle 15A 125V IG4700A IG4700 IG4700 4700-IG Isolated Ground(L5-15R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125V HBL2310 L520-R CWL52OR 2310 (L5-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125V IG2310 IGL520-R IGL52OR 2310-IG Isolated Ground(L5-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125V HBL2610 L530-R CWL53OR 2610 (L5-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125V IG2610 IGL530-R IGL53OR 2610-IG Isolated Ground(L5-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 250V 2 HBL2320 L620-R CWL62OR 2320 Pole 3 Wire Grounded(L6-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 250V 2 HBL2620 L630-R CWL63OR 2620 Pole 3 Wire Grounded(L6-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 250V 2 IG2620 IGL630-R IGL63OR 2620-IG Pole 3 Wire Isolated Ground(L6-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 20A 125/250V HBL2410 L1420-R CWL1420R 2410 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded(L14-20R) Single Locking Receptacle 30A 125/250V HBL2710 L1430-R CWL143OR 2710 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded(L14-30R) Single Locking Receptacle 50A 600V 2 HBL3771 3771 3771 3771 pole 3 Wire Grounded(Non-Nema) 16100-4 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Single Locking Receptacle 50A 125/250V CS6369 CS6369 CS6369 CS63-69 3 pole 4 Wire Grounded(Non-Nema) D. Connectors-Cord Mounted Locking Nylon Grounding-Type to match Plugs as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Locking Connector 15A 125V(L5-15R) HBL4729C PSL515-C 4731N 4729-C Locking Connector 20A 125V(L5-20R) HBL2313 L520-C CWL520C 2313 Locking Connector 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 HBL2423 L1520-C CWL1520C 2423 Pole 4 Wire Grounded(L15-20R) E. Connectors-Cord Mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding-Type to match Plugs as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL23CM13 CRL520-C CRL520C 23CM-13 20A 125V(L5-20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL24CM 13 CRL 1420-C CRL 1420C Not Available 20A 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (L14-20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL24CM23 Not Available CRL1520C Not Available 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded(L15-20R) Corrosion Resistant Locking Connector HBL28CM13 Not Available Not Not Available 30A 3 Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Available Grounded(L21-30R) F. Plugs-Cord Mounted Nylon Grounding-Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Plug 20A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded HBL5366CA PS5366SSAN 5366AN 5366-CA (5-20P) Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded HBL5466CA PS5466SSAN 5466AN 5466-CA (6-20P _ Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8421 C Not Available Not Not Available Grounded(15-20P) Available Plug 30A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8432C 5741-AN 8432AN 8432-P Grounded(15-30P) Plug 50A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire HBL8452C 5751-AN 8452AN 8452-P Grounded(15-50P) G. Plugs-Cord Mounted Locking Nylon Grounding-Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Locking Plug 15A 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL4720C PSL515-P 4721N 4720-C Grounded(L5-15P) Locking Plug 20A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL2321 L620-P CWL620P 2321 Grounded(L6-20P) _ Locking Plug 30A 250V 2 Pole 3 Wire HBL2621 L630-P CWL630P 2621 Grounded(L6-30P) Locking Plug 20A 3 Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 HBL2421 L1520-P CWL1520P 2421 Wire Grounded(L 15-20P) H. Plugs-Cord Mounted Corrosion Resistant Locking Nylon Grounding-Type to match Outlet Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton 16100-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A HBL23CM11 CRL520-P CRL520P 23CM-11 125V 2 Pole 3 Wire Grounded(L5-20P) Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A HBL24CM11 CRL1420-P CRL1420P Not Available 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded(L14- 20P) Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 20A 3 HBL24CM2I Not Available CRL1520P Not Available Phase 250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded (Li5-20P) Corrosion Resistant Locking Plug 30A 3 HBL28CM11 Not Available Not Not Available Phase 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Grounded Available (L21-30P) I. Pin&Sleeve-Insulated Water Tight-Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper Leviton Water Tight Receptacle 30A 250V 2 Pole HBL330R6W PS330R6W CD330R6W 330R6W 3 Wire Grounded(Non-Nema) Water Tight Receptacle 60A 250V 2 Pole HBL360R6W PS360R6W CD360R6W 360R6W 3 Wire Grounded(Non-Nema) J. Boots: Weatherproof Boots for Locking Plug and Connector Bodies-Type to match Devices as follows: Type Hubbell Pass&Seymour Cooper ' Leviton Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM31 CRL2030-RBP BM1 & 6031-Y&6032-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 125V(L5- & &CRL2030- BM2 20) HBL60CM32 RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 &BL2 6033-Y&6034-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 125/250V 3 & &CRL2030- Pole 4 Wire Grounded(L14-20) HBL60CM36 RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 &BL2 6033-Y&6034-Y Plug and Connector 20/30A 3 Phase 250V & &CRL2030- 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounded(L15-20) HBL60CM36 RBC Corrosion Resistant Boots for Locking HBL60CM35 CRL2030-RBP BL1 &BL2 6033-Y&6034-Y Plug and Connector 30A 3 Phase & &CRL2030- 120/208V 4 Pole 5 Wire Grounded(L21- HBL60CM36 RBC 30) K. Cover Plates: 1. Nylon cover plates for flush mounted devices. 2. Galvanized steel plates where devices are installed on exposed fittings or boxes. 3. 302 stainless steel cover plates for recessed outlet boxes in masonry walls. 4. Blank cover plate on all boxes without device. Type Thomas& Hubbell Intermatic s P m Pass Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle,weatherproof, Red Dot WP26M WP1010MX WIUCAST1 while-in-use,lockable vertical metallic cover plate CKMUV D Single gang GFCI duplex receptacle,weatherproof, Red Dot WP26MH WP1010MX WIUCAST1 while-in-use,lockable horizontal metallic cover plate CKMU D Single gang deep box twistlock receptacle, Red Dot WP7D WP 1250MV Not weatherproof,while-in-use,lockable vertical metallic CKLSVLU XD Available cover plate Double gang two GFCI duplex receptacles, Red Dot 2CKU Not WP1030MX Not weatherproof,while-in-use,lockable vertical metallic Available D Available cover plate L. Colors: 16100-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1. Unless otherwise noted,wiring devices and cover plates shall be gray nylon. 2. Blank Cover Plates: On boxes without devices or fixtures,provide same type and color as those installed on devices in the same room or area. 3. Isolated ground receptacles: Orange nylon cover plates with panelboard name and circuit number printed in 3/16 inch black lettering on clear adhesive label(Brady label or equal)adhered to plate. 2.6 WIRE CONNECTORS A. Splices: 1. #8 AWG and Smaller: Ideal Wingnut,3M Scotchlok,or equal connectors of proper size.3M No. 567 in-line self-stripping connectors will be permitted only at ballast lead connections in fluorescent light rows. 2. #6 AWG and Larger: Solderless lugs and connectors. 2.7 FIRE AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ROUGH-IN A. Electrical Backboard: 4x8 sheets of 3/4-inch plywood as specified in Section 06100 and shown on the drawings. B. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Grounding Conductors: Provide#6 AWG,copper grounding conductor. C. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm Conduit System: Provide conduit system with pull string and outlet box including remote conduit to fire pump,control valve supervisory switches(PIN/valves)or tank as indicated on Drawings and outlined below. 1. If shut off valve is located remote from store building,provide 3/4 inch conduit with pull string from remote location to building entrance location. 2. If pump and pump controls are located remote from store building,provide 2 inch conduit with pull string from the remote location to building entrance location. 3. If tank and tank indicators are located remote from store building,provide 2 inch conduit with pull string from remote location to building entrance location. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.-1 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Where switches are ganged, provide permanently installed steel barriers between switches or provide separate boxes and separate coverplates for each circuit. C. Access to Equipment: Coordinate access doors to allow for easy access of equipment for repair and maintenance. D. Trenching: Maintain 7.5 inch center to center horizontal and vertical spacing at service entrance conduits. Perform trenching and backfilling as specified in the following: 1. Verify and record location,size,elevation,and other pertinent data required to make connections to existing conduit system before beginning trenching.Use caution when digging around any underground conduit system. 2. Contract local utility companies before excavation begins. Dig trench at proper width and depth for laying pipe,conduit,or cable. Cut trench banks vertical, if possible,and remove stones from bottom of trench as necessary to avoid point-bearing.Overexcavate wet or unstable soil,if encountered,from trench bottom as necessary to provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding. 3. Remove excavated materials not required or not suitable for backfill in accordance with governing regulations.Dispose of structures discovered during excavation as specified herein. 4. Transport materials removed from excavation with appropriate vehicles and dispose off-site to areas which are approved for disposal by governing authorities and appropriate property owners. 5. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 16100-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 6. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations by temporary grading or other methods,as required.Remove accumulated water in trenches. 7. Open pumping with sumps and ditches shall be allowed,provided it dose not result in boils,loss of fines,softening the ground,or instability of slopes. 8. Trench width below top of pipe shall not be less than 12-inches or more than 18-inches wider than outside surface of pipe or conduit that is to be installed. 9. Trench depth requirements measured from finished grade or paved surface shall be 24-inches minimum to top of conduit or meet all applicable codes and ordinances,whichever is more stringent. 10. Accurately cut trenches for pipe or conduit that is to be installed,4-inches below bottom of pipe and to the width as specified herein.Place 4-inches of bedding material,compact in bottom of trench,and accurately shape to conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. 11. Place geotextile fabric where required for additional stabilization prior to placement of base course as specified herein. 12. Geotextile Fabric for Stabilization a. Mirafi HP 370 or HP 570 by Mirafi/Tencate. b. Typar SF40 or SF56 by Dupont. c. LINQ GTF-200 or 300 by Thrace-LINQ. d. TerraTex HD by Hanes Geo Components. 13. Backfill after pipe or conduit has been installed.Backfill trench with sand or aggregate materials with No.4 maximum size aggregate. 14. Backfill trenches to existing contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.Match finished surface with same material as surrounding surface. 15. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement.Do not backfill over porous,wet,frozen,or spongy subgrade surfaces. 16. Fill materials shall be placed in lifts or layers not to exceed 8-inches loose measure and compacted to 95 percent of maximum density,in accordance with ASTM D 698,(or 92 percent of the maximum density,in accordance with ASTM D 1557)at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content.Exercise proper caution when compacting immediately over top of pipes or conduits. Water jetting or flooding is not permitted as method of compaction. 17. Pavement replacement shall match existing adjacent pavement profile. E. Aluminum Alloy Conductors: Aluminum alloy conductors may be used at Contractor's option where permitted by local utility company and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Limit use of aluminum conductors to service entrance and feeders to#6 AWG and larger. Splices in service entrance and feeders will not be permitted.Utilize oxidation inhibiting compound(Penetrox,De-ox)at conductor terminations. 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers and Supports are specified in Section 16050. 3.3 WIRE A. Tie wrap groups of conductors in switchboards and panel boards. 3.4 CONDUIT A. Installation: 1. Install conduit concealed,except in unfinished areas and where indicated on Drawings. 2. Support conduit by means of specified hangers. 3. Clean PVC conduit per manufacturer's recommendations before application of solvent cement. 4. Coordinate flashings where conduit penetrates roof membrane. 5. Paint metallic conduit under concrete slab or where installed in contact with earth.Apply two 6 mil coats of PVC or Asphalt paint continuously along entire length of conduit prior to installation below grade.Do not run conduit in concrete slab. 16100-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 6. Install flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to thy-type transformers,baler,air compressors,HVAC equipment,motors and other vibrating equipment. 7. Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work. 8. Do not install conduit under slab unless indicated on Drawings.Conduit installed below slab shall be galvanized rigid metal(GRC),intermediate metal conduit(IMC),or Schedule 40 PVC. 9. Route above grade conduit parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 10. Maintain minimum of 6 inches clearance at flues and heat sources. 11. Install double locknut and bushings when terminating GRC or IMC conduit,except where conduit terminates in threaded hub. 12. Install insulated throat bushings on all PVC conduit runs. B. Location: 1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit(GRC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC):Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. 3. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above grade. 4. Polyvinyl Chloride Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit(PVC)Unless Noted Otherwise on Drawings: Permitted for below-grade use when permitted by local governing codes. 5. Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted in attic spaces and exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to equipment in dry areas.Not permitted for general exposed or concealed work.For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings and connection of other equipment subject to vibration. 6. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to food service equipment,refrigeration equipment and other vibrating equipment in damp locations where rigid connections are not suitable unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 7. MC Cable: Permitted only where concealed inside partitions,concealed between floor and display rack base,and above finished ceilings.Cable exposed on walls or in open bar joist areas will not be permitted.Cut cable with manufacturer's recommended armor stripping tool.Provide manufacturers approved connectors. 3.5 WIRING DEVICES A. Replace outlets or devices improperly located or installed. Set outlets and devices plumb or horizontal and extend to,but not project above,finished surface. B. Unless otherwise noted,receptacles,switches,and other wiring devices shall not be mounted back-to-back. C. Install receptacles so that the ground prong is in the down position. 3.6 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. Make final connection of motors,starters,disconnects,and other items furnished under other Sections. 3.7 FIRE AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ROUGH-IN A. Install fire alarm/security alarm conduit system,raceways, 120 volt supply connections, and fire alarm grounding conductor. B. Install Fire Alarm/Security Alarm systems on plywood backboard located as shown on drawings. C. Fire Alarm/Security Alarm System Grounding Conductors: Install from fire/security service equipment to electrical service grounding electrode system or dry type transformer grounding electrode system. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until completion of construction operations. • 16100-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 END OF SECTION 16100-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 102811 SECTION 16410(26 2817)-ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Safety disconnect switches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16100-Wiring Methods. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced within the text by the basic designation only. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 1. NEMA 250—Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 volts maximum). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Switch Interior: 1. Dead-front construction with hinged arc suppressor and switch blades which are fully visible in the off position and with door open. B. Switch Mechanism: 1. Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism with a delete dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the "on" position or closing the switch mechanism while the door is open. 2. Provide electrical interlock switch to de-energize control wiring as required. 3. Line and load terminals of the device rated 100 amperes or less shall be rated for 75 degrees C. 4. Provide operating handle with provisions for installation of a padlock in"off'or"on"positions. C. Ratings: 1. Switches horsepower rated for 600 volts,60 Hz,heavy-duty type. 2. Where switches are indicated to be fused,furnish with provisions for fuses. D. Enclosures: 1. NEMA 1,code gauge sheet steel with hinged cover,except where exposed to weather. 2. If exposed to weather,provide NEMA 3R enclosure. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install motor and circuit disconnect in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Applicable Codes shall take precedence over drawing details. B. Provide properly sized grounding lug and terminations for all safety switches. END OF SECTION 16410-1 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 BLANK PAGE 16410-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner-Furnished electrical service and distribution equipment for installation by the Contractor. B. Related Requirements: 1. 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.For installation of equipment. 2. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 1.2 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage. Keep materials dry,fully protected from weather. B. Contact the Owner's Electrical Equipment Supplier to coordinate and schedule delivery to site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Electrical Equipment Supplier will furnish the following electrical service and distribution equipment as specified in Appendix A(Section 16402)and shown on the Drawings for installation by the Contractor. 1. Switchboards 2. Panelboards 3. Transformers 4. Contactors 5. Motor Starters 6, Fuses PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, power company requirements, and as indicated on Drawings. B. Branch circuits shall be connected exactly as indicated on Panel Schedule. 3.2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Perform Work in compliance with the local utility's requirements. 3.3 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide temporary power during construction in accordance with Section 01500. 3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 16402-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Owner's electrical equipment supplier will perform a fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination study. 3.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ADJUSTMENTS(BY CONTRACTOR) A. After installation of overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process of electrical distribution system, the Contractor shall perform the following based on the Owner supplier's coordination study: 1. Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in studies. 2. Adjust devices to values listed in study results. END OF SECTION 16402-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec II 102612 SECTION 16442(26 2416)-BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tenant lighting/appliance panelboards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16050-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.Grounding. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code(NFPA-70),and interim amendments in effect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code. B. Comply with local and state,utility regulations and laws. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical System Voltages: The following voltages shall apply unless otherwise noted. 1. Receptacle and Small Power Systems: 208Y/120 volt,3 phase,4 wire wye,60 Hz,solid grounded neutral. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards manufactured by one of the following,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Cutler Hammer 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens(ITE). 4. Square D. B. Equipment shall bear name and trademark of manufacturer as listed above. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 TENANT LIGHTING/APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: Install as scheduled on Drawings,including voltage,amperage,bus bracing,and interrupting ratings. 1. Main lugs only(MLO),main circuit breaker(MCB), or main fusible switch(MFS)panelboard and branch devices as indicated on Schedule. 2. Branch Circuit Protective Devices: Plug-on or bolted type thermal magnetic center-trip circuit breakers for alternating current, each with single-handle common trip. Tandem or half-sized circuit breakers or load center type construction not permitted. Circuit breaker Amp Interrupting Capacity(AIC) no less than val- ues indicated on Drawings. Circuit breakers feeding emergency lights, night lights,time clock motors,etc. will be equipped with handle-locks where indicated on drawings,or required by NFPA 70. 3. Cabinets: Zinc-coated sheet steel with knock-outs, listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. Trims and doors to have suitable primer coat and finish coat of manufacturer's standard color. 16442-1 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Trims to be fitted with hinged doors having combined lock and latch. Locks will be keyed alike and fur- nished with two keys for each panelboard. B. Directory Holder: Contractor shall provide legible typewritten circuit directory properly identifying load(s) on each circuit mounted under clear plastic cover. Branch circuits shall be connected exactly as indicated on Panel Schedule. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work.Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and the Contractor shall then,at his expense,be re- sponsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective Work encountered. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION • 16442-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner furnished lighting fixtures for installation by Contractor. B. Related Requirements: 1. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Provide facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges,ends, and surfaces. Keep materials dry and protected from weather. Fixtures stored outside without'a permanent over- head roof and shelter shall be replaced at Contractor expense. Examples of approved storage include drop trailers, storage inside warehouse, or other Owner Construction Manager approved storage area meeting these criteria. Fixtures showing signs of rust or weathering shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. B. Contact vendor at least 4 weeks prior to desired delivery date to arrange for delivery of lighting fixtures. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Lighting Vendor(hereinafter referred to as"vendor")will furnish lighting fixtures and lamps, as indicat- ed on Drawings and as specified in Appendix A(Section 16500),for installation by Contractor. B. Owner's Lighting Vendor will furnish Protect-A-Lamp covers, as indicated on Drawings and as specified in Ap- pendix A(Section 16500),for installation by Contractor. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures, lamps,lighting panels,and connections in accordance with manufacturer's printed recom- mendations and as indicated on Drawings. 1. LED Fixtures will arrive with protective film. Film shall not be removed until deep cleaning is completed. Removal of film prior to the cleaning procedure may result in damage and replacement at Contractor's ex- pense. B. Coordinate mounting location of lighting fixtures with building structure and other trades prior to installation. Continuous rows shall be installed straight and true. C. Attach fixtures to ceiling grid. Install four to six feet of flexible conduit from recessed fixtures installed in lay-in ceiling grid systems to outlet boxes supported from building structural system. 16500-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Verify ceiling and wall details. Install fixtures complete with proper mounting arrangements for ceiling or wall construction encountered. E. Provide additional hardware required to complete installation such as nuts, bolts, threaded rods, and Unistrut channels. 32 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Deep clean lighting fixtures one week prior to possession with anti-static cleaning fluid in accordance with ven- dor's recommended procedure. B. Lighting Fixture Maintenance: 1. Fluorescent Fixtures. Maintain ballasts and lamps during construction, possession, and until store Grand Opening.Coordinate replacement with vendor and provide replace defective,lost,or damaged equipment. 2. LED Fixtures. Maintain LED drivers during construction,possession and until Store Grand Opening. Co- ordinate replacement with vendor and provide labor to replace defective,lost or damaged LED equipment. C. Owner Responsibility(Including Vendor): 1. Provision for oversupply of three percent additional fluorescent lamps with initial lighting fixture shipment. 2. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will be provided by vendor on site. 3. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. D. Contractor Responsibility: 1. Coordinate vendor on-site evaluation of abnormal component failures of fluorescent ballast and lamps over three percent oversupply at least two weeks prior to Grand Opening. Provide routine and normal mainte- nance of equipment including troubleshooting and determination of lighting failure. 2. Coordinate vendor on-site evaluation of abnormal failures,over one percent of LED driver or fixture failing to light,at least two weeks prior to Grand Opening. Provide routine and normal maintenance of equipment including troubleshooting and determination of lighting failure. 3. Provide replacement for normal failure rates of any fixture, lamp,driver or ballast prior to Grand Opening. 4. Costs for replacement of loss,breakage,or other damage due to fault of Contractor. 5. Reconcile the Freight Bid of Lading with the vendor material requirements within 15 working days. Verify that each specific fixture type is undamaged and correct quantity was shipped and on site. Resolve material conflicts and provide the correct information to the vendor to reconcile freight Bill of Lading. Replace fix- tures not identified when received as damaged or missing at Contractors expense. 6. Contact vendor to order replacement parts in time to have all fixtures fully operational prior to Grand Opening. - E. Replacement Procedure-General: 1. Notify vendor and request replacement of damaged fixtures, drivers, ballasts or lamps delivered to the jobsite. 2. If shipping damage is concealed,notify carrier and vendor within 15 days of acceptance of the freight.Pro- vide vendor a copy of the written notification sent to the carrier. 3. Use three percent fluorescent lamp oversupply for replacement for any reason prior to Grand Opening. Or- der additional lamps only after oversupply is exhausted. a. Maintain accounting log for disposition of lamp oversupply. Identify on log,the date, location, and reason for replacement of each lamp used from the oversupply. b. Retain log for review by vendor and Owner for determination of cost responsibility. F. Additional Fluorescent Ballast or LED Driver Replacement Procedure: 1. Order replacement ballast or driver from vendor. Request return authorization number from vendor to re- turn defective fluorescent ballast or LED driver no later than Grand Opening. 2. Return defective ballast or driver to vendor. Vendor will arrange pickup and return, including shipping costs, of defective fluorescent ballasts or LED drivers. Cost for fluorescent ballasts or LED drivers not re- turned within the specified time frame or returned but not defective will be charged to Contractor. 16500-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 END OF SECTION 16500-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR.5935-500 06/15/15 BLANK PAGE 16500-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415 SECTION 16700(27 0000)-COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner Furnished and Installed Voice/Data System. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16100-Wiring Methods: Outlet boxes and conduit fittings 2. Appendix A—Products and Work By Owner or Separate Contractor a. General procedures related to Owner furnished products and transport, handle, store and protect products.(Formerly included in Section 01640) b. Manufacturers, suppliers, and vendor contacts and product names and numbers related to Owner furnished products.(Formerly included in Section 01645) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The following products will be Owner furnished and installed as specified in Appendix A(Section 16700). 1. Voice/Data cable equipment PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install Voice/Data conduit system,Voice/Data grounding conductor,and signal systems as indicated on Drawings. B. Plywood Mounting Panel: Install as indicated on drawings. C. Voice/Data System Grounding Conductors: Install #6 AWG, copper grounding conductor from Voice/Data service equipment to electrical service grounding electrode system or dry type transformer grounding electrode system. D. Voice/Data Conduit System: Install conduit system as indicated on Drawings, including: 1. Voice/Data service conduit. 2. Other conduits as indicated on Drawings. Install#14 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each conduit for pulling the Voice/Data cable to each termination point. 3. Install outlet boxes conforming to requirements of Section 16100.Include cover plates. END OF SECTION 16700-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 BLANK PAGE 16700-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 061015 APPENDIX A PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Appendix Includes: 1. Existing building components previously provided by Owner during shell construction. Supplier and contact information is provided here for reference only. Refer to individual sections for new contractor provided and installed items. 2. Work provided by Owner including Owner furnished products and installation as associated with and as specified in the individual specifications sections and the Drawings. 3. Owner furnished equipment schedules and tables. 4. Information contained herein under the separate headings corresponds to the individual section numbers included in Division 2 thru 16 or Drawing numbers. Information under each heading identifies product information associated with the referenced specification or drawing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Contract Drawings:Owner furnished product information not included in this Appendix A 2. Appendix B: Owner furnished Testing and Inspection Services. 1.2 GENERAL A. Owner's supplier and associated products will be as specified hereinafter as applicable. Application of information herein shall be only to the extent as stated and referenced in corresponding specifications sections or as shown on the drawings. B. Unless otherwise specified,provisions specified herein are included as requirements for Owner's Suppliers,vendor, or separate contractors and shall be considered information only to Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Owner: Defined in Construction Agreement. Owner may also be referred to as"Wal-Mart". 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Product Installation:Equipment and products will be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor unless otherwise-specified herein. B. Product Delivery: Unless otherwise specified hereinafter, Owner's supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. If significant order lead times are required for a specific product,lead time shall be as specified by the product supplier. C. Coordination: 1. Contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery and installation date,quantities of materials,and a coordination procedure.In the event Supplier contact cannot be made,contact Walmart RPS Construction Buyouts&Equipment. D. Owner Responsibilities: I. Arrange for delivery of supplier furnished shop drawings,product data,samples,and installation instructions to Contractor. APP A-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2. Arrange for delivery of replacement products upon notification from Owner's Construction Department of shortages,damage,or defects in products. 3. Arrange for repair of product manufacturing defects upon notification from Owner's Construction Department. 4. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site,in accordance with agreed upon construction management plan in Specifications Section 01320. a. Deliver supplier's shipment list of materials to Contractor. b. Submit claims for transportation damage. c. Arrange for replacement of damaged,defective,or missing items. d. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties,bonds,services,and inspections,as required. E. Contractor Responsibilities as specified in Specifications Section 01600: 1. Submit notice of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use the products to supplier and to Architect,Owner,and Owner's Construction Department. 2. Receive and unload products at the Site when specified. 3. Inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged,or defective items and report to Owner and Owner's Construction Department. 4. Handle products at site,including uncrating, storage,and protection unless otherwise specified. 5. Install products when specified. 6. Provide for installation and hook-up at time of delivery of Owner installed equipment. 7. Protect installed products from damage. 8. Replace items damaged by Contractor. 9. Remove trash,debris,and rubbish. 10. Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Owner's Construction Manager and Product Supplier. 1.5 CONTACTS A. Contact information for vendors of Owner Furnished Equipment is identified in the applicable specifications sections or on the drawings or will be made available to the Contractor at the Pre-Construction Conference or upon request by the Contractor to the Construction Manager. PART 2 AND 3—PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION SECTION 05120—STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 SUPPLIERS: A. Existing structural steel was provided by Owner's Structural Steel Supplier: Ellis Steel Company, Inc.,West Point, MS,Account Projects Manager(888)494-5955. SECTION 05210—STEEL JOISTS 1.1 SUPPLIERS: A. Existing steel joists were provided by Owner's Steel Joist Supplier: 1. Vulcraft, Alpharetta,GA(678)965-6667.Account Sales Manager: Bobby Wesley or Jimmy Owens. SECTION 05300—METAL DECK 1.1 SUPPLIERS: A. Existing metal deck was provided by Owner's Metal Deck Supplier will be one of the following as selected by Owner based on project proximity: 1. Verco Decking, Inc.—A Nucor Company,Phoenix,AZ. a. Account Sales Manager: Bobby Wesley or Jimmy Owens(678)965-6667. APP A-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 SECTION 13900—FIRE SUPPRESSION 1.1 PRODUCTS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Furnish fire extinguishers and mounting hardware for installation by Contractor within the store. 2. Fire extinguishers and mounting hardware at the fuel station(if applicable)shall be Contractor furnished and installed. B. Provide UL Listed(for Fire Protection)or FM Approved(for Fire Protection)materials complying with NFPA 13, unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents. SECTION 15100-BUILDING SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1.2 SUPPLIERS A. Owner's Supplier:Haines,Jones&Cadbury. Contact: Customer Service(800)459-7099, WMT cz.hjcinc.com 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Water Piping Specialties(Owner Furnished,Contractor Installed) 1. Piping specialties include products of manufacturers,types,and model numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Water piping specialties shall include such items as hose bibs,hydrants,valves, vacuum breakers, mixing valves, pressure reducing (regulating) valves, expansion tanks and accessories therefor. B. Drainage Piping Specialties(Owner Furnished,Contractor Installed) 1. Piping specialties include products of manufacturers,types,and model numbers as indicated on the Plumbing Schedules on the Drawings. Drainage piping specialties shall include floor and roof drains, deck drains, cleanouts and accessories therefor. 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Install garden center watering mats as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Owner's supplier instructions. Coordinate installation with Owner's Supplier and Walmart Store Planning. SECTION 15410-PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.5 SUPPLIER A. Owner's Supplier:Haines,Jones&Cadbury.Contact: Customer Service(800)459-7099,W'MT@hjcinc.com. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following to the Contractor.. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, maintenance and repair data,and parts listing for plumbing fixtures. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection:Listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated,and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2. Disabled Access: Conform to applicable local,State or Federal disabled access requirements for the operation of plumbing fixture. APP A-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 3. Lead-Free Compliance: Fixtures and fixture trim shall comply with the requirements of NSF 61 Annex G for lavatories,sinks and water coolers. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements,provide plumbing fixtures of manufacturers indicated on Drawings and by one of the following listed for that category. 1. Stop Valves: a. Brass Craft Subsidiary;Masco Co. b. Engineered Brass Company c. McGuire Manufacturing Co.,Inc. d. Watts Brass and Tubular e. Zurn Industries 2. P-traps,Strainers,Drains&Miscellaneous Fittings: a. Brass Craft Subsidiary;Masco Co. b. Dearborn Brass c. Engineered Brass Company d. McGuire Manufacturing Co.,Inc. e. Watts Brass and Tubular f. Zurn Industries 3. Insulation Kits a. Brocar b. McGuire c. Plumberex d. Trap-Wrap e. Truebro,Inc. 1.9 FIXTURES A. Fixture types and model numbers shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 1.10 FIXTURE TRIM A. Provide each fixture complete with required trim. B. Exposed piping and trim shall be polished chrome-plated brass. C. Provide each fixture with chrome-plated brass,quarter-turn angle stop valves. D. P-Traps and Sink Continuous Wastes: Polished chrome-plated, tubular brass, 17 gauge, with brass nuts on slip inlets,and of configurations indicated.P-traps shall have cleanout plugs. E. Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated with set screw. F. Stainless Steel (SS) Braided Water Supply: Flexible braided stainless steel outer sheathing with reinforced PVC inner tubing. G. Provide flow-limiting device which limits flow to not more than 2.2 gpm for each sink except service and 3- compartment sinks. Provide devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. H. Lavatory faucets for public use or within public restrooms shall be of the electronic self-closing type and shall have a maximum flow rate of 0.5 GPM in accordance with ASME/ANSI Al 12.18.1.Provide devices integral with fixture trim,wherever possible,and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. APP A-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 I. Flush Valves: Subject to compliance and compatible with plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings.Provide flush valves that do not exceed code requirements for maximum gallons per flush. J. Provide trim as required to permit scheduled lavatory to be installed for handicap use. K. Provide bolt caps with retainer clips on water closets. SECTION 15480-DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 1.11 SUPPLIER A. Owner's Supplier:Haines,Jones&Cadbury. Contact: Customer Service(800)459-7099,WMT@hjcinc.com 1.12 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Glass-lined electric storage-type water heater of size and capacity indicated on Drawings. 1. Heating elements shall be suitable for electrical current having characteristics indicated on Drawings, and complete with necessary operating and safety controls. 2. Each tank shall be equipped with magnesium anodes for corrosion protection. 3. Heaters shall be UL listed and labeled,meeting efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 90.1. 1.13 ACCESSORIES A. Relief Valves: Provide ASME and AGA stamped temperature and pressure relief valves, of the sizes and types required to meet ASME and AGA Code temperature steam rating for discharge capacity,unless valves are furnished as integral part of water heaters or water heating system storage tanks. B. Expansion Tanks: Provide expansion tank as scheduled on the drawings. Tank shall be closed type,welded steel, design working pressure of 125 psi,with internal diaphragm to separate water from air charge. 1.14 PUMPS A. Recirculation pumps for the water heating system shall be as scheduled on the drawings. SECTION 15700—HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 1.15 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Furnish the following heating,ventilating,and air conditioning equipment for installation by the Contractor. 1. Roof top air conditioning units unless otherwise shown. 2. Exhaust Fans 1.16 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: Each item of equipment available with capacity ratings certified by AMCA and/or ARI, shall be furnished with capacity ratings so certified. 1.17 WARRANTY A. Owner furnished equipment shall be turned over to Owner in good working order. Prior to acceptance by Owner, equipment failures are under manufacturer's warranty. Notify equipment warranty contact specified herein for replacement or reimbursement information prior to beginning repairs.After acceptance by Owner,Contractor is not responsible for warranty repair. 1.18 SYSTEM STARTUP APP A-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Roof top air conditioning units (RTU) and air handling unit (AHU) start-up shall be by the manufacturer factory trained personnel The RTU manufacturer will conduct two start-up visits.AHU manufacturer will conduct one start- up visit. Startup visits will include the following: 1. Initial Start-Up: a. Verify OEM equipment protections are functioning b. Verify motor/compressor rotation c. Verify motor amperage d. Verify gas pressure 2. Final Start-Up: a. Verify items from Initial Start-Up b. Complete manufacturer's equipment start-up procedure c. Verify unit sequence of operation B. Start-up of other Owner and Contractor furnished HVAC equipment will be by the General Contractor as specified in Specifications Section 15700. 1.19 ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Where required for roof top units, factory mount and wire smoke detectors in roof top unit unless noted otherwise on RTU schedule on Drawings. B. Manufacturer:Lennox,Inc. 1. Technical and Warranty Consultants,(866)659-0756: a. Jeff O'Dell,National Account Tech Consultant&Warranty Contact jeff.o'dell(a>.,lennoxind.com. b. Tommy Boneta, National Account Tech Consultant & Warranty Contact thomas.boneta@lennoxind.com 2. Start up and Commissioning Managers,(866)659-0756: a. Dedicated Owner's Technical,Pre Start,Commissioning Managers(866)659-0756. b. Jannelle Lopez, jannelle.lopez@ lennoxmas.com; or Courtney Marrero, Courtney.marreroCu lennoxnas.corn. 3. Equipment Quotes and Delivery contacts: a. Tina Haney (Primary Contact), Lennox National Accounts (972) 497-6260; tina.haney@lennoxind.com. b. Al White,Lennox National Account Sales(972)497-6856,al.white@lennoxind.com. c. Denisse Rovirosa, Lennox National Account Sales (972) 497-6925, denisse.rovirosa(c lennoxind.com. 4. Account Manager: a. Eddie Chavez,Lennox National Accounts,(972)497-5355,eddie.chavez(rilennoxind.com. 1.20 ROOF EXHAUST FANS: A. Low contour,spun aluminum hood and base sections with curb cap,bird screen,and other accessories as scheduled on Drawings. Provide centrifugal fans with direct or belt drive motor,mounted on resilient supports with isolators between support and base. Provide motor with thermal overloads.Locate motor out of exhaust air stream. Provide UL listed and AMCA certified fans,of capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled on Drawings. B. Supplier: AES Industries;Tallassee,AL,Contact:Chad Burt(800)786-0402,ad@aescurb.com SECTION 15800—AIR DISTRIBUTION 1.21 SUPPLIER A. AES Industries,Tallassee,AL,Contact: Chad Burt(800)786-0402,ad@aescurb.com 1.2 PRODUCTS APP A-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Furnish the following items as specified hereinafter for installation by the Contractor. 1. Volume Control Dampers—Manual 2. Air Inlets and Outlets 3. Drop Box Diffusers 4. Duct transitions and return air plenums 1.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manual Dampers: Manual volume-control dampers shall be of the type and model number as scheduled on the drawings.Frame and blades shall be galvanized steel. 1. Round Dampers:Dampers shall have end bearings and center locking control handle with position indicator. Control handle shall be Durodyne KL-7R, Durodyne SRST-2R, or Ventlok 639 with 2-inch extension to protect insulation. 2. Rectangular Dampers: Dampers shall have single blade or multiple inter-locked opposed blades with shaft bearings, 3/8 inch square control shaft and center locking control handle. Control handle shall be Durodyne KL7,Durodyne SRST-2R,or Ventlok 639 with 2-inch extension to protect insulation. B. Field fabricated dampers shall not be used. 1.4 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Grilles,registers,ceiling outlets,and ceiling inlets will be as indicated on Drawings.Wall mounted and hard ceiling mounted air inlets and outlets will be provided with heavy-duty sponge or soft felt gaskets. 1.5 DUCT TRANSITIONS AND RETURN AIR PLENUMS A. General: Supply air duct transitions and return air plenums for RTUs and AHUs with drop boxes will be paint grip steel per SMACNA duct construction standards and furnished with 1-1/2 inch flange turned out to fasten to roof curb. Return air opening will have a 1"x 1" 16 gauge wire mesh with removable frame. Install owner furnished neoprene gasket material for installation of transitions and plenums. Mounting accessory packages will be furnished with the drop box assembly. B. Coordination: Manufacturer will label and package duct transitions and return air plenums for each RTU and provide assembly instructions in each package. SECTION 16100— WIRING METHODS (OWNER FURNISHED ONLY AS NOTED BELOW, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) 1.6 Furnish and install fire and security alarm system. Contractor shall provide rough-in as specified in Specifications Section 16100. SECTION 16402—LOW VOLTAGE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 1.7 SUPPLIER A. Square D,Contact Sharon Nola(866)773-8326x5 Email: Sharon.Nolan(dschneider-electric.com. 1.8 PRODUCTS • A. Furnish the following electrical service and distribution equipment as shown on the drawings for installation by the Contractor: 1. Switchboards 2. Panelboards 3. Transformers 4. Contactors 5. Motor Starters APP A-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 6. Fuses B. Equipment shall bear name and trademark of manufacturer as listed above. C. Perform a fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination study. SECTION 16500—LIGHTING 1.9 PRODUCTS A. Furnish lighting fixtures and lamps as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule at the end of this Appendix and as indicated on Drawings,for installation'by Contractor. 1.10 SUPPLIERS A. AcuityBrands Lighting (Lithonia), Conyers, GA, (800) 207-0363, Wal-Mart Team. Steve Schroeder. Stephen.Schroeder(u acuitybrands.com\ B. LSI Industries,Cincinnati,OH,(800)436-7800,Ext.3213.Cheri Kieffer.cheri.kieffer@Isi-industries.com C. CREE Lighting,Morrisville,NC(501)448-2035,Gloria Lacher. D. GE Lighting Solutions,Cleveland,OH,Walmart GE Project Team,Walmart.teamAge.com,(216)266-4042. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear the label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 1.12 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Owner Responsibility: 1. Provision for oversupply of three percent additional fluorescent lamps with initial lighting fixture shipment. 2. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will be provided by vendor on site. 3. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. SECTION 16525-SITE LIGHTING 1.1 SITE LIGHTING LUMINAIRES A. Owner's Lighting Luminaire Vendor(s): Lighting fixtures will be supplied by one or more of the following as selected by Owner: 1. LSI Industries,Cincinnati,OH,(800) 436-7800,Ext.3213. Cheri Kieffer. cheri.kieffer(a lsi-industries.com. 2. GE Lighting Solutions,Cleveland,OH(216)266-4042,John Downing,Walmart outdoor( ge.com. 3. Cree,Durham,North Carolina,(630)232-4614,Brett Hikemann, brett hikemann@cree.com. 4. Visionaire,Rancho Dominguez,CA(877)977-5843.Katy Nicholson,(310)-512-6480 x423, knicholson(c visionalreltghting.com. 1.13 SITE LIGHTING POLE A. Owner's Pole Vendor(s): Poles will be supplied by one or more of the following as selected by Owner: 1. LSI Industries,Cincinnati,OH,(800)436-7800,Ext. 3213. Cheri Kieffer. cheri.kieffer@Isi-industries.com APP A-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and their electrical components will bear a UL Label. 1.15 OWNER RESPONSIBILITY: A. Costs for replacement for normal failure covered by warranty of any fixture,lamp,or ballast/driver prior to Grand Opening. Evaluation of abnormally high failure percentage and replacement covered under warranty will be provided by vendor on site. B. Costs for replacement of parts damaged during shipment. Charges will be made to shipping carrier or responsible party. SECTION 16700—COMMUNICATIONS(OWNER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ONLY AS NOTED BELOW) 1.16 VOICE/DATA SYSTEM A. Furnish and install voice/data cable equipment. DRAWING SHEET E1.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE IU.h!' o .: 4LV? �f5 p ul. :. 2 ACUITY Z 2 32 MVOLT ACNP NAWT 10 ACUITY 2GT8 2 32 Al2 MVOLT ADOPH LPGM850EX NAWT 16 ACUITY LQM S W 1 R 120/277 ELN SD90 M6 LeMSW 1 G120/277ELNSD90M6 Mil ACUITY ELM2 LED SD 27 ACUITY ELM627 SD90 RO NAWT ELA T 1206CS WP M12 68 CREE LR6C-DR1000-GU24-H6-GU24 APP A-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Specification Description Furnished By Received By Installed By Section Electrical Drawings Fire and Security Alarm System • Fire Alarm System Owner Owner Owner • Burglar Alarm System Owner Owner Owner END OF SCHEDULE APP A-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC): 1. AISC 303-Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC 360-Structural Steel Buildings. 3. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A 14.3-Ladders,Fixed,Safety Requirements. 2. ANSI A 108, A 118, A 136 - American National Standards for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Includes ANSI A108.01,A108.02,A108.1A-C, 108.4-.13,A118.1-.12, and ANSI A136.1) 3. ANSI A 108.02-Materials,Environmental,and Workmanship,General Requirements. 4. ANSI A 108.5-Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 5. ANSI A117.1 -Guidelines For Accessible And Usable Buildings And Facilities. 6. ANSI A 118.4-Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 7. ANSI A 137.1 -Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 8. ANSI A 156.2-Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 9. ANSI A 156.6-Architectural Door Trim. 10. ANSIBHMA A 156.9-Cabinet Hardware. 11. ANSI(BHMA)A156.10-Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 12. ANSIBHMA A 156.11 -Cabinet Locks. 13. ANSI A 156.13-Mortise Locks and Latches. 14. ANSI A 156.15 -Release Devices-Closer Holder,Electromagnetic and Electromechanical. 15. ANSIBHMA A 156.18-Materials&Finishes. 16. ANSI A208.1 -Particleboard. 17. ANSI A208.2-Medium Density Fiberboard For Interior Use. 18. ANSI A250.6-Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 19. ANSI A250.8(Formerly SDI-100)-Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 20. ANSI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 21. ANSI A250.11 (Formerly SDI-105)-Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 22. ANSI B 16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 23. ANSI B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 24. ANSI B 16.22-Wrought Copper&Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure. 1) ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 -Pipe Threads,General Purpose(Inch). 25. ANSI B93.4-Hydraulic Line Welded Tubing. 26. ANSI C 12.1 -Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering. 1) ANSI/ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping 27. ANSI C 12.20-Standard for Electricity Meter-0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes. 28. ANSI Z97.1 - For Safety Glazing Materials Used In Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods Of Test. 29. ANSI Z97.1 -Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. 30. ANSI MH16.1 -Specifications for the Design,Testing and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 47-Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A 53-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 4. ASTM A74-Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM A 108-Steel Bar,Carbon and Alloy,Cold-Finished. 6. ASTM A 123 -Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 7. ASTM A 153 -Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 8. ASTM A 234-Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. APP A-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 9. ASTM A 240-Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 10. ASTM A 249/A-Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater,Heat-Exchanger,and Condenser Tubes. 11. ASTM A 269-Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 12. ASTM A 307-Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 13. ASTM A 325-Structural Bolts,Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 14. ASTM A 463 -Steel Sheet,Aluminum Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 15. ASTM A 490-Structural Bolts,Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 16. ASTM A 500-Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 17. ASTM A 501 -Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing 18. ASTM A 536-Ductile Iron Castings. 19. ASTM A 653-Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot- Dip Process. 20. ASTM A 666-Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip,Plate,and Flat Bar. 21. ASTM A 591 -Steel Sheet,Electrolytic Zinc-Coated,for Light Coating Mass Applications. 22. ASTM A 792-Steel Sheet,55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 23. ASTM A 795-Black And Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use. 24. ASTM A861 -High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. 25. ASTM A 865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For Use In Steel Pipe joints. 26. ASTM A888-Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 27. ASTM A 992-Structural Steel Shapes. 28. ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened,Baked Hardenable. 29. ASTM A 1011 -Steel,Sheet and Strip,Hot-Rolled,Carbon,Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy and High- Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 30. ASTM B75-Seamless Copper Tube. 31. ASTM B88-Seamless Copper Water Tube. 32. ASTM B135 -Seamless Brass Tube. 33. ASTM B 221 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods,Wire,Profiles,and Tubes. 34. ASTM B 280-Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 35. ASTM B306-Copper Drainage Tube(DWV). 36. ASTM B584-Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 37. ASTM B306-Copper Drainage Tube(DWV). 38. ASTM B584-Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 39. ASTM B 221 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods,Wire,Profiles,and Tubes. 40. ASTM B 813-Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. 41. ASTM C 553-Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications 42. ASTM C564-Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 43. ASTM C 578-Rigid,Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 44, ASTM C 921 -Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 45. ASTM C 1107-Packaged Dry,Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Nonshrink). 46. ASTM C 1048-Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS,Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 47. ASTM C 1071 -Thermal and Acoustical Insulation(Mineral Fiber,Dust Lining Material. 48. ASTM C 1136-Flexible,Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation 49. ASTM C1277-Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Castiron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 50. ASTM C1540-Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 51. ASTM C 1290-Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts 52. ASTM C 1710-Installation of Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form. 53. ASTM D570- Standard Test Method For Water Absorption Of Plastics 54. ASTM D648 - Standard Test Method For Deflection Temperature Of Plastics Under Flexural Load In The Edgewise Position 55. ASTM D695-Standard Test Method For Compressive Properties Of Rigid Plastics 56. ASTM D732-Standard Test Method For Shear Strength Of Plastics By Punch Tool 57. ASTM D 1187-Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 58. ASTM D 1785 -Poly vinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40, 80,and 120. APP A-12 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 59. ASTM D2000-Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 60. ASTM D2240-Standard Test Method For Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness 61. ASTM D 2466-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 40. 62. ASTM D2467-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80. 63. ASTM D 2564-Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 64. ASTM D 2665-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Drain,Waste,and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 65. ASTM D2609-Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene(PE)Plastic Pipe. 66. ASTM D 2855-Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe and Fittings. 67. ASTM D3311 -Drain,Waste,and Vent(DWV)Plastic Fittings Patterns 68. ASTM D 4985 - Low Silicate Ethylene Glycol Base Engine Coolant for Heavy Duty Engines Requiring a Pre-Charge of Supplemental Coolant Additive(SCA). 69. ASTM D5420-Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat,Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight(Gardner Impact) 70. ASTM E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 71. ASTM E96-Water Vapor Transmission Materials. 72. ASTM E 119-Fire Tests Of Building Construction And Materials. 73. ASTM E152-Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 74. by the Hot-Dip Process. 75. ASTM E 330-Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors,Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 76. ASTM E 648-Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 77. ASTM E 662-Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 78. ASTM E 709-Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing 79. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s)and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 80. ASTM E 1996 - Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 81. ASTM E 2129-Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products. 82. ASTM F439-Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80. 83. ASTM F441 -Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40 And 80. 84. ASTM F493-Solvent Cements for CPVC Pipe and Fittings. 85. ASTM F656-Primers For Use in Solvents Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 86. ASTM F 710-Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 87. ASTM F876-Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing. 88. ASTM F877-Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems. 89. ASTM F 1066-Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. 90. ASTM F 1700-Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. 91. ASTM F1807 - Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX)tubing. 92. ASTM F1861 -Resilient Wall Base 93. ASTM F 1869-Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. 94. ASTM F 2169-Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads. 95. ASTM F 2389-Pressure-rated Polypropylene(PP)Piping Systems. 96. ASTM F1807 - Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX)tubing. 97. ASTM F 1960-Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX)Tubing. 98. ASTM F2014-Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications. 99. ASTM F2023 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Oxidative Resistance of Plastic Piping to Hot Chlorinated Water. 100. ASTM F2098-Stainless Steel Clamps for Securing SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing to Metal Insert Fittings. 101. ASTM-F2389-Pressure-rated Polypropylene(PP)Piping Systems. APP A-13 Oudot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 1. AMCA 500-D-Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. AMCA 500-L-Laboratory Methods for Testing Louvers for Rating. E. Aluminum Association(AA): 1. Specifications for Aluminum Structures. F. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers(AAADM): 1. AAADM Inspector Certification Program. G. American Petroleum Institute(API): 1. API 1615-Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage Systems. H. American Plywood Association(APA): APA-Grades&Specifications. I. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural'Engineering Institute(ASCE/SEI) 1. ASCE/SEI 7-Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. J. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ASME B 1.1 -Unified Inch Screw Threads(UN and UNR Thread Form). 3. ASME B 16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings. 4. ASME B 16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 5. ASME B 16.4-Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 6. ASME B 16.5-Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 7. ASME B 16.9-Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 8. ASME B 16.11 -Forged Fittings,Socket-Welding And Threaded. 9. ASME B 31.5-Refrigeration Piping Standard 10. ASME/ANSI A112.18.1 -Plumbing Fixture Fittings. K. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE): 1. ASHRAE Standard 90.1-Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. L. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA): 1. 28 CFR Part 36-ADA Standards for Accessible Design. M. American Water Works Association(AWWA): 1. AWWA C104-Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA Cl 15-Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 3. AWWA C1'51 -Ductile-Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast. 4. AWWA C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains. N. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. O. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC)/Woodwork Institute(WI)- Joint Publication: 1. AWI/AWMAC/WI-Architectural Woodwork Standards. P. British Standards Institution(BSI): 1. BS 302-Stranded Steel Wire Ropes. Q. Carpet and Rug Institute(CRI): 1. CRI 104-Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. APP A-14 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 R. Consumer Product Safety Commission(CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CPR Part 1201. S. Door and Access Systems Manufacturer's Association International(DASMA) 1. DASMA 102-Sectional Overhead-Type Doors 2. DASMA 108 - Standard Method for Testing Sectional Garage Doors and Rolling Doors: Determination of Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. T. Factory Mutual System(FM): 1. FM-Approval Guide,Chapter 18-Building Materials. 2. FM Standard 4430-Test Criteria for Heat and Smoke Vents. 3. Approval Guide,Latest edition. 4. FM Data Sheet 8-3,Current Edition-Rubber Tire Storage. U. Hydraulic Institute(HI): 1. HI M103(ANSI/HI 1.4)-Centrifugal Operations. V. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials(IAPMO): 1. IAPMO/ANSI Z1001-Prefabricated Gravity Grease Interceptors. W. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers(NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. X. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA): 1. NEMA AB 1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA LD3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. Y. National Fenestration Rating Council(NFRC): 1. NFRC 100-Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. 2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance of Normal Incidence. Z. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 13, 1999[2002][2007][2010][2013]Edition-Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 20, 1999[2003][2007][2010][2013]Edition-Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. 3. NFPA 24, 20022007[2010][2013] Edition - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances. 4. NFPA 30-Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 5. NFPA 30A-Automotive and Marine Service Station Code. 6. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code. 7. NFPA 70-National Electric Code. 8. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. 9. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 10. NFPA 90B-Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems 11. NFPA 96-Ventilation Control And Fire Protection Of Commercial Cooking Operations 12. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 13. NFPA 252-Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 15. NFPA 701 -Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films. AA. North American Fenestration Standard(NAFS): 1. AAMA\WDMA\CSA\101\I.S.2\A440-The Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows,Doors, and Skylights. BB. North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association(NAIMA) 1. AH 124-Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard APP A-15 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 CC. NSF International(NSF): 1. NSF 14-Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials. 2. NSF 51 —Food Equipment Materials 3. NSF 61 —Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects. 4. NSF 61 Annex G - Weighted Average Lead Content Evaluation Procedure to a 0.24 Percent Lead Requirement. DD. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA): 1. OSHA 1910.23 Walking Working Surfaces. 2. OSHA 1926.502 Fall Protection. EE. Plumbing and Drainage Institute(PDI): 1. PDI WH 201-Water Hammer Arrestors. FF. Research Council on Structural Connections(RCSC): 1. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. GG. Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA): 1. SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible HH. Society of Automotive Engineers(SAE): 1. SAE J525-Welded and Cold Drawn Low Carbon Steel Tubing Annealed for Bending and Flaring.Steel Deck Institute(SDI): 1. Design Manual for Composite Decks,Form Decks,Roof Decks. (SDI Design Manual) JJ. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-SP 2-Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC SP-3—Power Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating Type I-Inorganic And Type II—Organic. 4. SSPC-Paint 25-Red Iron Oxide,Zinc Oxide,Raw Linseed Oil,and Alkyd Primer. 5. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating Type I-Inorganic and Type II-Organic. 6. SSPC-Paint 25 -Zinc Oxide,Alkyd,Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I And Type II. 7. SSPC-PA 1 -Shop,Field,and Maintenance Painting of Steel. KK. Tile Council of North America,Inc.(TCNA): 1. TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. LL. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL 10B-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305-Panic Hardware. 3. UL 508-Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. 4. UL Fire Protection Directory—Latest Edition. 5. UL 778—Motor-Operated Water Pumps. 6. UL 857—Busways. 7. UL Fire Protection Directory—Latest Edition APP A-16 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 UniSpec 042415a APPENDIX B TESTING AND INSPECTION BY OWNER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner's quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. C. Unless otherwise specified, provisions specified herein are included as requirements for Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory (CTL), Owner's consultants, or other testing or inspections agencies hired by the Owner and shall be considered information only to Contractor. D. Related Requirements: 1. Construction Contract between Walmart and Contractor: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.Contractor obligations to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. Section 01452 - Contractor Quality Control: Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor quality assurance and quality control. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this Appendix to the extent referenced.The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO) 1. AASHTO RI8 - Establishing and Implementing a Quality System for Construction Materials Testing Laboratories. 2. AASHTO T318 - Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying (Formerly AASHTO TP 23) A. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. ACI 305.1 -Hot Weather Concreting. C. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 31 -Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C 39-Concrete Specimens,Compressive Strength of. 3. ASTM C 42-Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 4. ASTM C 129-Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 5. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density(Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content(Gravimetric) of Concrete. 6. ASTM C 143-Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 7. ASTM C 172-Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 8. ASTM C 173-Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 9. ASTM C 174-Standard Test Method for Measuring Thickness of Concrete Elements Using Drilled Concrete Cores 10. ASTM C 231 -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C 318—Gypsum Formboard 12. ASTM C 1019-Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 13. ASTM C 1064-Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement Concrete. APP B-1 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 14. ASTM C 1077-Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 15. ASTM C 1093-Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. 16. ASTM D 1633 -Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders. 17. ASTM D 3740 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 18. ASTM D 3666-Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials. 19. ASTM D 6938 — In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 20. ASTM E 165-Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry. 21. ASTM E 329-Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection Of Materials Used in Construction. 22. ASTM E 543 -Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. 23. ASTM E 699-Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing,Quality Assurance,and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6. 24. ASTM E 709-Magnetic Particle Testing. 25. ASTM E 1155-Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System(Inch-Pound Units). A. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3-Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. A. Research Council on Structural Connections(RCSC): 1. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. D. Masonry Standards Joint Committee(MSJC): 1. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE5 and TMS 602/ACI 530/ASCE 6 - Building Code Requirements and Specifications for Masonry Structures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Testing: Evaluation of systems,primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials,in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and engineering judgment. C. Observation: Evaluation of systems primarily requiring observation and professional judgment. D. Quality Assurance: Activities,actions,and procedures performed by the Contractor before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will substantially comply with construction documents. E. Quality Control: Tests, inspections,procedures, and related actions performed by the Contractor during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction substantially comply with construction documents. F. Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL):The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner. G. Contractor: The General(prime)Contractor for the Project. Also referred to as GC. H. Architect of Record(AOR):The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the building. I. Engineer of Record(EOR):The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of engineering design for the project. J. Structural Engineer of Record(SER):The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for the project. APP B-2 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 K. Civil Engineering Consultant (CEC): The Registered Engineer in responsible charge of the civil design for the project. L. Architect-Engineer(A/E): A collective term to include the AOR,CEC,SER,and the Mechanical,Electrical,and Fire Protection EOR. M. Fire Protection Consultant: Consultant that provides professional design services and construction documents related to fire protection for the project. N. Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL):The independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner: O. Building Official:The Officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and enforcement of the local building code. P. Special Inspector(SI): The Special Inspector under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer (unless otherwise specified)regularly engaged in inspection,and experienced with the type of work requiring related testing and inspection.The categories of special inspector are: 1. Technical I(TI):A Technician who is an employee of a qualified and approved testing laboratory.Lab work shall be performed in a qualified testing laboratory. 2. Technical II (TII): A Technician with a minimum of 2 years' experience, or a graduate engineer, and is an employee of a qualified and approved testing laboratory. 3. Technical III(TIII):An engineer regularly engaged in related work with a minimum of 4 years of experience, licensed in the State in which the project is located,and is an employee of a qualified and approved testing laboratory.This licensed engineer shall review and approve all final field reports. 4. Structural I(StI):A graduate civil/structural engineer,or other trained and experienced personnel acceptable to the SER,with experience in the testing and inspection of related structural systems. 5. Structural II(StII): A civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in related work with a minimum of 4 years of experience, licensed in the State in which the project is located. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports. 6. Unique special inspector requirements, for specific materials and system, are noted in related technical specification sections. Q. Continuous Inspection: The full-time observation of work requiring inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in the area where the work is being performed. R. Periodic Inspection:The part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in the area where the work has been or is being performed and at the completion of the work. S. Deviation: Any item or component of work that does not substantially conform to the requirements of the construction plans and/or specifications and which has not been corrected by the end of business on the day it is identified.A life-safety deviation is any construction deviation that poses a serious hazard to any person. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION TESTING LABORATORY(CTL)QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. CTL shall comply with requirements of ASTM C 1077,ASTM C 1093,ASTM D 3740,ASTM D 3666,ASTM E 329,ASTM E 543,ASTM E 699,and AASHTO R18. B. CTL shall be authorized to operate in state in which Project is located. C. CTL Testing Equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST)standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. D. CTL shall have and maintain a written Quality Manual (QM) for its laboratory conforming to the Appendix requirements ASTM E 329 or AASHTO R18. The QM shall be available for review by the Owner's Construction APP B-3 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Manager upon request. The QM shall be organized similar to Quality Manual Requirements of AASHTO R18 and include the following: 1. Organization and Organizational Policies. 2. Staff. 3. Equipment. 4. Test Data Control and Reports. 5. Diagnostic and Corrective Action. 6. Internal Quality System Review. 7. Subcontracting. 8. Statement certifying compliance with ASTM standards specified above. 1.5 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Employment and payment for services of the Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL), Special Inspector(SI),and other third party testing,inspection,and observation firms to perform specified testing and inspecting will be by the Owner under separate contract. B. The Owner will perform testing and inspection (T & I) but only as a means to satisfy the Owner of contract compliance and as assurance to the Owner of Contractor quality control performance. C. Owner T&I specified herein below will be performed by the Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL)unless otherwise specified. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION TESTING LABORATORY AND SPECIAL INSPECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Responsibilities include inspections,tests,and related actions including reports performed by testing or inspection service. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Owner's Construction Manager or authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide the Architect of Record a copy of the contractual provisions defining the CTL's and SI's scope of services. B. The CTL/SI representative shall attend a pre-construction meeting prior to actual start of the Project. The CTL/SI representative shall be the Registered Professional Engineer assigned to the project. C. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. Use the Contract Documents supplemented by the approved shop drawings and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the Code for testing and inspection of the work. D. Provide qualified personnel at site to comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as defined hereinafter. Testing and inspection shall be under supervision of the Registered Professional Engineer(P.E.)in the state where Project is located. E. Perform specified inspection,sampling,and testing of work,materials,and equipment in accordance with specified standards. F. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Perform testing and inspections in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. Schedule and coordinate testing and inspections with Contractor and appropriate sub-contractors and installers. H. Coordinate and consolidate specified testing and inspection to be concurrent, to the maximum extent practicable, during each required site visit in order to minimize number of visits. I. If observed deviations from the Contract Drawings, Specifications, or building code will be probable cause of subsequent rejection of work or material, notify Contractor, the Owner's Construction Manager, Sitework Engineering Consultant, and Architect of Record,sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations APP B-4 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 or take corrective measures before continuing. If uncorrected after a reasonable period of time,bring the situation to the attention of the Structural Engineer of Record,the Building Official,and to the Architect of Record. J. Track resolutions and remedial repairs to deviations and subsequent conformance to the Contract Documents on the Observation Log. K. Report any observed life safety issue immediately to Contractor and Owner's Construction Manager. After notification is given to the Contractor and the Owner's Construction Manager, the CTL/SI shall also log the life safety issue on Owner's Observation Log. L. Perform retesting due to non-conformance with the Contract Documents based on CTL testing. M. Provide a final conformance letter to Owner, the SER the AOR and, if determined to be required, the AHJ. An example is attached at the end of this Appendix. N. Testing and inspection by the Building Official do not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by Architect or Structural Engineer of Record, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. O. Construction Testing Laboratory And Special Inspector Limits On Authority:The CTL or SI may not: 1. Release,revoke,alter,or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Stop the Work. P. Testing and inspecting services performed by the CTL (Construction Testing Laboratory) are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. 1. CTL services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements nor limit Contractor's quality assurance and quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Specific testing and inspection requirements for individual construction activities shall be as specified in the individual Appendix Sections. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by Architect, Owner,Construction Manager,or authorities having jurisdiction do not limit responsibilities of the CTL. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with CTL/SI and other third party personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. B. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,to facilitate tests and inspections,and to provide storage and curing of test samples.Provide lift equipment as required for inspection personnel of the Owner or the Owner's representatives. C. Provide CTL 24 hour notice prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. D. Notify in writing the Owner's Construction Manager three working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. E. Provide the CTL/SI with access to the internet for the purpose of logging deviations onto the Wal-Mart Observation Log on the Wal-Mart Building Portal website. 1.8 CONSTRUCTION TESTING LABORATORY REPORTS A. The CTL or other Owner's testing firm shall submit reports for T&I and other items as required herein. APP B-5 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. CTL Information: Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time Registered Engineer and responsible officer. C. Test and Inspection Reports: 1. Submit test and inspection reports showing the following information: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Store number. d. Firm name and address. e. Name and signature of tester or inspector. f. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge(as applicable). g. Date and time of sampling. h. Date of test or inspection. i. Identification of product and specification section. j. Location in project,including elevations,grid location and detail. k. Type of test or inspections. 1. Results of tests or inspections and interpretation of same. m. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom. D. Submit required reports and other items to the following: 1. CEC: 1 copy.(Site work T&I only) 2. SER: 1 copy(Construction Administration Leader)(Bldg T&I only) 3. AOR:2 copies(Construction Administration Leader). 4. Contractor: 3 copies. 5. Building Official:Quantities as required. E. Submit a separate final signed report stating the work requiring inspection is,to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the Contract Documents. F. Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and binding in booklet form. Sheets shall have the CTL letterhead(including phone number and address). Larger sheets shall be folded and bound into the booklet. G. Submit Test and Inspection Reports within 3 working days of T&I occurrence. H. Tests and inspections indicating non-conformance(deviations)to the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the Contractor, Sitework Engineering Consultant,and Architect of Record upon discovery in the form of hard copy reports and entered into the Wal-Mart Observation Log within 24 hours. I. Deviations from the Contract Documents,as defined above,shall be logged onto the Wal-Mart Observation Log by the CTL/SI representative on site. (www.bldgportal.com), enter username and password, select Observation Log. Follow instructions on the Observation Log website for entry of information. J. Owner's Construction Manager in conjunction with the CTL and/or SI will determine when to involve the AOR or EOR for remedial action. PART 2-PART 2 and 3—PRODUCTS and EXECUTION 2.1 TESTING AND INSPECTION BY OWNERS CONSTRUCTION TESTING LABORATORY(CTL) A. General Requirements: 1. Testing shall be conducted as specified hereinafter listed by sections corresponding to section numbers of the Specifications. Sections related to CTL responsibilities include the following: a. 03312—Cast-in-Place Concrete Slabs(Interior) b. 03362—Burnished Concrete Floor Finishes c. 05090—Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors APP B-6 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 d. 05120—Structural Steel e. 05210—Steel Joists f. 05300—Steel Deck g. 05400—Cold Formed Metal Framing h. 09511 —Acoustical Panel Ceilings 2. Tests and inspections shall, as a minimum, be performed by Technical I (TI) inspector if not otherwise specified in the individual section. 3. If inspection of fabricators work is required,the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant before shipment. 4. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the industry standard used as the reference for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified.In the absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 5. Work shall be checked as it progresses,but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. B. Testing or inspection in addition to that specified herein,shall be performed by the CTL as directed by the Owner for in-place work as further verification of Work or as verification of Contractor performed Quality Control testing and inspection. 2.2 TESTING,INSPECTION AND OBSERVATION BY OTHER THAN CTL A. Testing, inspection, and observation shall be as specified hereinafter listed by sections corresponding to section numbers of the Specifications APP B-7 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 SECTION 01454-ARCHITECT-ENGINEER SITE OBSERVATION 2.1 CONTRACTOR AND OWNER COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Contractor Responsibilities are specified in Specification Section 01454. B. Owner's Architect-Engineers(A/E)will perform site observation at no cost to the Contractor. 2.2 SITE OBSERVATION A. The A/E will perform construction site observations as agreed to with the Owner as listed below or as otherwise requested by the Authority Having Jurisdiction or the Owner to check a sample of the constructed Work for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Site visits noted below shall occur at one time for all work between tenant. 2. Additional,required special construction site observations will be performed by the A/E as indicated below in site visit descriptions. 3. During the course of construction,site visits determined by the A/E as required by regulatory or jurisdictional mandate shall be performed upon approval by the Owner based on written recommendation and request by the A/E to the Owner. A/E CONSULTANT SITE OBSERVATION/FPT (SITE VISIT)SCHEDULE Construction e Occurrence ` o U Discipline Architectural 1st Mechanical,Electrical,Plumbing&Fire Protection 1st *Site Visit Sequence. B. Construction occurrences listed in the above schedule are related to the construction schedule. C. Specific items to be witnessed during the construction site observation are listed below in more detail by discipline to assist in scheduling the site observation at the proper time. D. Architectural: Architectural consultant site observation shall be by a competent representative of the AOR having complete knowledge of the project. Site visits shall include the following: 1. 1st Visit: Verify egress compliance. Verify ADA compliance with regard to fixture mounting, clearances, floor transitions,etc. E. Mechanical: 1. 1st Visit: Verify grease/oil separator installation. Verify types of plumbing materials, roof-top unit installation,above slab plumbing installation,gas piping,flue installation,roof drains,roof drain piping,and ductwork installation. Observe final finish out including diffusers and escutcheons, and final equipment installation. F. Fire Protection: 1. 1st Visit: Verify type of material, underground stub-up, main locations and elevations, hanger and hanger spacing, available water supply, conformance with the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Review sprinkler locations, mains, and branch line installation. Verify system acceptance testing including but not limited to fire pump flow test,exhaust hood fire suppression system test,and dry pipe valve trip test. APP B-8 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 G. Electrical: 1. 14 Visit: Verify finish out of panels, circuiting, lighting, grounding, and exit signs. Verify Building Automation System cable is installed in conduit,wires labeled,wires landed on correct points, and correct number of wires in the conduit. H. The A/E shall monitor the construction schedule and coordinate with the Contractor to schedule site visits to occur at the most appropriate time. The A/E shall notify the Contractor and Owner's Construction Manager when travel arrangements are made in advance of the date and time of each scheduled site visit. I. Testing and inspections by the Building Official shall not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by the A/E,nor will it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. J. The A/E shall not have control over or responsibility for construction means,techniques,sequences of operations or for safety programs and procedures in connection with the construction work. K. The A/E will provide observation reports,via the on-line Observation Log,to the Owner. L. Work will be observed as it progresses and/or as completed as applicable but failure to detect defective work or materials shall not prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered,nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. M. Documentation: 1. Summarize observations with Contractor before leaving the site. 2. Contact Owner's Construction Manager within 1 business day by e-mail or phone to provide a brief summary of site observation. 2.3 DEFICIENCY PROVISIONS N. The observation site visit listed above is to be performed at Owner's expense. Should there be outstanding items of non-conformance with the Contract Documents that warrant additional site visits to be performed by the A/E,the A/E shall receive approval from the Owner prior to performing additional construction site observations or FPTs until all deviations have been corrected by the Contractor and closed by the A/E. Reimbursement by the Contractor for costs for additional A/E site visits will be as specified in Section 01452. SECTION 01455-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 2.4 CONTRACTOR AND OWNER COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Contractor Responsibilities are specified in Specification Section 01455. B. Employment and payment for services for the Contrractor to perform specified testing and balancing of environmental systems will be by Owner,except as otherwise specified. 2.5 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING BY CONTRACTOR A. Testing and balancing shall be supervised by a Registered Professional Engineer. Personnel involved in execution of the work for Contractor shall be technicians experienced and trained specifically in testing and balancing of mechanical systems. Instruments used by Contractor shall be recently and accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. Verification of equipment calibration shall be submitted in final test report if requested by Owner. Test, adjust, and balance specified equipment in accordance with governing NEBB or AABC Procedural Standards. B. Procedures: 1. Make preliminary system check on mechanical, control, and Building Automation Systems and equipment to be tested to determine that equipment, duct work, etc. is installed and will operate. Deficiencies shall be APP B-9 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 immediately reported to Contractor's job site superintendent and the Owner Mechanical Construction Manager. 2. Air Side Testing And Balancing: Perform the following air side testing and balancing for RTUs, AHUs, WSHPs,exhaust fans and exhaust hoods. Record readings for inclusion into final report: a. Record unit manufacturer,model number,and unit number. b. Test and adjust fan speeds to deliver design CFM and record for each unit. c. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. d. Measure and record unit voltage,amperage and fan speeds and final operating conditions. e. Test and record supply and return external static pressures at respective plenums. Seal access holes with rubber or metal snap-in plugs. The use of duct tape to seal access holes will not be permitted. f. Test and adjust the volume dampers in the main duct runs to each diffuser, grille, and register to provide±10%of design CFM requirements. g. Identify each diffuser,grille,and register location and area. h. Provide AHU unit static pressure profile including unit suction static pressure, fan suction static pressure,and fan discharge static pressure. 3. If any system or outlet is not within+/- 10 percent of design capacity at design rpm,determine the reason. Check duct work and plenums for leaks; coils, filter, for excessive pressure drop, etc.; and list on HVAC Deficiency Report. C. Reports: 1. Testing and balancing data,measurements,reading,verification,settings,and deficiencies shall be recorded and compiled in a complete report. Record data on applicable NEBB or AABC certified reporting forms. Report shall include summary sheet of deficiencies with status(corrected or not corrected at time of report) and recommendations. 2. Upload report to Wal-Mart Building Portal website within seven days after final test and balance. 3. Before leaving job site,Contrator shall provide to the Owner,a list of remaining HVAC system deficiencies for correction. D. Guarantee test and balance for period of 90 days from date of final acceptance of the Test and Balance Report. During this period,the Contractor shall correct deficiencies at no cost to Owner SECTION 03312—CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLABS(INTERIOR) 1.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. Keep records of the testing and inspections. B. CTL is neither authorized to change any specified requirement nor to approve any portion of the work. C. Owner's Concrete Consultant(SSI) is not authorized to change any specified requirement or to approve execution of any portion of the work. D. Failure to detect defective material or Work will neither prevent rejection when defects are discovered later nor will it obligate Owner to make final acceptance. E. Qualifications:Unless otherwise specified,work shall be performed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I.In addition to the Inspector and CTL qualifications specified in Section 01458,the following qualifications shall apply for all Cast-in-Place Concrete inspection. 1. Technical I:ACI Certified Grade I inspector. 2. Technical II:ACI Certified Grade II inspector. 3. CTL:C.C.R.L.certification at the National Bureau of Standards.(For multi-story projects only) 4. Lead technician shall have at least five years' experience in projects of this size and complexity. 5. Other technicians shall have at least two years'experience. F. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. APP B-10 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 G. Perform testing in accordance with testing standards listed herein. H. Field Testing: 1. Slump,Air Content,and Concrete Materials Temperature Tests: a. Test Methods: 1. Slump-ASTM C 143. 2. Concrete materials temperature-ASTM C 1064. 3. Air content-ASTM C 173 or C 231. 4. Unit weight-ASTM C138. 5. Compressive Strength-ASTM C31,39 b. Periodic Test Frequencies: 1. Conduct slump,air content,and temperature tests for the first placement of concrete and every 150 CY placed thereafter for each mix of concrete placed each day.If any test fails on the first placement,test at 50 CY for the corresponding failing test. If any test fails during normal 150 CY test intervals, test at next 50 CY for the corresponding failing test. Notify the Owner's Construction Manager upon failure of any second failing test. 2. Make cylinder sets for compressive strength testing once each day a given mix design is placed, and not less than once for each 150 cubic yards of each mix placed each day, nor less than once for each 5,000 square feet of each mix for slab surface area placed each day. 3. If pumping concrete is approved,take additional samples for slump tests at point of delivery from pumping line. 2. Flatness and Levelness Testing: a. Test floor slab finished surface areas shown on drawings for flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E 1155,except as specified herein. b. Perform testing at random on the first placement of the exposed sales floor slab and randomly on other placements as directed by the Owner's Construction Manager or as directed by Owner. c. F-Number requirements shall be as follows for all interior sales floor slabs. 1. FF/FL minimum overall for composite of measured values (SOV) for entire day's concrete placement;FF/FL minimum for any individual floor section(MLV)as specified in Tolerances paragraph. d. Bound individual floor sections for testing purposes by the following that provide the smallest sections: construction joints,contraction joints or column and half-colunm lines. e. Conform to F-numbers specified for floor areas within 2 feet of construction and isolation joints, in lieu of ASTM E 1155 requirements that exclude these areas. f. Ensure top of entire floor falls within tolerances specified in Tolerances paragraph for finished floor elevation. 3. Complete testing, identify defective areas, and give verbal report to Owner's Construction Manager within 24 hours after placement. 4. Submit written report by electronic means or hand deliver to parties concerned within 36 hours or next regularly scheduled working day(Mon-Sat),after placement. Include costs for retesting replaced or repaired defective areas. 5. Note trends of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons,conditions of curing,or other causes and bring to attention of the Owner's Construction Manager.Report and log comments on Non-Conformance Correction Log. 6. Verify each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck,and time at which concrete was discharged from truck. 7. Verify that the proper amount of densifier has been applied to the concrete floor slab surface. Laboratory Testing Requirements: 1. Test items such as reinforcing steel, aggregates, and other products suspected of not meeting specified requirement as directed by Owner's Construction Manager to verify compliance. Provide test report to Owner's Construction Manager. 2. In-place tests in accordance with ASTM C 42 shall be conducted as directed by the Owner's Construction Manager when specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structures. 3. Tests: APP B-11 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 a. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Sample at regularly spaced intervals from middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed 15 minutes. b. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31. 1. During the initial 24 hours(plus or minus 8 hours)after molding,the temperature immediately adjacent to the specimens shall be maintained in the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. Control loss of moisture from the specimens by shielding from the direct rays of the sun and from radiant heating devices. 2. Specimens transported prior to 48 hours after molding shall not be demolded, but shall continue initial curing at 60 to 80 degrees F until time for transporting. 3. Specimens transported after 48 hours age shall be demolded in 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours).Curing shall then be continued but in saturated limewater at 73.4 degrees(plus or minus 3 degrees F)until the time of transporting. 4. During transportation, protect the specimens with suitable cushioning material to prevent damage from jarring. During cold weather, protect specimens from freezing with suitable insulation material.Transportation time shall not exceed four hours. 5. Date test cylinders and number consecutively. Give each cylinder of each set an identifying letter(i.e.A,B,C,D).Prepare a sketch of the building plan for each test set identifying location of placed concrete. c. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 39. 1. Test one cylinder(A) at 7 days for information. If the compressive strength of the concrete sample is equal to or above the 28 day specified strength,test another cylinder(B)at 7 days. The average of the breaks shall constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. 2. Test two cylinders (B and C) at 28 days and the average of the breaks shall constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. 3. Retain fourth cylinder(D)for further testing if needed,but do not retain cylinder more than 60 days. J. Reporting: 1. Record the following information on concrete material reports and submit to Owner's Construction Manager and others as specified in Section 01458. a. Slump. b. Air content. c. Concrete temperature. d. Concrete plastic unit weight. e. Elapsed time from batching at plant to discharge from delivery truck at project. f. Date and time concrete was placed. g. Ambient temperature,wind speed,and relative humidity during concrete placement. h. Name of technician performing tests. i. Test cylinder number and letter. j. Specific foundations or structures covered by this test. k. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification. 1. Maximum size coarse aggregate. m. Specified compressive strength. n. Tested compressive strength. o. Curing conditions for concrete strength test specimens(field and laboratory). p. Date strength specimens transported to laboratory. q. Age of strength specimens when tested. r. Type of fracture during test. 2. Field Test Reports: Submit reports of field tests to Owner's Construction Manager and others as specified in Section 01458. In addition to other required information noted in this Section, record the following concrete materials information on"Wal-Mart Interior Slabs on Ground Observation Report": a. Date and time concrete was placed. b. Time of batching at plant(As shown on delivery ticket) c. Relative humidity, ambient temperature, and base temperature during concrete placement in accordance with ACI 305.1. d. Time of placing and finishing tasks at location where sampled concrete is placed. APP B-12 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 • 1. Discharge from delivery, 2. Start of initial floating. 3. Start of initial troweling. K. Batch Plant Quality Control: Quality control of materials and batching operations during batching operations shall be the full responsibility of the batch plant operators. CTL or Owner's Concrete Consultant will not be required to perform observation,testing,or inspection at the batch plant during batching operations. SECTION 03362—BURNISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I): A. Owner T&I will be performed by the Owner's Construction Testing Laboratory(CTL). B. Gloss Measurements: 1. Gloss measurements will be taken two weeks prior to Owner Possession and at time of Possession.Contractor shall notify CTL when floors are ready for testing. 2. Measurement and Recording: a. Measure gloss value at three evenly but randomly distributed locations within each column bay within the floor areas shown on the drawing Finish Plan or Slab Plan to receive Exposed Concrete (EC) Measured Gloss. b. Record measurement locations on copy of sheet S1.1. c. If samples fail to meet the specified value, Contractor shall continue burnishing operations until the specified gloss requirements are achieved. d. Record and certify gloss measurements. 3. CTL will prepare test report including plan and table of the measurements. CTL will submit test report to Wal-Mart. SECTION 05090—POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I): A. Owner T&I shall be performed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I. B. Inspection:Verify and inspect the following for mechanical and adhesive anchors: 1. Periodically verify the following: a. General compliance with manufacturer's published instructions. b. Product name and description. c. Adhesive expiration date for adhesive anchors. d. Compliance of drill bit with manufacturer's specifications. e. Adhesive application technique for adhesive anchors. 2. Continuously inspect and verify the following: a. Hole diameter,depth,location,and edge distance. b. Cleanliness of hole and anchor. c. Anchor diameter,length,and steel grade. d. Anchor embedment and spacing. e. Required tightening torque for mechanical anchors. C. Testing: Perform pullout or shear tests to determine adequacy of suspected malfunctioning anchors when directed to do so by the Owner's Construction Manager upon recommendation by the CTL. SECTION 05120—STRUCTURAL STEEL 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I): A. Owner T&I shall be performed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I. APP B-13 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 B. In addition to the Special Inspector qualification stated in this Section, the Technical II Inspector shall be an American Society for Non-destructive Testing(ASNT)Non-destructive Testing Technician, TC-1A Level I, or an American Welding Society(AWS)Certified Associate Weld Inspector(C.A.W.I.) C. CTL shall report results after each observation visit.[Use if high-strength bolting is required by SER. D. High Strength Bolting(Field Installed): 1. General: a. Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all slip-critical bolted connections prior to bolting. b. Verify that bolts,nuts,washers,paint and installation/tightening standards are met, c. Observe calibration procedures and verify that selected procedure is used to tighten bolts. d. Test high strength bolted connections in accordance with bolting standard specified above. 2. Slip Critical and Tension Bolts: Test bolt tightening in 100% of bolts. Verify that surfaces of connected elements have been brought into contact at 100%of connections.Verify all tips are removed from twist-off bolts. 3. Bearing Bolts:Visually inspect to confirm surfaces of connected elements have been brought into contact,at 100%of connections. This shall apply only to bolts designed for values not requiring exclusion of threads from failure plane.All other bolts shall be tested as for tension bolts. E. High Strength Bolting (Shop Installed): Self performed by the Fabricator as part of their compliance with AISC Quality Certification Program—Category I requirements. For shop fabricated work,perform tests if more stringent requirements are required by either the AHJ or the SER. Shop bolting inspection requirements are same as field bolting requirements. F. Welding(General): 1. Prior to start of fabrication,determine if fabrication shop meets the criteria for exempting shop welds from inspection and confirm in writing to Building Official and SER. 2. Verify qualifications of welders as AWS certified. 3. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. 4. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. 5. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel,proper technique and sequence of welding,and cleaning and number of passes are provided as required. G. Welding(Field): 1. Visible and uncovered at the time of each inspection for proper inspection procedures. 2. Single Pass Fillet Welds:Visually inspect 100%of single pass fillet welds for size,length,and quality,per AWS D1.1. 3. Multi-pass Fillet Welds: Visually inspect 100%of multi-pass fillet welds for size, length, and quality, per AWS D1.1. 4. Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS. D1.1.Test 100%of partial penetration welds less than 5/16 inch,using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709,performed on root pass and on finished weld. 5. Complete Penetration Welds: Test 100% of complete penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per A.W.S. D1.1 Test 100%of complete penetration welds less than 5/16 inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709,performed on root pass and on finished weld. 6. Miscellaneous Metals,Inserts and Prefabricated Components:Where integrity of the connections impact life safety or performance of the building structure,provide testing and inspection as for typical welds previously specified. H. Contractor and CTL shall collaborate to predetermine periodic scheduled inspections to not exceed a total of 12 working days to accomplish field bolding testing and weld testing and inspections by the CTL. Inspections and number of allotted working days shall be concurrent with the weld inspections and bolt testing and inspections allotted days specified in Appendix A sections 05210,05300,and 05400. If additional working days are necessary, the CTL shall obtain written approval from the Owner prior to completing the work and the Owner will determine if the Contractor,the CTL,or the Owner is responsible for added fees. APP B-14 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 I. Coordinate and schedule inspections such that completed bolts and welds are visible and uncovered at the time of each inspection for proper inspection procedures. J. L.Welding (Shop): Perform inspections as for field welding except weld testing may be reduced or deleted if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program - Category I, or more stringent criteria, and is approved by Building Official and SER. K. Submittal Verification: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation for compliance with Contract Documents. L. Materials Verification: Verify materials delivered to Site comply with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.Materials and verifications include: 1. Structural Steel: a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards. b. Manufacturer's certified mill test reports. 2. High Strength Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. 3. Welding Electrodes: a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. M. Verification of Detail Compatibility. 1. Inspection shall coincide with welding inspections. 2. Review project documents affecting integrity of the structure, including Contract Documents and pertinent submittals including approved shop drawings. 3. Perform review of the structure and visually confirm general compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details indicated in Contract Documents and approved shop drawings: a. Bracing and stiffening members. b. Structural member locations. c. Proper applications of joint details at connections for structural members. 2.2 RETESTING AND RE-INSPECTION BY OWNER CTL: A. CTL will conduct retesting and re-inspection as necessary until corrections are fully completed by the Contractor. Retesting shall follow the procedures for correction of deficiencies described above. SECTION 05210—STEEL JOISTS 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I): A. Owner T&I shall be preformed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I. B. High Strength Bolting(Field Installed): 1. General: a. Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all slip-critical bolted connections prior to bolting. b. Verify that bolts,nuts,washers,paint and installation/tightening standards are met. c. Observe calibration procedures used to tighten bolts. d. Test high strength bolted connections in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. 2. Slip Critical Bolts and Tension Bolts: a. Test bolt tightening in 100%of bolts. Verify that surfaces of connected elements have been brought into contact at 100%of connections.Verify tips are removed from"twist-off'bolts. 3. Bearing Bolts: APP B-15 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 a. Visually inspect to confirm surfaces of connected elements have been brought into contact at 100% of connections. This shall apply only to bolts designed for values not requiring exclusion of threads from failure plane.All other bolts shall be tested as for tension bolts. C. Welding(General): 1. Verify qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. 2. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. 3. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. 4. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel,proper technique and sequence of welding, and cleaning and number of passes are provided as required. D. Welding(Field): 1. Single Pass Fillet Welds: Visually inspect 100%of single pass fillet welds,for size,length,and quality,per AWS D1.1. 2. Multi-pass Fillet Welds: Continuously inspect 100%of multi-pass fillet welds, for size,length, and quality, per AWS D1.1 3. Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS.D1.1. Test 100%of partial penetration welds less than 5/16 inch,using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709,performed on root pass and on finished weld. 4. Complete Penetration Welds: Test 100% of complete penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per A.W.S. D1.1 Test 100% of complete penetration welds less than 5/16 inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709,performed on root pass and on finished weld. 5. Steel Joist/Joist Girder Welds: Provide testing and inspection as specified for field welds. 6. Miscellaneous Metals,Inserts and Prefabricated Components: Where integrity of the connections impact life safety or performance of the building structure,provide testing and inspection as for typical welds previously specified. E. Contractor and CTL shall collaborate to predetermine periodic scheduled inspections to not exceed a total of 12 working days to accomplish field bolting testing and field weld inspections by the CTL. Inspections and number of allotted working days shall be concurrent with the weld inspections and bolt testing allotted days specified in Appendix A sections 05120, 05300, and 05400. If additional working days are necessary, the CTL shall obtain written approval from the Owner prior to completing the work and the Owner will determine if the Contractor,the CTL,or the Owner is responsible for added fees. F. Coordinate and schedule inspections such that completed welds and bolts are visible and uncovered at the time of each inspection for proper inspection procedures. G. Submittal Verification: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation, for compliance with contract document. H. Material Verification: Verify materials delivered to site comply with contract documents and approved shop drawings.Verify the following: 1. Structural Steel Bar Joists and Joist Girders. 2. High Strength Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: a. Identification markings conform to ASTM standards. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. 3. Welding Electrodes a. Identification markings conform to AWS specification. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. Verification of Detail Compatibility. I. Inspection shall coincide with welding inspections. 2. Review project documents affecting integrity of the structure, including Contract Documents and pertinent submittals including approved shop drawings. 3. Perform review of the structure and visually confirm general compliance with Contract Documents. APP B-16 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 4. Inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details indicated in Contract Documents and approved shop drawings: a. Bracing and stiffening members. b. Structural member locations. c. Proper applications of joint details at connections for structural members. 2.2 RETESTING AND RE-INSPECTION BY OWNER CTL A. CTL will conduct retesting and re-inspection as necessary until corrections are fully completed by the Contractor. SECTION 05300—METAL DECK 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I): A. If inspection of fabricator's work is required, testing agent may test and inspect structural steel at plant before shipment.Owner and SER reserve right to reject material not complying with Contract Documents at any time before final acceptance. B. Owner T&I shall be performed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I. C. CTL will prepare report of results after each observation visit and submit report to Owner. D. Roof Deck Fasteners: 1. Visually inspect welded and screw fasteners for specified size,spacing,embedment,and location. 2. Inspect 100%of side lap connectors over entire roof area for type,size, and spacing of side lap connectors. Verify that the side lap connection connects all layers of the deck tightly. 3. Inspect 100%of primary deck attachments to continuous steel members(joists,joist girders, and perimeter angles). 4. For TEK screw connections,inspect for complete depth of penetration. 5. For welded connections inspect for fusion and size. E. Contractor and CTL shall collaborate to predetermine periodic scheduled inspections to not exceed a total of 12 working days to accomplish fastener testing and field weld inspections by the CTL. Inspections and number of allotted working days shall be concurrent with the weld inspections and fastener testing allotted days specified in Appendix A sections 05120, 05210, and 05400. If additional working days are necessary, the CTL shall obtain written approval from the Owner prior to completing the work and the Owner will determine if the Contractor,the CTL,or the Owner is responsible for added fees. F. Coordinate and schedule inspections such that completed welds and fasteners are visible and uncovered at the time of each inspection for proper inspection procedures. G. Submittal Verification: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation, for compliance with Contract Documents. H. Materials Verification: 1. Verify materials delivered to Site comply with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.Materials include: a. Welding Electrodes: b. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification. c. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. d. Mechanical fasteners. e. Deck: Select 6 random sheets for each type of deck used. Inspect for deck thickness, type, and material. 2.2 RETESTING AND RE-INSPECTION BY OWNER CTL: APP B-17 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. CTL will conduct retesting and re-inspection as necessary until corrections are fully completed by the Contractor. SECTION 05400—COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I): A. Owner T&I shall be performed by a Special Inspector—Technical II or Special Inspector—Structural I. B. Welding(General): 1. Verify qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. 2. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. 3. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. 4. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel,proper technique and sequence of welding,and cleaning and number of passes are provided as required. C. Welding(Field): 1. Cold Formed Metal Framing Welds: Visually inspect 100%of welds for specified length,size,and continuity in accordance with AWS D1.3 for metal less than 1/8"in thickness,for work designed as a structural element. 2. Miscellaneous Metals, Inserts and Prefabricated Components: Inspect connections as indicated on the Structural Drawings. Inspect components as follows: D. Miscellaneous Mechanical Fasteners: Visually inspect fasteners that are part of the building structural system for specified size,spacing,and location. E. Contractor and CTL shall collaborate to predetermine periodic scheduled inspections to not exceed a total of 12 working days to accomplish fastener testing and field weld inspections by the CTL. Inspections and number of allotted working days shall be concurrent with the weld inspections and fastener testing allotted days specified in Appendix A sections 05210, 05300, and 05400. If additional working days are necessary, the CTL shall obtain written approval from the Owner prior to completing the work and the Owner will determine if the Contractor,the CTL,or the Owner is responsible for added fees. F. Coordinate and schedule inspections such that completed welds and fasteners are visible and uncovered at the time of each inspection for proper inspection procedures. 2.2 RETESTING AND RE-INSPECTION BY OWNER CTL: A. CTL will conduct retesting and re-inspection as necessary until corrections are fully completed by the Contractor. SECTION 07500—MEMBRANE ROOFING 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION: A. Owner's Independent Roofing Consultant(IRC) Services: Upon completion of the roofing project and at or near three weeks prior to Possession,The IRC will perform a roof construction inspection at no cost to the Contractor. Inspection includes the following: 1. General overall roof inspection to verify conformance with the Contract Documents. 2. Core testing recommendations. 3. Oversight of remedial repairs in the field. 4. Entering roofing defects and required repairs defined as deviations by the IRC into the online Owner's Observation Log. B. The activities and responsibilities of the IRC shall not preclude any quality control responsibilities by the Contractor, the Roofing Contractor,or the Manufacturer's Technical Representative as specified herein. C. The IRC is neither authorized to change any specified requirement nor to approve any portion of the work. APP B-18 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 D. Failure to detect defective material or Work will neither prevent rejection when defects are discovered later nor will it obligate Owner to make final acceptance. SECTION 08710—DOOR HARDWARE 2.1 OWNER SITE OBSERVATION: A. Owner site observation specified herein below will be performed by a Manufacturer's Technical Representative enlisted by the Owner. Site observation will be performed at completion of installation of doors and hardware and will include the following. 1. Inspect closers;exit devices(except Detex and Positive Lock);locks,latches,and bolts;and electric strikes. 2. Verify hardware installed is as specified. 3. Verify proper installation. 4. Verify proper operation. B. Contractor shall notify the following manufacturer's representative at completion of installation of doors and hardware: 1. Bob Maas, Director Key Accounts and Mechanical OEM, Allegion, (814) 836-0283 (Office), (814) 450- 5920(Mobile), bob Maas@iallegion.com. C. Manufacturer's Technical Representative will prepare Observation Report and submit to Architect for posting of deficiencies noted on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. Observation Report will indicate the following: 1. Store number and location. 2. Time and date of observation. 3. Name and contact information of Manufacturer's Technical Representative. 4. Summary of observation. 5. Identification of deficiencies describing precise door number, hardware item, nature of deficiency, and recommended resolution. 6. Signature of Manufacturer's Technical Representative. SECTION 09511 —ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION (T&I): A. CTL shall perform periodic special inspection during installation of acoustical panel ceilings, including acoustical panel placement,ceiling grid suspension system installation and connection to structure. SECTION 13900—FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.1 OWNER SITE OBSERVATION: A. Site Observation: Owner's Fire Protection Consultant shall conduct a site observation. The purpose of the Fire Sprinkler System Site Observation is to determine if the fire sprinkler systems are in general conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. A Fire Sprinkler Acceptance Test(FPAT)performed by the Contractor shall be supervised and witnessed by the Fire Protection Consultant. The Contractor will contact the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant to coordinate the time and date of the observation and FPAT. Scheduling for the FPAT shall begin one month prior to possession with FPAT being conducted one to two weeks prior to possession.FPAT shall occur prior to possession. A representative sample checklist is available upon request. At the conclusion of the observation, an exit interview shall be conducted with the Contractor to review and identify issues that need correction prior to acceptance of the system and deficiencies will be uploaded to Owner's electronic log for tracking. SECTION 15700—HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) 2.2 OWNER SITE OBSERVATION APP B-19 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 A. Functional Performance Testing(FPT): FPT will be conducted by Engineer of Record at no cost to the Contractor in accordance with Section 01454 of this Appendix. FPT will be performed after Owner's possession date. Deficiencies noted and related to the Contractor's installation responsibilities shall be corrected prior to Grand Opening. SECTION 16525-SITE LIGHTING 2.1 OWNER TESTING AND INSPECTION(T&I) A. Concrete Sampling,Testing,and Inspection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 03310.of this Appendix B. END OF SECTION APP B-20 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Walmart Building Performance Verification Program Initial I Intermediate / Final FPT Report Store No.,City,and State: Report Date: Initial FPT Date: Initial FPT Person,Org.: Initial Walmart BPT Person/Phone Joe Kozlosky/479-204-0455 FOLLOW-UP FPT REQUIRED?YES OR NO Follow-up FPT Date: Follow-up FPT Person,Org: Follow-up Walmart BPT Person/Phone Joe Kozlosky/479-204-0455 EMS Vendor: Novar CPC The following summarizes the mechanical and electrical equipment tested in accordance with the Walmart Building Performance Verification Program. Equipment Pass/ Deviation Number(s) Fail AHU 1-3 RTU 1,2,3,4,5,6(list option after RTU:WSHP,cont. or auto fan, CO2) UPC RTU XX Emergency HVAC Shutdown Air Curtains Unit and Radiant Heaters Exhaust Fans Garden Center Spot Cooling Fan Skylights Automated Lighting Controls Occupancy Sensors Energy Sub-Metering Notes: Sample notes.... Refer to attached Observation Log Open FPT Deviations List. AHU Gas Heat was not tested beyond Stage 1 because outside air temp was too warm. Unable to test RTU cooling and AHU cooling/dehumid because outside air temp was too cold. Walmart Mechanical Services CM George Bailey confirmed unit heater and light dimming operation during remote retest with BPT on February 29, 2012. Page 1 of 1 APP B-21 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Walmart Building Performance Verification Program Supercenter Electrical Lighting Systems FPT Checklist Store No.,City,and State: Date and Time of Test: EMS Vendor: Name and Organization of Testing Person: Note: Verify with BPT Interior Lighting and Exterior Lighting Override Routine is off. Exterior Lighted Areas: Area Pass/Fail Notes and Corrective Action Building Security Lighting - - Entry Facade Lighting - - Building Signage/Bollards - - Page 1 of 1 APP B-22 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Walmart Building Performance Verification Program Walmart Rooftop Units—Lennox Prodigy DX Cool, Variable Supply Fan Functional Performance Test Store No.,City,and State: Date and Time of Test: Equipment Tag(Area Served): Equipment Type: Manufacturer and Model: Name and Organization of Testing Person: CONTACT WALMART ALARM AT 479-273-4600 PRIOR TO FPT TO NOTIFY THAT RTUS WILL BE TURNED OFF DURING TEST v Verify if store has a demand shed in the EMS. Need to release to do testing. # Pass/F Operation FPT Override: When test is complete,release all Expected Results Notes ail Tested overrides 1 Parameter Danfoss System operates in heating, See Appendix for Settings Communicates single setpoint to Lennox RTU Controller, economizer cooling,and/or procedure on how to setpoint should be in center of range between heating(67F mechanical cooling modes according interface with RTU VERIFY DB)and cooling(76F DB)temperatures. to space and ambient conditions. Controller WITH BPT PRIOR TO Verify setpoint=71.5F DB and ECTO 6.15(auto TRAVEL changeover deadband)setting=8 or 9 F DB,or as shown on project RTU Sequence of Operation (ask WM BPT to verify and correct if needed prior to FPT travel) Novar/CPC Communicates distinct heating and cooling setpoints to Verify OTS and ODP setpoints agree Lennox RTU Controller. with values listed for defining OAS. OTS=Outside Temperature Verify heating setpoint=67F DB(-0.5F) Sensor(from weather Verify cooling setpoint=76F DB(+0.5F),see EM2 OAS operation can be verified by mast) observing the OAS light on the A56 Economizer Operation economizer board: ODP=Outside Dewpoint EMS communicates Outside Air Suitable(OAS)before temperature(average of economizer operation allowed,if OF DB<OTS<70F DB& OAS light on solid=Outdoor air is Munters readings) ODP<48F DP, suitable then economizer enabled to assist mechanical cooling. OAS light blinking=Mechanical cooling&Economizer cooling For units with economizers,cooling L/O<45F operation—OR-CO2 in control of To test cooling when OTS is less than 45F,unplug the economizer damper RTU RT17 Outdoor Air Sensor to bypass the low ambient lockout for testing.Reconnect sensor after testing. Page 1 of 10 APP B-23 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 2 Parameter Verify Economizer DIP switch settings(DIP switch located DIPI=off Address DIP switch value Settings on EMI board A56 left hand expansion board on RTU DIP2=on is assigned during start-up Controller) 3 Parameter Verify occupied mode time of day settings are per AU RTUs programmed for Settings operating schedule. 24hr operation. Front tenants RTUs operate in VERIFY unoccupied mode from WITH BPT 2200-0600 hours at 78 F PRIOR TO DB cooling setpoint and 60 TRAVEL F DB heating setpoint 4 Parameter Verify Auto/Continuous fan settings in EMS are per Supply fan operates continuously or Note:Refer to RTU Settings "Operation"column under Supply Fan in RTU schedule on AUTO per mechanical schedule. Controller manual on M3. procedure to change ECTO VERIFY Continuous operation-fan ON without parameters. Parameters WITH BPT demand can be viewed without PRIOR TO AUTO operation-fan ON with being changed. TRAVEL demand For Danfoss,BPT has Auto/Cont fan set under ECTO Setup/Appl page to turn parameter 6.17 fan On/Off 5 Fan Operation Enable system operation(Power ON the unit if not already System operates in heating, Note:OA damper should operating) economizer cooling,and/or be closed when unit is off, OBSERVE mechanical cooling modes when OA damper opens to CORRECT space condition exceeds.temperature minimum when unit is on FAN N tg:It would be abnormal at this time for power not to be set-points,fan operation continuous or and not economizing,and OPERATION on at unit. If found in this condition note on FPT form, cycles with call for heating or cooling unit is scheduled to deliver DURING FPT verify with Contractor unit is available for testing,or select (auto) outside air. another unit. Note:It may be difficult to visually confirm OA damper rotates from closed to minimum when unit enabled 6 Space Temp Set heating space temperature setpoint in EMS minimum of Supply fan operates at Ventilation Upon arrival at RTU Satisfied 1.0F less than the current indoor space temperature Speed(ECTO 0.03)if continuous fan determine whether unit is or cycles off;otherwise no heating or operating in heating or OBSERVE OR cooling should operate. cooling then implement CORRECT setpoint adjustment to OPERATION Set cooling space temperature setpoint in EMS minimum If the unit is off and setup for auto fan disable heating or cooling. DURING FPT of 1.0F greater than current indoor space temperature operation,and passes test#5 above, The.setpoint for the non- then the unit is assumed to have operating mode can passed this step. remain. 7 Heating Set indoor space temperature setpoint(override)to current Supply fan operates at Full Speed Note:DO NOT physically Demand#1 indoor space temperature(actual)plus minimum of 0.5F during all heating stages,OA damper test heat if ambient temp> remains at minimum. 90F,just note heating Actual Temperature= F DB could not be tested at this time Temporary Override= F DB Note:the above operations required to test heat stage Heat 1 energizes after delay to allow demand#1 may result in both heating stages being enabled combustion air inducer to start and Burner will attempt to fire at this point. This portion of the FPT will be accepted if burner ignition to prove(approx 45 3 times before being this occurs. seconds) locked out 8 Heating Set indoor space temperature setpoint(override)to current Heat 2 energizes after delay(second Demand#2 indoor space temperature(actual)plus minimum of 0.5F stage of heat only on 5,10 and 20 Ton units). Actual Temperature= F DB Temporary Override= F DB Page 2 of 10 APP B-24 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 9 Heating Stage Set indoor space temperaturesetpoint(override)to current Heat 1 and Heat 2 de-energize Down indoor space temperature(actual)minus minimum of 0.5F simultaneously due to default stage down timer of 0 seconds. Actual Temperature= F DB Supply fan resets to Ventilation Speed for Continuous Fan units;fan OFF for Auto Fan units. Temporary Override= F DB Reset heating setpoint to normal to avoid cycling heating during cooling test 10 MSAV Units Following FPT steps referencing change in supply fan MSAV units are 10 ton and 20 ton ECTO 6.16 forces a 5 speed only apply to multi-stage-air volume•units and units only minute delay between further differentiated when unit operates in economizer heating&cooling mode mode or mechanical cooling only mode Cooling Demand with Economizer changeover.Press RTU (unit size,tons) Controller left arrow key For 20 ton units with NOVAR ETM RTU controllers,Cool #1=Economizer Only(all) for 2 seconds to reset this Stage 1 operates RTU compressors 1 and 2 at Cool 2 fan #2=Economizer+Comp 1(3,5,10) time delay speed and Cool Stage 2 operates RTU compressors 3 and 4 #3=Econ+Comp 1,2(all) at Cool 4 fan speed. #4=Econ+Comp 1-4(20) When Outdoor Air Is Suitable and there is a Cooling Call, Cooling Fan Speeds: the Supply Fan Runs at Full Speed for all Mechanical -Economizer Only—Full Speed with Cooling Demand Stages. or without Mechanical Cooling -10 ton unit has Cooll and Cool2 fan speeds -20 ton unit has Cooll,Cool2,and Cool 3/4, fan speeds -3 and 5 ton units are constant volume -Cool 1 fan is at Stage 1 Speed Page 3 of 10 APP B-25 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 11 Cooling Set outside air dewpoint(ODP)enable set-point to 10F Danfoss and Novar Demand#1 higher than current outside air dewpoint temp. To perform economizer Economizer FPT override ambient Only/DX Actual Temperature= F DP conditions(ODP&OTS) Cooling with when necessary to enable L/O Temporary Override= F DP economizer. Set outside air dry bulb temperature(OTS)to 20F higher Novar:BPT cannot than current outside air temperature. override ODP>85 F DP Actual Temperature= F DB Note:due to control Temporary Override= F DB limitations between RTU Controller and EMS Note:The above operations are required to test economizer cooling and economizer function exclusive of mechanical cooling. DX may be enabled for However,even with these overrides first stage cooling Cooling Demand#1 and' demand may enable DX cooling along with economizer. subsequent demands may This portion of the FPT will be•accepted if the notstage as described. combination of economizer and compressor operation Reference Appendix occurs. "Testing Cooling and Heating Demands"section. ECTO 5.23=100 opens 11 Cooling With space satisfied,set indoor space temperature setpoint Outdoor Air Suitable(OAS)Light economizer to 100% Demand#1 (Overridel)to current indoor space temperature(actual) ON,Outside Air Damper enabled during OAS condition Economizer PLUS minimum 1.0 F DB. Only/DX Cooling with Actual Temperature= F DB L/O Temporary Overridel= F DB Mechanical cooling delay: RTU Controller energizes economizer ECTO 6.27=2 With OAS light ON,set indoor space temperature setpoint cooling;fan runs at Full Speed. (Override2)to current indoor space temperature(actual) Outside air damper opens from Press RTU Controller left MINUS minimum 1.0 F DB. minimum to 100%,Compressors are arrow key for 2 seconds to off override this time delay Actual Temperature= F DB Upon economizer OA damper reaching 100%open and a 10 minute Temporary Override2= F DB delay and economizer unable to satisfy space temperature,compressor enabled 12 Cooling After outside air damper is fully open,press RTU Economizer damper reaches full open Actual Override3 value Demand#2 Controller left arrow key to override time delay. position then Compressor 1 energizes. will depend on offset Economizer/ produced by Override2 Compressor#1 Set indoor space temperature setpoint(Override3)less than Supply fan remains at Full Speed. setpoint,but Override3 previous setting(Override2)(see above)to enable Cooling needs to result in offset Demand#2 greater than or equal to 1.OF to enable cooling Actual Temperature= F DB demand#2 Temporary Override3= F DB 13 Cooling Cooling Demands#1 and#2 operate Outside air damper remains full open, Actual Override4 value Demand#3 Compressor 2 energizes will depend on offset Economizer/ Set indoor space temperature setpoint(Override4)less than produced by Override3 Compressors previous setting(Override3)(see above)to enable,Cooling Supply fan remains at Full Speed. setpoint,but Override4 #1,2 Demand#3 needs to result in offset greater than or equal to Actual Temperature= F DB I.5F to enable cooling demand#3 Temporary Override4= F DB Page 4 of 10 APP B-26 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 14 Cooling Cooling Demands#1,#2,and#3 operate Outside air damper remains full open, Applies to 20 ton units Demand#4 Compressors and condenser fans 3& Economizer/ Set indoor space temperature setpoint(Override5)less than 4 energize Actual Overrides value All previous setting(Override4)(see above)to enable Cooling will depend on offset Compressors Demand#4 Supply fan remains at Full Speed produced by Override4 setpoint,but Override5 Actual Temperature= F DB needs to result in offset greater than or equal to Temporary Override5= F DB 2.0F to enable cooling demand#4 15 END Set indoor space temperature setpoint(override)to current Outside air damper closes to minimum Due to stage delay times Economizer / indoor space temperature(actual)plus minimum 1.0F position,Compressors 1-4 de-energize performing cooling testing DX Cooling in reverse order on a maximum of two(2) Actual Temperature= F DB RTUs simultaneously is Supply fan resets to Ventilation Speed recommended. The for Continuous Fan units;fan OFF for Override needs to result in Temporary Override= F DB Auto Fan units. offset greater than or equal to 0.5F to disable cooling demands. 16 Cooling Set outside air suitable setpoints to lockout economizer Lennox RTU Controller Outside Air Demand#1 cooling Suitable(OAS)light is OFF Compressor#1 Set outside dry bulb temperature enable setpoint 1OF I Only below current outside temperature Compressor I energizes. Set outside dewpoint temperature enable setpoint 10F below current outside temperature Supply fan speed operates at Stage 1 speed. Set indoor space temperature setpoint(override)to current indoor space temperature(actual)minus minimum 0.5F Cooling Demand without Economizer DB. (unit size,tons) #1=Comp 1(all) Actual Temperature= F DB #2=Comp 2(10,20) #3=Comp 1-3(20) Temporary Override= F DB #4=Comp 1-4(20) Reset outside air suitable parameters. 117 CO2 Control Record indoor space CO2 level=> ppm Current Proto design RTU schedule Setpoint=1100ppm includes note A which states the Range=100ppm CO2 setpoints are internal to the RTU Controller.Verify economizer damper is fully open to ECTO Setpoints: operation with WM BPT prior to travel:test CO2 operation 100%outside•air at 1100ppm CO2 5.16=100 by breathing on sensor or other means. and closed to minimum outside air 5.17=140 position(or fully closed)at 1000ppm 5.18=128 CO2 5.23=100 5.26=5 18 CO2 High BPT verify that CO2 is inactive.This allows the RTU Note: If the testis not Level Alarm Controller to control the fan/damper and is the standard successful,BPT verify that setting.BPT override the 60 min alarm delay 6 sec the correct program is loaded from Novar.If so Blow on the•sensor to increase the CO2 level and the alarm still doesn't Fan energizes and economizer damper work,Lennox will need to starts to open confirm parameter settings BPT release override on site. BPT confirms the alarm CO2 reaches 1400 ppm for 6 sec 19 Loss of Power Turn off power at unit disconnect RTU goes through normal shutdown Monitoring should receive operation,EMS creates a critical alarm within 4 minutes. alarm to Monitoring,BPT observes BPT observation of unit unit shut down shut down and verification of alarm programming is sufficient for test to Pass 20 Return of Turn on power at unit disconnect RTU goes through normal start-up Power operation and system returns to normal operation,BPT observes unit start up Page 5 of 10 APP B-27 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 21 Parameter Confirm RTU Controller dipswitch positions correct Re-check dipswitches are correct per Settings Parameter Settings above. 22 CO2 Sensor BPT confirm CO2 readings for all RTUs with CO2 sensors CO2 readings similar to tested RTU Function not previously tested. 23 Emergency BPT override all tested RTUs ON in heating,cooling or HVAC continuous fan mode. Shutdown Push in Emergency HVAC Shutdown button All AHUs and energized RTUs shut down completely During unit shut down,BPT change spacesetpoint for at least one RTU to energize unit in heating or cooling mode RTU should not energize After shutdown confirmed by BPT for AHUs and tested RTUs and spot checked at store,pull Emergency 1-IVAC All AHUs and RTUs with heating or Shutdown button cooling demand or continuous fan turn ON End of Functional Test RELEASE ALL OVERRIDES AND SETPOINTS BACK TO DESIGN CONDITIONS WHEN FINISHED NOTES: 1. Building Performance Team: 479-204-0432 2. Verify sensors are in correct location,with covers installed and not damaged and labeled with RTU#. 3. In event equipment does not function,verify breaker at panel and disconnect switch is turned ON. Do not troubleshoot deficiencies beyond this. 4. Upon arriving at RTU a scrolling display"6.XX LX"indicates the RTU Controller software version and address and is considered normal. 5. Using portable meter compare indoor space temperature read from meter to same temperature read from Lennox sensor:Portable meter reading= F DB,Lennox sensor= F DB 6. Note Project EMS Vendor: FUNCTIONAL TESTING NOTES: Page 6 of 10 • APP B-28 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Appendix Refer to the Lennox Prodigy Manual furnished with the unit and located in the controls compartment for additional information. Also refer to the back of this manual for a summary,and refer to the error codes placard displayed on the inside of the compartment door. RTU Controller MAIN CONTROL BOARD DETAIL S' A;16N meearnerm aoaw Pooh o 4.1*eller ttr4n w LZFa INTEUSB RFACE Ei ( OISPIAY ` (For Flash PORT OrNe 0 0 W2=711 0 sinus m m r1 max ( ::= 1 . I USERINTERFACE NAVIGATION ARROWS) r 0 illZa Mill LZ=Mi A A BUTTON �=fr[•+ m li an na P— ,-, cre •: iQUrff O ,ER • ODM 24 VAC e o ttt P °18 11 motes. T%RX 10 BU9'laK" 61Bi U ire IIII Low)Vi % r.we. G W1 W2 Yt Y2 OCP4*a,- mat ti1D114M �'3 s .{-1a-1.b., .. {I USB CONNECTION j L CONNECTION(optional II ddJJ (fart Uni Controller mmecton method for Unit SMARTWIRE` software) Controller software) CONNECTORS - Follow User Interface diagram to check setpoints, ECTO Parameters,etc.as needed. Page 7 of 10 APP B-29 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Free Cooling Option M2 UNIT CONTROLLER - h ni nis:.,.i. ill." --.\ MR SUITABLE"LED INDICATES ,Ju,!' ECON DIP SWITCH OUTDOOR AIR CAN BE USED { FOR COOUNG ` f--- 1 s _ 3 Dd� 0.100' L MINIMUM 5 POSITION ' Zvi 2,1 !''. POTENTIOMETER Figure 4. Economizer controls The A56(EMI)board controls economizer operation. A flashing yellow OAS indicates the CO2 sensor requires additional outdoor air. Since economizer is factory installed DIP switch settings are factory set. Enthalpy setpoint set to"D"during Lennox field commissioning. For older stores where ECTO 6.27=0,when outdoor air is suitable and economizer is functioning,outside and return air dampers will modulate to achieve a discharge air temperature of 55 F. ECTO parameter 5.24 should read"101",this allows minimum OA damper position to be set Verify minimum OA damper position set by MIN POS SET dial on EM 1 board. Verify minimum OA damper percentage when the FAN is ON and the board is OCCUPIED.Press the SELECT/ENTER button to display SERVICE.Press the down arrow to display DATA.Press the SELECT/ENTER button to display RUNTIMES.Press the down arrow twice to display SENSORS. Press the SELECT/ENTER button to display TSTAT.Press the down arrow twice to display DAMPER POS.Press SELECT/ENTER and the damper position will be displayed. Page 8 of 10 APP B-30 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Testing Cooling and Heating Demands Refer to the sequence of operation and to page 20 in the Lennox RTU Controller manual for additional information. For Cooling Demand testing Override I ONLY Actual Temperature##.X Temporary Setpoint Override (where"X"is.0 to.9) .0 =first whole number temperature value below actual temperature .1 to .4 =second whole number temperature value below actual temperature .5 =first whole number temperature value below actual temperature .6 to .9 =first whole number temperature value below actual temperature Example An actual temperature=75.7F would fall in the .6 to .9 range,so the override=75.0F(first whole number below actual temperature). The override forces a 0.7F offset between the temperature setpoint and the actual temperature. This offset forces Cooling Demand 1 on since the offset exceeds the half-degree upper limit in stage up deadband. A positive offset between the actual temperature and the setpoint override causes the cooling to stage up as follows: Stage-Up Offsets Result +0.5F Cooling Demand 1 +1.0F Cooling Demand 2 +1.5F Cooling Demand 3 +2.0F Cooling Demand 4 Refer back to the FPT steps to perform Overrides 2,3 and 4. For Heating Demand testing Override I ONLY Actual Temperature##.XF Temporary Setpoint Override (where"X"is.0 to.9) .0 =first whole number temperature value above actual temperature .1 to.4 =first whole number temperature value above actual temperature .5 =first whole number temperature value above actual temperature .6 to.9 =second whole number temperature value above actual temperature Page 9 of 10 APP B-31 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Example An actual temperature=73.3F would fall in the.1 to.3 range,so the override=74.0F(first whole number above actual temperature). The override forces a 0.7F offset between the temperature setpoint and the actual temperature. This offset forces Heating Demand 1 on since the offset exceeds the half-degree upper limit in stage up deadband. A positive offset between the actual temperature and the setpoint override causes the heating to stage up as follows: Stage-Up Offsets Result +0.5F Heating Demand 1 +1.0F Heating Demand 2 Standard Internal RTU Protections 1. Cooling System operating range of 0 degrees F- 125 degrees F(-18-52 degrees C)with RTU Controller 2. Compressor Controls: a. For 3 phase units,minimum compressor on time of 240 seconds b. Compressor lock out setpoint at 45 F c. Low pressure controls lock out compressors and activate digital output for service if low pressure switch trips 3 times during one cooling cycle d. Freezestats shut off compressors if freezestat trip occurs. e. Freezestats lock out compressors if freezestat trip occurs 3 times during cooling demand. Page 10 of 10 APP B-32 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Walmart Building Performance Verification Program Walmart Ancillary Mechanical Equipment Functional Performance Test Store No.,City,and State: Date and Time(s)of Test: Equipment Tag: (See Below) Equipment Type: (See Below) Manufacturer and Model: (See Below) Name and Organization of Testing Person: # Pass/ Operation Tested FPT Override: When test is complete, Expected Results Notes Fail release all overrides L.1 Unit Heaters Verify occupied mode temperature set-points: Heat ON Space Unit heater/radiant heater operates under Temperature<=65 F; Heat OFF Space Temperature=>68 F; normal controls Heat L/0 with outside-air temp=>55 F L.2 Set outside air 110 set-point to outside air Unit heater/radiant heater may temperature plus10 F or may not operate depending Record outdoor air temperature=> F on space conditions Record indoor space temperature=> F L.3 Set indoor space temperature set-point to indoor Fan energizes and gas space temperature plus 1 F burner/electric heat energizes L.4 Set indoor space temperature set-point to indoor Gas burner/electric heat turns space temperature minus 1 F off,supply fan turns off L.5 Repeat steps above for each unit heater Fan energizes and gas burner/electric heat energizes, gas burner/electric heat energizes RELEASE ALL OVERRIDES AND SETPOINTS BACK TO DESIGN CONDITIONS WHEN FINISHED NOTES: 1.Building Performance Team: 479-204-2256 2.Verify T-stat and sensors are in correct location,T-stat and sensor covers installed and not damaged 3.Verify T-stat and sensor labels 4. In event equipment was not functioning,verify breaker at panel and disconnect switch is turned ON. Do not"trouble- shoot"deficiencies beyond this. FUNCTIONAL TESTING NOTES: Page 1 of 1 APP B-33 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15 Mr.Construction Manager Wal-Mart Construction Sam M.Walton Development Complex 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville,Arkansas 72716 Re:Supercenter(Store#xxx)—City,State Dear Construction Manager: The purpose of this letter is to state to Owner,the Architect of Record and the Engineer of Record that,to the best of our knowledge,the construction on the above referenced project has been completed in substantial conformance with the approved Contract Documents and with the provisions of the applicable building code. In the capacity of owner's testing and inspecting agency,periodic reports as well as a final report have been issued.Those reports state that all of the on-site inspection and testing has been performed.Work requiring inspection was,to the best of the inspector's knowledge,in conformance with the approved plans,specifications,and applicable workmanship provisions of the code. To our knowledge no outstanding items exist except as otherwise may be entered and shown on the Wal-Mart Observation Log. Sincerely, Testing and Inspection Agency Include a seal,signature and date of signature cc: ARCHITECT OF RECORD ENGINEER OF RECORD APP B-34 Outlot Buildings,Tigard OR 5935-500 06/15/15